James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 14:08:50 GMT
Four – Revenge
February 19th 1990 Above Cuba
For three decades, planners at the Pentagon had been crafting designs for the form that warfare between the United States and Cuba would take. Professional uniformed staff officers and civilian contractors made their careers out of these plans. They came in various forms covering every conceivable scenario where conflict could erupt and for multiple methods of conducting military action – dependent upon political will – there were official blueprints. There was nothing that wasn’t covered within all of the outlines as for the war which the United States would launch against Cuba.
With the Pentagon still operational, despite the Secretary of Defence and those at the top decamped to Raven Rock, the plans had been taken out of storage following the attacks made by Cuba. New drafts were created incorporating the avenues of attack made by the Cubans, what American forces were available and the immediate political desire to have a response given in overwhelming form.
When approved, Operation Oblivion was set into motion with haste. There was already groundwork done in assessing intelligence of the capabilities of the Cubans while at the same time the majority of the American military force to be used were already at the highest level of readiness even if they hadn’t been prepared beforehand to attack Cuba. Therefore, there was plenty of risk when it came to Oblivion in striking so soon but at the same time that risk was mitigated by the high-level of training given to the attacking forces involved.
Such was the hope of those who proposed and formulated Oblivion anyway.
The US Navy made the opening strike of Oblivion.
From across in the Sargasso Sea, ten (of twelve carried) Tomahawk cruise missiles were fired by the USS Oklahoma City. This submarine had been heading across the North Atlantic on its way to an ultimate destination in the Barents Sea before turning back around and racing at flank speed to a launch point northeast of the Bahamas. BGM-109C variants of the Tomahawk were fired, those with conventional high-explosive warheads. Two more Tomahawks, one each of the -109A and -109B variants for nuclear strike and anti-ship missions, remained aboard the submarine which then headed for the Nassau area on more typical submarine missions.
One of those Tomahawks failed early in flight and plunged helplessly into the sea, but the other nine flew onwards. They were subsonic missiles and flew very low over the water first. The Americans planned the flight-paths of them as they approached Cuba to avoid the most intense radar cover and the to go over land out of the way of known positions of air defences. At several points, Cuban air defences did partially detect them yet the missiles weren’t effectively tracked and in no way engaged because the Cubans couldn’t gain a fix on them as they remained low over land and made much use of the terrain above which they raced. What the Cubans were able to see was that there were missiles coming towards the western end of the island, in the general area of Havana. More radars came on-line, air defences close to the capital were prepared for action and fighters were lined-up to lift off from several airbases. There was a determination on the part of the Cubans to defend their capital.
However, the Tomahawks weren’t sent against Havana itself, they were just leading the way for other American weapons of war heading towards that city.
Targeted first was a SA-2 Guideline SAM site south of the Cuban capital. One of the Tomahawks (there should have been two) shot towards the last reported position of the long-range early warning radar associated with this strategic air defence system. What NATO deemed the Spoon Rest was a mobile radar which the Cubans moved around frequently as per doctrine. The targeting data for the exact location of the radar was three hours old; the information had been sent over a satellite link-up to the Oklahoma City. Unfortunately, the radar escaped undamaged and the battery would remain operational.
Another SA-2 site east of Havana was targeted by a pair of Tomahawks with again the aim being to hit their Spoon Nest radar using the latest available satellite imagery. This time there was success: the explosions from incoming missiles was enough to do damage to the radar that would need extensive, long-term repair.
Six more Tomahawks went after mobile air defence radars not directly tied to SAM batteries themselves. Again the issue was with the Cubans moving these around in an infrequent manner. The Americans had been watching for a long time but to accurately predict where the Cubans would move them to, and more importantly when, wasn’t something easily done. The Tomahawks from the Oklahoma City got two of them – one destroyed, the other damaged – and came very close to hitting a third. The other three arrayed east of Havana too escaped American attack entirely.
Far more missiles with more precise intelligence, even better the ability to track the radars as they moved, would have done the job of knocking out the strategic air defences around Havana which the SA-2s were the most capable platforms. Or, to assure total threat reduction, there should really have been a serious effort to go after SAM launchers themselves. That would have meant a delay to Oblivion and the commitment of far more attacking assets than just one submarine with ten missiles.
It would also have meant that the operation against Havana was something other than planned. Later the Americans would try to destroy the air defences completely so that SAMs couldn’t challenge them over the Cuban capital. The attacks tonight were a raid and to achieve the stated aims of Oblivion Cuban air defences needed to be panicked, worried about their own survival and hopefully looking the wrong way with what was left after the Tomahawk hits. The Americans wanted the Cubans to be watching the skies to the north and northeast on threat axis’s in the direction of Florida. There were air battles already underway there not directly related to the Oblivion mission; the objective was to have the Cubans believe that if an attack was coming towards Havana it would be from that direction, not the northwest…
…where four squadrons of B-52s, with escorting fighters and defence-suppression / strike aircraft, were coming towards them from that direction.
Strategic Air Command (SAC) had released the heavy bombers for the attack upon Cuba away from their stand-by for nuclear strike missions against the Soviet Union should the war progress to that level. Of course the commanders of SAC were far from happy – to put it mildly – and weren’t swayed at all by being told that combat experience would be gained by the aircrews over Cuba. The worry was that some, maybe many would be lost taking part in Oblivion. Two squadrons came from the 7th Bomb Wing out of Carswell AFB in Texas, another squadron was based at Eaker AFB in Arkansas with the 97th Bomb Wing and the fourth was assigned to the 320th Bomb Wing in California at Mather AFB. There were fifty-seven which took part from a supposedly available force of sixty-four (each squadron had sixteen assigned) after last-minute maintenance and lift-off issues. It was a long flight for the bombers, especially those coming all the way north California; those 320th Bomb Wing bombers would refuel on the way.
Out ahead of the bombers were the fighter-interceptors. Louisiana Air National Guard F-15 Eagles with the 159th Tactical Fighter Group were above the Gulf of Mexico leading the way ready to take on Cuban fighters which were judged to come up to try to engage the bombers. The 159th Tactical Fighter Group had been due to deploy to Europe until yesterday after a period of intensive training and refresher familiarisation with NATO combat operation procedures, but that had been cancelled for now.
Closer to the bombers were a mixed force of aircraft flying ‘Wild Weasel’ and ‘Iron Hand’ missions in support of the bombers tasked for Oblivion. There were F-4Gs with a California-based training squadron and F-16s also from a training squadron in Arizona. These aircraft carried external stores in the form of electronic warfare pods for passive & active jamming in addition to overt weapons that included anti-radar missiles and cluster bombs. Of all of the aircrews, these men who had flown their aircraft from forward bases in Louisiana and Mississippi believed they faced the most risk tonight. Their job was to attack Cuban air defences. They would have to get up close and personal to them, drawing their fire when necessary too. There was plenty of combat experience among the aircrew due to their assigned commands being training units. Nonetheless, Cuba was known to have extensive air defences and those would be on alert.
The Cubans detected the Americans before the planners of Oblivion anticipated. A mobile air-search radar, moved into the Bahia Honda region west of Havana and pointed out into the Gulf of Mexico, caught glimpses of many aircraft coming over the horizon off in the distance.
Those aircraft certainly weren’t friendly!
There were fighters airborne over Cuba which had taken off when the Tomahawks had come and these were Soviet-built MiG-21s and -23s. On strip-alert, the MiGs had raced to get airborne to avoid being caught on the ground if more American cruise missiles cratered their runaways and had used up plenty of fuel in making fast take-offs. Many of these were in the process of beginning to return to un-attacked airbases located at San Antonio de los Banos, San Julian and Santa Clara. More MiGs were getting ready to come up and take their place on patrol missions over Havana and away to the east of the city too where the threat axis had been judged to be. Therefore, when the radar images showed anything up to a hundred aircraft coming in from the northwest, the Cubans were caught off-guard.
The planners of Oblivion had their intelligence correct on Cuban operating procedures and made the correct calculations as to when to have the air strike arrive after the Tomahawks had.
Initially, only a few Cuban fighters, those with the most fuel, were able to make the turn to the northwest. Cuban MiGs were sent towards the incoming aircraft while radar operators and fighter controllers on the ground – those who would direct the air battle rather than fighter pilots, as per doctrine – aimed to get a grasp on the incoming threat. What they needed was to get more fighters off the ground, including some of the remaining MiG-29s out of San Antonio de los Banos. Those top-of-the-range fighters were the survivors of previous air battles over southern Florida and had the best available pilots, weapons and combat systems.
Meanwhile the Americans got closer and closer.
Some F-15s started to acquire Cuban MiGs at distance and prepare to launch Sparrow missiles; others kept all active combat systems switched off and stood ready to ignite afterburners to race towards more MiGs to take them on at close-range using Sidewinders. Then there were the B-52s along with the F-4Gs and the F-16s. They carried on flying towards Havana with the F-15s out ahead to protect them.
The air battles started once the distances closed. Radar information from an E-3 aircraft flying away to the east, was shared with American aircraft in the sky while the Cubans relied upon their own ground radars. In the latter case, the Cubans struggled through targeted jamming directed against them and the air picture became confused. Soviet-supplied computer assistance to link together what certain radars were seeing so an overall picture could be gained provided some help to the commanders on the ground but the Americans used frequency-hopping jamming while the Soviet technology was a decade out of date.
Sparrow missiles started to explode against and near to MiGs. A few Cuban pilots managed to use their flight skills and their fighter’s manoeuvrability to avoid these while trying to line up returning shots. More American missiles arrived though, Sidewinders from other F-15s that had come in close. It was a massacre. There were far too many Cuban fighters and too many American missiles. The Cubans couldn’t get a handle on the situation, one which was moving too fast for them with the Americans having the upper hand in technology too when it came to controlling the air battle. The Louisiana national guardsmen really had been put through their paces in their training for their now aborted European deployment. Some of their own shots might have missed, but they could out-fly the Cubans in more powerful aircraft.
Cuban pilots died over the water when shot down and more when their MiGs ran out of fuel and crashed down into the Gulf of Mexico. The men from Louisiana would have nine kills confirmed by the E-3 – they themselves claimed eleven – for no losses suffered of their own. The skies ahead towards Havana were open though there would be more air combat over that city.
Wild Weasel and Iron Hand missions went in ahead of the B-52s. Missiles were fired from and bombs fell from the aircraft which flew in low when fighters clashed above them. The targets were identified tactical SAM sites and anti-aircraft guns around the capital. But there were more of those then anticipated. The Cubans had moved many more air defences into the area than Oblivion had planned for. American intelligence on what systems the Cubans fielded, and the capabilities of those, wasn’t complete. There were successes, especially since the Americans had had ample real-world combat experience over European skies recently of Soviet-built air defences, but failures were met too. The F-4Gs and F-16s started to pay a price in their attacks as they tried to blast apart a corridor for the incoming bombers.
The plan was for the B-52s to make one pass over Havana as a solid wave of bombers. There were B-52G and -52H models, all laden with free-fall bombs in their belly bomb-bays. There was a whole range of targets clustered together for them to deliver their bomb loads upon while their escorts defended them against threats.
Outside of the city, those SA-2s and also SA-3 Goa systems, the strategic air defences of Havana, opened fire. The incoming bombers were detected even with all of the electronic jamming that came with them and the big SAMs were lofted into the sky. It was hoped by the Cubans that they could get successes against such aircraft like the Vietnamese had long down and get those hits in early too so the Americans would call off their attack at the last minute. However, these missiles didn’t perform as advertised. The Americans had plenty of operational intelligence when it came to these particular models of SAMs, despite recent upgrades, and negated their use. More tactical, newer Cuban air defences directly over Havana were able to do damage to the Americans, but not these older systems around the outside.
F-15s were engaging more Cuban MiGs by the time the bombers finally arrived, including a couple of MiG-29s, and the attacks on air defences in a tactical fashion over the city were ongoing. For the aircrews aboard the B-52s approaching Havana was not a happy experience. They had their own jammers active but could see all of the tracers from anti-aircraft guns lighting up the sky. There were the streaks of missiles too. Thankfully, they were unmolested by fighters and there were explosions on the ground ahead where air defences were being attacked. They flew onwards into all of that.
The targets for their bombs would be what Oblivion planners called ‘regime targets’ in the form of certain buildings. There was a whole cluster of those identified inside Havana. At the same time around the targets would be other buildings, many full of ordinary Cubans.
Collateral damage.
The B-52s finally started their bomb-run and all of the hundreds upon hundreds of Mk.82, Mk.84 and Mk.117 bombs started to fall upon Havana… with all of the epic devastation which would follow.
This was Oblivion.
Oblivion was the destruction of central Havana.
Oblivion was the hell unleashed upon those who were unfortunately in the way.
Oblivion was the revenge of the United States.
February 19th 1990 Tyrol, Austria
All through yesterday, Hungarian forces had attempted to advance through the western Austrian state of Tyrol with the ultimate goal being to reach Innsbruck. The snow-covered mountains across this Alpine region of Austria provided a natural barrier to the onwards movement west though, especially when protected by well-led defenders. There were immense problems away from the frontlines too, with the Hungarian forces assigned and within the territory taken beforehand by the Soviets, all combining to forestall the continuation of the previously-successful invasion of Austria.
Those issues would again today make sure that the majority of Tyrol, the capture of which would geographically split NATO into two, wouldn’t succumb to foreign invasion and all of the horrors which came with that.
Through the snow and the freezing cold, the Hungarian First Army tried to move forwards once again immediately after first light. Many officers gave it all to lead their men on advances to complete what the Soviets had done and finish off the Austrians; others in command positions – especially those at the lower levels – only made desultory attempts. The enemy wouldn’t yield though, the men wouldn’t fight and their rear areas were in chaos. For the second day in a row there was failure met here.
Innsbruck and the Inn Valley where it lay inside, were far away from the frontlines. Road and rail links between West Germany and Italy ran through there, over the Alps. Those communications links had been attacked from the air, along with the city as well, but the transport routes were still being used in support of NATO and also to assist what remained of Austrian resistance too. Assigned the mission of reaching Innsbruck by their Soviet overlords, the Hungarians weren’t up to the task. On their left flank was one Soviet field army also fighting in the Alps towards the Italian frontier. On their right flank there was another, this one engaged in combat operations on the border with West Germany. Those Soviet troops were having some successes. Yet the Hungarians met only abject failure.
Hungarian soldiers on foot were shot down, those in armoured vehicles incinerated when those were blown up. Enemy snipers were everywhere along the frontlines and there was the constant rumble of well-placed artillery. It was hell at the frontlines were the Hungarians fought and died for no gain, but grim for them behind the frontlines too. Special KGB units had been attached to the Hungarian First Army once it had moved across into Austria. Without a secret police service of its own and the Hungarian military weak with regards to any form of security apparatus, the Soviets had provided for their allies assistance to ‘maintain political order’ within the ranks. There had been arrests and executions of officers and men throughout the whole period which the Hungarians were in Austria, following their move westwards behind the invading Soviet Eighth Tank Army. This continued today, like it had yesterday, as Hungarians far from home attracted the unwanted attention of their supposed allies. Hungarian soldiers were being shot at by Austrians away from the frontlines too: partisans, guerrillas and stay-behind paramilitaries were active against them. The Hungarians were all conscripts forced into service and not at all motivated to be involved in a war in a foreign land. Some had misbehaved by abusing civilians – the usual war crimes: rape, robbery and murder – and so brought about revenge killings upon their brethren yet the majority were just being driven forwards towards the frontlines through a hostile population wanting to defend their homes and families from foreign invaders. There were explosions staged against them alongside the shots fired at them; on a few occasions more gruesome methods were used to kill Hungarian soldiers.
The overall Soviet war aim in Austria was to conquer the country whole. The Swiss border was to be reached and NATO cut in two as it had been by pre-war Austrian neutrality. This had almost been achieved during the first round of fighting by how far the Soviets had managed to get west. They had eliminated the majority of Austria’s small, professional army and got as far as Tyrol before the ceasefire. Once the fighting resumed, the main offensive was to be directed to the south to get troops into Austria with drives made against Bavaria and Tyrol only being to guard their flanks and keep their opponents off balance.
To the south were the Italians. Their initial move into Austria to support their neighbours had been defeated and remaining Italian forces pushed back by superior Soviet forces to the Alps. On the other side of the mountains was northern Italy where larger Soviet forces were meant to later enter. The fighting with the Italians inside Austria had been successful for the Soviets when they first met in combat and they wanted to repeat that on a grander scale and invade the country properly. There were Spanish and Portuguese troops which had been part of NATO reinforcements to the Italian Front and those were to be engaged on Italian soil as well.
Failure in Tyrol would not be fatal for the war aims when it came to dealing with Italy as the Soviets desired, but it wouldn’t be helpful either. Mountain passes across the Alps, the Brenner Pass south of Innsbruck especially, were fixed and known locations which aircraft and rockets could strike; Soviet commandoes were up in the Alpine passes too. Connections for NATO logistics efforts could be cut by those means if troops weren’t able to physically occupy the Innsbruck area. Yet to leave the last of the Austrians in control of the last unoccupied part of their country was considered a political failure. Austria was meant to be wholly conquered just as West Germany, Denmark, the Netherlands, Belgium and Luxembourg were to be. Worries had been expressed in some quarters about the inability of the Hungarians to meet expectations but the hope had been that they would make some forward progress and march upon Innsbruck. A siege of the city would have been enough for the Soviets with the thinking that in the Alpine winter Innsbruck couldn’t hold out for long in such a scenario, especially with so many Austrian internal refugees having fled towards the city from across the country too.
But the Austrians had stopped the Hungarians cold.
The fighting was raging across a long and windy frontline far to the east of Innsbruck. The most western point of the Hungarians lines was twenty-five miles away from the city. The heights of the Alps were on the way above and valleys below were likewise defended. The Austrians were light troops and a mix of regulars which had been fighting since the first day of the invasion and many reservists: all of them fully committed to the fight for their country. Soviet intelligence had missed the addition recently to Austrian positions of several battalions of Spanish mountain troops. Those elite soldiers had been spread out to bolster the Austrians and they were doing just that.
Every major push forward that the Hungarians tried, they failed. Their own problems before they attacked in the form of the terribly low morale, out-of-date weaponry and the attacks on their lines of communications were devastating. Thousands of them would die today just as they had done yesterday too and would again tomorrow if there wasn’t a change in the overall situation.
The Hungarian First Army was going nowhere.
February 19th 1990 Near Tønder, Jutland, Denmark
Soviet tanks were now pouring towards the border between West Germany and Denmark. The Eleventh Guards Army couldn’t be stopped and was rapidly closing the distance between the start-lines from where they had beginning yesterday and what had to be their initial objective of reaching the entrance to Jutland.
Major General Lewis MacKenzie, the acting commander of the LANDJUT Corps, a multi-national formation which he had been appointed deputy on the eve of war and then assumed command following his superior’s untimely death, was unable to stop the enemy advance. The after-effects of the nuclear strike against Flensburg had crippled part of the Canadian Army officer’s command while those troops which remained active and able to fight following that attack had been smashed to pieces through pushing two days of fighting now.
The command column in which General MacKenzie was travelling within came to a temporary halt for refuelling outside of Tønder. The Danish town had been attacked by enemy aircraft and rockets – conventional, not thermonuclear weapons used – and there were refugees streaming away from it. Security troops with the corps commander’s detachment kept an eye on those civilians while he took the time to study his maps and try to communicate with his subordinates. The commander of the West German forces which had been arrayed in the Flensburg area, and obeying orders from the now-obliterated government which had sat there, hadn’t responded to orders since late yesterday when most of his men had been overrun. There were still Danish troops and US Marines on the (moving) frontlines though, with a brigade-group of General MacKenzie’s countrymen on their way to join them.
The Danish Jutland Division and the 2d Marine Expeditionary Brigade were taking the brunt of the continuing Soviet advance. General MacKenzie managed to establish contact with the two operational commanders this afternoon. There were struggles in doing so through airwaves filled with hostile enemy electronic jamming but eventually he spoke to both. Each was of equal rank to him and professional military officers with wide experience.
The Dane reported that both of his remaining combat brigades (the third had been lost yesterday down in Schleswig) were fighting for their lives as they tried to conduct withdrawals along the course of the main roads coming out of West Germany. The Soviets were seemingly everywhere and the Danes were being smashed to pieces every time they stopped to try to hold up their opponents. The Jutland Division was approaching the Vida River now, just inside Denmark, but would keep going afterwards rather than try to make a stand on such a narrow water barrier.
As to the Americans, the 2d Brigade was composed of reservists. There were a couple of thousand US Marines recalled to service during hastily mobilisation and shipped across to Denmark during the first round of the fighting with the Soviets. They had seen some action before the ceasefire and the during the following three-day period been reinforced with armour, artillery and aviation assets joining them. The ultimate plan was for the 2d Marine Division which had fought up in northern Norway to join them but the Soviets had started attacking again long before that could happen. General MacKenzie’s conversation with the brigade commander was interrupted by enemy artillery fire and also the unwelcome news that most of the tanks assigned to the US Marines had been destroyed in battle. The Americans were falling back against the North Sea coast, pushed aside by Soviet armour driving the Danes back into their own country. They would very soon to be cut off, General MacKenzie was told, and left behind in West Germany. There were Soviets tanks that had already reached the road that might have provided an escape towards Sylt and possible salvation from there.
The American on the other end of the radio link-up told his Canadian counterpart that he was going to fall back to Dagebull. General MacKenzie had to find that location on his maps and saw that it was a small village with a coastal ferry terminal serving islands off-shore. That was where the US Marines would fall back to if they could. No help could be sent to them, the American was told, but that was expected by them. The conversation with regards to that was terminated on that note…
Enquiring after his own countrymen with the 1st Mechanised Brigade-Group, General MacKenzie couldn’t get through on the radio to them. The last he had heard was that they were in central Jutland and trying to move southwards. Slowing them down in doing so was enemy air action but more than that the flight of tens of thousands of civilians. West Germans far from home and also Danes who hadn’t yet travelled that far were using every route which they could to move northwards away from the advancing Soviets. They were fleeing for their lives. Rumours were abound with news of not just what had happened at Flensburg but also what had happened to other civilians not so fortunate to escape areas which had come under Soviet occupation.
Those civilians were right to flee and General MacKenzie held no animosity towards them. However, he didn’t want them on the roads which the arriving Canadian were to need to reach the frontlines. Anywhere else would be fine, just not blocking those routes bringing forward fighting men which he so desperately needed if he was to stand any chance of stopping the Soviets… or even slowing them down in their madcap advance to overrun the Baltic Exits.
During their initial invasion, the Soviets had worked with the East Germans and the Poles to take Denmark and secure the Baltic Exits. The LANDJUT Corps had fought to stop the advance which had come up through Schleswig-Holstein and brought the Warsaw Pact ground forces to a halt a considerable distance away from the Danish border. Across to the east, other NATO forces outside of General MacKenzie’s operational command, had taken their time but eventually defeated those airmobile and amphibious troops which had landed upon Zealand and forced their surrender hours before the Europe-wide ceasefire had come into effect.
Now the Soviets were out to overrun Denmark and take the Baltic Exits again. They had much stronger forces this time operating on land, their own massed tanks and armoured infantry in several divisions rather than just relying upon one division of East Germans.
The LANDJUT Corps couldn’t stop the Soviet Eleventh Guards Army. General MacKenzie didn’t want to admit that yet it was the cold, hard truth of the matter. It was just a matter of how long it would take and how many would die before there would be T-72s at the Skagerrak and all of the NATO troops he commanded either dead or in POW camps.
February 19th 1990 Command Bunker #5, Beneath Tikrit, Saladin Province, Iraq
Saddam Hussein al-Tikriti, the President of Iraq, had command bunkers for his personal use scattered across the country which he ruled. Built to foreign designs by foreign hands, Saddam had spent the past few days moving between these. The bunkers located north of Baghdad were those were he was most comfortable in as they were underneath tribal areas where loyalty to him was the most strongest compared to elsewhere throughout Iraq. Of course, it wasn’t the people above him who were a current threat necessitating the need for him to be underground. It was the Israelis and their infernal strike aircraft which had driven him to the safety of his bunkers.
Above the skies of Iraq there constantly were those aircraft wearing the Star of David as insignia.
How dare they!
If there was one thing that any leader such as Saddam needed to stay in power as he did, then that would be an external enemy. The people could be led to hate one certain group to forget all of their own problems which they might otherwise blame upon their own leader. Saddam had directed the Iraqi people during his time as President of Iraq against the Iranians, the Kurds and domestic communists. When the time was needed for official ire to be against those, then the people had followed. At the same time, nothing united people such as those who he ruled over than hatred of the Israelis. It was in the national character of the Iraqi people and those across the Arab world to understand – ‘helped’ by their leaders – to blame everything upon the Israelis.
For Saddam, his own hatred of Israel was personal too. It was they who had destroyed his pet project of making Iraq a nuclear power back in 1982. They had worked with the Iranians of all people to conduct their air attack then and he had only been able to take limited vengeance upon those charged to defend Iraq then rather than Israel itself. A revenge against Israel for their Operation Orchard had been something which he had long waited for.
When war had broken out in Europe a few weeks ago, a long time foreign visitor to Iraq had come to see Saddam again: Yevgeny Maksimovich Primakov. The Soviet academic and diplomat was well known to Saddam based upon a personal relationship stretching back for many years. Saddam repeatedly had had many problems with the Soviet leadership because he had put his own interests first rather than their geo-political goals yet Primakov had been a constant figure of Iraqi-Soviet relationships who Saddam would deal with. He knew that the dour-faced, quiet man was an agent of the KGB rather than just a respected academic and had no problem with that. Saddam respected the man whom he had always had productive dealings with.
Primakov had told him that the new Soviet leadership would be greatly aided in their war with the West if Israel was attacked. Once the war was won, Soviet gratitude would be shown. Assistance would be provided to Iraq in attacking Israel if not at once then very soon afterwards. There would have to be coordination with Syria and Assad – another enemy of the Iraqi people which Saddam had at times led his people to hate – to achieve victory but in the end it would be Iraq which would come out victorious in the spoils of the conflict. Iraq would strike at Israel and liberate Palestine while driving the Israelis back into the sea; Saddam would be the hero of the Arab world for doing so.
Saddam had given the proposal much thought for the benefit of Primakov though he had immediately decided that he would do as the Soviets wished. He was very weary of those promises of later riches that Primakov had promised yet believed that he would have the opportunity to take his own with his armies inside Jordan, Palestine and Israel. Working with the Syrians was not what he wanted to do and he had known that he would have to push aside the Jordanians, who wouldn’t want a war with Israel, to achieve the goal of gaining revenge against the Israelis but he saw victory as something possible. He had the largest army in the Middle East, one which was battle-hardened. The Iraqi Air Force was well-equipped and combat experienced too. His people would support the war and those in all other Arab nations would also be supportive of war against the Israelis.
Moreover, he had led Iraq successfully against the Iranians and he, Saddam, knew how to defeat Israel. He had been sure that he couldn’t lose.
Those memories of his belief in victory were with Saddam tonight as he was in his bunker. He recalled how in conversations with his military chiefs they had told him that by this point in the conflict the Iraqi Republican Guard would have driven through Jordan and be entering Israel. Israeli armies were meant to be distracted fighting the Syrians and Iraqi forces would roll into their country over crossing the Jordan River. Airbases from where the Israelis flew their warplanes would be conquered. Iraqi armies would strike westwards towards Tel Aviv and southwards through the West Bank so that Jerusalem could be taken.
Saddam had intended to be there himself when Jerusalem fell to Iraqi armies.
The generals were dead. Saddam had had them shot for failing their duty, Iraq and him. He had ordered the arrest of their families already and those would be dealt with in time too. The only thing for him to do was to take personal charge of the war after those who had gotten rid of had failed. Now he would have to do all of the work, but he was used to that.
The Iraqi Republican Guard had been attacked right before it was due to enter Jordan by the Israelis. It was called a spoiling attack, Saddam had learnt. There had been air attacks and Israeli commandos on the ground: many of the latter even inside Iraqi sovereign soil! An advance afterwards had started by those incompetent generals to move forwards regardless because Saddam had told them that the Israelis were incapable of stopping such a strong force when underway rather than in static positions. The generals hadn’t followed his instructions properly though and been too cautious. They had spoken of leaving supply lines exposed and falling into Israeli military traps. Such ideas had been passed down to those on the ground causing delays to be made in the advance Saddam had ordered. When his orders hadn’t been followed properly that had allowed the Israelis to do so much damage. It was the same in the air too with so many of his expensive aircraft shot out of the sky as well when caution had been employed.
He hadn’t been listened to, his orders hadn’t been correctly followed. He had shot those generals but it had been too late. The Republican Guard was nowhere near the Jordan River and instead still being struck at by the Israelis, including their paratroopers now fighting on the ground inside eastern Jordan. Israeli aircraft had been allowed to attack Iraq itself.
Saddam knew how to solve this problem now that the generals were out of the way. His orders were to be listened to by those on the ground fighting the hated Israelis or they would pay the price like their superiors had done. He wouldn’t run to the Soviets begging for help, nor any other Arab nations who would wish to take the glory of liberating Jerusalem.
From the bunker here Saddam was to monitor the progress of the ballistic missile attack upon Israel.
The tide of the war would be turned when fire rained down upon the enemies of Iraq. Saddam had complete faith in the ability of the missile program which he had overseen the creation of. Promises had been made by those whom he had long ago put in charge of the missile program that they could devastate Israel. It had been done to win the war against the Iranians and that success would be repeated.
Messages started to come in that the missiles were underway. From mobile launchers spread across the western deserts of Iraq, Soviet-supplied Scud missiles and the Iraqi-built derivatives of those (which Saddam was proud of) were launched. There were a few launch failures and Saddam made note of the excuses given by those who failed to get their missiles off the ground but otherwise he was pleased. Again and again, there came reports directly made to him that missiles were in the air.
Israel wouldn’t be able to stop this attack. They had no weapons capable of intercepting the inbound missiles and little time to prepare to get their civilians in the targeted cities out of the way. Haifa, Tel Aviv and Beersheba should be blown apart. Afterwards, the Israelis would be forced to devote all of their efforts into stopping another attack that would again kill as many as the one tonight. In the meantime, Saddam’s armies would finally be given free rein to do as tasked: reach the Jordan River and get across into Israel.
As in everything that he did, the President of Iraq was fully confident that this would work. He personally was in total command and everyone below knew the price of failing him again. Israel’s cities would burn, Jerusalem would be liberated and Saddam would have his revenge upon Israel.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 14:11:28 GMT
Five – To The Sea
February 20th 1990 The Wiehen Hills, Lower Saxony & North Rhine–Westphalia, West Germany
The US III Corps had gone on the offensive late yesterday evening, just after it had gotten dark. All through the night and into the early hours of this morning the Americans drove forwards. They advanced forward through the high ground which was covered in snow across bare woodland and into engagements with the Soviet Twenty–Eighth Combined Arms Army. The immediate objective for the III Corps was to get down the northern side of the hills and to the Mittellandkanal which ran lateral across northern West Germany. Ultimately though, the Americans were aiming for the shores of the North Sea far off in the distance. It would take them a few days and nights of hard combat to get that far, that was well understood, and they would have to fight a strong and battle-hardened enemy, but it was to the sea which they attacked towards.
With four combat divisions plus substantial attachments under command, with the majority of the troops having already fought during the first round of fighting and late additions seeing some action in the past few days, the III Corps wasn’t an inexperienced command itself either. These were the ‘counterattack corps’ of the US Army. They had come across the North Atlantic during REFORGER to arrive in Western Europe whilst being attacked themselves. Battles had been fought with the Soviets before the ceasefire where the III Corps hadn’t been able to muster sufficient strength yet hadn’t lost a major engagement. Their flanks had been threatened during that fighting causing tactical withdrawals to be made. Strikes had been made against the American’s logistical and communications links during that earlier fighting.
Nonetheless, the III Corps hadn’t been defeated in battle on the North German Plain earlier in the month and wasn’t about have such ignominy inflicted now. Morale was high among the men and the commanders had made their plans. The III Corps was supported by plenty of air power and their opponents had, as expected, been taken by surprise by the Americans moving forward rather than withdrawing due to external threats to their flanks. A battle which those involved expected to be later written about in the history books was underway through the Wiehen Hills.
Strike aircraft, attack helicopters and massed artillery had opened the way for the American advance to get down off the high ground through where for the past couple of days their forward positions had skirmished with half-hearted Soviet forward attacks. Once again, there had come counterattacks upon those fire support assets for the III Corps. Aircraft and helicopters had been shot down and counter-battery fire had targeted howitzers. The Soviets had filled the airwaves with electronic jamming to try to deny the Americans effective command and control.
The Twenty–Eighth Army had fought back too on the ground. Many of the better-trained and more experienced combat units which had been involved in the pre-ceasefire successful crossing of the Weser had been redirected towards the Third Shock & Fifth Guards Tank Armys to the northwest which were entering the Netherlands. Nonetheless, the Soviets here whom were meant to tie down the Americans and stop them from doing such they were and driving north towards the sea to cut off the Soviet Army from behind (yes, STAVKA had people who could read maps) weren’t incapable and inexperienced. These were soldiers who had seen combat before too. They had officers who had been involved in fighting the III Corps earlier in the month and also engaged some of the best elements of the West German Army as well. They had had time to prepare their defences. The ground had been studied and plans made to defeat a northwards drive coming down from above to reach the canal line and get over that. There was wide understanding of how the US Army fought on the attack with hitting tactical commanders to cause confusion and making use of the darkness to effectively utilise their infrared & night vision equipment. The Americans would keep moving themselves and pound away with fire support against static defences. They were known to be casualty-averse too. Previous experience in fighting the III Corps from the dead suffered by the Twenty–Eighth Army to the (brutal) interrogations of POWs had led the Soviets to be sure that they knew what was coming their way when the Americans finally got around to making an attack which would begin a counter-offensive.
The fighting for the Wiehen Hills could be described in many different ways. It was vicious. It was deadly. It was full of violence. Such was war though. When two mechanised armies clash over difficult terrain and both are experienced when it came to fighting the other thousands will die. There were fantastic explosions and horrible deaths. Vehicles blew up with men burnt to death inside of them. In hand-to-hand combat among infantry forces to dismount soldiers died further gruesome deaths. There was no time to stop for those involved with both the Americans and the Soviets on the move fighting tactical and operational battles of manoeuvre. Confusion reigned at times while on many occasions each opponent believed that they had complete control of the battlefield and everything was going as planned… until it didn’t.
For the III Corps the progress was slower and more costly than expected, but their aims were starting to be achieved long before the sun would come up this morning. On the eastern side of their front more success had come than to the west. The 2d Armored Division had defeated Soviet attempts to hold them back and driven surviving defenders back down off the hills. The Mittellandkanal would have been in sight if there had been light in the sky. There would be a final push towards the canal before the 5th Infantry (Mechanized) Division behind came forward to go over that and continue the advance. Meanwhile, the 24th Infantry (Mechanized) Division was stuck fast still fighting stubborn defenders and couldn’t break Soviet resistance. Behind them the 1st Cavalry Division was waiting to follow up any success in getting down the northern side of the hills. If that breakthrough couldn’t be achieved, then National Guard units held back would move in to support what headway had been made in the west and the 1st Cavalry Division would go east instead. This was the current situation for the III Corps where they weren’t about to be stopped in their counter-offensive by the enemy.
In contrast, the battle for the Wiehen Hills was going good enough for the Soviets to not consider that they might be defeated. The Twenty–Eighth Army had almost equal strength to the Americans, a fact which they were sure that the III Corps’ intelligence efforts hadn’t been aware of or they would have attacked in greater number of even elsewhere. Both committed Soviet divisions which had been at the frontlines had been mauled, but there remained large elements of those still fighting. There were still two other divisions held back ready to move at a moment’s notice when the decision was made to counterattack. They would fight for the limited objective of surrounding, pounding and crushing American forces which got down of the high ground and were racing for the Mittellandkanal ahead of the main III Corps force in what should be a devastating surprise for the Americans who would hopefully be caught unawares. No vocal protestations that the Americans might not be as unawares as hoped had been raised within the command staff of the Twenty–Eighth Army about this yet many were silently concerned that this was the case: ‘defeatism’ was a cause for arrest by the overbearing KGB presence at the field army’s headquarters.
At just gone four in the morning, the 2d Armored Division started driving on the Mittellandkanal; the 6th Guards Tank & 120th Guards Motor Rifle Divisions came out of their covered positions and counter-attacked the Americans on the move.
It would be deemed afterwards the Battle of Lübbecke.
Fought to the south and east of that small West German town, an ultimately inconclusive multi-divisional engagement would take place between the US and Soviet Armies. The Soviet ‘surprise’ counterattack with their two divisions racing out of cover from above ran right into the Americans given last-minute warning of what was coming their way due to aerial observation and thus a counter-counterattack took place. The 2d Armored Division, assisted by elements of the 3d Armored Cavalry Regiment, weren’t suddenly surrounded as expected and refused to be pocketed by tanks rolling across the dark countryside all around them. At the same time, those III Corps troops there weren’t able to defeat the Twenty–Eighth Army in open battle either. Neither side was able to gain the upper hand during the fight and had to conduct multiple withdrawals to break contact. Friendly-fire incidents occurred on the ground but also in the skies above them when NATO and Warsaw Pact aircraft became involved.
So many soldiers fighting on foreign soil far away from home had no idea what was happening and died without understanding the overall picture. It was the same for commanders of both sides as they lost track of the details of the fighting despite strenuous efforts to maintain control. In the darkness and the confusion of radio communications facing interference, neither pushed an advantage home and so there was no victor.
The Americans didn’t pull back from their furthest advances as far as the Mittellandkanal itself yet the Soviets hadn’t had their lines torn open and would be able to defend their overall position as they remained on the other side of the water barrier and also in Lübbecke too. When the 5th Infantry (Mechanized) Division was able to come down to the lower ground they found that the Soviets had fallen back with somewhat order re-established among their ranks and in no position to allow the Americans to dominate the region. Up above, those Soviets still in the western side of the Wiehen Hills remained holding back those III Corps elements there and were not cut off by the Americans below but not behind them.
A stalemate fell over the fight for the Wiehen Hills following the Battle of Lübbecke. Fighting continued as daylight approached and more men would die in continued mobile engagements yet the main battle of manoeuvre was over. Both sides had been fatally wounded yet were still in an overall position to achieve their aims despite all of the losses taken.
The advance to the sea by the III Corps had been halted. It still remained to be seen though whether the Soviets would be able to stop the Americans when they reorganised themselves and began advancing again aiming for another chance to tear open a gap and go for the North Sea.
February 20th 1990 Erica, Emmen, Drenthe, the Netherlands
The Dutch had fought hard for the village of Erica. They had ultimately lost the fighting which had taken place here but that didn’t mean that they hadn’t tried to defend their country near to the West German border.
Marshal Gromov hadn’t expected anything less. There had been some among his staff who had speculated that the Dutch wouldn’t have the stomach to stand up to an invasion due to the (only partially confirmed) reports leading up to the ceasefire that the government in the Netherlands had seriously considered giving up when the West Germans initially had. All that the commander of the Western–TVD had heard beforehand and seen since then when it came to engaging the Dutch gave lie to such pronouncements. The Dutch weren’t strong enough to stand up to what he had to throw at them yet that didn’t mean that they were weak. Nor were they ready to give up as their country was being overrun by Soviet troops.
Nonetheless, the Netherlands was slowly but surely being conquered.
He had come to the village where the destroyed houses still smouldered from the ruinous fires and there was shattered glass everywhere from all of the fighting which had smashed apart the numerous greenhouses that were located all around Erica. There would be bodies in abundance too, yet Marshal Gromov was sure that those with the Fifth Guards Tank Army command staff would have had men clearing all of them if not away then out of sight for now. On that latter matter he intended at the end of the briefing which he was now being given to make sure that the corpses of the dead, Soviet and Dutch (many of those civilians rather than combatants) alike, be removed due to the diseases which would spread from them.
Basic sanitation measures should be followed, he reminded himself whilst inside the erected tent and out of the failing rain outside, or we’ll face the same issues as in Afghanistan.
The visit he was undertaking to the forward command post of the Fifth Guards Tank Army was meant to have been a surprise. Marshal Gromov had come unannounced to the operational command operating the furthest west and heading to the sea. However, the field army commander here had been alerted before Marshal Gromov’s helicopter had arrived and sent several vehicles – including a tracked anti-air vehicle with both SAMs and guns – to meet to meet him. That had been annoying as Marshal Gromov had planned to find out the truth of how things were going without there being a stage-managing of the situation at the headquarters. Either someone in his own headquarters or that of the Netherlands Front (to which the Fifth Guards Tank Army reported to) had tipped off those here at Erica that he was on his way and they had this presentation for him.
His subordinates here spoke first of the successes which they had and what they had achieved by following their orders. Marshal Gromov expected that. They would want to start with the positives before moving to problems being encountered. That was known to be the way which he wanted operational briefings given to him. Moreover, the field army commander and his senior staff would be fearful of being relieved of their duty and handed over to the KGB detachment which he travelled with.
If only they understood that like them I am only one mistake away from being relieved of command, arrested on trumped-up charges and being taken out to be shot…
The Netherlands Front had three field armies under command. The Polish First Army was in fact still back in West Germany controlling security in rear areas and also guarding the right flank where there were West German hold-outs along parts of the coast. In the centre was the Third Shock Army which had entered the northern Netherlands and was engaging the greatly-understrength Dutch I Corps with its mix of Dutch and West German forces; Marshal Gromov was to visit them there next today. The Fifth Guards Tank Army, which operated the best available forces with the Netherlands Front, had entered the central part of this NATO country. Their opponents were the Allied II Corps, a recently-created combat group of weak enemy forces struggling to even slow let alone halt Soviet forces driving west and southwest. Therefore, if there had been bad news first Marshal Gromov would have been mighty surprised.
The crossings over the Ems River which the Fifth Guards Army had gone over several days ago now were far behind. All four attacking combat divisions were over the border now and spread out inside the Netherlands. They had taken the border regions where NATO forces defeated on the Ems had tried to fall back towards and driven forwards. Marshal Gromov was briefed that one division had reached the Polder Region near the town of Meppel, another two were within half a dozen miles of the IJssel River around Zwolle & south of there and the fourth division was heading for Deventer and further future crossing points over the barrier which would be the IJssel. His orders were being followed correctly despite going against standard operational doctrine.
The multi-divisional attack was on a wide frontage with three avenues of attack and what should have been the exploitation force for the Fifth Guards Tank Army committed at the beginning into the attack directly. NATO would be searching for where to send their strike aircraft against and the defenders on the ground would be keeping some of their own men back from the fighting ready to move when they expected that reserve force to be deployed.
Marshal Gromov was assured by the field army commander that they would reach the IJssel by this evening and be ready to go across it tomorrow morning. So-called ‘Fortress Holland’ would then be entered by the Fifth Guards Tank Army. Amsterdam and Utrecht lay ahead, so too did The Hague and Rotterdam… and the North Sea coast directly opposite Britain. Pleased with all that he heard but still sceptical of what was to be mentioned afterwards, Marshal Gromov rushed the briefing along. He was certain that those with him understood that they all shouldn’t stay in one place for so long this close to the frontlines: there wasn’t the time to waste when a NATO aircraft could appear overhead and possibly detect such a gathering of commanders ready for a laser-guided bomb or two.
What the Fifth Guards Tank Army had failed to achieve wasn’t much.
Too many enemy forces which had be defeated in battle and fallen back before being pocketed (around towns in most places) remained active for Marshal Gromov’s liking. He was told that they were being slowly dealt with with the strongest taken on first, especially those which could pose a threat to supply links. He was unhappy at this and expressed his displeasure though was content with the assurances given that full attention would be paid to each and every one of those pockets of enemy resistance soon enough. There was also the failure to utterly defeat the enemy this side of the IJssel yet. The race was still on with the forward elements of the Fifth Guards Tank Army to seize crossing points over that river which ran lateral to their line of advance before they could be used by the Allied II Corps to make withdrawals over and thus fight again. Keeping tank-heavy forces, even if there were so few of them, on this side of that river was of great importance. It was explained to him, and he agreed, that it was the enemy not cooperating with Soviet plans rather than mistakes made by the Fifth Guards Tank Army that had caused the situation.
Marshal Gromov told them to fix the issue soonest.
As to what enemy forces remained active in central parts of the Netherlands, he was given a run-down of them too here. Marshal Gromov was aware from summaries given by his Western–TVD intelligence headquarters but wanted to hear it first-hand from those here at the frontlines.
The Allied II Corps had a short and violent history of combat operations inside West Germany. It’s headquarters nucleus had been formed from West German reservists operating in Lower Saxony just after the invasion had begun at the beginning of the month. Many West German units had been stripped away and its ineffective commander had been killed. The British had taken over and added forces of their own, again most of whom were reservists. Many of those men from their Territorial Army had been defeated in battles for the Weser crossings in the days before the ceasefire yet the majority of the regular troops had avoided the same fate. During the ceasefire it had been reassigned from the NATO Northern Army Group (NORTHAG) army group to the new North–West Army Group (NORWESTAG) – a vanity exercise for the Dutch if there had ever been one – and moved into the Netherlands. The remaining British troops had been joined by some light French forces and then even lighter Dutch reservists too.
The Allied II Corps was the weakest of all NATO corps commands spread from the sea to the Alps and through which Marshal Gromov had directed his main attack in the north. There were strong American forces with NORTHAG as well as British and Belgian units that were combat-experienced and in far stronger positions to hold ground. Those were back to the south and the southeast though, where Marshal Gromov had effectively shielded his flank with his own battle-hardened men in field armies with the Polish Front: as had been the case earlier in the day in the Wiehen Hills.
The Fifth Guards Tank Army were claiming that they were in the midst of destroying the British 5th and French 9th Divisions. Tanks were few and far between with two such formations along with armoured infantry. The light infantry units that the Allied II Corps had in the central Netherlands had a lot of artillery and man-portable missile-men in addition to plenty of air support given to them from NATO air forces. They were fighting alongside Dutch reservists and even irregulars who were defending their homes. All were about to be crushed underneath the treads of Soviet tanks charging towards the North Sea.
When seeing all of their intelligence, and getting silent nods from his own senior intelligence officer who was travelling with him to confirm that, Marshal Gromov had no reason to believe that soon enough the Fifth Guards Tank Army would complete its objective of getting that far west. Afterwards, in conjunction with many of his other field armies of course, they would start moving southwards as well. Charging for the Lower Rhine crossings was a matter for another day though. Moreover, the Thirteenth Combined Arms & First Guards Tank Armys with the Northern Front (operating in the centre despite the pre-war designation) might reach the Rhine long before them anyway…
…downstream in the Koblenz / Mainz / Frankfurt area.
February 20th 1990 Israeli Defence Forces Headquarters, The Kirya, Tel Aviv, Israel
General Shomron returned from his meeting with the Israel War Cabinet back to his headquarters just before darkness came.
He had travelled in a small, well-protected convoy from the government bunker where Prime Minister Yitzhak Shamir and his ministers where the short distance to The Kirya. The armoured car in which he had rode and the other vehicles loaded with security troops had moved as fast as possible through Tel Aviv though the journey had taken a round-about routing through the damaged city. There were still rescue crews working to locate victims of last night’s missile strike and there were also many people out on the streets moving to places where they would feel offered safety for the coming night. More Iraqi missiles would fall upon the country, the government had broadcast to the Israeli people, and shelter should be taken.
The IDF Headquarters should have been a target for any missile strike which followed conventional military strategy. It remained wholly undamaged though, above and below ground. The Scud missiles fired by the Iraqis were far from accurate, especially at great range, and the use of so many of them against Tel Aviv hadn’t really been targeted either. General Shomron was unsure whether the Iraqis had even bothered to aim their missiles in the general area of military and government targets in the city or just had fired them without any form of targeting.
The latest count of the dead during the attacks last night in Tel Aviv and other Israeli cities was one hundred and ninety-three. Sixty-two missiles had crashed into Israel in total – only three plus fatalities per missile on average – in the space of two hours, with another twenty-odd not completing their flights. It was mainly damage which those missiles had done and the injuries caused (twice as many Israelis were hurt than killed) had been multiple. Israel had been hurt worse many times before and had lost far more soldiers already in the fighting, especially up in Syria. Yet, when meeting with the War Cabinet it had been those missiles which the politicians had wanted to talk about with their demands that the Iraqis be stopped from doing the same again tonight.
Unfortunately, the IDF was unable to do anything meaningful to prevent the expected follow-up attack by the Iraqis again tonight. General Shomron told them what the Mossad chief had done: the Iraqis only had a certain number of such weapons which they had already depleted their stock of. If they repeated their attack again tonight, and the next night too, on a similar scale then they would have no more of them left: resupply from Soviet sources wasn’t possible for them at the minute. Military options to combat the missiles in-flight weren’t possible and with the IDF so committed to current conventional operations there wasn’t much chance of using men on the ground or aircraft to knock out the mobile missile-launchers located off in Iraq. Israel would just have to weather the storm of the Scuds. Those were inaccurate weapons with small warheads that had a high failure rate in Iraqi hands.
If Iraq had other, more accurate Soviet-supplied tactical ballistic missiles and used chemical warheads with them then it would be a different matter entirely.
Of course the War Cabinet hadn’t been happy to hear his answers on that matter. There had been demands for commando teams to operate by the hundreds throughout the Iraqi desert and strike aircraft to be kept loitering overhead by the use of tankers ready to blast launch sites after Scuds had been fired. Calmer voices had been listened to though, along with General Shomron’s. To do such things would demand a change in the current military strategy being employed when faced with Iraqi and Syrian forces on the edges of Israel’s borders and other potentially hostile forces gathered in the region. In addition, General Shomron would have found it impossible to complete such a task anyway with the military resources which Israel was limited to.
How the war was going against the Syrians in the north and the Iraqis across in eastern parts of Jordan was discussed with the War Cabinet as well as the Iraqi missiles. There were other briefings given concerning events elsewhere across the Middle East and also closer to home in the West Bank and Gaza. Shabtai Shavit, the Director-General of Mossad, and the new Defence Minister Ariel Sharon were more involved in informing the politicians of developments away from the battlefield though General Shomron had some input there too.
Now back in his own bunker, away from the more comfortable surroundings which the politicians were staying in, General Shomron had a meeting of his senior staff arranged.
The IDF was still winning on the battlefield. In Lebanon, Israeli and South Lebanese Army (SLA) forces had moved forward closer to Beirut and cut off most of that city from the outside as well as engaging anyone – Syrians, Lebanese, terrorists – who stood in their way. The aim there was to keep the opposition far back away from Israeli territory and on the defensive; there were later options to resolve the military situation much more favourably there but for now enough success had been attained. Across in Syria, the lead IDF ground units were within sight of Damascus. The Golan Heights had provided the perfect springboard for the assault which started as a spoiling attack and then became a general offensive throughout the south of the country. The Syrian Army was smashed to pieces. Just like Beirut, at the moment Damascus was to be partially enveloped rather than directly entered. Those two cities would be costly for the IDF to take and there was far more strategic military attention in having Israel’s opponents fight to break the effective sieges of both. There were corridors left open for civilians to flee while the defenders would be harassed inside.
The main focus of the IDF was now being directed into Jordan against the Iraqis. There remained a general inadequacy from the Jordanians to sort out their own military forces following the chaos caused by Iraqi action with assassins and commandos against them and this had allowed the Iraqis to get as far into that country as possible. They were being blasted from the air though and the IDF was moving ground forces ready to come southwards from occupied parts of Syria, rather than directly through the West Bank and across unoccupied parts of Jordan first, to hit the Iraqis in the flank. Israeli aircraft losses had been heavier than expected with SAMs being the most effective Iraqi defence yet pilots were being rescued in the majority of those cases. Unless something unexpected occurred, then the Iraqi Republican Guard was soon to be destroyed. It’s supply links back through the desert had been cut, command-&-control had been targeted from the air too (adding to Saddam’s own actions against his generals) and the IDF was soon to be on its flank ready to launch their attack.
There had been further losses to Israeli aircraft when operating over Iraq and General Shomron informed his staff that any more of them were to cease. The targeted airbases in the western part of the country had been hit enough for the time being. It was time to use air power on a more tactical level over the next battlefield rather than in that semi-strategic sense so far away; more weapons could be carried instead of fuel and rescue for downed pilots was easier. The war aim was to destroy Iraqi forces threatening to invade Israel, which were closer now, rather than to wholly eliminate Iraq as a military power.
The assembled IDF senior staff was briefed on those other events further afield next.
Across the West Bank and Gaza there remained serious ongoing civil disturbances with riots, shootings and explosions. Security forces were still on the defensive and unable yet to effectively turn the tide. There was no one person or group identified as directly leading the ongoing troubles as this was all related to the ongoing Intifada, but there was evidence that KGB influence had been felt in increasing the violence in the past few days since Israel started conventional fighting with its neighbours. Arafat himself had got word that the PLO was trying to bring some semblance of order to the state of affairs and despite the long-term situation with regards to the Palestinian people and Israel he didn’t want to have his people fight someone else’s war. Whether all of this could be believed – ‘Saint Arafat’ – was debatable but the War Cabinet had issued orders that for the time being that was the situation on the ground. The Palestinians weren’t to be regarded as a direct enemy aligned with the Syrians, the Iraqis and their Soviet puppet-masters. Moreover, there would be an issuing of personal gas masks made across the West Bank and Gaza to the PLO so they could supply them to their people like Israelis elsewhere (including in the hotly-contested settlements) were receiving; sirens to warn people in such a nightmare scenario were to be set up as well. If chemical weapons were employed by Israel’s enemies, even if not targeted, then those in the West Bank and Gaza would face casualties too.
Propaganda had many faces.
Foreign Minister Moshe Arens and the Foreign Ministry had been active elsewhere in the Middle East making unofficial contacts with the Gulf Arabs. As expected, none of those countries such as Saudi Arabia and the nations along the Persian Gulf were willing to support Israel in their fight with Syria and Iraq – not even unofficially. Regardless, those nations were working with the Americans already in blockading Iraq’s access to the sea and cutting trade links overland as well. Israel’s diplomats made contact with representatives of those regimes assuring them that Syria and Iraq were doing what they were for Soviet purposes, not just those of the Arab people: Israel wasn’t at war with all Arabs. General Shomron told his staff that much success wasn’t happening in convincing the Gulf Arabs of Israel’s good intentions but none were actively supporting Assad and Saddam at the minute. The Persian Gulf countries were in fact working with the Americans to offer support to Pakistan with its armies inside Afghanistan rather than giving any aid to their fellow Arab dictators fighting Israel.
There were American forces in the Persian Gulf region. A supposedly noted senior US Army officer, General Norman Schwarzkopf, was in Bahrain now. He had a big headquarters staff – US Central Command – but little available forces. There were many US Navy warships including an aircraft carrier en route until this morning towards the Red Sea as well as a division of US Marines and some US Air Force strike assets; there were no troops from the US Army. The Americans had many plans it seemed, but this Schwarzkopf character at the moment was unable to do much apart from blockade Iraq and make promises to the Gulf Arabs… which there had been concern among the War Cabinet that he might not be able to keep.
That aircraft carrier had been heading towards the Suez Canal until a situation of great concern for Israel erupted in Egypt earlier today. There hadn’t been enough discussion on that matter for General Shomron’s liking at the War Cabinet but he was aware that Mossad and Sharon shared his worries. Egyptian President Mubarak had survived an assassination attempt and a coup d’état averted when the Egyptian military supported him rather than the Islamic fundamentalists who had tried to topple him. Should they have done so, and turned the attention of the Egyptian military towards Israel, then the threats from Assad and Saddam would have been nothing in comparison. Thankfully, Mubarak was still in charge in Cairo. However, the Suez Canal had been targeted at the same time as Egypt’s president. A Panama-flagged, Greek-owned and Filipino-crewed cargo ship – the MV Pearl of the Philippine Sea – which had been engaged in shipping war supplies to American forces operating in Turkey and transiting the Suez Canal had been taken over by what Mossad believed were KGB operatives. Egyptian representatives aboard the ship when in the waterway had been killed before the ship was turned sideways near Port Suez and then charges blown below the waterline. The ship had been scuttled in a perfect location and in the most expert manner to block maritime traffic. There had been a similar attempt with a West German ship at the northern end of the Suez Canal where those Egyptian security people aboard had stopped a similar act of sabotage.
The Suez Canal was currently blocked though. Israel had been in the midst of talking to the Americans about proving aid to them and that aircraft carrier moving up the Red Sea – which had turned back around afterwards – was hoped to be the start of that. Soon enough there would need to be a major resupply given for Israel to carry on fighting like it was and only the Americans could do that. There were other means of resupply, but the Suez Canal was still vital and now it was closed. There had been some of Israel’s leaders who General Shomron had just met with who weren’t all that upset at such developments in Egypt. This was explained in coded terms to those at the IDF Headquarters.
No one wanted Egypt to have fallen to Islamic fundamentalists who could easily have turned on Israel, with or without coordination with Assad and Saddam, but the fall-out from the failed coup d’état and the attention Egypt would now have to pay to domestic issues would be beneficial for Israel in a strategic sense. The Egyptians, prodded by the Americans, had been considering intervening in the war. Mubarak had been preparing to send Egyptian forces to Jordan to fight Iraq and defend King Hussein’s embattled country. To do that would have involved moving those forces across either the Sinai or the Red Sea into Saudi Arabia and then up to Jordan. Israel did not want Egypt to do that for a whole host of geo-political reasons!
On a final subject for the meeting which General Shomron oversaw, there was a briefing given on the state of the non-alliance of Israel’s current active wartime opponents. Assad and Saddam were sworn enemies. Syria wasn’t a firm Soviet ally and Iraq even less so. They were gaining no real active Soviet assistance during this conflict and both still had part of their armies facing the other. The Iraqi invasion of Jordan had angered Syria too. Moreover, Assad was furious at Saddam’s recent declaration that Iraq was fighting for all Arabs in the war against Israel.
There would be opportunities soon apparent with such a situation, such was the hope of Israel.
February 20th 1990 On the road to St.-Jean-de-Luz, Pyrénées-Atlantiques, France
Father, Mother, Daughter and Son were stuck outside the French town of St.-Jean-de-Luz.
Their BMW, which had taken them all the way from Remagen in the Rhineland, was stopped in the traffic along the road leading into the coastal resort. Up ahead as far as each of them could see when they had tried there were vehicles halted like theirs. There were only the lights of other cars and trucks on this dark, wet night and they could see nothing but those vehicles and not what was causing the traffic to have been stopped like it had.
Frustration had long reigned inside the car among those who had driven, lived and slept here and it came forth again tonight.
Mother asked Father to step outside and have a look at what was causing the hold-up. They were so close now and if there was a way which her husband could see to get out of this traffic jam then they would soon reach their salvation by the sea. Father told her that there was no point in doing so. The traffic would soon move along again and he didn’t want to get wet out there in the driving rain. Daughter tutted at her parents arguing again and wished she could be anywhere else rather than with her family this far away from home and heading towards what she regarded as the retirement home on the Atlantic coast. Son had his headphones on and his music playing so he could not hear what his parents were saying nor the noise which his sister made. Yet, he didn’t have to hear them to know that an argument was again taking place. He wanted to be away from his family like his sister did, though Son also knew that being in St.-Jean-de-Luz would probably save his life.
Ahead, someone beeped a horn repeatedly. Another car flashed its fog-lights. There were raised voices too outside for a moment. Mother again asked Father to find out what was happening… it was an instruction for her husband really.
Climbing out of the specially-adapted BMW, Father silently cursed in guttural German. He at once felt the wind and the rain on his exposed face and moved to pull the collar up of his coat around his neck. Mother called out for him to close the driver’s side door and there was another silent curse before he did that. There was darkness to the side away from the road but all of that artificial light ahead and Father walked forward. He could hear several voices speaking in French, in the tones used by officialdom too.
There was a silent reminder to himself to remain calm because he had done nothing wrong.
A Frenchwoman spoke to him and Father understood her question even if it wasn’t in his native language but he pretended he didn’t hear her as he refused eye-contact with her and instead strode towards the other people ahead. More people were talking, all in French, and he started to gather the meaning of their conversations. A Frenchman had been removed from his car by the uniformed men all around and they were placing him under arrest. Those officers wore military uniforms and Father believed those were of military police. The detained man was shouting that he wasn’t a deserter and the woman with him who also had come out of the parked Renault was launching a tirade of abuse against the military policeman questioning their honour as Frenchmen. In addition, she passionately affirmed that her husband wasn’t a deserter but a true French patriot instead.
In the past couple of weeks, Father had seen many deserters – including one in the mirror every time he saw his own reflection – and that Frenchman certainly looked like a deserter.
That first Frenchwoman, the one who had spoken to him and he had ignored, urgently asked the military policemen if the traffic would be able to move again soon. She needed to get down to Hendaye and there was no time to waste. She was told that the traffic would move again soon but before then the identity papers of everyone would be checked.
An icy ball formed if the stomach of Father, but he then repeated to himself what he had said before: he had done nothing wrong. His papers were in order and so were those of his family.
Once back in the BMW, Father was questioned at length by Mother while they waited for the French military policemen to reach them. She wanted to know whether it was only French nationals whom would face questioning about what they were doing on the road to St.-Jean-de-Luz or whether everyone would be asked why they were driving towards the resort which lay close to the Spanish border. Father told her that would certainly do that. She and the two children seated behind them should answer in German all questions put to them. He would reply in broken French to the military policemen relating the same story which he had said elsewhere to all whom had asked while they were in France.
They were taking Daughter and Son to the family-owned property beside the ocean. There was nothing else to say apart from that because the military policemen here might not reveal that they understood German.
Son had lowered his headphones connecting to his Walkman when Father had returned to the car. Once he heard such a comment and witnessed the solemn nod of approval from Mother, he looked at Daughter and raised an eyebrow. They two of them may have often hated each other, but the teenagers had their own silent methods of communication like their parents did. Daughter returned the stare and shook her head at her brother. She hoped that he understood that now wasn’t the time to be asking questions about what their parents were doing, especially the actions of Father. The time hadn’t been right for questions when they left the family home in the Rhineland in the middle of the night and nor was the time right now for questions either.
The presence of the military policeman at his window was greeted by Father with a smile and then he wound down his window. As he had done many times on this journey where he was taking himself and his family to safety, Father made sure that the first thing that those who looked inside the car at him would notice would be his missing lower left forearm. He had rolled up the sleeve and placed the partial limb across his chest. He could drive the BMW with one arm using adapted foot pedals but those weren’t as on show like his visible disability.
The conversation was brief. Father spoke with the Frenchman at his window while a second military policeman went around the car shining a torch into the rest of the vehicle and also looking in the boot. There were questions asked and responses given. Father supplied all of those in French and also handed over the West German identity papers for him and his family. Everything was all in order.
Father was told that he was free to go. Drive on, the Frenchman had said, and goodnight.
Mother, Daughter and Son all loudly breathed sighs of relief as the tension disappeared in an instant. Father made no noise and instead concentrated on the road ahead of him. His mind was racing though at the luck he was having. He had come all of this way and been through so many roadblocks and identity checks. Each and every time he had expected that his luck would finally brake yet instead he had been waved through again and again. Being regarded by those who looked upon him as an invalid was helpful, so too was the picture presented of a nuclear family fleeing a possible nuclear war. Then there were the identity papers carried, especially his own.
Father was a senior civil servant inside the BND, West Germany’s foreign intelligence service. He had lost part of his arm to a violent assailant three years ago in an encounter with a Rote Armee Fraktion terrorist when in Denmark. His career had been only harmed in the manner which he could no longer take part in active assignments in the field and so instead had remained office-based working to defend West Germany. That office was now very far away though and Father hadn’t been there in over a week since the West German government fell apart. He had feared before then for his safety and realised once Kohl was deposed and the Aachen Government was formed that he really would be in for a fate worse than losing part of a limb following events that would come when his nation would certainly fall apart. His family would be in danger too. In his nightmares he had foreseen that Mother would face severe hardship as the wife of a ‘traitor to Socialist Germany’, Daughter would probably end up as some Soviet soldier’s sex slave and Son would be drafted despite his age to serve for an occupying regime. Fleeing as many of his fellow BND officers had done to foreign exile had been the only choice. There was a holiday home waiting for them far away in France and exchangeable currency gathered.
It was exile or death for Father and he had chosen the former rather than the latter.
What the future held for him and his family Father couldn’t know. To be in France at St.-Jean-de-Luz, so far away from his own collapsing country, meant safety for the time being though. That was all that mattered. If there had been a demand issued for his arrest for deserting his country, then it hadn’t caught up with him yet… maybe it never would. The French themselves had their own problems with their own people and had left his family alone.
The Soviets certainly wouldn’t have had they the chance, neither would the new regime that he was certain that soon enough would establish their illegal rule over his native country.
Father, Mother, Daughter and Son had now got to the sea and the safety that was surely in St.-Jean-de-Luz.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 14:14:10 GMT
Six – Decoys
February 21st 1990 In the skies above Europe
With just a short interruption during the ceasefire, NATO aircraft had been active on combat missions in the skies above Europe for more than two weeks. Even during that stand-down they hadn’t been inactive due to the then tense situation of everyone waiting for the war to restart again. For the aircrews of all of the multi-national aircraft taking part in offensive and defensive flight missions there were no longer any surprises to be had. This was the war which they had so long trained for and taking part in it meant the very real risk of death at any moment, in the air or on the ground, yet at the same time they put everything that they had into it.
To lose the control of the skies in World War Three meant to lose the war.
Day and night NATO aircraft fought their Soviet and Warsaw Pact opponents. There were counter-air missions to be flown to guard against the offensive actions of enemy aircraft. There were close-air support and tactical strike missions to be flown in support of the ground war. Maritime air missions were flown around the nearby seas and then there were overland reconnaissance missions of both a tactical and strategic nature. Deep strike missions meant hunting for enemy aircraft far beyond the frontlines to break up enemy air strikes before they could commence as well as going after transport and communication aircraft. There were too strategic strike missions to be undertaken against more targets on the ground from enemy command-&-control to supply bases to transport links to airfields. All of this went on twenty-four hours a day with no respite.
In the early hours of this morning, again during the terrible flying weather at this time of year, NATO was continuing to do what they had done since the Soviets had first struck at the West at the beginning of the month.
The United States provided the largest number of aircraft and personnel to the ongoing air war above Europe, though the Americans were not in a majority there due to the high numbers of participation from their NATO allies. Regardless, the Americans had many aircraft and supporting personnel active. The regular United States Air Force (USAF) had pre-war Europe-based forces active in the fighting along with plenty of reinforcements flown in from bases back home during REFORGER. There was too a high proportion of USAF Reserve assets as well as the Air National Guard (ANG). Furthermore, training units had been deployed too before aircraft had come from storage and aircrews found to man those. The very latest technology was taking part in the air war along with many older pieces of equipment as well. When it came to manpower, the Americans like their allies had made full use of reservists and sent them across the North Atlantic too so they could join the fighting above Europe.
For combat missions the USAF, the USAF Reserve and the ANG made use of a wide range of aircraft. There were A-7s, A-10s, F-4s, F-15s, F-16s and F-111s as their primary combat aircraft. Different variants of all of these aircraft were in use and were employed in all combat roles where they defended against the enemy, intervened on the battlefield and struck deep into the enemy’s rear. Some of these were very old – especially those which had come from ‘the Boneyard’ in Arizona while others were only recently built. To assist with strategic strike missions, there were B-52s and FB-111s also made available to fight the air war in Europe with F-117s also joining those though focused more in a tactical fashion than the bombers released from Strategic Air Command (SAC).
Aircraft deployed in combat support were involved in the air war as well. There were defence suppression aircraft like the EF-111s and electronic attack aircraft such as Wild Weasel versions of the F-4. Kept further back from the actual fighting though just as vital were EC-130s and EC-135s: aircraft with a more stand-off role. Airborne radar aircraft for command-&-control in the form of E-3s were being flown by the USAF. High-flying, updated versions of the U-2 were deployed to Europe and urgent efforts were being undertaken to get SR-71 aircraft back operational as well to add to additional strategic reconnaissance support like what the U-2s offered.
There were tankers too flown by the Americans. SAC had released a whole host of airborne refuelling aircraft to support the air war in the form of newer KC-10s and many older KC-135s. The ability to refuel aircraft in flight during their combat missions meant a great increase in strike capacity with those tankers able to meet heavily-laden aircraft on the way to or returning back from combat missions. The European NATO members had a few tankers, and the Soviets even less, yet none could compare with how many the Americans flew in such a role which they led the world in. In addition, there were aircraft and helicopters deployed to Europe which flew combat-search-&-rescue (CSAR) missions and others to infiltrate and ex-filtrate special forces teams. These were all armed with offensive and defensive weapons and were vital parts of the American commitment to the air war too. Saving the lives of aircrews so they could fly again as well as putting commandos on the ground behind enemy lines was of great importance.
The USAF, USAF Reserve and ANG all provided extensive ground support assets as well as aircraft. There were aircraft engineers, technicians and armourers to support American aircraft but also to assist in the efforts of their NATO allies as well. Security units were provided to defend airbases and then there were command staffers… in addition to medical personnel, signallers and meteorologists to name just a few of the additional roles which personnel were needed to support the air war. So many men, and women too, were deployed to Europe to take on these important roles away from the aircrews themselves and their aircraft which they flew against the enemy.
Canada and European NATO countries provided generally the same as the United States did to the air war over Europe. They too had combat aircraft for all sorts of roles along with combat support aircraft for electronic warfare and stand-off reconnaissance. There were some tankers and CSAR assets, though not as many as the Americans. With personnel on the ground there were extensive numbers of men and women deployed too whom preformed all of the roles undertaken by Americans as well.
The Canadian Forces’ Air Command, the Royal Air Force, the Royal Norwegian Air Force, the Royal Danish Air Force, the Luftwaffe, the Royal Netherlands Air Force, the Royal Belgian Air Force, the Armee de l’Air, the Spanish Air Force, the Portuguese Air Force and the Italian Air Force were all involved in the air war. Some of these organisations had aircraft deployed overseas before the hasty mobilisation which occurred less than forty-eight hours before the war started, including Dutch & West German aircraft deployed abroad in the United States and British & French aircraft stationed elsewhere in the world. Most though had been positioned within their home countries or on the territory of their NATO allies when the conflict came.
A wide range of aircraft were flown by these other air forces. There were those manufactured within the own nations, others as part of pan-European efforts and then more built in the United States and exported. For combat roles there were Alpha-Jets, G-91s, Mirages and Tornados in addition to A-7s, F-4s, F-5s, F-16s. F-18s and F-104s. The British flew Buccaneers, Harriers, Jaguars and Tornados. The French had plenty of different variants of the basic Mirage design which had progressed over the years into the latest strike-fighter versions. The West Germans had their Alpha-Jets, F-4s and Tornados. Several NATO nations flew European-built versions of the older F-104 and the newer F-16. The Canadians and Spanish had land-based version of the F-18 which the Americans used as a carrier-based aircraft. The list went on…
In supporting roles there were too so many different aircraft flown in various colours of NATO air forces. The British, Dutch and French all had their own (if few) airborne tankers and there was a NATO-wide programme for fielding E-3s with multi-national aircrews. The Italians had some electronic warfare-rolled G-222; the Spanish had C-212s tasked for the same mission. Again, the list went on… For ground personnel it was much the same as with the Americans with only a few differences. There were more non-US NATO security units around airfields including those engaged in anti-aircraft protection with missiles and guns. European NATO countries didn’t have quite as many specialists in certain fields as the Americans did with intelligence analysis and satellite-to-earth communications.
As they had been during the whole war, NATO aircraft were again taking part in their centrally-controlled missions throughout Europe. They were over friendly territory, above the frontlines and deep into the enemy’s rear area. So much was going on as was always the case with hundreds of aircraft in the dark skies fulfilling taskings given to them through multiple headquarters.
Up in the northernmost reaches of Europe, above the last portion of Norwegian territory still occupied by the Soviets and close to their border, Norwegian and USAF Reserve aircraft were engaged in attack missions against the invader there. The Soviets had lost the battle for Norway with their airborne/airmobile and amphibious troops lost some time ago further to the west along the shores of the Norwegian Sea, yet those in eastern Finnmark were still occupying Norwegian territory. Attack missions were flown to bomb the Soviets where they could be found. There remained little offensive potential left with the occupying Soviets so the air strikes were just to keep them in-place and under attack. No offensive air missions were undertaken further east into Soviet air space or down into neutral Finnish skies. NATO air power here was just deployed over a small area doing as much damage as possible to a static, immobile and generally impotent enemy. Through the Baltic Exits, NATO combat operations conducted by air forces were combined with those from naval aviation units of several navies. With the Soviets making a second attempt to take Denmark, this time via land rather than from the air and the sea, NATO was responding to this by shooting down enemy aircraft in the skies as well as bombing the enemy on land. At the base of Jutland was where the enemy could be found and NATO came at their opponents from the west, the north and the east. These were contested skies though, unlike those up in northern Norway. The Soviets fought back and weren’t about to make things easy for NATO’s air efforts here.
Across West Germany and the Low Countries, there were a far greater number of air operations being flown compared to Norway and the Baltic Exits. There were fighter operations above friendly territory and over the parts of NATO countries occupied. Strike missions were flown close to the frontlines and beyond them into the enemy’s rear areas. There were AWACS aircraft in the skies and strand-off electronic warfare missions undertaken. Further eastwards, NATO was taking the air war to the Soviets hitting targets inside East Germany, Poland and Czechoslovakia. Bombs were delivered, missiles launched and guns fired. Pre- & post-strike reconnaissance missions were made. This was full-scale air warfare being undertaken. Down in the Alps above Austria and on the Italian border, again NATO was fighting the air war here as well.
The air war was proving costly for NATO.
In terms of aircraft, aircrew and ground personnel there had been an immense toll taken. Enemy action was the prime cause of those losses though there had been accidents too due to mistakes made with fatigue and, on occasion, stupidity where ego came into play. The political crisis proceeding the West German unilateral ceasefire and then during the period of that partial collapse of the West German war machine had brought about other loses. Even now with the Munich Government gaining strength and the Aachen Government falling apart, there were still problems there.
Aircraft losses couldn’t easily be replaced. Once aircraft had been taken from storage and others reassigned from training units, the available pool of replacements for those destroyed either in the sky or on the ground – even in a few cases captured when airbases had been overrun – started to run out. This wasn’t World War Two were aircraft could be built in a couple of weeks. All of the complicated electronics, weapons systems and powerful engines that came with a modern aircraft were just too complicated to so easily manufacture. Moreover, the enemy gave interference to the process of NATO starting to try to build replacement aircraft despite knowing how long that would take. Aircraft factories in Europe had faced air and missile strikes while even those far afield in the United States and Canada had faced attacks in the form of sabotage, arson and bombings by specialist KGB teams operating in very dangerous territory. Aside from that, supply chains were disrupted and key workers had refused to attend their places of work under the threat of being maimed or killed.
Substituting trained manpower wasn’t easy either. Reservists, retirees and trainees could all be brought to use and had been by NATO to fight the air war. Yet they suffered at times losses even higher than the regular professionals which they replaced. Morale was another issue which NATO suffered from as losses in terms of territory and other men were known about by those fighting against an enemy which it seemed couldn’t be stopped from advancing onwards. The crisis with West Germany was another factor in doing damage away from just the physical effects.
When it came to weaponry, NATO air forces used up their pre-war stocks of bombs, missiles and bullets at alarming rates. Rates of expenditure were far higher than all peacetime studies had shown which they would be; there was also the issue of targeted enemy attacks upon storage sites for ammunition. To stop, even slow down the enemy, NATO aircraft were through again and again into battle deploying every weapon available apart from their stores of tactical nuclear bombs. Further stocks from the United States were shipped across the North Atlantic and munitions factories there were instructed to start immediate manufacture of more. Again though, there were small but effective attacks launched against such ‘safe’ sites inside America while arms factories in Europe were blasted in more conventional manners. There was furthermore the issue of smart weapons: laser-guided bombs and specialist missiles. There was a massive early demand for these weapons to be employed against the enemy in the first few days of the war and they were put to use with the desired effects in most cases… but then follow-on enemy forces appeared and there were no more wonder weapons left. Again, there were efforts to hastily manufacture more, which endeavours came under enemy attack at source, but that left a period where there were no more available and NATO air forces were stuck using ‘dumb’ munitions.
NATO’s air war faced other problems apart from losses taken in combat, serious morale issues and the supply difficulties. There was organised command-&-control through long-term established procedures for NATO to work with in peace and war. Everyone knew what they were supposed to be doing, who they were supposed to be reporting to. National priorities were meant to be put aside and everyone was meant to work together for the common good. Surprisingly, in the main this actually worked when the war commenced. Every air force did their bit with NATO fighting together and co-operation being in most cases stellar. Over time though, difficulties occurred. When West German resolve fell apart on a political level first and then reaching downwards into the military units, the Luftwaffe suffered from mutiny and defections. Other NATO air forces scrambled to fulfil missions undertaken by West Germans who weren’t doing as ordered by NATO commanders and were instead listening to their own politicians… or their own consciences too. The ceasefire came soon afterwards yet once that was broken those issues surrounding what occurred with the Luftwaffe were brought to prominence again. Some officers within certain NATO air forces gave priority to their own national concerns where their fellow countrymen were fighting on the ground and their own countries in imminent danger of invasion. What West German forces which remained active within NATO’s command structure weren’t trusted to fulfil the tasks set for them in case they suddenly decided that they didn’t want to fight. Airbases in the Netherlands and Jutland were evacuated with the threat of Soviet tanks overrunning them and there were arguments over where aircraft from those abandoned facilities were to be redeployed too.
This was all in addition to enemy activities.
The Soviets regarded the air war as just as important as NATO did. They aimed to win it and stop NATO from doing what they aimed to achieve: control the skies above Europe.
In active measures the Soviets flooded the skies with their own aircraft. They brought up training units and took older aircraft out of storage. The air assets of their allies came under central control with greater discipline than NATO showed because they didn’t have to concern themselves with the internal politics of the Warsaw Pact nations. Losses hurt them too and they couldn’t exactly manufacture new aircraft and munitions with great speed, but their facilities to do so were generally untouched by NATO efforts to strike at them so they could at least make a start. Air defences in the form of SAMs were deployed and made use of more than NATO did. What the West called ‘double-digit’ SAM systems in regard to the latest models – the SA-10 Grumble, the SA-11 Gadfly, the SA-12 Giant / Gladiator and the SA-15 Gauntlet – were made extensive use of in protecting the skies above Europe. These were mobile systems and incorporated the latest technology. Quite often to supply these SAM units with missile reloads, helicopters were used to fly missiles to their deployment sites therefore avoiding delays caused by NATO air attacks. When NATO attacked these SAM batteries, they of course fired back and took their toll on attackers yet the real benefit from them which the Soviets saw was how much effort was expended by their opponents in trying to avoid them at times or on other occasions use everything against them. There was the effect upon NATO morale from their lethality that was yet another bonus of the extensive use of such air defences too. NATO aircrews were known to believe that they could defeat Soviet aircraft in the skies but they were frightened of such advanced SAM systems which shot down so many attacking aircraft.
In terms of passive defences, the Soviets had further methods of winning the air war away from their active defences and general offensive warfare efforts elsewhere. Pre-war spying and wartime reconnaissance efforts allowed them to understand their opponents command-&-control as well as planning. They sent commando teams and rockets towards NATO airfields. Powerful jammers were deployed to take control of the electromagnetic spectrum when NATO technology in that field was put to use; the Soviets tried everything to jam radars and targeting systems aboard NATO aircraft. Captured NATO aircrews were interrogated and eavesdropping on enemy communications was made.
And the Soviets littered their rear areas with decoys too.
Bridges, airfield, airfields and command bunkers were built to look like the real thing from the air. Some were surrounded by defences lying in wait whilst others were left without protection. They were built by specialist Maskirovka units to fool those studying the fakes from the air using photographic means but also infrared and radar detection. In some cases the decoys were constructed in such a manner where even someone on the ground would have to walk right up to them and touch them before they would realise these were real and not just magnets from NATO bombs and missiles. The decoys were made even more realistic by where they were positioned and what surrounded them. The aim was to get the enemy to waste effort against these and to be engaged while attacking. Furthermore, there was the added strategic benefit aimed in a psychological manner against NATO: when they discovered that many of the sites they had targeted were fake they would doubt intelligence on real targets in case those were decoys as well… information on the scale of decoys was slowly let out to gain enemy attention to bring forth that goal.
Despite everything, NATO aircraft were active again this morning. The losses being taken, the problems that they had and the actions of the enemy all mattered, but the air war was still being fought. NATO hadn’t lost control of the skies yet and there remained the majority of whom believed that they weren’t going to. There was a certainly among most – the aircrews, their commanders and the politicians – that despite Soviet successes on the ground the air war could still be won and the tide of the war turned by such a victory.
To not believe in such an outcome would mean that all the death and destruction so far was for naught. If the air war had already been lost, or was soon to be, then NATO might as well just give up and surrender. It was in the air, along with the stunning victories achieved at sea, which was how they were able to effectively fight back against Soviet armies that continued to mercilessly move forward.
February 21st 1990 The Kantei, Tokyo, Japan
Prime Minister Toshiki Kaifu had remained in his official residence throughout the entirety of the ongoing war. The Emperor was still in his own official residence in Tokyo as well. Both men had publically declared that they would remain in the Japanese capital come what may.
Some would say it was a bold decision, others would declare it a foolish mistake.
Other ministers in Kaifu’s government were located elsewhere away from their ministries and residences, outside Tokyo too, in secure locations where they would hopefully be physically unaffected should the worst happen and August 1945 was repeated upon Japan, though on a far deadlier scale then forty-five years ago. Kaifu was able to keep in contact with them through encrypted communications links which connected his residence with those bunkers and oftentimes with the private homes of several prominent members of the Diet as well who might not have been officially in the government but at this time of national crisis were serving their country as best as they could. There was security deployed around the Kantei, the Imperial Palace and many other locations to guard these senior Japanese political figures as they each generally remained in one place rather than on the move as contemporaries abroad were doing to stay safe.
Early this evening (Japan was eight hours ahead of Europe) Japan’s government was dealing with yet another crisis since a conflict which had erupted due to causes half a world away had seen them dragged into full scale war. This time though, Kaifu and those whom he was in communication with believed that what was now occurring was far worse than North Korea invading South Korea & attacking selective Japanese targets whilst doing so, air & sea engagements with Soviet military forces all around the country’s shores and the ever-real threat of nuclear warfare breaking out.
There was a plague starting to ravish Tokyo.
Biological warfare was the term which had been used in relation to what was happening in Japan’s capital city to Kaifu and his ministers. Both domestic Japanese and foreign American military scientists were now declaring that lethal germs, none of which were known to be naturally occurring, had been unleashed upon the people of Tokyo. The flu-like initial symptoms that hundreds upon hundreds of people were already suffering from in tight clusters all around the city would soon turn into something far more deadly. Just as those thirteen thousand South Korean civilians in Pusan had had their internal organs rapidly fail after first being diagnosed of suspected influenza, Tokyo’s citizens had been infected too. The numbers of ill Japanese would rapidly rise and those with the infection would soon start to die: the time-frame of first appearance of symptoms to death was between thirty-six and forty hours.
Using intelligence gained from the Pusan Incident a week ago, the biological attack upon Tokyo was fast being seen for what it was. The plague which had been unleashed hadn’t been delivered in aerosol form from a bomb, missile or aircraft-dispenser but rather at ground level in tightly-packed residential areas. Food or water spread the infection as it wasn’t an airborne contagion. Those affected would die quickly and in fast numbers but weren’t spreading the disease to others beyond those directly affected initially. Samples of the germs from Pusan came in many forms and fast-track testing showed they matched those of some of the most gravely-ill victims in Tokyo.
Thousands of people were going to die with the city very soon and there was nothing which could be done to help them at this stage.
Already aware of what had previously happened in South Korea and somewhat immune to asking so many questions about the disease after being given the cold hard facts by their advisers, the ministers with whom Kaifu spoke had only one enquiry: was this the work of the North Koreans or that of the Soviets?
As expected, Japan’s leaders were fuming at the use of biological weapons against their civilians. They understood the strategic implications of such an attack too; they listened to the Americans patiently explain about how biological warfare was far worse than chemical attacks, in their opinion anyway. There was as well the issue of the death toll that would occur and the panic within their capital city. All of this was understood for the seriousness of the matter and such weighty issues had been discussed and were in their minds as well.
Yet, they wanted to know who had struck at Japan in such a manner. The response which would be given depended upon who was behind the evil plague that had befallen helpless Japanese civilians.
Were the North Koreans behind the attack in Tokyo like the Americans had been certain had were responsible for the Pusan Incident?
The North Koreans had invaded South Korea at the beginning of February simultaneously with the first round of fighting which had erupted in Europe. They had sent their armies across – and under – the DMZ. Aircraft had filled the skies along with rockets above Japan’s neighbour. There had been missile-boats and small submarines active at sea off the Korean Peninsula. American forces stationed there had been attacked just as the South Korean military and people had been. Eventually, to stop the North Koreans in their tracks from inflicting a catastrophic defeat, the Americans had used a trio of small nuclear weapons on South Korean soil. Further American military reinforcements had arrived to join the fully-mobilised South Koreans and there was currently a successful effort underway driving the North Koreans back to the DMZ… those which were retreating fast enough anyway and not being overrun like so many of their unfortunate comrades were.
When the initial invasion had occurred on the Korean Peninsula, the North Koreans had also struck against military targets on sovereign Japanese soil. Their attacks had been directed against the Americans with commando raids and rocket attacks on their military installations – on Okinawa mainly but also in select locations on Honshu such as Yokota Airbase and Yokosuka Naval Base, both near to Tokyo – though those had seen Japanese lives lost. The careless disregard for Japanese sovereignty and civilian life had shown North Korea’s war ambitions for what they were: an attack upon Japan too. This had brought about military action in support of American and South Korean defensive moves authorised by the Japanese government. Aircraft and warships fought against the North Koreans and there was other assistance in the form of movement of military supplies across to the Korean Peninsula.
Japanese troops had stayed at home though… that wouldn’t be the case if North Korea had struck at Japan with biological weapons.
Or were the culprits of such a dastardly, evil attack the Soviets?
When World War Three started, Soviet forces had attacked Japan. Pre-war hopes from some of Japan’s leaders, Kaifu included, had hoped that the Soviets would leave the Japanese mainland unmolested. His advisers, and the Americans too, had said that that was a forlorn hope especially since American aircraft and warships would be operating from Japanese bases against the Soviets… there wasn’t a request made, just a reminder of their interpretations of the US-Japanese 1960 Mutual Security Treaty.
The Soviets had struck at airbases and naval facilities which the Americans used in Japan. Instead of commandoes and a few Scuds which the North Koreans had made use of, the Soviets made full-scale attacks with more conventional weapons. The moment Japanese Self-Defence Forces fired back then Japan was engaged in wartime operations against the Soviet Union. There was no declaration of war but a state of war existed. The military forces of Japan were very modern and the Air & Naval Self-Defence Forces assisted the Americans in fighting for defence of their country as was their sworn duty. Japanese fighters, warships and submarines were engaged in furious battles with the Soviets just as they were with the North Koreans. Losses were taken in battle and there were some civilian casualties at home, yet the latter were rather low. Following the initial Soviet attacks against military bases in Japan were civilians were killed in collateral damage, the fighting moved away from Japan itself to the Sea of Japan and above the Soviet-held islands to the north of the country.
Japan had feared that its cities would be bombed or agents would sabotage nuclear power plants: that hadn’t occurred. The Soviets had been more focused upon defending themselves as the US Navy and USAF started sinking their own naval forces of the Soviet Pacific Fleet and launching selective attacks against a few military bases on Soviet soil: Japan had no part in the latter. Following the use of nuclear weapons on the Korean Peninsula, Kaifu and his ministers had feared that nuclear war might spread to Japan too. They hadn’t gone down the route of the West Germans and attempted to give in though. During the short ceasefire Japan had taken the time to lick its wounds and get ready to start fighting again while trying to understand why the Americans had done what they had in ‘respecting the ceasefire’, apart from in South Korea though. Then there was Flensburg and Paris before the Soviets restarted the war in Asia just like they had done in Europe too. Japan was left unmolested at home though its air and naval forces had been engaged in combat with the ever-shrinking remains of Soviet aerial and maritime power available near to their country.
Had the Soviets now decided that they were going to add a biological level to the ongoing war to frighten Japan into making a decision to stop fighting? Or was the plague in Tokyo the North Koreans as Japan’s American allies were certain that it was?
If the North Koreans were responsible then the line of thinking which Kaifu and his ministers had was that Japanese troops would be sent to the Korean Peninsula. Political differences with the South Koreans would be moved aside, adding to the later woes which would come from those at home seeing Japanese troops fighting abroad, to respond to the North Koreans if they were guilty by fighting them directly and possibly joining an invasion of that country should the military and geo-political situation be favourable to that.
Should the Soviets have conducted the biological strike, for whatever reason they had chosen, even if to provide a distraction & a decoy for further action elsewhere, then Japan’s leaders would start to have serious discussions about those islands to the north of the Home Islands. They expected that their American allies would be up in arms if Japan were to move to occupy what was regarded as sovereign Soviet soil. Japan didn’t see the legal situation of ownership of those islands in the same manner though: those islands were Japanese and Japan had the troops to take them especially with the Americans blasting apart the Soviets as they were.
Japan needed an answer as to the nation guilty for the germs now killing civilians in Tokyo.
February 21st 1990 Boca Chica Key, the Florida Keys, Florida, the United States
Circling above Boca Chica Key, where the Cuban-held NAS Key West was located, and seemingly without a care in the world as it flew in plain sight this morning, was a lone propeller-driven aircraft. Cuban paratroopers, naval commandoes and a whole load of military specialists who had arrived here several days ago all looked up at the aircraft. Some wondered whether it was about to deliver paratroopers; others pondered over whether it was on conducting reconnaissance against them.
Many more wondered why no one was shooting at it… before remembering that the last of the SAMs had been used up yesterday and there had been no resupply.
Then the aircraft attacked them. The cannon aboard opened fire first followed by the mini-guns mounted as the aircraft got closer. The noise was terrific and the sight, even while terrifying, was spellbinding. It was truly something to witness and several Cubans on the ground beneath spoke of the aircraft as a dragon as foretold in mythical stories while running for shelter from the aircraft flying around above in a circle still even when firing.
Knowing it wasn’t a dragon, but rather something real, a Cuban military intelligence officer on the ground at Boca Chica Key was able to make a shout of ‘Spectre’ before his voice was drowned out. A dragon was fictional; a Spectre was very real indeed.
The AC-130A Spectre was a converted C-130 Hercules. Retired from active frontline service with regular elements of the US Air Force after being replaced by more modern AC-130H versions, this particular Spectre was home-based at Duke Field in the Florida Panhandle. The 711th Special Operations Squadron operated the aircraft with aircrews from the USAF Reserve manning those which had been detached in Flights across the world due to the ongoing war to forward bases in Norway, Turkey and South Korea.
One Spectre had remained behind at Duke Field due to a long-standing maintenance issue. For a time it appeared that the aircraft might not fly ever again and there had been pre-war talks of scrapping it. However, with the urgency of the war and then the invasion of the Florida Keys by the Cubans, the luck and skill of aircraft technicians – dedicated men and women – had finally managed to get the Spectre back into the skies where she belonged. From Homestead AFB the Spectre was now flying and the Cubans occupying American soil were who it and her aircrew were sent after.
Those on the ground beneath this unexpected American air attack had been bombed and strafed by many aircraft. There had been those flying high and those which had come in low. Day and night air attacks had come to deliver well-placed munitions against the Cubans here and the military base which they occupied. The city of Key West, where there were also Cuban troops but many American civilians too, had faced nowhere near the same level of enemy attention coming from the air. It was Boca Chica Key that the Americans were blasting away with their aircraft and the Spectre this morning was just the latest unpleasant surprise for those this far from home.
NAS Key West was a large airbase which covered almost all of the island which was Boca Chica Key. When the Cubans had taken it in their late evening airborne / airmobile assault on February 17th they had fought hard to seize it from the admittedly-surprised but still very tenacious defenders. There had been men from the US Navy – aviators and ground personnel – present as well as others from the US Air Force and the US Army; no US Marines had been encountered. NAS Key West had been being used as a transit facility for personnel moving about through the US Southern Command region and not a proper defensive position. The vast majority of the US Navy aircraft usually based here had been deployed elsewhere in the world at the time and those who ended up fighting for the facility had all been previously eager to leave to go and join the fighting elsewhere in the world.
No one had expected the Cuban paratroopers and then the light transport aircraft making forced landings before disgorging men. Plenty had gone wrong with that assault. The Americans had fought back furiously. Paratroopers had been dropped into the ocean to drown. Two of those aircraft laden with airmobile-rolled troops had exploded in flames on the runaways. It had been a risky mission yet overall success had been attained. There was damage to many parts of the facility and men lost but the Cubans had taken NAS Key West.
Then afterwards the air attacks had started. The Americans apparently didn’t understand what the Cuban troops on the ground had been told: that the United States was busy losing a war in Europe and wouldn’t, couldn’t fight at the moment for the Florida Keys.
Logistics win wars, not tactics or strategy or even political alliances. The ability to supply combat forces in the field is what gains military success in the long-term. A daring coup de main might gain a major operational advantage (NAS Key West a case in point) but to win more than just an isolated battle and instead a war there has to be an effective logistics effort. Fighting men need to be fed & watered, they need medical care provided and they need ammunition to replace what is expended. What supply links are established need defending against enemy moves to cut those.
There were no supply links that the Cubans had established to their forces deployed to the Florida Keys. Those fighting men who had reached there were sent with what they had brought with them when they first arrived by aircraft. The supplies which they carried with them were all that they had to use. No more aircraft laden with food, water, medicine and ammunition were planned to be sent their way, let alone ships either.
No one had told them that though. Back in a bunker beneath the Cuban countryside outside of Havana – one which had already taken a near miss from an American laser-guided bomb – the headquarters staff for what had been the Grupo de Asalto del Norte (Northern Assault Group) had already been disbanded and officers assigned to other duties. The commander, General de Cuerpo de Ejercito (Army Corps General) José Luis Mesa Delgado, a noted Raul Castro loyalist, had returned to supervising the defensive efforts of the city. His task had been to put men in the Florida Keys and he had done just that. The Grupo de Asalto del Norte had made their assault in the north. Those men couldn’t be supplied and so wouldn’t be.
They were decoys: they had been sent to the Florida Keys to attract the attention of the Americans and soak up attacks which would otherwise come against Cuba itself. Those men, many of whom were elite troops, were expected to fight well and to the very end. They would serve the Revolution by where they were. Messages would be sent promising resupply, even reinforcement, but none would come.
Cuban blood would stain US soil but so too would that shed by the norteamericanos too.
Back at Boca Chica Key, eventually the Spectre flew away. It had been immune from the few antiquated anti-aircraft guns which had tried to engage it and there were no more reloads available for the man-portable SAMs. Damage had been done, fires started and Cubans killed by the lethal fire from that aircraft. None of the Cubans knew it – because they didn’t have a functioning radar – but in a few minutes time a flight of four A-7 Corsair attack-fighters laden with bombs would be making an appearance in a follow-up strike to catch defenders which exposed themselves in the open afterwards.
Just as the Americans had anticipated, there was activity before then.
Men rushed out of their trenches and others from whatever hasty shelter that they had taken. Many officers and sergeants quickly called them back and told them to leave the casualties whom they had rushed to try to aid alone, yet on many occasions those orders were ignored. Discipline issues were becoming rife here with the men thinking of their fellow comrades rather than what their superiors said. Efforts had been made to try to curtail that – executions for disobedience had occurred – but there was general failure. The men had talked among themselves and disbelieved what they were told that they weren’t on their own here and help would soon be coming their way.
Some of the more astute officers feared a widespread mutiny. If that occurred, they planned to find a way to somehow surrender to the Americans rather than face their own men. Or worse, make the long swim home through shark-infested waters!
One officer, a DGI Colonel, purposely led a group of naval commandos out of shelter and towards a pack of dead and wounded bodies next to one of the taxiways. He had ignored the shouted ‘suggestions’ from Cuban military officers to stay put and had decided to deal with those defeatists afterwards. Meanwhile, he took the men with him towards the group of forced labourers who’d been caught out in the open. Friendly fire had killed and injured these men and women he came upon to see who was left alive. They were men and women, all able-bodied civilians rather than POWs, brought across from Key West under DGI control. Their task had been clearing rubble from previous American air attacks but now they had been killed accidentally by their own side.
The Colonel started shooting those who remained alive, injured or not.
Fidel Castro had broadcast last night from Guantanamo Bay. On the radio, the Colonel and others at Boca Chica Key had heard the proclamations made (officially-neutral Nicaragua had aided in broadcasting the messages across the Caribbean and to other parts of the world too) from there with their country’s leader stating that Cuba had been finally reunited after the liberation of that imperialist outpost of tyranny. He had extolled Cuban military forces deployed at home and abroad to keep fighting against the norteamericanos. Victory would come at a cost, he had said, but could be achieved. A less-public broadcast had come to the Colonel’s attention only: DGI chief Luis Barreiro Caramés had spoken to him over a shaky radio link-up. Be cruel, he had said, and give the Americans no mercy.
The Colonel was busy doing as he was told – for reasons unknown – when the A-7s (in markings denoting them from the Iowa Air National Guard) arrived overhead and unleashed more bombs.
February 21st 1990 Outside Neustadt an der Weinstrasse, Rhineland–Palatinate, West Germany
The Soviet First Guards Tank Army had been stopped from making a successful effort to reach the Rhine.
Through yesterday and most of today, that field army with all of its attendant changes make in organisation since before but also during the war, had been unable to tear open a gap in NATO lines. The French III Corps and US V Corps – both with large numbers of West German units among them – hadn’t allowed the seam between them to be torn open. Soviet tanks hadn’t been able to drive to the western end of Hessen, push the French back into the Lahn River valley, force the Americans to fall back into the Taunus Mountains outside of Frankfurt and get to the Rhine somewhere between Koblenz and Mainz as intended.
It had been a close-run thing though. The Soviets may have been stopped cold eventually, but they hadn’t been driven back to their start-lines nor enveloped by pincer attacks on the flanks in a series of counter-attacks. Neither French, American and especially not West German forces on the left hand side of the operational area for CENTAG had been able to manage such a feat despite initial efforts during the later hours of today to try to do that.
Both sides were worn out afterwards. Fighting men were tired on a physical and emotional level; many others who had seen combat today were dead. Military equipment was left burning, broken apart or abandoned across a wide area. The countryside and many abandoned towns which had been in the way when the opposing armies clashed were all left in ruin. There was particular devastation, along with thousands of bodies needing recovery afterwards, around the West German towns of Bad Camberg and Idstein: they lay near to the route of Autobahn-3, which ran lateral across the battlefield and generally was where the new frontlines ended up after the fighting stopped. The defending NATO forces and the attacking Warsaw Pact troops had fought themselves to a standstill there… but soon expected to be doing all again, and soon too.
CENTAG – NATO’s Central Army Group, consisting of ground forces in west-central parts of West Germany – had long ago moved its headquarters away from the peacetime location in Heidelberg. Various isolated and protected sites across on the other side of the Rhine, far back from the frontlines, were being used to control the NATO forces under command. The geographical area of operation was smaller than in peacetime though there were far more troops assigned. NORTHAG was to the north and the French First Army was the overall command for NATO units to the south, this side of the Alps. General Crosbie Saint – a US Army four-star general officer – led CENTAG and he had had a difficult war with all of the losses in terms of men and territory taken as well as having his command badly disrupted by the wave of desertions from the fighting before and during the ceasefire by West German units. Many of those men had returned following the restarting of the conflict but the Bundeswehr was not what it was beforehand. There had been the addition though of the French and the Canadians to his command and also large numbers of American reinforcements which had arrived. Saint’s men were deployed (north-to-south) from near to the Belgians under NORTHAG command around the Kassel Salient down across Hessen in a south-westerly line to the Lahn valley, now across to the high-ground of the Taunus’ covering Frankfurt and around that northern and eastern side of the Main valley there, over the Spessart into the northern reaches of Bavaria and across to where the French First Army was between Wurzburg and Nurnberg.
Saint’s current field headquarters was near to Neustadt an der Weinstrasse, a considerable distance back from those forward locations, and it was here that General Galvin – his superior – had come this evening.
SACEUR was another senior US Army officer, again with the responsibility for multinational forces engaged in combat operations. However, General Galvin had far greater obligations upon him and weighty considerations to keep in mind than his younger colleague. If he had been in the position to, then he would have oftentimes during this war – before, during and after the interruption of the three day ceasefire – preferred to have been in-charge during the fighting for the middle of West Germany. There would have been the same difficulties involved for him as there had been for Saint, yet he still would have chosen to take part in this theatre than some of the political battles which he had fought while being the supreme commander of NATO forces spread throughout Europe from the North Cape to the Black Sea.
Alas, he had taken this appointment three years ago and was doing his very best…
Having been attending a meeting in France with French military chiefs, General Galvin had come to Neustadt rather than returning to his own field headquarters in the Belgian Ardennes after being informed that the Soviets had been brought to a firm stop from charging on the Rhine. There had been difficult discussions with those French generals when he was with them about their stated national policy when it came to a situation with the Soviets getting over the Rhine and he had been more than greatly relieved to hear that those outcomes which they had spoken of weren’t about to be possibly brought into play with CENTAG’s stopping of the First Guards Tank Army.
Saint and his staff now gave General Galvin a briefing on the overall battle. The strength of the enemy attack was discussed with all of the mass formations employed by the enemy: a total of seven combat divisions, some at full-strength and others markedly not, had been under First Guards Tank Army command for their ultimately unsuccessful offensive. What exactly the Soviets had tried in their attack, how they had gone about it, was covered along with all of the identified problems that CENTAG intelligence efforts had been able to show. The enemy had suffered from major maintenance issues with their tanks and other armoured vehicles, their command-&-control had often fallen apart and their engineers hadn’t been able to get forward in strength to assist the fighting troops in clearing obstructions. There was mention too of the intelligence coming in that not just the Polish units involved but the East Germans too assigned to the attack had suffered from lack of discipline and badly affected the overall enemy attack by not fulfilling assigned tasks.
How CENTAG had fought back was then summarised. The fighting withdrawals and tactical counterattacks made were standard tactics employed by the combat veteran units within the French III Corps and the US V Corps. Air power and plenty of artillery had come into play to an acceptable degree though, as was now seemingly always the case, there still wasn’t enough of the former for the liking of commanders on the ground due to enemy aircraft filling the skies as well. Starting from midday today, to finish the battle and finally bring the enemy offensive to a halt, the US XVIII Airborne Corps had been employed and it was news of them which General Galvin was very interested in.
Throughout the first week and a half of war, the US XVIII Corps hadn’t been put to use and its highly-trained men not seen action. The corps headquarters, combat support assets and half of the assigned peacetime strength of this command had been deployed to West Germany during REFORGER. There had been concerns expressed in high places throughout the US Army about how and where they could have seen action on a Central European battlefield and this had been shown to be true. The 24th Infantry (Mechanized) Division had been detached to the US III Corps on the North German Plain, the 10th Infantry (Light) Division sent to Norway and a brigade of the 82nd Airborne Division employed in urban fighting in South Korea. The rest of the 82nd Airborne Division and the whole of the 101st Infantry (Air Assault) Division had remained inactive, kept in reserve west of the Rhine. They had been joined by the 9th Infantry (Motorized) Division – part regular, part Army National Guard –, which had gone to Britain en route to Denmark but later redeployed to join the US XVIII Corps in addition to an armoured cavalry regiment from the Ohio Army National Guard. All of these troops, and all of their supporting assets including so many combat & assault transport helicopters as well, had not seen combat while the rest of the US Army in Europe had been bled. The thinking had been that should the light troops which made up the majority of the US XVIII Corps been sent into battle against Soviet armour they would have been massacred… as evidenced by the fate of several other NATO airborne / airmobile troops that had done so and suffered that fate.
CENTAG had seen the coming Soviet attack developing through. Forward-deployed Special Forces teams, aerial reconnaissance and electronic interception interpretation had identified that a massive attack was to be launched towards the Rhine right where it had been. There had been fears over a Soviet Maskirovka being made yet all the evidence was there and the detected coming attack made sense where and how it was to be launched. Both the French III Corps and the US V Corps moved forces into place and then parts of the US XVIII Corps had been deployed into ready positions as well; the latter had units in ambush places to help break-up and counterattack.
General Galvin himself had been one of those of the opinion that the US XVIII Corps should have gone to Northern or Southern Europe rather than the decision seemingly made in panic to send the light troops to West Germany. They had done well today though, fighting in Central Europe against enemy armour. The 107th Cavalry Regiment had assisted the French, the 9th Infantry Division had fought up in the high-ground of the Taunus’ and the 101st Air Assault Division had (carefully) assisted in the US V Corps’ flanking attacks to break up the Soviet advance from behind them. Only the 82nd Airborne Division had missed the battle: Saint had wanted to keep those elite paratroopers ready to fight in the general Frankfurt area should a surprise Soviet attack move against that city, its airport or transport links in addition to the main drive upon the Rhine. There had been the inevitable losses taken, as was the case in any engagement, but those were far lower than expected due to the care taken in employment of them.
After that briefing, General Galvin had one of his special advisers travelling with him – he had several from various NATO countries, all of whom were undertaking a career-enhancing role – give a short summary of other matters. There had already been intelligence given through regular channels yet SACEUR wanted to be present when Saint as CENTAG commander heard it again so any questions could be addressed.
The Soviet war machine was not invincible. That was again being seen, just as it had been before the short ceasefire.
At sea, the Soviets had been utterly defeated and there had been major losses that they had taken in the air too. In addition, when Soviet assault troops, their paratroopers and naval infantry, had seen combat on NATO’s strategic flanks they had been crushed. The mass armoured force of tanks and mechanised infantry that was the Soviet Army had been devastated countless times when moving forward: they had attacked defended positions with losses disregarded to take objectives. Their equipment broke down on a constant basis, their men were ill-disciplined and their command-&-control was left ineffective when faced with NATO attacks as well as political interference.
Behind the still-moving Soviet Army, NATO deep-strike forces were causing devastation. Road & rail bridges over every major river had been targeted and so too had rail switching yards and harbour facilities along the Polish Baltic coast. These attacks were aimed at eliminating Warsaw Pact strategic supply links running west from the Soviet Union towards its deployed forces at the front. All evidence pointed to those having hurt so much of the transport network that further large numbers of Soviet reinforcements coming west would be seriously impeded. However, it appeared that for now, the Soviets had already brought what troops they were going to bring west already through Eastern Europe before NATO could do all of that damage. Moreover, there was the issue of supply too. There was no evidence from multiple intelligence sources which pointed to the Soviets doing things differently and not as hurt from those air attacks on their logistics links either. Their stores from warehouses across East Germany, Poland and Czechoslovakia had been pre-war much bigger than expected. Yes, those were a finite source, but there wasn’t a dependency in the short- and medium-term on what was coming from back in the Soviet Union.
Lt.-General Fred Franks, the US VII Corps commander, was present at the briefing for he had been meeting with Saint when General Galvin arrived. Franks’ command was still holding its own in northern Bavaria against Soviet flanking forces and he had been here at Neustadt to discuss the transfer of parts of his command further west to free-up US V Corps units. It was he who had a question posed to SACEUR; Franks was unimpressed with what he had heard.
Was this just another one of those Maskirovkas?
Franks spoke of all of the deception employed by the Soviets during the war. They employed trickery everywhere, including often lying to their own men up to general officer rank. Some of their plots and schemes were simple decoys, others were immensely complicated. He spoke of what he had been told about all those decoys bridges and command posts which NATO air power had supposedly hit and according to reports from certain Special Forces teams were fake. How was NATO to know that the Soviets weren’t up to this again? They could easily be providing the ‘evidence’ that they already had enough men and supplies at the frontlines or immediately behind them and didn’t need their fixed links running back home. Why would they do this? Franks suggested that maybe they wanted NATO to send their air power elsewhere and needed to get to work repairing those logistical links. Too much faith was being put in intelligence gained when it was well known how often the Soviets were employing their trickery.
General Galvin’s usually unflappable staffer was stumped for a moment at that; SACEUR didn’t blame him because that was something he hadn’t considered until now either.
Saint followed up by mentioning the so-called Soviet Twenty–Second Guards Combined Arms Army. Several days ago, CENTAG had been warned about this field army – the designation was given by NATO because its actual Soviet name was so far unknown – coming through the Thüringenwald and towards them. Apparently three combat divisions and a lone brigade were with the Twenty–Second Guards Army: the 2GMRD (the Taman Guards), the 4GTD, the 50GMRD and the 27th Independent Brigade. Those elite units and that reserve force (the 50GMRD) were meant to be charging forwards ready to roll down the enemy-held Fulda Gap and towards Frankfurt. Aircraft and Special Forces teams had hunted for them ready to slow them down while part of the US V Corps was readied to move to stop them. All evidence had pointed to the Twenty–Second Guards Army approaching CENTAG. Where was that field army instead?
Those Soviet troops were currently moving across the North German Plain heading for the Netherlands behind other Soviet forces currently stalled there outside of Fortress Holland where it was as if every Dutchman who could carry a rifle was located. What the Soviets had done in that instance was a basic tenet of military tactics: simple deception. US Army forces with CENTAG had been doing it since the beginning of the war and that was one of the major reasons why there still were American troops active and fighting when faced with the overwhelming numerical odds which they opposed. They had a technology advantage and had conducted a fighting withdrawal all the way from the IGB yet also played the Soviets at their own game with trickery. Franks’ opinion was that all the enemy was doing was taking that to a strategic stage.
With such comments in mind, as General Galvin set off to leave Neustadt, he started to ponder over not just whether Franks and Saint were correct, but whether there was more that NATO could do itself when it came to their own Maskirovka efforts…
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 14:16:47 GMT
Seven – Fog Of War
February 22nd 1990 Above the North Sea
Ringmaster Two–Six was the flight call-sign this morning for a NATO-crewed E-3A Sentry which departed Gatwick Airport in southern England and flew east towards the North Sea. Before reaching its patrol station, the AWACS aircraft with twenty aircrew aboard undertook that short flight overland and under the command of Ringmaster One–Nine: a sister aircraft which was being replaced on station directing air activity over the BENELUX region and would head home to Manchester Airport afterwards.
Those aboard were all a long way from home. There were three Americans as part of Ringmaster Two–Six’s flight complement along with a Canadian, two Britons, two Norwegians, a Dutchman, two Belgians, a Luxembourger, two West Germans, a Frenchman, a Spaniard, two Portuguese, an Italian and a Turk. These men had all flown on other NATO AWACS missions on this particular aircraft and others too… those which had survived multiple enemy attempts throughout the war to either shoot them down or destroy them on the ground.
It had been a bright morning back on the ground during their pre-flight at Gatwick despite the cold and the skies above Britain had remained clear once Ringmaster Two–Six was airborne. The flight crew up ahead in the forward cabin had observed the weather though those behind them in the self-contained command-&-control cabin – what would be the passenger deck in the civilian model of the Boeing-707 which the AWACS aircraft was derived from – saw none of that as the battle staff were busy getting ready to take over from Ringmaster One–Nine. However, filling the windscreen of the aircraft the flight crew saw that there was an artificial darkness on the horizon.
An unsightly mass of unnatural fog hung over the Continent ahead where below the war continued to rage.
Once on station, Ringmaster Two–Six stayed over water above the southern part of the North Sea. The Belgian coast was away to the east and there was a considerable distance kept between land and the AWACS aircraft itself. No NATO fighters directly escorted Ringmaster Two–Six yet there were many friendly aircraft capable of intercepting an attacker that would dare to go after it within close range. The flight crew got to work making racetrack, figure-of-eight patterns while the battle staff undertook their own tasks.
Ringmaster Two–Six was flying this morning to direct air activity over the Low Countries. There were to be fighter missions controlled, strike missions to be supported and long-range early warning provided. Those NATO personnel in the pressurised cabin had radar screens and communications links. The most senior member of the aircrew aboard was that Spaniard, a colonel in his country’s air force. He was widely experienced with much service seen during the past few weeks of the war and before then many years of training at various institutes in Spain and worldwide. With his multinational staff in assistance the task for him was to be the point commander for hundreds upon hundreds of square miles of air space and all those on the NATO side fighting for the control of them.
No one would have said that this would be an easy task.
The air situation above the Netherlands was where the majority of the focus of the on-board battle staff was upon. Soviet ground forces were over the IJssel and pushing NATO troops back. There was combat near Apeldoorn and also in the vicinity of Arnhem too; the latter where Soviet paratroopers had shown up in the early hours. In close proximity to the areas of fighting there on the ground there were many aircraft in the skies, friendly and hostile. Other aircraft, again NATO and Soviet, were on missions over the wider area but also involved in the fighting for the control of access to Fortress Holland. North and south of that active combat zone there were even more aircraft. Further outwards over the North Sea, Belgium and the edges of West Germany there were even more aircraft.
Mounted atop of Ringmaster Two–Six was a rotating radome. The air-search radar inside had a fantastic range when operating at full power and with the aircraft which it was attached to flying up high in the sky. It was using the information gained from that radar which was fed into the computers and interpreted by the battle staff. They made sense of what was being displayed and communicated that to the other aircraft in the sky where needed. Warnings were sent of enemy air activity. Flight path changes were sent. New orders were issued. Led by the Spanish colonel, these communications were of vital importance.
On the issue of importance, the most important priority, where everything was a priority to be honest, at the moment was the air battles underway above the central Netherlands. Plenty of NATO air power had been directed to influence events on the ground there by controlling the skies above the battlefield and the enemy in the form of Soviet aircraft clearly had the same importance attached to that region as well. Close air support and tactical strike missions from both sides were being made and so was fighter cover. Missions being flown were being interfered with by the other side for both NATO and the Soviets there. The pre-flight briefing for the battle staff when back on the ground had informed them that intelligence pointed to the Soviets making an attack today to push their armies down from the IJssel towards the Lower Rhine; they would be racing westwards aiming for distant objectives of the port at Rotterdam, the Hook of Holland and the North Sea coast. Stopping them by the use of air power was what Ringmaster Two–Six was to oversee while at the same time undertaking other tasks as well.
After about an hour and a half of being on station, Ringmaster Two–Six started to receive hostile enemy attention. The background jamming which the Soviets had been employing beforehand and counter-jamming was being used to try to negate became far more severe. The electromagnetic spectrum was full of powerful interference and it was being targeted against the AWACS aircraft in a deliberate fashion. A Soviet aircraft far away to the east, beyond the radar coverage of Ringmaster Two–Six, was known to be doing this and was using more advanced technology that the Soviets were thought capable of. There were electronic warfare staff aboard the AWACS aircraft and they moved to combat this by using frequency-hopping techniques to allow Ringmaster Two–Six’s radar to operate at full capacity.
The Soviets followed NATO’s lead here though and chased after Ringmaster Two–Six across the airwaves.
Then there came a warning delivered from another AWACS aircraft stating that Ringmaster Two–Six was being targeted for physical interception. That aircraft which sent the warning was a USAF E-3B Sentry flying over the Luxembourg area directing air operations over Germany and because it was flying further eastwards was able to see deeper into the skies above enemy-held territory. A flight of eight interceptors packed in a tight cluster with their own jammers active was tearing across the sky heading directly for Ringmaster Two–Six. Below them were all of those fires burning and the smoke rising for the effects of war, but those aircraft cared nothing for that as they came westwards.
The Americans informed Ringmaster Two–Six that the eight interceptors were Foxhounds.
There were two Soviet air forces, both independent of each other and fulfilling different missions. The Soviet Air Force (VVS) had assets which a traditional Western air force would in the form of tactical aircraft, bombers, transports and a small fleet of airborne tankers. Then there was the PVO: the Air Defence Force. The latter flew interceptors home-based inside the Soviet Union and not deployed abroad in peacetime like many parts of the VVS. However, since the second week of the war, just before the ceasefire, PVO aircraft had made appearances over the skies of Europe and far from their home bases. NATO knew that the Soviets had had a whole range of problems trying to coordinate the PVO with the VVS in combat operations and had taken advantage of those issues on many occasions.
MiG-23 Floggers, MiG-25 Foxbats and Sukhoi-27 Flankers in service with the PVO had fought against NATO aircraft over Europe. There were other versions of those in service with the VVS and NATO had engaged them beforehand. No MiG-31 Foxhounds had been seen before this morning though. The Foxhound was a true, long-range interceptor designed to defend the Soviet homeland as great distances with guided missiles being fired far from visual range and with control from the ground. It was not a dog-fighting aircraft and NATO believed that at close-range it would struggle to defend itself due to lack of manoeuvrability and the pilots being ill-trained to get up close and personal with an enemy fighter.
Now Ringmaster Two–Six was being told that Foxhounds were being sent their way and available intelligence stated that they had extremely-capable long-range air-to-air missiles which had home-on-jam capability. Other NATO fighters deployed over the Rhineland were ordered to move to intercept those interceptors, including a trio of F-15C Eagles in USAF markings armed with long-range missiles of their own (Sparrows) that were currently above the southern Netherlands.
However, the threat to Ringmaster Two–Six was truly serious. The Foxhounds might be able to engage them from a hundred miles away, maybe more. NATO had started the war back at the beginning of the month flying seventeen of these AWACS aircraft of its own with multinational aircrews and the Americans had twice as many in USAF service. Those latter weren’t all deployed in Europe though and those with NATO crews (they wore the markings of the only aircraft in Luxembourg Air Force service) had been tasked across Europe. Losses had been taken from enemy action despite all possible care taken to protect them. Five of the NATO aircraft and three flown by the Americans over Europe were no longer operational and while many remained, the loss of Ringmaster Two–Six, and its highly-trained battle staff, wasn’t something which could be allowed to happen.
The Spanish commander aboard was ordered by his own superior with the Allied Second Tactical Air Force – on the ground in Belgium – to withdraw from the forward advanced position. Ringmaster Two–Six was to change course and head back towards Britain and take up position over Kent. It’s radar would be shut down for the time being and NATO interceptors would charge towards those Foxhounds.
As a result, for the time being, NATO had no AWACS coverage for the air battles raging over the central Netherlands. There were other radar assets and many mobile stations, all on the ground, but no longer an E-3 in the sky tasked for that region with all the capabilities on offer to see through the fog of war. This was to have a meaningful outcome on the battles raging there… just as was the Soviet intention.
February 22nd 1990 The Hauran Plateau, Jordan
To defeat the Iraqi Republican Guards, the Israeli Defence Forces (IDF) had been preparing the battlefield for the final blow which they wished to launch since pre-empting the war which Assad and Saddam were about to commence upon them. Raining bombs down upon the Iraqis as they were on the verge of crossing – uninvited – into Jordan had been the opening more before the IDF then hit them hard with more air strikes and commando raids when they finally got underway and heading westwards. Physical attacks were joined by body blows landed in the field of electronic warfare by jamming communications internally and externally so that the Iraqis blundered around the desert in eastern Jordan before they finally started to come closer to the River Jordan valley in the west. The reconnaissance efforts focused upon the Iraqis were wide-ranging too so that the IDF could fully understand their opponent ready for the climatic finish that would eventually come…
…which would be made when and where the IDF wanted that to occur.
After beating the most professional and mobile elements of the Syrian Army in vicious battles between the Golan Heights and Damascus, the main striking force of the IDF’s ground forces attached to the Northern Command had withdrawn from the battle line. Second-line units had taken up defensive positions inside Syria and around Damascus to keep the shattered remains of the enemy there in-check. Those units which had been withdrawn into the rear stayed inside Syria too though, just below the Golan Heights and under cover from aerial observation as they waited for their next opponent to move closer to them. It became a matter of timing for the Israelis. They couldn’t strike to early nor too late either. The plan was to launch a devastating assault against the Iraqis at the most opportune moment so that the most destruction could be done along with the fewest IDF casualties caused at the same time.
It had been an almighty difficult balancing act as that wait occurred, but the word had come during the night that at midday today, the IDF was to make their move. The Iraqis were close enough to the River Jordan now and suitably ripe for attack. They were busy making their own preparations to advance up to the West Bank crossings, had to keep a watchful eye on the Jordanians finally starting to threaten their southern flank and their supreme commander back in Iraq – who controlled every move they made – hadn’t given any indication in all of the intercepted communications that the IDF had seen that he regarded the northern flank of his army as being in danger.
Operation David’s Fist started exactly at midday local time.
To overcome the difficulties of fighting outside Israel’s borders against a foreign foe which there was little pre-war solid information upon, on territory where the local political situation was complicated (to say the least), the IDF had been working to overcome the natural fog of war which would occur using all of their technological advantages. They used long-range surveillance drones, both high- & low-level reconnaissance flights with manned aircraft packed with recording equipment and also had plenty of men on the ground in Jordan. Commandos with multiple units were inside that neighbouring country, one which had been dragged kicking and screaming into a war which it wanted no part in and was being fought on its territory. There were men from Sayeret Matkal and Sayeret Haruv: strategic-level reconnaissance units reporting directly to the Northern Command during this war rather than to Aman as they usually did so. Sayarot Golani and Sayarot Tzanhanim were tactical-focused units from the Israeli Army assigned to combat brigades in peacetime and now acting in the pathfinder role. Yachmam was another strategic unit tasked for long-range reconnaissance and target acquisition while Shaldag was manned by the Israeli Air Force for forward air control missions up close and personal to the enemy. Whilst operating in Jordan, restrictions had been placed upon these commandos with regard to their rules of engagement when faced with encounters with Jordanians; Israel didn’t want to go to war unnecessarily with Jordan as Iraq and Syria were already being fought.
Officially, Israel was defending Jordan against foreign aggression!
It was those commandos who were most active in bringing the ground units taking part in David’s Fist to bear against the Iraqi Republican Guards. They acted as pathfinders first for the 35th Paratroopers Brigade which landed in the Iraqi’s rear southeast of Al Mafraq and then guided the progress of the mass of armour which poured down from inside Syria across into Jordan. That armour belonged to a trio of Israeli combat divisions: the regular-manned 36th & 162nd Armoured Divisions and the reserve 319th Armoured Division. That latter formation moved down Highway-40 on the left to link up with the paratroopers while the former pair moved in a southwestern direction onto the fertile Hauran Plateau following the general course of Highway-35 but not tided to that road connection. Waves of aircraft and armed helicopters were in the sky supporting the Israelis as their fully-mechanised forces rolled down into the Iraqi flank. They had a mass of artillery support and combat engineers all integrated too.
Very quickly, the Israelis and the Iraqis came into contact with each other and the Battle of the Hauran Plateau commenced throughout the afternoon and into the evening and the night as well.
The Iraqi Republican Guards were considered an elite. Saddam had been busy broadcasting from Iraq that it was they – under his personal command, naturally – who had defeated the Iranians. They were now fighting against Israeli aggression in Jordan and would liberate Palestine and Jerusalem. Those ‘Zionist cowards’ which the Iraqi Republican Guards would encounter would ‘be crushed underfoot’ in ‘the mother of all battles’.
A total of seven Iraqi combat divisions were inside Jordan, all but one were of those supposed elite Republican Guards units. The 1st Mechanised Division (non Republican Guard) was in the midst of their deployment into Jordan and stretched out across the desert almost all the way back to the Iraqi border. Further west the 4th ‘Al Faw’ Motorised Division was positioned between the Jordanian city of Zarqa and the capital Amman: these Republican Guards were facing down the Royal Jordanian Army who had finally managed to sort itself out following all the chaos and destruction caused by the Iraqi invasion. Around Al Mafraq was the 8th ‘As Saiqa’ Special Forces Division. The paratroopers and commandos with this unit were staging outside of that town and were meant to be getting ready to lead the assault over the Jordan River. The remaining four divisions, the bulk of the Republican Guards armoured strength, was located on and near to the Hauran Plateau that the IDF had chosen as the location for their engagement with the Iraqis. Those formations were the 1st ‘Hammurabi’ Armoured, 2nd ‘Medina’ Armoured, 3rd ‘Tawakalna’ Mechanised and 6th ‘Nebuchadnezzar’ Motorised Divisions. Each formation spread across Jordan had taken casualties from air and commando attacks during the war so far before they could get into battle while their senior officers were attacked from the rear by agents of Saddam sent to arrest and shoot them for failing to follow his orders as demanded.
Numerically, and in propaganda terms, the Iraqis had the advantage. In real terms though they had lost the battle before it begun. From the air and in the electromagnetic spectrum the Israelis were the undisputed victors. The Iraqis were demoralised by their own treatment from above and the effects of the air attacks which had come against them, plus the recent activity from the Jordanians beginning to launch what seemed like a guerrilla war against them. They were caught by surprise too, not just tactically or operationally, but strategically. The Israelis had done it again: David’s Fist was yet another bolt from the blue attack against them which they had no warning of and had come before they were ready to get into action.
The Iraqi Republican Guards were massacred. It was an unfair fight, just as successful military operations should always be to be honest.
The Israelis were suddenly everywhere at once and knew exactly what they were doing. They had hit the Iraqis unexpectedly from the flank and took full advantage of the chaos unleashed. Tanks and armoured vehicles supplied by the Soviets and Chinese, even some locally-produced vehicles, were blown up again and again. Infantry which tried to deploy and fight were bombed, machine gunned and shelled. Commanders had their communications jammed and were clueless as to how to react to such an attack. The Israelis kept fighting on the move and there was no let up. They surrounded Iraqi units and hit them from all sides. Any Iraqis which tried to flee were chased and slaughtered whilst on the move. The ability to act independently and conduct tactical operations on an ad hoc basis in the middle of the battle, Israeli military doctrine, was alien to the centrally-controlled Iraqis who had no training to do anything like that themselves let alone combat it.
The fighting was the most fierce around Al Mafraq to the east. There those Iraqi paratroopers and special forces with the As Saiqa Division put up the best overall performance and inflicted the most casualties which the Israelis were to suffer. Once the tanks arrived to support the Israeli paratroopers there though the situation was resolved favourably for the attacker and that formation ceased to exist with its men with dead, prisoner, or scattered as they ran across the desert.
In the hills, valleys and vineyards of the Hauran Plateau three Iraqi divisions were destroyed as well. The Hummurabi, Medina and Nebuchadnezzar Divisions posed little problems for the attacking Israeli armour. Israeli tanks kept moving, never seeming to stop as they fought their battles while on the move. Their infantry at times had tougher fights but they had their own mobile firepower and the tanks never went too far away to come back to assist in eliminating any Iraqis who wanted to make a fight of it. Above, aircraft and helicopters rained down destruction as well yet there were often problems with this due to the rules of engagement when it came to not attacking Jordanian civilians. The smartest, maybe luckiest, of the Iraqis in the area saved their own lives by abandoning their comrades and running into the small towns and villages. It wasn’t as if the locals offered them any aid, but it was being mixed in with those civilians which saved their lives.
The Tawakalna Division was engaged only from the air as it was too far for the south of where the Israeli ground forces were operating. That formation and the Al Faw Division even further away would be the last of the Iraqi Republican Guards left standing by the end of the day. There were plans for David’s Fist to continue into the night with a focus upon going much further south but delays started to incur up on the battlefield with regard to many Israeli units getting too carried away and spreading out over a truly large area. Commanders of both the 36th & 162nd Armoured Divisions were duty-bound to re-establish some control over their units especially since once it was dark armed Iraqi stragglers had to be engaged. There was also an issue with POWs: the tens of thousands of them which the IDF suddenly had spread out over the wide area as well. These Iraqi conscripts had been disarmed but needed rounding up and guarding: the IDF hadn’t expected to gain so many so quick.
At the end of the battle, a post-battle report over a secure US military channel was made from the village of Kitim. There on the ground in Jordan was a US Army liaison officer deployed by US Central Command to the attacking IDF forces. He made contact with General Schwarzkopf personally to deliver news on what had happened and his observations. The Israelis monitored the communication and were prepared to cut the feed – Israeli-American relations were never simple – if the American broke protocol and said something which they didn’t want him to that they feared the Soviets might be able to eavesdrop on but there was eventually no need to. The news which went to Bahrain where Schwarzkopf was located was of near complete Israeli military success and the broad strokes of how that had been done.
How that general based there in the Persian Gulf would have liked to have been in the shoes of his Israeli allies today!
February 22nd 1990 The Barents Sea
The cruise missile strike was directed by a Soviet Naval Aviation Ilyushin-38 May. The maritime reconnaissance aircraft had fleeting radar glances of the American carrier battle group operating in the Barents Sea and that information was collaborated by what a satellite had earlier seen, what further radar images had been sent over a data-link before a high-speed Tupolev-22RDM Blinder C had observed before being shot down and also a contact report from a Type-877 (NATO designation Kilo) patrol submarine that had been made. The enemy were where they should be: in range of three more Soviet Northern Fleet submarines. Targeting information was rapidly sent over another data-link to those strike assets and the May stayed in-place under firm orders from the ground despite the reported presence of American interceptors heading its way so that hopefully strike confirmation could be made.
Those eight men aboard the May wouldn’t live to see the results of the ambush whose final stage they had so expertly coordinated.
The submarine K-125 fired first. Eight cruise missiles were launched one after another in quick succession from the vessel before the Type-675M (NATO: Echo-II) submarine made a crash dive back down into the depths below and commenced evasive manoeuvres to avoid a counterattack. The missiles fired were programmed for anti-ship strike with seven of the eight P-500 Bazalt SS-N-12 Sandbox starting their attack run while the other one unfortunately spun out of control before crashing into the water.
Next to launch was one of the two Type-949 (NATO: Oscar) submarines. This first Oscar sent twenty-two of the two dozen missile carried – the other pair with thermonuclear warheads stayed aboard – into the evening sky from its missile-tubes and then K-148 dived. Straight afterwards, K-525 fired twenty-one more of the same type of anti-ship cruise missiles: P-700 Granit SS-N-19 Shipwrecks. Three of the Shipwrecks – a name given by NATO which the Soviets would have wholly endorsed – were misfires which left forty of them in the air in addition to the seven Sandboxs.
K-525 made her own crash dive too following her launch. The fear was that the Americans would rapidly return fire despite the incoming death and destruction heading their way. So many submarines had been lost during this war already and keeping their vessels active for future missions was a priority for the embattled Soviet Navy; none of the crews aboard either the K-125, K-148 or K-525 would have argued with those orders.
Coming from the north, east and south were almost four dozen cruise missiles lancing towards Carrier Strike Group One and the US Navy warships which made up that flotilla that had entered the Barents Sea earlier in the day.
Warning of what was coming their way was at first fragmentary and confusing for the Americans. The reconnaissance aircraft in the form of first the Blinder and then the slower May had been responded to with F-14A Tomcat interceptors being dispatched to deal with both aircraft separated over a wide area. It was known too that there was a Soviet satellite as part of their Legenda targeting network high up in space above and there was a submarine active in the area that a hunt was underway for; both of these were like the aircraft suspected to be trying to gain a fix upon where Carrier Strike Group One was so an attack could be launched.
As had been the case throughout the war, the US Navy assets here which had previously smashed apart the Soviet Northern Fleet’s surface fleet in the Battle of the Lofoten Islands were on their guard against such an attack. Their reaction to aircraft, warships and submarines of the enemy was to strike at them the moment which they were detected so that no tracking of Carrier Strike Group One could be made. An immense amount of electronic jamming filled the skies to interfere with Soviet radar systems while the most possible use was made of weather cover as the US Navy moved around under cloud cover and through storms to try and avoid satellite reconnaissance that would guide a strike against them. There was some information on how the brand-new aircraft carrier USS Abraham Lincoln had been destroyed off Norfolk in the opening hours of the war to a cruise missile strike, the failed attempt at an identical strike which had taken place against the USS Dwight D. Eisenhower in the North Atlantic and the manner in which the USS Independence had been disabled by selective torpedo strikes when at sea in the North Pacific. To successfully attack the capital ships of the US Navy, their carriers, was clearly the ultimate aim of the Soviet Navy even in their death throws.
Carrier Strike Group One consisted of the carrier USS Theodore Roosevelt, the guided-missile battleship USS Wisconsin, several escorting warships, non-combat support ships in attendance and a trio of submarines. Back away to the northwest, coming around the North Cape to join this flotilla were the carriers USS America and Eisenhower along with their escorts in Carrier Strike Group Two. The latter formation had been busy for the past four days blasting enemy-held targets on land in the occupied parts of Norway while the former, targeted today, had been active striking against naval and naval air targets above the Barents Sea from their previous north-western position before now coming forward. Carrier Strike Group One had a new assignment of hitting targets on land now rather than over the water. Aircraft were to be sent first against the Rybachy Peninsula, Linakhamari and Pechenga near to the Soviet-Norwegian border before later turning their attention towards the Kola Fjord area. Tomahawk cruise missiles would be involved too and, depending upon enemy opposition, the heavily-escorted Wisconsin was to edge its way forward as well to hit the Soviets up close with her own brand of particular fire-power. There was an expectation that the Soviets would move against them with everything that they had with the primary threats believed to be submarines: the majority of the Soviet Northern Fleet’s heavy surface combatants were long since sunk and Soviet Naval Aviation had lost most of its vaulted Tupolev-22M3 Backfire C missile-bombers as well.
That Kilo – named B-402 – being hunted by the Americans had broadcast a signal when a communications antenna was raised. The message had been partially intercepted but the US Navy was unable to decode it. Regardless, the presence of the submarine inside the inner defensive ring of Carrier Strike Group One, in close proximity to both the Roosevelt and the Wisconsin, meant that an immediate active hunt was underway to hit it before it could hit an American ship. Ships were moved around and sub-hunting helicopters filled the skies dropping sonobuoys and ready to follow those up with torpedoes. This came in conjunction with the pair of Tomcats racing after the May.
Then there were unidentified electronic signals detected. The airwaves were filled with what appeared to be first burst communications and then radar sweeps conducted from active radars at very low-levels. Combat officers aboard several US Navy ships alerted their superiors that something rather worrying was going on… before many of those commanders started to understand what all of the incoming information – when taken together, not individually – actually meant.
Calls of ‘Vampires!’ were made rapidly afterwards on several secure radio frequencies. Defensive radars detected aboard multiple ships caught the boost phases of cruise missiles coming from submarines on the surface. Those missiles then dropped off radar screens moments later as they afterwards went low.
With regards to offensive doctrine, the US Navy and the Soviet Navy differed greatly in the methods and tactics to employ in such operations in wartime. The Americans built their aircraft carriers with all of those strike aircraft aboard to deliver bombs and missiles from distance and to remain flexible in combat operations using those carriers to move about unimpeded from retaliation. For the Soviets, they had their own missile-armed major surface combatants and even small carriers – well… had those with the Northern Fleet until the Battle of the Lofoten Islands overnight of February 7th/8th – but invested mainly in their missile-bombers and submarines carrying cruise missiles for anti-ship and land attack missions. Rather than ‘power projection’ as the US Navy termed their offensive naval operations, the Soviet Navy focused upon ‘active area denial’ using supersonic cruise missiles delivered from stand-off platforms.
In their operation to leave the Abraham Lincoln alight from bow to stern, the Americans afterwards determined that either the submarine K-22 or submarine K-35 – upgrades of the Echo-II class – had fired P-1000 missiles against that carrier. Thankfully, the vessel hadn’t had her air wing aboard to be destroyed as the carrier was. It was again either one of those two submarines using that missile which didn’t yet have an official NATO designation that had tried to do the same to the Eisenhower when it was coming west to join the gathering of US Navy fire power previously in the Norwegian Sea and now near to the shores of the Soviet Union. Eisenhower’s would-be attacker had been sunk and the one which had hit the Abraham Lincoln would have empty missile tubes and be attempting to return home.
The Kola Peninsula lay off the Barents Sea and was home to the multiple naval bases where Soviet submarines that had been deployed before and during the war into the North Atlantic and a-joining seas had sailed from. Cruise missile submarines had made attacks against land targets as well as two major convoys crossing the ocean laden with military equipment and supplies. There had been other submarines on traditional attack missions too which had used torpedoes against NATO warships and submarines as well as civilian ships undertaking wartime roles in support of the West. Carrier Strike Groups One & Two were thus sent towards those bases to bomb them. There would be no resupply for those submarines which had gone out on wartime missions and expended their torpedoes and cruise missiles. Moreover, those vessels that had yet to put to sea due to maintenance issues – which the Soviet Northern Fleet desperately needed to have at sea – would be hit while they were still in port.
It was only about an hour before the Roosevelt was due to launch a land attack mission with her A-6E Intruders and FA-18A Hornets, an ‘Alpha Strike’, that the Soviets managed to make their own attack. The planners of the cruise missile strike didn’t know the details of that timing but the intention of the Americans by bringing their carriers this far to the east was easily understandable. The Soviets could foresee the incoming attacks that would commence against the Kola Peninsula; they also feared that afterwards there would be more launched against the afloat fleet of strategic ballistic missile submarines across in the Kara Sea or maybe air support given for the US Marines to be put ashore on Soviet soil.
Unbeknown to the Americans, there had been a failed attempt two days ago to catch Carrier Strike Group One in a similar attack to the one launched this evening. Both of the two Oscar’s employed now – K-148 and K-525 – had failed to make a rendezvous with a Type-641 (NATO: Tango) class submarine scouting ahead. The B-319 disappeared without a trace and then the Tupolev-95RT Bear D on airborne reconnaissance too fell victim to missile fire from a pair of Tomcats flying from the Roosevelt. That had been then though, today the Soviet’s careful efforts along with plenty of luck paid off.
The US Navy had some intelligence about the swarm tactics which both the Sandbox and Shipwreck cruise missiles would employ in real-time combat operations. They understood that the missiles when in-flight would stay together and that priority would be given to going after larger vessels at the expense of smaller ones; the mass destruction which could come from a supersonic missile with its own warhead and unspent rocket fuel was also understood. What the Americans didn’t know was that the missiles would be using autonomous targeting methods following their launch though. It was the presumption that either an aircraft such as a May or the firing submarine would guide the missiles in or if those had to evade or were destroyed than the missiles would no longer had updated targeting and so have outdated last-minute intelligence.
There hadn’t been evidence presented to the US Navy either through peacetime espionage or wartime observation that the Sandbox and Shipwreck systems were vastly different to anything else in the field of naval cruise missiles, one which the Soviets excelled in.
Flying extremely fast and incredibly low across the waves of the Barents Sea, through the evening fog, the three separate groups of missiles lanced towards the American flotilla ahead of them. One missile within each group, a Sandbox and two Shipwrecks, preformed a ‘pop-up’ manoeuvre. The active radar gave the surface several sweeps to confirm pre-launch data with what was now seen before the missile in question with each swarm dropped back down to low altitude. The information was shared with each of the other missiles in a self-contained loop and corrections made to course. A list was created of the first priority target, then the second, the third and so on. Those out in front of each group increased speed and charged towards them. If those in the lead struck their target enough to be considered a kill then the other missiles would move onto the next target. If there was defensive fire which engaged the lead missiles then more would take their place in going after the main target. This was all built into the software of the computers aboard each cruise missile, a great feat of technical engineering and something that the West didn’t regard the supposedly-backwards Soviets of being capable of doing. Yes, there were flaws, many of them in fact, in that software and it was capable of being spoofed or failing all on its own, but for now the missiles were doing what they had been designed to do: bare in upon their targets.
There were other missiles in the air too. US Navy warships started launching SAMs into the sky against those which had made their pop-up flight deviations. Track was lost of those and the SAMs hadn’t been quick enough so fell back down into the sea while radar operators had their systems at full power trying to reacquire the inbounds that were coming in very fast indeed from multiple directions. Warships not engaged in SAM operations were hastily conducting evasive manoeuvres and turning towards west, where the only threat axis wasn’t, while launching waves of chaff into the sky. Close-in weapon systems in the form of anti-missile guns and active jammers stood ready to be put to use; sailors aboard were rushing to emergency stations and damage control teams were assembled. Aboard the Roosevelt, there was a flurry of activity. The carrier would have to be the number one target for any attack using aircraft or missiles and every other vessel, even the Wisconsin, was considered expendable in relation to the Roosevelt. Other warships were ordered to position themselves between the multiple threat axis’ and the carrier while there were hasty preparations made to launch as many aircraft as possible, lock the ship down internally to negate combat damage and have damage control parties ready. Everything was happening faster than expected though as the Sandboxs and Shipwrecks came in so very quickly.
Travelling the furthest of the three groups, the Shipwrecks launched by the K-525, numbering seventeen now (down from twenty-one following the loss of the first pair during launch misfires and another two falling from the sky due to mechanical issues mid-flight), needed a second guidance check. Another pop-up was made with a radar sweep by that one missile and the information shared to confirm targets because the Americans were hopelessly trying to evade. More SAMs fired by the Americans were launched, but those would again hit nothing as the targeted Shipwreck dropped back down even before the trio of RIM-66H Standard-2MRs fired by the USS Mobile Bay could get that far away from that cruiser.
Then the Kilo struck, that little submarine almost forgotten about by the Americans with the immense number of Vampires pouring towards them. The Mobile Bay had been what the submarine was stalking after sending her earlier broadcast but near-deadly efforts from that warship to chase her off had pushed the B-402 in the direction of another US Navy warship. The USS Comte de Grasse was not as capable as the Mobile Bay in terms of air defence for Carrier Strike Group One – hitting an air defence ship whilst the cruise missile attack was taking place was the assigned post-reconnaissance task for the B-402 – but it came fortunately right into the submarine’s figurative gun-sights.
Four Type-53/65 torpedoes were fired by the B-402. These twenty-one inch torpedoes shot out of the forward tubes and were left to go after the destroyer above all by themselves as the submarine evaded. To an outside observer, the launch of so many torpedoes all at once when the Kilo’s magazine was designed to hold only eighteen would seem to be an error, especially since ten torpedoes had already been expended by the B-402 during this war… for the dubious gains of a Norwegian missile boat near the North Cape, a merchant ship in the Norwegian Sea and a whale pod in the Barents Sea. This was standard practice across the entire Soviet Navy’s submarine fleet throughout the war though with multiple launches in every engagement leaving magazines near empty after just a couple of attacks made and then the need for the submarine to have to return home to reload, which were long dangerous journeys indeed. When the many Soviet submarines had made their attacks during this war they often did a lot of damage but afterwards would be no longer capable of conducting combat operations even after sailing away from engagements unharmed.
In this instance, the damage which could be expected from four torpedoes against the Comte de Grasse was seen. Each Type-53/65 came in from the rear aiming for the disturbance in the water caused by the propellers of the fast-moving destroyer and aimed to explode around those to knock out propulsion and cause damage elsewhere, maybe even breaking the back of the target. This was all achieved. One torpedo was decoyed away by the Nixie decoy trailed behind the Comte de Grasse and blew that up; the other three exploded underneath the destroyer. Her propellers were blown off, the engine room flooded and the keel shattered enough so that it soon broke. The last quarter of the warship broke away and the catastrophic damage from that doomed the remainder of the Comte de Grasse and her crew of three hundred and twenty-four sailors.
And then the Sandboxs and Shipwrecks arrived.
In ascending order, the top five targets for the cruise missiles were the (no. 5) USS Philippine Sea, (no. 4) her air defence sister ship Mobile Bay, (no. 3) the nuclear-powered cruiser USS South Carolina, (no. 2) the Wisconsin and, of course, (no. 1) the Roosevelt. A pilot in an attacking aircraft under attack himself might focus upon another warship engaging him or an easier kill rather than sticking to his priority targets; the captain of the submarine B-402 had just shown that human weakness even when given firm orders. There was no disobedience, no distraction from the non-human brains in each of the attacking cruise missiles. They all focused upon the primary target and only then would move down their list, and in the assigned order too as they shared information.
Such was modern warfare.
With so many missiles coming in from three different directions, and with ineffective long-range defences which couldn’t see let alone get down low enough to engage the inbounds, the Roosevelt was doomed. There were point-defence weapons aboard the carrier which conducted her last minute defence in addition to a brave Hornet pilot nearby who flew dangerously low near to the carrier and aimed for the incoming missiles with his fighter’s own weapons.
The Vulcan-Phalanx multiple-barrelled 20mm anti-missile guns killed three cruise missiles. In an impressive feat, the Hornet pilot managed to destroy another one, though he ended up being unable to pull out of a sharp turn – avoiding impacting the carrier kamikaze fashion – and he crashed into the ocean losing his own life. Two of those Sandboxs and five Shipwrecks hit the Roosevelt.
Four more cruise missiles struck the Wisconsin, three made impact against the South Carolina, three hit the Mobile Bay and two smashed into the Philippine Sea. Targets assigned priority further down the list attracted more missiles, including a trio of destroyers and a massive combat support ship.
Anti-aircraft guns had got quite a few missiles and either blew them up in fantastic explosions or sent them tumbling into the sea. Two of the Sandbox’ were decoyed away by electronic warfare measures which were at the same time ineffective against Shipwrecks. Moreover, all of the chaff launched into the sky did nothing at all apart from attract ghost targets for the autonomous, radar-directed Vulcan-Phalanxs to fire upon which distracted them from their anti-missile task.
Finally, Soviet anti-ship cruise missiles had managed to repeat the success on the war’s first day and do the US Navy incalculable damage. The warheads of the missiles which had struck the American ships – 950kgs with the Sandboxs and the Shipwreck’ had those of 750kgs – had been joined by unspent rocket fuel igniting the targets behind those initial impact explosions; there was too the incoming force of those missiles.
The Roosevelt went up in flames. Secondary explosions rocked her afterwards when aircraft aboard were torn apart. Her own carried munitions were in protected magazines deep below and aviation fuel lines had been shut down, but the aircraft she had in her hangars were accidents waiting to happen. Blasts were directed upwards and outwards. Hundreds died immediately from the impacts of seven cruise missiles and so many more would soon afterwards lose their lives in the heroic but doomed efforts to save the ship from the destruction of the fires which rapidly spread out of control.
Armour-piercing warheads were fitted to the Sandboxs which hit the Roosevelt, not the Shipwrecks which struck the Wisconsin. Whether that would have mattered was debatable for the battleship had been built to World War Two standards to take on plunging shells and close firings from enemy guns up to 16-inch in calibre. The impacts of four Shipwreck missiles – including one which was hit by gunfire less than fifty yards from the battleship and tumbled into her regardless due to forward momentum – weren’t fatal themselves for the Wisconsin. Once the warheads carried went off it was what came afterwards that nearly did the battleship in: fire. Rocket fuel and then the explosion of the battleship’s own Harpoon missiles in their launchers (the Tomahawks didn’t blow up, including the two of those with thermonuclear warheads) started fantastic fires aboard the Wisconsin. Her captain ordered a turn into the waves of the stormy Barents Sea and saved his ship that way, by eliminating the worst of the flames in the seawater which broke over the bow. It was a risky move that put the battleship in a lot of danger but once the battleship recovered from that firefighting efforts were able to get underway better than before. The Wisconsin wasn’t going to be abandoned and left to burn out like the Roosevelt would be yet she was certainly heavily damaged. Electronic arrays were smashed, two of the three barrels in her B turret were ever so slightly bent – the force taken to do that had been immense – making them non-operational and her post-refit missile batteries were out of action. Plus, so many of her crew were dead and injured, the latter with severe burns.
As to the trio of cruisers, each of them were destroyed. Again it was fires which killed them, far more so than the explosions and impact damage of the missiles which had mercilessly torn into them. Two destroyers and the support ship USS Seattle were also lost with the third destroyer suffering heavy damage like the Wisconsin had taken.
When the battleship afterwards led the few survivors away from the scene of such epic destruction – a few rescued casualties aboard the escaping ships, thousands of others unfortunately left behind due to the submarine threat – there were eight less ships with Carrier Strike Group One than there had been before the battle and seven thousand plus fewer sailors. Those losses included that carrier and the majority of the men and aircraft aboard her of course, effectively making such a designation for the escaping force redundant. Neither of the four submarines responsible for the losses taken had been even scratched while just two enemy aircraft could be claimed as victories.
The First Battle of the Barents Sea had a clear victor and a woeful loser. It would have been worse though, there could have been three carriers targeted if the Soviets had waited another day or two to strike. This only meant that the Americans would be back, in a vengeful mood too, where the lessons learnt from today’s battle would be put to use.
There would be a Second Battle of the Barents Sea.
February 22nd 1990 Flamborough Head, East Yorkshire, Great Britain
Once the allotted time had passed for the men to get clear, a nervous wait indeed for those aboard, the submarine made a gentle dive further down into the depths of the North Sea. The commando team was swimming to shore using their scuba gear and should hopefully be nowhere near the danger posed from their method of clandestine transport causing them harm as it made its own escape.
Back out to sea, to again face NATO patrols the Soviet submarine went.
There were seven men who made the last leg of their journey under their own power. There should have been eight of them though, the mission called for eight. Yet there were only seven who swam just below the treacherous waters and for the small beach which was up ahead. It was hard going for them, but each had trained many long years for something like this. Moreover, all of them had too seen combat already in this war which had demanded intense excursion. That might have been on land and away from the open water yet they remained in good physical shape. Each man was high on natural adrenaline as well.
The point man soon reached the sand where the waves were breaking. There was pitch black darkness on the surface, just as it had been below the water, with the fog and the moonless night sky. He wore bulky night-vision goggles which displayed a green and black fuzzy image of what lay ahead of him as he crawled out of the water. His eyes fixed ahead for a moment before turning to the left, the right and then back straight ahead again.
From what he would see, he had led those behind him to the right place and there was no one else about. He would have preferred to be without the headgear, but without this piece of technology, as uncomfortable as it was to wear, he was able to see something rather than nothing.
He stood up and broke into a sprint; running across the sand, the stones and then to the rocks ahead. Once he reached those he came to a stop and tried to find some shelter. He was cold, wet and tired yet it wasn’t shelter from the elements he was seeking. Instead, the point man feared observation. If someone had seen him then they could shoot at him too. Yet the cover he hoped he gained next to the rocks would give him some measure of safety.
Waves continued to break at the shoreline. On either side in front of him was the sand and the stones of the little beach. Behind was a path leading away from the beach and then bare trees. Above and to the sides were sheer white chalk cliffs that rose up to a considerable height and were impressive from down here.
The point man told himself that there was no one else around and everything was clear for his comrades to come to join him. He recovered his signal light – a small waterproofed LED device – and held it up pointing out to sea. He activated the light in the correct sequence declaring an all clear before putting it back into one of the specialised pockets attached to his wetsuit. Then he waited.
He was being observed, by those with rifles pointed in his direction ready to shoot too.
Behind in the woodland called Danes Dyke – a naturally formed gully which ran north south and physically cut the end of Flamborough Head off from the rest of the mainland – there were men lying prone in ambush. Above on the crest of the cliffs there were more armed men under orders to stay still and do nothing. All were watching him and waiting for the word from one of their number, a Scottish SAS captain, to engage the enemy.
The rest of the Spetsnaz team who these TA soldiers serving with the SAS were here to properly welcome to Britain came out of the water. They were observed moving with some care though not as much as the point man who had come first. To those soldiers who were poised to kill them, the Soviets below were letting themselves down as they ran out in the open like they did.
The SAS would have crawled out of the water to stay low and out of sight.
The point man started moving again. He left his comrades behind and started making for the path leading to the woodland.
The trees may have been bare in there and the sides extremely steep as well as wet, but those advantages for the SAS team on keeping an eye on him would only be beneficial in daylight. The captain, a long way from his native Glasgow and a man who was rather glad to have been kept in the UK while the war raged on the Continent (his men had voiced opposite views on that matter), realised that his troopers would lose sight of the point man very quickly. He would be armed and dangerous and difficult to catch up with. Intelligence said that eight men were expected and there had only been seven who had come out of the water, yet there was no time to wait for the final man who might not show up at all. The enemy was at the moment all clustered together, in a perfect ambush position, and there was no time to wait.
He gave the order to open fire.
Without any warning at all, the point man was knocked to the ground. He had the wind taken out of him – quite a feat for a man nicknamed ‘the Tank’ by his Spetsnaz comrades due to his immense size – and was on the cold, hard pavement face down. Then the pain hit. Not pain from the impact with the ground but from what he quickly understood were bullets that had torn into him somewhere in his upper chest. He tried to call out, to scream for help when all of his training had told him to never do that, but there was no air in his lungs to do so. There was further wrenching pain as he tried to take in breath as well as to rip off the headgear.
Yet his world just went black…
The other members of the Spetsnaz team all heard the two shots that had rung out. They sought to find more cover than they had but then more shots were taken. The bullets came first, then the crack of rifles before the screams finally followed.
They were shot down. Some were killed instantly, others were mortally wounded. More and more rifle cracks came, hitting the rocks if they didn’t hit any of the helpless men. One of the Spetsnaz managed to raise his waterproofed rifle and try to get a shot off himself. His intention was to aim up above at those cliffs and get whoever was up there to put their head down and give him and his comrades below a fighting chance.
Most of his face was blown off by a well-placed bullet fired from a patient, expert marksman.
When the firing stooped, the SAS captain had his men report. They were claiming that the point man and four others were dead. Only two of the enemy were reckoned to be alive, both of whom were hit. One had stopped screaming and was now just groaning as he rolled around on the stones which littered the top of the beach. The other one, trailing blood, had dragged himself under the rocks and they wouldn’t get direct shots upon him at the moment. Through their own night-vision goggles, it looked like those two injured men had both lost a lot of blood and wouldn’t last very long if not given medical care.
There were fourteen SAS men here, including the captain. He and his radioman were up in the chosen observation point (on the cliffs with their backs to the golf course), five were deployed as the snipers and the other eight were waiting down below in the rear as the reaction force. He gave the order for that latter group, including the officer from the Defence Intelligence Staff (DIS) attached to this mission, to move forward. The DIS man spoken excellent Russian and would try to get the last two enemy to surrender. When they did, and were clear of their weapons, then whatever help which could be given to them would occur… and only then.
The enemy Spetsnaz, even wounded, would be very dangerous indeed.
Usually, there might have been a rush to get to a live prisoner and chances might have been taken. The captain though had been told that on this mission there was no great urgency. A prisoner would be a bonus, not a necessity. The Soviet GRU agent in the custody of a joint DIS & MI-5 team, who should have been here but was instead very far away and under armed guard, had told them everything that was needed to be known. That information – on what exactly the Spetsnaz were doing here this late in the war, their own mission and details of how they were to avoid detection – hadn’t been shared with the captain. He also hadn’t been informed as to how the enemy spy had been captured nor the fate of the submarine which had dropped off the invaders.
His orders only concerned instructions to kill those who landed here on the Yorkshire coast tonight.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 14:19:33 GMT
Eight – Occupation
February 23rd 1990 The western portion of the North German Plain, West Germany
Operation Eagle Fire commenced at 0300 hours local time. American elements of NORTHAG forces, on the left of the army group operational area, struck northwards aiming to make a second attempt to undertake a massive multi-corps counter-offensive. The initial objectives of the operation were rather ambitious: seize many of the enemy crossings over the Ems to the west, do the same along parts of the Weser to the east and reach Bremen in the north. Ultimately, getting to the sea far ahead of them and therefore cutting off Warsaw Pact forces in the Netherlands was the long-term goal. Lessons learnt from the failed attempt coming down from the Wiehen Hills three days ago were to be put into practise.
Just like before there was a determination to succeed, but this time many of those involved believed that they really had a strong chance of making the counter-offensive work… as long as everything went as planned.
*
Both the US I Corps and the US III Corps were involved in Eagle Fire. These two commands controlled a significant number of US Army, US Army Reserve and Army National Guard troops shipped over from the mainland United States to Europe over a period of more than three weeks. There were those that had arrived during the early stages of REFORGER (and taken casualties while landing in Western Europe), more which had come across the North Atlantic during the first round of fighting and then further numbers that had come during the short ceasefire. The majority now had already seen action and been bloodied whilst doing so; there were plenty of combat veterans now. At the same time, other men who had come with these veterans lay dead spread across the North German Plain, in enemy POW camps which littered open fields across Poland or had been evacuated due to being wounded and were now far away from the battlefields where they had been injured.
There were fighting soldiers and support personnel with the two corps’, tens of thousands of them. Men came from across the United States and all of them were volunteers: those who had signed up some time ago to serve their country, not those among the several million Americans who had in recent weeks volunteered at home without any need for a universal draft to be yet arranged. The reasons behind the service which those in uniform had chosen to give were as diverse as the backgrounds of the men themselves. Some were extremely patriotic, others victims of circumstances. It didn’t matter though: the general understanding wide among them was that they were here to fight for their nation’s liberty even if it was on foreign soil. They had seen what the enemy was and what he could do here in West Germany… it was apparent to many that if the enemy wasn’t beaten here one day soon he might be standing ready to invade the United States too. Impossible, some others said; possible, many believed.
Along with the soldiers, there was all of their military equipment. The formations under command here were well-equipped, sometimes lavishly so. Thousands of tanks and tracked armoured vehicles were present. There was a lot of artillery and engineering equipment. Trucks and jeeps had come from the POMCUS sites as well as being shipped over on freighters that had made the dangerous voyages across hostile waters. This mobile military hardware was alongside everything else that the Americans had brought here too.
And there were helicopters, what the US Army liked to call ‘Snakes’. A particular shortcoming identified as being crucial to past lukewarm success when fighting in earlier battles across the North German Plain had been the shortage of Snakes. Those POMCUS weapons dumps in the Rhineland and the Low Countries had had almost everything else but those stored at them. Combat helicopters, transport models and others for MEDEVAC & communication duties weren’t kept in storage in Europe but rather at home. They had been truly missed. The 3d Armored Cavalry Regiment and 2d Armored Division, who had fought the III Corps’ first battles, had only a few with them which were sent initially on USAF transports. Size restrictions, rather than weight considerations, had limited the number which could be deployed aboard C-5 Galaxys and C-141 Starlifters. The Snakes were present now after an immense deployment of so many helicopters aboard aircraft and as deck cargo on ships too.
The I Corps was almost exclusively manned by Army National Guard soldiers in combat roles while the III Corps had mainly regular US Army forces though also US Army Reserve and Army National Guard detachments. In terms of officers, there had been many cross-postings so that regulars and reservists were working together in command positions. Outside of the two corps’, the Americans had many of the command and headquarters positions within their parent formation now: NORTHAG had many Americans in occupation of roles formerly held by West Germans. There was still a British general in command yet his deputy was now a professional US Army officer. Some voices had called for the replacement of General Sir Peter Inge himself with an American to take over due to the fact that the Americans outnumbered the British in terms of a manpower commitment to NORTHAG, yet that had not come to pass due to not just political considerations but also because SACEUR believed that General Inge had done a good job in spite of a very difficult situation. There were still personal opinions aired about how the US Army would have done things differently had it been in the position of the British in the Hannover Salient during the first round of fighting – a drive to the sea then was that idea raised – yet those arguments were quickly silenced by superiors as stern reminders were given to obey the chain of command.
In preparing for Eagle Fire, the Americans had resisted attempts to strip assets away from them to support the fighting in the nearby Netherlands. The Allied II Corps there – with Belgian, British, Dutch and French troops; many of who were reservists armed with older equipment – were in a lot of trouble as the Soviets poured forward deeper into (the misnomer which was) Fortress Holland. NORWESTAG was practically screaming for help and for tank forces from the Americans with the nearby US I Corps to either be transferred across to them or, failing that, to assault the flanks of the Soviets to relive the pressure on them.
With approval from SACEUR, General Inge denied those requests. He understood the importance of conserving the strength of the Americans for their counter-offensive. It might not have been his operation – despite being titularly under his command – but he more than approved of it and worked to assist it as a commander of fighting men should. His other corps’, the British I Corps and the Belgian I Corps, both falling back from the middle reaches of the Weser as the Soviets continued to slowly move forwards in those areas too, weren’t given any further assistance than what they had at hand either. The Americans were kept together and with ammunition stocks built up.
The Soviet forces ahead of the Americans considered of combat veterans too. There was the Soviet Second Guards Tank and Twenty–Eighth Armys, both of which had seen even more fighting than the Americans had. These troops had earlier in the month beaten the Dutch and the West Germans while holding off British and American counterattacks. They had driven to the Weser and then come over that significant water barrier too. A few days beforehand, the latter of the two field armies had managed to blunt the US III Corps’ push forward; the former had stood ready to intervene while also keeping the US I Corps in check. However, from all of the available intelligence which the Americans had – supported by the efforts of their NATO allies too – the enemy was weak. They had taken up defensive positions, but all evidence during the war had shown how the Soviets couldn’t defend ground. They could launch their own counterattacks, and especially make extraordinary counter-counterattacks when necessary, but they couldn’t hold back when fixed to static position. It wasn’t in their training nor military doctrine, even in the state of mind of their officers to hold fast. No mass fortifications in terms of earthworks, serious mine-laying and creating natural obstacles were in the path of the Americans preparing for Eagle Fire. There were tank detachments scattered throughout the rear as well as strategically-placed towed anti-tank guns, but those high-powered guns were meant to delay an offensive force operating in the Soviet rear so that they could be held up by tank forces on the counter-counterattack. To achieve an overall defeat of an enemy when facing a penetration into their rear, the Soviets would hit it hard and fast near the scene of the counter-offensive with their troops at the front and those smaller forces in the rear where meant to mop up stragglers who might gain some ground.
The Soviets drove further forward in the Netherlands every hour. They continued to push the Allied II Corps back in the general direction of Rotterdam while keeping the Dutch I Corps – a mix of shattered Dutch and West German forces – on the defensive in the northern Netherlands. This exposed their rear open to an attack. The Americans watched with glee as the Soviets dug themselves into what they regarded as a grave by pushing further west. A division with the Twenty–Eighth Army was diverted away to the fighting there in the Netherlands, the Americans were happy to see it move. There was also that follow-up Soviet field army that the enemy had moved fast across the North German Plain and was by now across on the western side of the Ems preparing to enter the frontlines against the Allied II Corps: the Twenty–Second Guards Army with those elite divisions from the Soviet interior.
A massive area of enemy-held territory was only lightly held. The Americans regarded the portion of the North German Plain between the Ems and the Weser, beyond where they had their own troops near to the Mittellandkanal, as theirs for the taking. They could cut off an immense number of enemy troops inside the Netherlands and seize not one but two major water barriers between them and the remaining parts of occupied West Germany east of the Weser. The Soviets would have one hell of a job turning their field armies in the Netherlands around and coming back east. The situation was seen as perfect. The timing of the attack would be beneficial because of the weakness of the enemy: past those weak forces at the frontlines and enemy tanks and anti-tank guns poised to delay a counter-offensive were supply forces and occupation troops.
Eagle Fire was destined, its proponents claimed, for stunning success. They said that initially, breaking past where the Soviets had their men and tanks near to the Mittellandkanal, it would be bloody but afterwards the US I & III Corps would run riot.
*
To start the counter-offensive were air operations.
The USAF, US Air Force Reserve, US Air National Guard and the US Navy with aircraft flying from the USS Saratoga in the North Sea threw hundreds of aircraft into the attack. They flew a plethora of offensive air missions all over the North German Plain after coming from three directions. There were fighters in the sky and strike aircraft with them. Close air support missions were flown near to the frontlines as well. Those US Navy aircraft coming from the rear caught the Soviet air defences by surprise and so did a trio of F-117A stealth aircraft on strike missions that delivered precision bombs onto ground control stations.
Then the ground attacks started. Eight combat divisions, six brigade-sized combat units (brigades and armored cavalry regiments), seven field artillery brigades and two combat aviation brigades (with Snakes) were assigned to the US I & III Corps. The tanks and infantry started moving forwards in the darkness and engaging the enemy with all of the available fire support which they had on-hand.
To the left, the US I Corps struck with the 30th & 39th Infantry Brigades and the 278th Armored Cavalry Regiment first and then the 35th & 40th Mechanized Infantry Divisions behind pushing for gaps opened up. These Army National Guard troops shed a lot of blood, as expected, but they defeated enemy units where needed and pushed others back in a panicked retreat. The Second Guards Tank Army was down to just two understrength divisions – a mix of battalions and regiments merged from shattered pre-war parent units – and unprepared to be struck with such force. They couldn’t stop the Americans nor get a counterattack underway either… and then the 49th & 50th Armored Divisions started edging forward ready to tear forward as the front opened up almost everywhere along the US I Corps’ operational area.
On the right, the Twenty–Eighth Army came apart even faster. The US III Corps hit them with the 3d Armored Cavalry Regiment and the 2d Armored Division. The assigned Army National Guard brigades (48th & 256th) were held back along with the 1st Cavalry Division for flank support along the Weser, which left the 5th & 24th Mechanized Infantry Divisions to charge forwards. They went over crossings secured over the Mittellandkanal in brutal fighting where many assaulting troops and combat engineers lost their lives, and then broke free soon enough and into the open ground ahead.
Both corps were advancing clear of the defeated enemy long before it started to get light.
When on the move, there were multiple engagements all around the advancing troops. Orders were to keep unit cohesion together and not to have divisions and brigades break apart fighting battles all over the place which would slow down forward progress. It was strenuous work for command staffs to keep that momentum whilst fighting took place. Soviet, Polish and East German tank groups were met everywhere. There were those towed MT-12 anti-tank guns to deal with. Supply troops, men assigned to transport units, engineers and anti-aircraft gunners were met in short, violent battles.
Snakes filled the skies.
There were AH-1 Cobra and AH-64 Apache gunships aided by OH-58 Kiowa scout helicopters; the gunships blasted apart the enemy using their cannons, rocket pods and Hellfire missiles. UH-1 Hueys and UH-60 Blackhawks moved around men and commanders. Just as the planners of Eagle Fire wanted, those helicopters did the job needed of them. There was a strong anti-air threat present and some helicopters were shot down. The Snakes were fast and agile, but they were immune to well-directed enemy fire. Some West German armed helicopters joined with the Americans in the air but the Snakes found the skies alongside themselves mainly full of ‘Fast-movers’: attack aircraft such as A-10 Thunderbolts. These tank-killers had been held back for a few days and thrown forward now. They had their own cannons, the huge 30mm Avengers, and Maverick missiles to go after ground targets as well.
Past the frontlines, American troops moving north, northwest and northeast came across occupation forces. They ran into armed men who either engaged them or tried to flee: if they weren’t surrendering then they were shot at. These wore all sorts of uniforms from various paramilitary and intelligence services from across several Warsaw Pact nations, with most being Soviet and East German. The current occupation of parts of West Germany came with all that could be expected from armed control exerted by a totalitarian power over a population which previously lived under a liberal democracy. It wasn’t just the killings and the rapes and the looting, but organised terror, forced population transfers and deliberate destruction as well.
The leading American troops blasted apart those who wanted to stand in their way; behind them would come military police units as well as men from NATO intelligence services to better address the issue.
In addition, in the early stages of Eagle Fire there had been a mission undertaken by a detachment of US Army Rangers who parachuted into action to seize a POW detention centre near Diepholz. Troops from the 24th Infantry Division arrived a few hours later – they had come very far, very quickly – to find that the Rangers had a few prisoners of their own… though also a rather lot of dead enemy soldiers on their hands too. Those POWs were mainly all armed now from captured weapons and declared an intention to fight, though the attacking tanks and armoured infantry rolled onwards without them due to the difficulties of bringing such a mix of men under command at no notice. Regardless, NATO intelligence officers would want to talk to those prisoners anyway and would find out afterwards that the released men really went in a fit state to fight anyway after their detainment. Moreover, this mission particular mission was a test-run for further ones planned latter elsewhere so what the ex-POWs had to say was very important.
The US Army was on the move and not stopping. With the sun up on this surprisingly bright day, they were rolling towards their objectives and confident that the enemy wasn’t going to be able to stop them.
February 23rd 1990 Key West, the Florida Keys, Florida, the United States
Key West was proving exceptionally difficult for its occupiers to keep control of.
It was the locals on the ground which were causing all of the problems for the Cubans rather than enemy action in the form of air power – see Boca Chica Key – or special forces raids, such as was the case at Marathon. American civilians who called the little island at the end of the Florida Keys home refused to accept hostile foreign control over them. They dared to try and fight the occupiers. They died doing so in such an uneven battle, but they took many Cuban soldiers with them and therefore slowly lowered the number of men assigned to control Key West. Rather than being able to spend all of their time constructing their improvised fortifications for the sure-to-come American invasion, the Cubans were instead fighting a small-scale guerrilla war here. It was one which they should have been able to win due to the island’s small size and the terrain which should have made that impossible, but they weren’t able to bring to an end resistance here.
After five days of being in occupation, other losses incurred from landing operations aside, the Cubans had lost one hundred and twenty-seven men either shot, blown up or slaughtered by rather cruel means that they regarded as verging on the inhumane. That particular number wasn’t that large in the grand scheme of things, say in comparison to Cuban losses elsewhere in direct combat. However, only fourteen hundred men had been assigned to the operation to take Key West – not all of them soldiers either – and more than three hundred had died during that assault. Every man killed here, when there had been none of the promised reinforcements, truly was an irreplaceable loss when the number of civilians on the island along with the Cubans was upwards of twenty thousand.
A composite regiment was created to take and hold Key West as part of the assigned forces for the Grupo de Asalto del Norte. An understrength parachute battalion, a reinforced airmobile infantry battalion, a company of military police, another company of combat engineers and then platoon sized detachments of air defence, signals, medical, artillery observation and mechanical engineering troops had been sent by the Cuban Army. A mixed squadron from the Cuban Air Force of specialists to set up an airhead at Key West Airport had joined them along with operators for several small radars which were meant to be deployed to the island. The DGI had sent men to Key West as well, though those intelligence officers were not under the regular military command structure.
Not all of this assigned force made it to Key West.
Several Antonov-26 Curl and -32 Cline tactical transport aircraft had been shot down during the invasion. They had fallen victim to American fighters and men being transported aboard them had been killed, in particular the second wave of troops in the form of those specialists. The paratroopers who had jumped over Key West had lost more men too when landing in the sea rather than on land, while at the naval airbase on nearby Boca Chica Key two transport aircraft had been bombed just after landing with infantry aboard meant to come across to Key West and those men killed.
The Cubans who had survived the landings made had travelled from home light.
They had personal weapons, ammunition and rations; what they carried on their backs was what they had when it came to bullets and food. There were radios as well as a few light anti-aircraft guns and air defence radars too, but no heavy equipment. The unit commanders for the assault troops had been told that when the second wave arrived to reinforce them – the time-frame for that follow-up deployment kept moving – they would bring in heavier equipment and far more supplies, including armoured vehicles and even a few tanks. None of that came though. The rations ran out and medical gear was used up fast. Even the ammunition ran short soon enough when acts of resistance from the local population was met with massed gunfire and more bullets were expended as well as the few reloads for man-portable SAMs against high-flying American aircraft: the Cuban officers couldn’t stop their men from firing their rifles skywards even when no direct air attacks were made against Key West.
The Cubans had expected resistance to occur, though had underestimated the scale of it while also overestimating their own ability to control what would come. There was an understanding that there were only a few armed American military service personnel at Key West. In addition, it was known that there would be civilians in Key West who had personal weapons… America was a country in love with guns after all. Access to information on the numbers of weapons in civilian hands especially was something that the Cubans didn’t have. Key West wasn’t a crime-ridden city with armed gangs roving the streets and nor was the local police department configured like a military force to deal with that; this the Cubans knew, propaganda aside. Yet they failed to grasp that so many law-abiding citizens who lived in Key West kept weapons at home with them. Florida’s gun laws were as controversial as the rest of the United States and in the Sunshine State it was illegal to keep lists and counts of weapon ownership; there was therefore no intelligence on the matter which the Cubans, nor even the Soviets had they been asked to assist, could get their hands upon.
Taking on and forcing the surrender of American military personnel on Key West and then going after the civilian police while they were still organised meant that the Cubans gathered up a stockpile of guns and ammunition soon after arrival on the island. This weaponry was quickly realised for the value which it had in terms of being able to provide further armament for the Cuban occupiers in the face of an American invasion to retake Key West…
….if it could be distributed properly with the right bullets with the correct guns, no easy task at all.
To get more guns out of the hands of private citizens – including a large number of police officers who simple melted away – meant entering the homes of American citizens and searching them for weapons. No one had expected this to be something easily done and it certainly wasn’t! Gun battles erupted everywhere. People fired rifles and handguns at the Cubans who invaded their homes demanding weapons. The Cubans would fire back only when fired upon initially, but soon took to opening fire first on many occasions as they conducted their house-to-house searches. The local civilians knew their communities and their way around, unlike the Cubans who hadn’t been issued with maps below the company commander level, and evaded capture. Key West was a small island so a prolonged guerrilla conflict was out of the questions, and the urban population would be unable to sustain the privations of that regardless, but the majority of the island’s citizens just weren’t going to stay at home and do nothing while Cubans poured into their homes and shot at anyone they could as well as looting and taking part in a few other nasty incidents too with rapes occurring.
Key West was, like everywhere in the United States, home to military veterans. Many of these had their own personal weapons as was their Constitutional right and others quickly gained access to the weapons from the fallen. A few former retired servicemen also had the knowledge in their head as to how to make small explosive devices from everyday materials. They threw improvised grenades and constructed small bombs; a favourite target for both being the civilian vehicles which the Cubans were using to move around.
Key West wasn’t somewhere about to be pacified, especially not with so few Cuban troops present and no more on their way.
The best method for the Cubans to bring to an end the resistance to their occupation – apart from shooting everyone in sight, of course – would have been to follow the example set by the Warsaw Pact in the territory which they had taken in Western Europe. There were far fewer guns in private hands there, yet they still had faced resistance especially from NATO stragglers armed and alone behind the frontline. What the Soviets had done was to round up civilians, search them and concentrate them together under guard away from the frontlines. Terror methods including public killings and then a heavy dose of propaganda to frighten them had been what had been done in Western Europe.
The Cubans on Key West certainly didn’t have the manpower to do that. They had no troops who were assigned for occupation duties; every man here was meant to be manning outward-facing defences. More and more of those were dragged into trying to combat resistance, but that was in a haphazard fashion rather than organised as was the case with the Soviets. The Cubans also didn’t want to, let alone had the capability to, move the civilians away from Key West. Their orders stated that the civilians were to be generally left to their devices and spread out across Key West. As long as they were everywhere, then the Americans wouldn’t blast Key West apart from the air with their bombers for fear of killing those non-combatants. Should that mass hostage taking of an entire city’s population been the case, then where would the Cubans have move the twenty thousand people too? The only large enough place where that might have been doable would have been the airport. That was to be kept open for the supposedly-arriving follow-up forces to use. The few soldiers there were covering it against an American assault and couldn’t guard tens of thousands of resisting people, nor could the Cubans get all of those civilians there either.
Only the DGI detachment which had come to Key West did anything like the Soviets were doing in the parts of Western Europe which they occupied. These men had come to the island to try to pre-empt resistance in the long-term… by dealing with enemies of Cuba who resided here. The DGI had some intelligence on the personalities whom they were after and when they caught those people they shot them with firing squads being used at Fort Zachary Taylor. These were Cuban exiles born in Cuba as well as those born in the United States, the DGI didn’t care for the distinction when they were all enemies of Cuba. There was no prolonged interrogation or holding of them preparing to ship them back home eventually: they were just lined up and shot with their bodies being thrown into the sea.
The killings would continue until the end of the occupation came, in whichever form that would take. Civilians armed and fighting the occupiers or those caught up in the crossfire would be killed by a dwindling number of Cuban soldiers who were slowly starting to realise that they might just be cut off all alone here. At the same time, more targeted murders would be occurring too by the DGI eliminating enemies of their country’s regime here on foreign soil.
February 23rd 1990 Arnhem, Gelderland, the Netherlands
Two comrades-in-arms, a pair of men who shared a long-standing professional friendship, ran into each other this afternoon in Arnhem. Lt.-Colonel Vladimir Vladimirovich Putin spotted his KGB colleague from varied assignments in Finland and Leningrad and called out to Lt.-Colonel Sergey Borisovich Ivanov to get the other man’s attention.
They managed to catch up over the next ten or so minutes, talking informally to one another as they related their personal and professional experiences during the war so far before having to return to their duties on behalf of the Rodina.
Putin wore a pressed uniform and regarded himself as looking the part of a KGB officer doing an important job. He commented upon the almost bedraggled appearance of Ivanov who was also in a KGB uniform yet looked as if he had been wearing those clothes for the past several years.
“Vova,” Ivanov responded with a hearty laugh and used the short, informal version of Putin’s given name, “I am a simple soldier now!”
“I refuse to believe that, Seryozha.” Putin knew that that would be far from the case at all.
“It’s been a long journey here and I’ve had little time to worry about appearances. Leningrad to Arnhem, by way of Poland and Germany, is quite a trip. We’ve been living in the field.”
“Whose staff are you on?”
“I’m with the Forty-Fifth Guards Motorised Rifle Division headquarters staff. I’m a political commissar now, Vova: something old and something new, as I believe they say here in the West.”
“And something blue?” Putin gave a laugh of his own, one of ironic amusement. “That is for weddings. Your bride back home will not be happy.”
“I do not understand.”
Putin smiled rather than explain what he meant. Ivanov’s English came from books yet he knew rather few common idioms. Regardless, that didn’t matter. What was important was what he had described himself as.
“Are the last of the zampolits gone, Seryozha?”
“Those with the Forty-Fifth Guards were reassigned out of the division before we left the Karelian. There are no more political officers, just new commissar’s like me.”
“None of them shall be missed.” Putin gave a dismissive shrug at the fate of zampolits, those half-policemen, half-soldiers who were all being relived of duties across the entire Soviet Armed Forces in the midst of war. “Yet I think you have been busy since, yes?”
“I’d rather be back in Helsinki.”
Ivanov gave a wide smile with such a comment, as if telling a joke of his own, though he actually appeared to be rather serious. When he and Putin had served for many years together in the Finnish capital, assigned to the large embassy staff there, they had done true intelligence work on behalf of their country. It was what both had been trained to do and had excelled at. Now, both were back in the West again, though in vastly different circumstances.
“Yourself, Vova? You are assigned where…?”
“I’m back with Ivan Yurievich,” Putin named an old acquaintance of the two of them, “though we are here in Holland not to recruit agents but rather to oversee the transfer of power from military control to friendly local civilian authorities as the Army moves further onwards. The old order here is to be replaced and, as expected, that will not be an easy process. There will be resistance to what must be done. This Kingdom of the Netherlands is to be broken up and a socialist republic established here in Holland instead. We are locating and screening candidates for when that occurs and making sure that we decisively deal with those who will cause problems.
Some of it is rather distasteful, but it must be done this early in the occupation.”
With such an explanation, Ivanov thought that Putin told him far more than was needed. It was as if his friend was defending himself against charges so far unmade. Everyone in the service of the KGB at the moment was on their guard with fears for their future as Chairman Kryuchkov back in Moscow – who now led the Soviet Union in addition to the KGB – made all of his changes, yet Putin really didn’t seem comfortable with what he said he was doing here in the Netherlands.
“Have there been other problems too? With our comrades in the Army?”
“I see that some rumours might have reached you when travelling, Seryozha.” Putin didn’t wait for an answer before carrying on. “Yes, there have been clashes with those who believe in many of the old ways and aren’t willing to accept the new reality. They still think that they can do as they did under Gorbachev.”
“Grachev?”
“That particular general from the Airborne Troops could not, would not understand that personal enrichment – in wartime too! – will no longer be tolerated. I had no involvement myself in his arrest, court-martial and the deliverance of justice… yet I am more than satisfied at the outcome.”
“There are large parts of the Armed Forces, Vova,” Ivanov shared his own opinion on this following his friend’s lead, “where corruption is endemic, but that is the least of it. There has been talk that there is in many places a wide defensive mindset which has caused the slow progress of the advance westwards. I still think that remains: after all, the first strikes against the West commenced without strategic weapons used where they really should have been. Gorbachev’s so-called reforms and restructuring…”
“I understand, I really do.” Putin had had this conversation on many occasions during the war with others and was too tired to do so again. He agreed with all of that, yet that was in the past. The Armed Forces had shown marked recent improvement in attitude. Senior officers who had lacked the necessary offensive spirit had been removed and there was work underway among the junior ranks to improve the discipline problems which had occurred; especially among conscript soldiers in their fourth, final six month period of enlistment. It wasn’t an easy process, but was slowly being done. The zampolits were gone too, and now the KGB, the true guardians of the Rodina rather than too many fools with too many guns, were finishing up taking the Armed Forces to task… with the resultant body count which had come from that. When in West Berlin early in the war, Putin had seen the failures and worked as part of the solution. He hoped to do more to assist that when here in Arnhem, especially since the operational remit of his superior was so vague.
There was another Airborne Troops senior officer here in the Netherlands, one General Lebed, who was causing other problems…
“Tell me about the journey which you had, Seryozha.” Putin changed the subject some.
“Long. Troublesome. Stressful. We went down from Leningrad, through the Baltics, across Poland, and then through the two Germanys. I have never been a fan of rail travel, Vova, especially over such long distances. We were rerouted several times too, especially the further west we moved. NATO has bombed bridges and rail yards throughout Poland and the German Democratic Republic. There should have been a much earlier point where we came off the trains and moved forward with our own vehicles.”
“Was their trouble in Poland?”
“From NATO?
“No, from the Poles.”
“Surprisingly not. There was tension, an atmosphere, but that country remains calm at the moment.”
“I fear that situation may not last, Seryozha.”
“I would agree.”
For a moment, neither of them had nothing to say. They each considered what to discuss next, with each wanting to seek information from the other yet without overtly doing so due to the ethics of their service responsibilities.
Putin heard an aircraft in the distance and looked up briefly at the skies above the Netherlands. He considered asking Ivanov about how bad the NATO air attacks in Poland had been, whether they had been as bad as he had seen in both Germanies, but then realised that Ivanov would have travelled through Poland with haste and not had the time nor the training to evaluate those.
Ivanov pondered over how to ask about this General Lebed character…
“The Airborne Troops here in Holland, Vova. Are they under Front command or attached to a field army?” He found a roundabout way of asking.
“They answer to the Netherlands Front at the minute. They come from multiple units who saw fighting across the Federal German Republic throughout the past few weeks and the survivors of many fights merged into one. They took Arnhem when the front was broken open, yet failed to exploit that breakthrough.”
This was far from the reason behind Putin’s agitation with the commanding officer of those paratroopers and airmobile troops; the KGB man was concerned little with those fine details of the military campaign. The Soviet Army was still driving forwards and while the part of the Rhine Estuary hadn’t been crossed here it had been a little further westward. The Fifth Guards Tank Army was now operating between the Nederrijn / Lek and the Waal. They were driving for the North Sea up ahead while also pushing against the southern two of those rivers which formed the estuary here of one of Europe’s biggest rivers.
“The Twenty–Second Guards Army shall be in the fight by tomorrow.” The division which Ivanov was with was part of that newly-created field army. “We’ll go south, I think, rather than across to Rotterdam.”
“Do you know that it is no coincidence that the Taman Guards, the Kantemir Tanks and the Forty-Fifth Guards are all here in the Netherlands, Seryozha?”
“How so?”
“Three combat divisions of ‘Category A’ troops home-based around Moscow and Leningrad make up the force sent such a great distance ahead of many other formations and into battle right at the frontlines. Why would that occur? Who do you think gave the order, a personal order for the deployment of those elite formations?”
Ivanov gave an answer to the latter question: “Chairman Kryuchkov.”
“Correct.” Then Putin gave his opinion to the first question he had put: “To make sure that if the Armed Forces decide to act against the new regime, the last of their supposedly elite units of a significant number are far away fighting in Western Europe.”
“The poor Dutch will face the consequences of such paranoia then, Vova.”
“Yes they will, Seryozha, they will. And all of the other NATO reservists here in the Netherlands. Your division will see action against third-rate, even fourth-rate troops from various NATO countries here.”
“Where are their best troops?”
“Still back in the Federal German Republic, Seryozha.”
“If they manage to make a strong counter-offensive, Vova, then…”
“I’ve been assured,” Putin cut in, “that any attack there is doomed to failure. The Americans won’t get far if they try and the British and the Belgians with them – yes, the Belgians have almost all of their professional army on the Weser of all places at this fateful time for their country! – try to join them it will still result in failure.”
“I hope that you are correct.” Ivanov was a little more concerned hearing this and didn’t share the confidence of his friend.
“I’m certain of that. The Twenty–Second Guards Army will soon go down into Belgium and we’ll see the end of the war not long afterwards.”
Afterwards, Putin and Ivanov said their goodbyes; for now, not for good… or so both hoped. The former went back to his occupation duties and doing the intelligence work which was befitting the status of the professional which he believed he was while the latter went back to playing at being a sort-of soldier.
All the while, what Putin had said wouldn’t occur on the North German Plain – NATO’s American-led counter-offensive having success – did.
February 23rd 1990 University of Munich Campus, Munich, Bavaria, West Germany
The politicians meeting this evening in central Munich were now the de facto government of the Federal Republic of Germany. They were not the de jure, legal ruling administration governing West Germany yet they were the ones who now had power in their hands.
Well… as much power as the French wanted to allow them to yield anyway.
New Chancellor Theodor Waigel didn’t owe his position to the French nor had any allegiance to them. He was a German and his allegiance was to his people. There was a significant French military presence throughout southern parts of West Germany and all NATO forces there – including what elements of the Bundeswehr hadn’t collapsed when the short-lived ceasefire came about – were under French command. Regardless, Waigel and his government weren’t puppets of the French despite what the naysayers said.
There were quite a few of those; people who claimed that the Munich Government had no mandate and was only in place because of the French. It was France after all which had dealt with the Aachen Government and whom had troops in Munich protecting Waigel and those politicians with him who had fled here following events that had brought down the government which had acceded to those Soviet demands earlier in the war. It was yet another occupation of West Germany, it was said, this time by the country’s neighbour rather than the Soviets.
There was no disputing the French military presence nor the reasons behind France’s despite to keep as much of West Germany free from Soviet occupation: of course they didn’t want the Soviets on their own borders. However, Waigel and those in his government were unequivocal in their denial that Bavaria and Baden-Württemberg – as well as parts of Hessen north of the Main Valley where the Americans were – were under French occupation. French troops were giving their lives every day for the defence of West Germany and it’s people, people whom the Munich Government represented. Moreover, all of the remaining parts of West Germany were the French were not significant in number when it came to men on the ground, up through the Rhineland and into the Ruhr as well as Ostfriesland, had local West German authorities recognising the Munich Government’s rule. Much of Bonn was a ruin after repeated Soviet efforts to demolish the little city as part of their propaganda war, Flensburg had been destroyed in nuclear fire and Aachen was associated with where those who were prepared to give up the fight for West Germany had been based at.
Munich was therefore where the new government would be headquartered. It was Waigel’s home city and not immediately endangered by enemy occupation. Furthermore, Munich had been recognised early on in the political crisis which had engulfed West Germany as where continued resistance would be met to the Soviets. Waigel had his people inform all of those who voiced opposition that once the war was over and the Soviets pushed out of the country, the Munich Government would probably relocate too, to somewhere more centralised. At the moment, with so many West Germans dead (many at their own hands too when they gave up all hope) and many more either living under the horrors of foreign occupation or whom had made themselves refugees in neighbouring countries, there were far more important matters to be concerned with.
Waigel had been the Finance Minister in Helmut Kohl’s cabinet. He had been in the wartime bunker for the senior members of the West German government underneath the Rhineland when the Foreign Minister had launched his putsch to have a vote made against Kohl and depose him. Waigel had been on the losing side of that vote, arguing that it was illegal and abstaining, and then been dismissed like so many others from the government. He had been unsure of the intentions that others claimed Hans-Dietrich Genscher had and didn’t think that the man was acting for Soviet interests, but instead believed that the man was naive fool who shouldn’t have been allowed to do what he did. Other senior ministers had gone to Flensburg, Britain, France or even tried to get as far away as the United States when they feared for their own future yet Waigel had gone to Munich. His intention had at first been to work with the Bavarian state government, not to lead a new government.
Genscher – whose wife had been missing since the war and might have been kidnapped, Waigel later discovered – had then made error after error and couldn’t even keep his new government together let alone work out any sort of deal with the rest of NATO as he had tried to do so that West Germany could be free of foreign troops. Waigel had always known that that would fail but hadn’t been sure that he could do anything about it. Joined by others who also came to Munich in the following days, ministers who weren’t prepared to run away from their responsibilities to their people, he had been convinced that he could do something about it. The Munich Government was formed before the ceasefire broke down and while it was technically not the legal government for West Germany, neither were those operating from either Aachen or Flensburg. A vote of his colleagues had put Waigel at the head of the new administration.
At the top of the Munich Government were several other senior members of Kohl’s cabinet. Justice Minister Hans Engelhard, Economy Minister Helmut Haussmann and Transport Minister Friedrich Zimmermann had all resigned rather than serve under Genscher. They had all returned to their home regions in the south of the country where they represented their local areas in the Bundestag: Engelhard and Zimmermann were Bavarians and Haussmann was from Baden-Württemberg. They were among Waigel’s early supporters and were joined in Munich by Martin Bangemann who came to the Bavarian capital from Brussels after leaving his European Commission post. These politicians were from the CSU and FDP political parties, those who were in the pre-war governing coalition of Kohl’s ruling CDU party. To give the Munich Government more legitimacy, they added Hans-Jochen Vogel to their ranks making Waigel’s administration more representative. Vogel, the leader of the left-leaning SPD, had narrowly escaped being trapped in West Berlin – his local constituency – when tensions erupted and the East Germans closed the air corridors. He had been wholly side-lined first by Kohl and not even consulted by Genscher; the Munich Government brought him in for more than just appearances, yet his political stance helped.
A day after the Munich Government was formed, the Soviets struck at Flensburg where former Defence Minister Gerhard Stoltenberg (another one who had resigned rather than give in to the Soviets) and eliminated the government there by their nuclear attack. Waigel had at that point had representatives there in that unfortunate town on the Danish border talking with Stoltenberg about joining them in opposing the Aachen Government. Further representatives from the Munich Government were in Paris too when Soviet commandoes started their slaughter. Luckily for them, the NATO Secretary-General Manfred Wörner – a fellow West German who was furious at what he called the ‘traitors in Aachen’ – was hosting their meeting with American diplomats in another part of the French Foreign Ministry complex and they all managed to escape. Wörner gave plenty of assistance to the Munich Government in making sure that the rest of NATO moved to recognise them rather than the Flensburg Government… agreeing to work with the Aachen Government was something that no NATO country had been willing to do.
Immediately following the resumption of hostilities, Waigel and the Munich Government had been browbeaten by the French into leaving the Bavarian capital. They set themselves up outside the city at Dachau but none of them wanted to be known as the Dachau Government for all of the historic connotations with regards to that town. Moreover, Waigel wanted to be back in Munich among those West German civilians there; he wanted it to be known that his government wasn’t running away. Helmut Kohl was in the United States and Federal President Richard von Weizsäcker (not a sinecure post but at the same time not a head of government) was in Brussels. Those two men were regarded as having fled their people at a time of need in addition to putting Genscher in power. Such assertions weren’t in fact the case with Kohl leaving at CIA insistent and von Weizsäcker only agreeing to recognise the vote to replace him with Genscher because he feared that Kohl was incapable; the president hadn’t intended to see West Germany surrender, rather the opposite. Still, both men were out of the country and not with their fellow citizens.
Security was paramount for the Munich Government though. In the days before the war commenced a trio of West German senior ministers had suffered unfortunate fates. Social Affairs Minister Norbert Blüm had just plain disappeared, Interior Minister Wolfgang Schäuble had been killed when his government car was blown up with him inside of it and Minister for Special Affairs (a minister without portfolio) Rudolf Seiters had been detained by agents from the domestic security service BfV before he died in mysterious circumstances while in their custody. In addition, other politicians such as the Minister-President of North Rhine-Westphalia – West Germany was a federation with the states having their own governments – and senior SDP figure Johannes Rau had been shot dead while his CSU counterpart from Bavaria Max Streibl had survived an assassination attempt conducted against him. Precautions had to be taken by the Munich Government for their own personal safety and the French had provided much of that. Large elements of the BfV and the foreign intelligence service BND had seen acts of treason and desertion with worries over the rest of those organisations left intact being able to do their duties. There were West German soldiers in the south of the country who hadn’t given in and whom answered to the Munich Government yet they were all needed at the frontlines.
Now, with the second round of fighting fully underway following the brief interlude which had been the ceasefire, southern West Germany faced Soviet-led Warsaw Pact efforts to conquer it and drive to the Rhine. This would mean the destruction of all that Waigel and his government represented: a free, democratic West Germany who would fight for their own sovereignty and alongside their allies. Wörner was still trying to convince the rest of NATO that his fellow countrymen could be trusted and they only had to look at the Munich Government and the actions of the Bundeswehr across Bavaria and Baden-Württemberg to see that the West Germans could still fight. There were Warsaw Pact forces inside Bavaria along the Danube after crossing from Czechoslovakia and more whom had penetrated the Alps through the West German-Austrian border.
Waigel was at the head of all West German efforts now to resist the invaders, and not just here in the south where the French were certainly not in occupation. He had personally secured the support of Ernst Albrecht, the Minister-President of Lower Saxony who had taken over authority from the vanquished Flensburg Government in controlling West German forces spread across Ostfriesland, in working with NATO there and also had telephone conversations with both Bush and Thatcher to assure those two leaders that the French were correct to have faith in his ability to lead. West Germany was aiming to give full support to the war and there would be no more betrayals of its NATO partners who were fighting and dying for his country’s survival. To give proof of his commitment to NATO, Waigel had told the leaders of Britain and the United States just as he had told the French when it came to the Aachen Government: do with them as you wish.
Genscher and the former junior ministers he had promoted to senior positions in his attempt at a government, along with figures from the military & the security services, who had all set themselves up in Aachen were now in French custody. They were somewhere in the south of France, Waigel hadn’t asked exactly where. He knew though that the French weren’t about to kill them or anything like that, yet they were certainly not be treated in a manner which a lawyer would like. The French were trying to get to the bottom of why Genscher did as he did and the motivations of his co-conspirators in deposing Kohl too. What West Germany’s new leader wasn’t happy with though, yet kept silent on the issue for now, was French behaviour in other matters concerning another two prominent politicians and fellow countrymen of his. Waigel had been alarmed at how Saarland Minister-President Oskar Lafontaine and the Green politician & activist from Hessen Joschka Fischer had both been detained by the French and remained in their custody. Neither Lafontaine and Fischer had been supportive or Genscher’s Aachen Government nor were agents of the Soviets; Waigel saw them as misguided in their attempts to speak out against current French influence in their country rather than traitors.
The French were holding them though, which regrettably gave credence to those others who said that West Germany was under foreign occupation in the south as it was in much of the north too. Waigel wanted to change that opinion that was gaining traction, but for now there were still more pressing matters such as the war to be focused upon.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 14:21:32 GMT
Nine – Alliances & Assassinations
February 24th 1990 Command Bunker #5, Beneath Tikrit, Saladin Province, Iraq
Primakov had returned to Iraq and Saddam met his long-term ally down in the bunker underneath the city in the Iraqi President’s tribal home. He wanted to show to the Soviet intelligence agent and diplomat that he was in control here. All of the officers were smartly dressed and ceased doing their duties when Saddam came in with Primakov to stand to attention and salute their leader. Everywhere inside had been cleaned thoroughly overnight by a maintenance staff of trusted workers who had then departed afterwards less they be seen by those of importance.
Once the initial greeting and inspection of facilities was out of the way, the two of them met inside an internal room within the bunker. Saddam had his guards posted at the door while inside were just him, his visitor and two translators.
Saddam was his usual bombastic self in front of an important foreign guest.
Iraq’s armed forces had fought the Israelis and done very well in battle. There hadn’t been a defeat inflicted upon the Republican Guards, despite what Primakov might have heard: that was all Israeli lies. Instead, the Israeli Army had taken fearful losses and after inflicting those, the Republican Guards were reorganising themselves ready to fight again and get on with the task of liberating Palestine. Iraqi rockets had devastated Israel’s cities and left tens of thousands dead in those while the Iraqi Air Force had shot down at least a hundred Israeli aircraft. The war was going just as planned and would soon be won.
It would be helpful, Saddam added, if the Soviet Union was able to provide some of that support it had promised. Iraq could, would win the fight against the Israelis on their own, yet Soviet resupply of Scuds and aircraft would speed that along. Iraq would pay for those, of course, yet there might be a slight delay with the transfer of monies.
Primakov reminded Saddam of the logistical difficulties of getting such military equipment to Iraq. All current access routes from the Soviet Union to Iraq were at the moment unavailable through air, sea and land means. In addition, at the moment his country was engaged in a worldwide struggle against the West and needed all weapons available. In time, soon enough, there would be a resupply available for Iraq, just not at the moment; the Soviet Union trusted Iraq too when it came to the issue of payment.
What Primakov suggested that the Iraqis do was to hold the line in Jordan. The Soviet Union was pleased that Iraq had won their great battle against the Israelis but now was the time to consolidate that victory before overextending themselves. The Syrians to the north of where the Iraqi Republican Guards were located had failed to defeat the Israelis and if the Iraqis moved too far forward they would expose themselves. Moreover, Primakov also advised that Saddam look for further, less-costly opportunities elsewhere. Iraq could use its alliance with Yemen and connections with like-minded Arabs across the region to destabilise the Gulf Arab regimes who were allied with the Americans in not just supporting the Pakistanis in Afghanistan but also hosting US military forces throughout the region. Bringing down the regimes in Riyadh, Kuwait City, Manama, Doha, Abu Dubai / Dubai and Muscat was possible and doing so would leave Iraq, under Saddam’s leadership naturally, as the undisputed master of the Arab World.
Saddam considered what was said for a few moments before he would make a response. He regarded many of those rulers in the nations along the Persian Gulf to be his enemies as much as the Iranians, the Israelis and the Syrians too. The monarchies in those countries had supported him in his war against Iran as he was fighting for the shared aims of all Sunni Arabs, but afterwards they had betrayed him, those in Kuwait and the United Arab Emirates especially. Yet he was in no position at the moment to fight them, even covertly as Primakov said. The Soviets were far from thinking of Iraq’s interests in Primakov’s ideas on that matter: they wanted the Americans driven out of the region to hurt the United States on a geo-political level.
When it came to the military situation on the ground in Jordan, Saddam knew the truth of the matter. The Republican Guards had been annihilated by Israeli military action. With his arsenal of Scuds almost expended and his warplanes shot out of the sky every time they got airborne, he needed immediate Soviet military aid. He had a back-up plan to avert the defeat suffered yet wasn’t sure if his idea of declaring victory in Iraq’s efforts to stop Israel from conquering Jordan and then pulling his troops back to the Iraq-Jordan border would work in the long run. His people would believe it because all methods of communication for them were under his control, but he was concerned that the doubters elsewhere in the Middle East would believe it. If the rest of the region knew that Iraq had been beaten, then Iraq could be seriously threatened with invasion.
He decided to ask what further ideas Primakov had rather than committing himself to anything at the moment. If his Soviet guest said something that he liked he would make use of it, otherwise he would just let the man talk and keep him happy. Saddam was just about to start talking through his interpreter again when the door to the room burst open.
Uday Hussein, Saddam’s eldest son and someone more trouble than he was worth, burst in with a furious look upon his face. He was shouting that they needed to leave at once and there was no time to waste.
Saddam was equally mad. The interruption was outrageous!
He had brought Uday back from his exile in Switzerland to head up his personal security but also to give him another chance to prove his worth and learn how to lead. Acting in this manner in front of an important foreign guest, showing panic like he was and barging one of Primakov’s concerned KGB bodyguards out of the way, certainly wasn’t that. Whatever the issue was, whatever the Israelis had done now, surely wasn’t that urgent and…
Saddam never got to finish that thought. His life ended in an instant along with that of Uday Hussein, Yevgeny Maksimovich Primakov, four more Soviets and thirty-one other Iraqis inside the bunker when the bomb went off. In the enclosed underground space, everyone present was killed either directly by the blast or by suffocation when the air was sucked out of their lungs when a thermobaric device exploded.
Those who planted the bomb and organised its delivery on the ground – who posed as cleaning staff and whom facilitated their security clearance – would all be killed within days too in the fall out from the assassination. Qusay Hussein, the twenty-three year-old surviving son of Saddam, sought to take control of Iraq afterwards and his first actions were to kill those whom his departed brother had discovered at the very last moment were behind the bombing. Uday had been too late but Qusay would avenge him and their father.
Blood would be spilt across Iraq yet those truly behind the assassinations underneath Tikrit, far away at Langley in Virginia, would escape the wrath of Qusay. In addition, once he moved onwards from Iraqi traitors, the departed Saddam’s son would – as was usually the case in the Middle East – blame the Israelis and Mossad rather than the CIA.
February 24th 1990 Norden, Ostfriesland, Lower Saxony, West Germany
The commander’s conference was taking place outside the small town of Norden in the northwestern corner of West Germany. Here in Ostfriesland, everywhere south of the Ems-Jade Canal apart from an extended area near Wilhelmshaven, was in enemy hands. The northern reaches of the Frisia Peninsula – as well as the small offshore islands too – remained under NATO control with until last night a mixed force of West German regulars and reserves had been the only defending troops present. The area had been almost callously ignored by the Warsaw Pact apart from their terror bombing attacks as they focused instead on advancing westwards into the northern Netherlands. That (hopeful) mistake would cost the Soviets and their puppets dear though if the men gathered in tents making plans had their way.
There were now significant NATO forces who had arrived in the region with no evidence that the enemy was aware of them and their intention was to attack southwards… and soon too.
Those forces which had slipped into Ostfriesland under the cover of darkness and made a soft, unopposed landing here had come from Norway. There were light infantry, mountain troops, paratroopers & airmobile infantry and light armour: the Allied I Corps. This mixed force of mainly American, British and West German victorious men, though joined by troops from many other nations including a number of battle-hardened Canadian, Luxembourgish and Spanish men, had formerly been the Allied Command Europe Mobile Force – Land (ACE MF-L). All had been sent to northern Norway right on the eve of war and fought with the Norwegians there – and later with US Marines too – to retake those airports and coastal anchorages which the Soviets had seized and then afterwards lost. Their West German commander had been passionately vocal in opposing the order to conduct a ceasefire which had come from his home country in the middle of the month and instructed his staff to ignore that illegal command. Those multi-national troops which he commanded had given it their all as well as lost many of their comrades yet seen victory after victory occur as their opponents were eventually wiped out.
Now, Generalmajor Carstens was back in West Germany… and he had brought his men with him.
NORWESTAG had sent to Norden senior officers to serve with Carstens’ staff. There were Dutchmen and Britons as well as a few West Germans. These men had seen action against the Soviets across Lower Saxony and into the Netherlands. They were with the Allied I Corps to make sure that it was understood that there was a different enemy to the light and cut-off forces which had been fought in Norway as well as to coordinate efforts between NATO troops fighting in the Netherlands and those which had arrived in Ostfriesland ready to aid them. This meeting at Norden was Carstens’ show, yet it was the men from NORWESTAG which would conduct much of the briefing especially in the form of intelligence summaries and external fire support which would be given to the Allied I Corps.
The troops which had arrived here had come through the small harbours along the coast at Norddeich, Greetsiel, Bensersiel and Haresial. Those were usually made use of by small ferries linking the mainland to resorts on the East Frisian Islands but they had seen the transit of cargoes of men being transferred from larger vessels onto those small boats which went through them. Inland airfields around Jever and Wittmund, which had been attacked many times during the war and combat aircraft which had flown from them having departed, were put to use as well by transport aircraft that had ‘rough-field’ capabilities and also had been assisted by last-minute hasty repairs to them. The majority of the Allied I Corps was a flexible, mobile force that consisted for men and equipment meant to arrive though small-scale facilities, even those which were being fought over. There had of course been some local difficulties in getting the Allied I Corps ashore overnight and then into concealed positions before daybreak so when the moment came to strike they would be unexpected. However, none of those problems had been overwhelming, even the landing of the brigade of ‘heavy’ troops (armour) which had been added to the Allied I Corps’ order of battle and needed much effort to be spend in getting those Americans who’d come all the way from California ashore.
Carstens’ commander’s conference brought together the senior men leading many of his individual units from the divisions and brigades of combat troops to those who led his combat support and service support elements. There were plenty of officers present from various formations and nations whom he’d assembled to hear what those from the NORWESTAG staff had to say and then instruct them on their tasks. There were two more divisional major-generals – a fellow West German and an American –, brigadier-generals & brigadiers, several colonels & lieutenant-colonels as well as a couple of majors too. They had all come a long way to listen to what was to be said about what they were going to do to assist the ongoing NATO counter-offensive in Lower Saxony. Pre-conference informal talks had been about how they would use their mobility to race forward through what were reported to be Polish rear area troops and dash to seize key points far to the south where the American ground forces from NORTHAG would meet them. In addition, there had been speculation among the officers about securing crossings over the Ems to the west and the Lower Weser to the east to trap Soviet forces either side of those rivers.
There’d been some personal disagreements too though among these men all serving within the same alliance, even wearing the same uniform. Generalmajor Bernhardt, the commander of the 1st Fallschirmjager Division (with brigades of West German and British troops as well as a composite NATO force), had expressed concerns to Carstens about the ability of his men to do as tasked; Brigadier Mike Jackson who led that NATO brigade had his own doubts about his divisional commander and was certain that his corps commander knew what he was doing. Then there were the two US Army officers and their clashes: Major-General Boylan who led the 10th Infantry (Light) Division and whom seen action in Norway had fallen out with the boastful and impulsive Brigadier-General Wesley Clark who commanded the reinforced 177th Armored Brigade which was a very long way away from the Mojave Desert (Fort Irwin and the National Training Centre) but was eager to get his men into battle. Not all of them were happy either to have what US Marines they had with them here now in Ostfriesland. Instead of the corps-sized II Marine Expeditionary Force which had fought with them in Norway, there were instead the beaten and demoralised brigade of marine reservists who had been evacuated from Schleswig-Holstein present and needing much time and assistance to get combat-ready again.
Several logistics officers – wearing many uniforms – disputed the notion that the Allied I Corps would be supplied through the small coastal ports which they had. Men were one thing, but bringing in any heavy gear – as had been the case with Clark’s tanks & tracked armoured vehicles – was going to be extremely difficult. That particular landing had been made at Norddeich, near to where they now, through a tiny port which could easily be closed by enemy air attacks such as Emden and Wilhelmshaven had been several weeks ago. The fighting spirit of the men was one thing, so too was the élan of several combat officers, but logistics won wars. If an immediate link-up wasn’t made with the advancing forces coming northwards and the rivers either side not shut to enemy use, then the Allied I Corps would be in trouble if it had to fight a series of major battles where what little supplies coming forward would be rapidly used up. This was meant to be addressed at the commander’s conference and those logistics men hoped for satisfactory answers.
When the conference got underway, Carstens gave his opening pep talk as he congratulated his men on getting ashore as they had done. He assured them that NATO was running it’s own maskirovka and the Soviets had been led to believe that they were going to Denmark where the US Marines which had also left Norway had gone too. The Polish First Army south of them were on occupation duty and had first dispatched armoured reinforcements to the fighting in the Netherlands before now coming under the attack which they now faced from the two US Army rampaging army corps out of NORTHAG. There were reports – which the NORWESTAG intelligence staff would explain further – that said that wide-ranging discipline and morale problems were affecting them. Moreover, yet another Soviet field army which was entering the combat zone in Germany – this time the Sixth Guards Tank Army out of the southern Ukraine and full of reservists – was on a forward axis to move forward far to the south and its reservists manning all of those hundreds of T-55 & T-62 tanks would be coming nowhere near the Allied I Corps was to operate. The Allied I Corps was to do what it had done in Norway: take on the enemy in rapid assaults and overcome them with tenacious fighting.
He then moved to turn the meeting over to the Dutchman from NORWESTAG’s intelligence staff who was to inform them all about their Polish opponents ahead: where they were, what weapons they had and what they were capable of.
However, there was an interruption which came from a West German reserve major. The Landwehr artillery officer – one of those who commanded men here in Ostfriesland before the Allied I Corps landed – stepped forward and asked if he could ask a question. It was a breach of discipline and unbecoming of an officer. His own commanding officer, who led what had once been the 72nd Home Defence Regiment, moved to order his to respect the chain of command.
But by then another Landwehr officer within the tent but on the other side, making use of the planned distraction, had his personal sidearm out of his holster.
Between them the two West German traitors, got off seven pistol shots. Their high-level assassination attempt was a success for those who they killed though neither would personally survive to see the end results though as each ended up being shot several times themselves when other officers in the room opened fire. Too many people panicked when they shouldn’t have and bullets flew in many directions. Wesley Clark wasn’t one of those. He would afterwards claim he was a hero; he managed to save the life of the Mike Jackson, his British colleague, by stopping the bleeding inflicted upon that fallen officer to the effect that a fast-arriving combat medic was able to keep the ACE Brigade commander alive.
The pair of West German major-generals, the prime targets of their fellow countrymen, were not so fortunate though and both lost their lives along with several other NATO officers present. Enemy action in an unexpected form had halted the attack of the Allied I Corps which had been due to take place starting tonight. Marshal Gromov and the Western-TVD intelligence staff knew nothing of this, nor even that NATO had brought assault troops into Ostfriesland, because the KGB only told the Soviet Armed Forces what they needed to be told, but they would benefit from this dastardly act of strategically-targeted assassination to go after their alliance of military opponents.
February 24th 1990 Alblasserdam, Zuid-Holland, the Netherlands
No one wanted to fight the Battle of Rotterdam.
The advancing Soviets who were aiming to seize the city’s port facilities after NATO troops were clear didn’t want to fight in the urban terrain. NATO forces which had been positioned ahead to defend the approaches to Rotterdam didn’t want the fight for the city. The Government of the Netherlands didn’t want to see their second city fought over after it had been rebuilt following World War Two. Those inside, civilians and specialist stay-behind units alike, weren’t looking to see Rotterdam a battlefield.
Yet the Battle of Rotterdam was underway.
It wasn’t a comedy of errors but instead a deadly series of mistakes.
Both sides made error after error in the lead up to the full-scale warfare which came to the city all the while thinking that they were doing the right thing to avoid the situation which they were now in. The Soviets planned to avoid a direct fight for the city and only occupy it afterwards; NATO wanted time to get troops caught between the edges of the city and the advancing enemy out of the way in time. But those plans went wrong, fatally so for not just the fighting men involved but the Dutch people who ended up caught in Rotterdam as it was fought over too.
There were two divisions of the Soviet Twenty–Second Guards Army involved. The 2 GMRD and the 45 GMRD approached from the east towards the southern portion of Rotterdam. They were fighting Belgian and Dutch troops, all reservists, who had fallen back as slow as possible – taking more losses than they would have had they moved faster – before the overall intention was for the pair of divisions to turn to the southwest and engage more NATO troops throughout Zuid-Holland. NATO would do as they’d done before and evacuate the city of many people as well as military stores in the port. The Soviets were unsure if NATO would or would not demolish the port facilities themselves: they might leave them intact with a view to keeping them in-place and ready to be reused if the city was later liberated. While advancing across the central Netherlands, the fresh and not-yet veteran troops of the Twenty–Second Guards Army followed standard Soviet Army doctrine irrespective of wartime experience gained by other Soviet units on NATO territory who had disregarded much of that doctrine after initial combat. In doing this they advanced in line following guidelines in manuals, moved units around in the clear as they were trained to and used fire support to cut off escape routes for opponents in the field so they could be crushed again as they had learnt.
As to the NATO defenders, they were under Allied II Corps command. These Belgians and Dutchmen were shocked at seeing the Soviets doing this but kept their belief that this was an error or a deception where the Twenty–Second Guards Army would soon change that foolish behaviour. They didn’t believe that they would have no choice to fall back into the city and wouldn’t be able to break contact while doing so. Yet, the NATO troops ended up dragging the Soviets with them into Rotterdam with an opponent who wouldn’t let them escape either north nor south and kept up close and personal to them in retreat. Tactical intelligence showed through communications intercepts that the Twenty–Second Guards Army leadership tried to stop this happening but events on the ground away from the commanding general and headquarters staff were out of their control.
Both sides – certainly those in leadership roles – didn’t want to see urban fighting for they knew the losses which it would entail. Each was waiting though for the other side to disengage first without realising that this behaviour dragged full-scale fighting inside the southern portion of Rotterdam below the Nieuwe Maas River.
No city in West Germany had been directly fought over. NATO had defended the approaches to Bremen, Hamburg, Hannover and Kiel but at the crucial moment pulled away just before the fighting reached them or withdrew fast through them. The Soviets had only gone in to occupy them afterwards with occupation troops rather than combat forces. The casualties for attackers and defenders alike, plus those who were unable to or refused to leave inside a city, were regarded as being far too much for either side to stomach. Only in West Berlin had been the situation different yet the fighting there was just a skirmish – a drawn-out one – in comparison to the scale which was being seen in the Battle of Rotterdam.
Inside those West German cities which hadn’t been the scene of open warfare there had been selective engagements which stay-behind teams – the Gladio network – had taken part in. There was sniping, explosions, arson and sabotage occurring. Intelligence-gathering from patriots on the ground fighting to make the occupation impossible was going on in those places. This was done against those occupation troops who weren’t ready to oppose it despite training to do so. Now in Rotterdam, the Twenty–Second Guards Army wasn’t in a position to oppose such activities either yet they didn’t need to. The city was alight and buildings destroyed. There was nowhere for the stay-behind units to operate from, no sullen and frightened population to shelter within, and no laziness to exploit among those on sentry duty. The dirty war which had been planned to have been fought against the Soviets in Rotterdam, where casualties among the civilian population who were held captive by the invader were to be low, was impossible to fight when the city was being fought over as it now was.
However, against the backdrop of the Battle of Rotterdam which had begun late yesterday, four men had come to the city’s outskirts to kill a man in a purposeful targeted assassination that would have all the hallmarks of a Gladio mission. It was a foreign operation though, not one conducted by Dutchmen.
There were four Belgians who had come to Alblasserdam and who’d volunteered for this mission. Afterwards they were told that they shouldn’t be captured alive to be interrogated… with the rest of that left unsaid but understood: they were to take their own lives rather than answer questions. They were instructors from the Equipes Spéciales de Reconnaissance – the ESR, Belgium’s military special forces – school and widely-experienced in peacetime. Today was the first time they were to see some real action though after years of training for themselves and others. Their comrades from the field units of the ESR had fought and died across in West Germany and now their former teachers were here in the Netherlands finally seeing combat too.
A parachute insertion had taken place overnight where they had dropped from a USAF C-130E Hercules transport flying low into nearby Papendrecht. This was a NATO mission to further the aims of the alliance which Belgium was part of yet it really was an American show with only the actual assassins being non-US servicemen. The communications and equipment had all been supplied by the Americans and at the other end of their satellite link-up was a US Army Green Beret colonel.
The four ESR men had been told that this couldn’t have been done with an aircraft-dropped bomb and it had been explained to them in general terms about the so-called evidence which they were to plant for the other side to find. They had volunteered for this. They had lawful orders to take out a valid military target. The operation was risky for them, yes, but it was what they were here to do.
Divided into a pair of two-man teams – a spotter and a shooter – the Belgians were split up across Alblasserdam. The Americans said that their target would be in one of the two exact places that they had their eyes on at an exact time. They asked themselves where that intelligence had come from and if it could be trusted.
The Belgians had to have faith in what they had been told but it was difficult for them. This whole operation seemed too perfect for them to believe and the assurances which they had been given had seemed… worrisome.
Then the command column, armoured vehicles mounting multiple antenna complete with security troops atop those, arrived at the spot where Team #2 was. The Soviets were right on time and where they were meant to be.
The ESR men were amazed! They asked themselves what kind of intelligence did the Americans have to get them this information.
More than just the arrival of those vehicles, from out of one of the wheeled BTR-70s came their target. He wore no helmet and his security men were looking around and not up at rooftops. It was certainly the correct man: General-Lieutenant Fyodor Reut, the commander of the Twenty–Second Guards Army.
Team #2 took their shot.
A lone 7.62mm bullet flew away from a Soviet-built SVD Dragunov sniper rifle downwards towards it target. Reut was struck in the back of his unprotected head and there was then an almighty mess left behind of what had once been the man who’d come a long way in the past week from the Moscow Military District.
The distinctive crack of that rifle came just as there was an explosion a few miles to the west, closer to the fluid and porous frontlines were in Rotterdam itself. That was further, if unintended cover for the shot to disguise its source like the selective emplacement to lower enemy detection of the ESR men. The sniper dropped his rifle once his spotter confirmed the kill. The latter man then also left a six-by-four inch black-&-white photograph with the hand-written Cyrillic lettering of the target’s name on the back underneath the discarded weapon.
No policeman would fall for this, the spotter said as he led their departure. The sniper said that the Soviets who came upon this scene might want to see what they did and so it could work. Either way, where they had just left and at the other sniper/spotter position, the ‘evidence’ that a Soviet Army field general had been taken out by his own side was placed to be found.
Afterwards, the successful Team #2 and the undetected Team #1 both fast evacuated their observation and shooting points on the rooftops above warehouses. They’d left behind those Dragunovs, weapons which they trained with in peacetime as all NATO special forces units did to be ready for all opportunities in wartime, but had their own Belgian-built rifles in-hand now. They had a difficult journey to make to the extraction point where a helicopter was to meet them.
This involved crossing hostile territory through the rear of the now-leaderless Soviet field army here in the Netherlands. Great danger would come their way, yet they were highly-trained and had a belief that if they could kill their target with such ease then they could get away from here too.
Rotterdam was still being fought over in place as the Belgians ran. They had undertaken their mission here hoping that it would play a part in making sure that in later days the same scenes wouldn’t be necessary around Antwerp or even Brussels. Their mission, they’d been told, would cause mistrust and suspicion. It might even cause chaos and even targeted fraternal bloodletting. However, it was about more than killing a Soviet general and halting command-&-control of one field army. There was a bigger picture to consider, one which involved intelligence of the highest-level being passed to NATO for the assassination here as well as other events (see the unfortunate Spetsnaz at Flamborough Head), yet not one which the ESR men making their escape knew of.
February 24th 1990 Dhahran International Airport, the Eastern Province, Saudi Arabia
Moments after the VC-137B aircraft in USAF markings finished taxiing after landing here in Saudi Arabia, the truck moved out of its hidden position and the driver accelerated forwards. Speed was quickly gained as the vehicle raced across the open flight ramp from out the hangar and towards the converted Boeing-707 which had just arrived from Bahrain. There was pure determination in the mind of the driver to smash his vehicle into that aircraft as well as to detonate the explosives carried aboard the truck. He had already pledged his life and been promised a just reward in Paradise for the success which he had affirmed he would gain. When there came the rattle of rifles firing and the popping sounds of bullets impacting the truck he didn’t fear for his own safety. Even if he was struck by one, he told himself as he continued to move forwards, those bullets weren’t about to stop him. All he had to do was to keep going and his mission would be achieved. The aircraft certainly couldn’t get out of his way and he was going to destroy it any moment now…
The truck blew up a hundred odd yards short of the American VIP transport aircraft. Luck was on the side of those aboard that aircraft – passengers and crew – as one of the hundreds upon hundreds of bullets directed against the truck set of a chain of events inside where the majority of the carried explosives prematurely detonated in a furious blast.
Parts of the truck, pieces of the body of the deceased driver and elements of the explosives which hadn’t been set off blew in every direction. Saudi and American security personnel were killed and injured by the blast and a small crater left on the flight ramp. The assassination of those aboard that large aircraft had been averted though there were many other casualties.
Immediately afterwards, a series of desperate inquiries and investigations started as to how this had happened. Who had been in that truck? Who had built and shipped that bomb here? Who had allowed the truck to park in that hangar and made sure that it had remained unobserved? Who was behind this outrage?
And just who had come very close indeed in their attempt to killing those Americans aboard that aircraft which included not just the most senior American military officer in the Middle East but the new Vice President of the United States too?
Far away to the southwest, on the other side of Saudi Arabia, the man who’d ordered the attack at Dhahran had no idea of the failure met. He and his closest followers were currently near the city of Ta’if: not that far from Mecca. They wouldn’t receive information for at least an hour that the martyrdom operation had failed and when they did there would be natural disappointment though an understanding that they were engaged in the start of a long war and today had just one of many battles.
The tall, Saudi man who everything in the encampment outside Ta’if resolved around, Usama bin Mohammed bin Awad bin Laden, would share that disappointment that his comrades had when they were all told that the truck hadn’t destroyed the aircraft and killed those aboard. He would talk to them, counsel them to keep the faith and make sure that they all remembered what they were fighting for. Even in failure there could be success. Once word spread of how close they had come, what they had achieved despite eventual failure, there would come more volunteers to their cause and the movement which they were part of could only grow. The news would bring hope into the hearts of many who were downcast in their current situation and inspire many of them that they too could act.
bin Laden would have a far stronger reaction – one of inward fury – in later days though when his contacts within the Saudi establishment informed him of whom had come so close to death. The operation on the ground there near the Persian Gulf may have been planned from here near to the Red Sea yet the fine details were down to those there in Dhahran. bin Laden would wish that he had sent more than one man when he discovered that instead of an aircraft full of US Marines come from Bahrain to begin the process of establishing an American colony in the land of his birth there had been such important people instead.
The intelligence had been faulty and a great opportunity missed!
Back in Dhahran, Vice President Jim Webb and General Norman Schwarzkopf were rushed away from the airport. There was a major security effort underway to search the entire airport grounds and the surrounding region too, though both men thought that that was a little bit too late!
Nervous Secret Service men with Webb and US Army specialist military police acting as personal protection for the Central Command’s commanding general were more alarmed than their two charges and worried over what further threats which they might face when here in Saudi Arabia. The fear had been of Soviet KGB assassins, but the truck which had charged the aircraft had been something different indeed and a threat which they had been unable to counter. They’d come very close to not just losing their own lives but failing in their duty too in the most spectacular of fashions.
Two different helicopters were used to fly Webb and Schwarzkopf out of the airport and to the nearby Saudi Aramco complex. There was security on the ground to meet them and that whole fenced off area was on the highest of alerts already. No one was happy with how many armed men there were and more were called for to make sure that any second assassination attempt here was defeated long before there was even an outside chance of success. Another senior American official, Deputy National Security Adviser Robert Gates, who’d been in Saudi Arabia since yesterday, met with them there and then went with them when they went to see the gathering of Gulf Arab dignitaries who were already here and not yet aware of what had happened at the airport.
The Dhahran conference then got underway.
The government of Saudi Arabia, five more nations of the Persian Gulf along with senior figures from both the United States and Pakistan all started their discussions concerning the immediate future of the region. News from earlier in the day of what had occurred in Tikrit with the demise of Saddam – which Gates was to officially confirm – as well as the future for Iraq were up for discussions. What was to be done with the situation on the ground in Jordan, the ongoing fighting in Syria & Lebanon and continued Gulf Arab support to Pakistan as its war in Afghanistan continued were further items that these talks were to cover.
Only a Pakistani military intelligence figure (from the ISI organisation) and one of the senior Saudis (another spook; this member of the Royal Family served within the Saudi GID) present had ever heard of the man currently down in Ta’if. bin Laden was the head of a group calling itself al-Qaeda, which had global ambitions despite being small and only formed in 1988, but there were other matters on their mind at the moment as the alliance being formed here in Dhahran tonight was meeting.
One dedicated, patient religious extremist who claimed that he and his few hundred men had previously defeated the superpower which they were all discussing overcoming themselves was just not important at the moment.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 14:24:04 GMT
Ten – Parley
February 25th 1990 The Grand Banks, near the Newfoundland coast, the North Atlantic
‘Shoot first and ask questions later’ was not a Royal Navy operational procedure in peace or war. The North Atlantic was an active war zone and HMS Boxer had already seen much action. When the warnings came of reported enemy submarines or aircraft – the Soviet Navy’s now-sunk surface fleet hadn’t been on this side of the ocean – everyone aboard stood ready to open fire at a moment’s notice though there had always been thought and consideration given by Commander Tim Laurence (Boxer’s captain) first as to what he was about to do as per his training. There was always the chance that a friendly, allied vessel or aircraft had been misidentified. Yes, there was danger in pausing to confirm before opening fire, but to open fire without thought and on impulse was not how officers such as he in the Royal Navy had been schooled to act.
It was this calmness under pressure by Commander Laurence which allowed the Soviet submarine K-60 to surface three hundred odd yards away and her blinker light to start flashing at the Boxer instead of the vessel being blown to smithereens the moment that it had been detected. Of course, there had been the temptation to launch the torpedoes which the frigate carried then as well, with the submarine certainly having no chance of escape, but again there had been a wait given to see what was actually happening first.
The blinker sent a message through the early morning light that the Boxer’s bridge crew was able to understand as it was a lone word in English repeated many times in Morse code.
That word was ‘parley’.
Back to the west, about forty miles behind where the Boxer was now, there was a convoy of thirteen ships out of Halifax en route to Europe. The cargoes carried by those civilian vessels varied from vehicle & aviation fuel to ammunition to military equipment spare parts to countless other smaller military items many of which for use by soldiers fighting for NATO. The British-crewed frigate was one of several escorts assigned on the surface with air support in the form of land-based aircraft flying from Canada, Bermuda, Iceland and Scotland also assigned to provide coverage during different parts of the voyage. The convoy was one of many at sea and the majority of ships which formed it already having made at least two crossings over the North Atlantic beforehand during the war.
The Boxer was operating out ahead, looking for submarines, and had found one.
It was a Type-627A vessel (known to NATO as the November class) and in service with the Soviet Navy’s Northern Fleet based out of the Kola Peninsula. The nuclear-powered vessel was more than twenty-five years old and even back when new in the Sixties had never been a serious technological threat to the navies of NATO. This morning though she had surprised the Boxer by surfacing fast and only then being detected. The weather conditions were rather bad and the Lynx helicopter carried by the frigate had been stuck aboard by the wind and rain, but the K-60 should have been spotted far earlier than she was with all of the noise she made.
There would be time for recriminations later for the hydrophone operators, Commander Laurence reminded himself when he came up to the bridge to see the submarine for himself. In the meantime, he used the low-light binoculars to look at the surfaced vessel up ahead that his frigate was closing in upon and he himself read the Morse code. As he’d been told when down in the Operations Room, over and over again the same series of flashes came.
Dot Dash Dash Dot space Dot Dash space Dot Dash Dot space Dot Dash Dot Dot space Dot Dash Dot Dash Dash.
Parley.
Commander Laurence presumed that there was meant to be a question mark at the end.
Before the Boxer had set sail from Devonport – not an hour before the war commenced – Captain Lawrence had been issued with a whole series of direct orders and general operational guidelines for her wartime patrol. He had been told that the Boxer was assigned to protect the sea-lanes which provided lines of communication with North America and that he was to operate all across the ocean guarded trans-Atlantic convoys during their runs to Europe but also going back the other way to the United States and Canada too; returning ships were just as important as those fully-laden. Soviet ships, submarines and aircraft were to be engaged when spotted and identified as being hostile. NATO’s established chain-of-command for North Atlantic operations were to be followed and the Boxer was to work with Britain’s allies.
Commander Laurence and his crew had done just that. They had made three runs across the ocean and were just starting out on their forth one. In doing so, the Boxer was officially claiming credit for the ‘kill’ of one Soviet submarine on the war’s sixth day and an ‘assist’ in the elimination of another on the eleventh day (hours before the ceasefire) when an American P-3 had dropped a torpedo on the frigate’s acquired & tracked target.
In the guidelines given, Commander Laurence had been told that there were moments where he would probably have to use his own judgement in tricky situations. The Boxer might come across a ship flying the flag of a neutral when it was clearly not. There might be an incident of a mutiny aboard a vessel where the crew or elements of decide that they might no longer want to fight. In addition, there had been instructions to him to make his own decision if he came across the Soviet vessel which might want to surrender… or talk about doing such as the K-60 appeared to be doing now.
No black flag had been run up from the conning tower – the internationally-recognised and traditional signal of parley – from the submarine which the Boxer now reached. Parley was the only word being used over the Morse code, not truce or surrender. Parley itself meant to talk about a truce, to discuss the terms.
Commander Laurence could only assume that this was the one solitary English word known to cover the broader definition of what those aboard the K-60 meant. He still had his frigate’s weapons trained upon the submarine but he wanted to believe that that signal which they were sending actually meant that there were intentions of the submarine giving up the fight. It felt right; those aboard the submarine surely would no longer want to keep fighting.
He was with this belief, though there was the issue now of how to arrange that without the Boxer having a Russian-speaker aboard and communications at the moment only going to happen in this weather via visual signals.
It was certainly going to be an interesting experience indeed!
February 25th 1990 Israeli Defence Forces Headquarters, The Kirya, Tel Aviv, Israel
All through this morning, General Shomron had been receiving news about the activities of the Defence Minister who was up in Syria near the frontlines outside Damascus. Each time something new came into the communications centre here at the IDF Chief-of-Staff’s command bunker, he would be further outraged at what Ariel Sharon was up to.
Again and again, General Shomron sent out firm instructions that the Defence Minister was to be escorted out of the area and back to the Golan Heights at least, into Israel itself preferably. His orders were being ignored though. Sharon himself had interjected himself inside the chain-of-command and was telling those local commanders on the ground that his authority override that of military in the situation which he found himself in. He wouldn’t talk himself on the satellite-radio link-up with The Kirya and had the IDF personnel there repeat what he said instead. The Deputy IDF Chief-of-Staff, Major-General Ehud Barak, was currently on a helicopter heading that way to personally intervene. Southern Syria was still an active war-zone with no ceasefire, truce or armistice underway and the Syrians still had the capability to strike despite the series of defeats which they had taken in battle.
If Sharon was hurt or killed – maybe even taken prisoner! – then…
General Shomron had no choice but to place a call to the Prime Minister of Israel and gain his intervention.
Prime Minister Shamir was informed of what was going on. He was told by General Shomron that overnight the Defence Minister had made an authorised visit to the Golan Heights and met with the Northern Command staff operating at a forward location near Ani’am. It was supposed to be a morale-boosting trip lasting a couple of hours where he would meet with service personnel at the field headquarters and also attend a briefing on the overall military situation in Syria. Major-General Yossi Peled and Sharon had then a private meeting before soldiers from Peled’s personal guard escorted the two of them down to the edge of the Golan Heights and into occupied Syria. They had visited a battlefield six miles past the pre-war frontlines in the early hours where Israeli armour had smashed apart the Syrian Army.
That initial excursion was unauthorised though General Shomron had only been a little concerned when first told about that. He could easily foresee how that could have happened with a man like Sharon and his forceful personality riding roughshod over the worries of others. The Defence Minister would have wanted to go there and Peled would have been browbeaten into accepting. What happened afterwards, and was continuing to occur, was unacceptable though. General Shomron informed the Prime Minister that at the moment Sharon was on his way to Damascus International Airport. He was travelling in a convoy with junior officers – acting against Peled’s orders too – on their way there on a resupply mission to the IDF troops which held that wrecked facility. Roadblocks manned by units sent firm orders to halt and turn back the convoy had been intimidated by Sharon and he’d had The Kirya informed that he wanted to make a visit to the troops there to boost their morale as well.
General Shomron asked the Prime Minister to contact his Defence Minister himself and get him to come back. The danger to his life, and the blow which that would bring to Israel, was far too great. The Syrians had been beaten in battle after battle but they could still fight back when and where they wanted, often in foolhardy yet deadly attacks. If they got wind that Sharon was in that convoy they’d throw everything that they had at it; more lives than just Sharon’s were at stake.
There had been no questions from Shamir as he’d been told all of this, only silence on the other end of the connection. When he finally did make a response, he spoke with haste and told General Shomron to ‘let Arik do what he must’.
Further fury boiled inside the IDF Chief-of-Staff when there came the sound of laughter over the telephone. He realised that there were others on the connection and recognised the voice of Moshe Arens; the Foreign Minister said the name ‘Assad’ to someone else with him and the Prime Minister. General Shomron, who was meant to be the commander-in-chief of ongoing current military operations, realised that he had been cut out of the loop. The politicians were up to something and he hadn’t been told. As was his right befitting his position, he should have been though.
Politely, but firmly, he told them that he needed to be informed of what was happening.
Shamir, Arens and Shavit (the Mossad director) each gave partial apologies to General Shomron over the telephone for leaving him out of the loop. Furthermore, Shavit said that one of his top people was already on his way to The Kirya to brief General Shomron even before the IDF Chief-of-Staff’s call: there’d been an unforeseen delay. Regardless, what was going on in Syria at the moment with Sharon was a secret of the highest levels and only those who needed to know had been informed. With reflection, General Shomron should have been told long before now, but, alas…
The Defence Minister was going to meet Bassel al-Assad, the eldest son of the Syrian President and his nominated successor.
What the two of them would be discussing would be the initial terms of an official ceasefire to come into effect across Syria and Lebanon. Their clandestine meeting – at the airport where Israel was in control of – needed to be kept secret for the time being because there would be many opposed to any form of an ending of the war in Syria. The Soviets would surely try to intervene and so too was the possibility of rebellious Syrians as well.
Only Sharon could go to Damascus and meet Assad’s son. The Defence Minister hadn’t been given such an important, prestigious position in the government following the pre-war reshuffle at the beginning of the month – when hostilities broke out in Europe – for nothing. He was a national hero in Israel and an able (if retired) military commander. The Syrians would respect him and his word when meeting with Sharon as opposed to someone of lesser standing. He could bring the Syrians the negotiating table to first discuss parley before anything else where others might fail to achieve that.
Arens reminded General Shomron of the fears that they all had about an end game to Israel’s current wars with both Iraq and Syria. Saddam might be dead and Assad’s forces beaten in battle outside of their capital, but the immediate future was uncertain with regard to both countries that Israel was fighting. They each were known to maintain stocks of chemical and biological weapons. In such a nightmare scenario where those might be used, Israel would ultimately ‘win’ an exchange of weapons of mass destruction – thermonuclear warheads trumped nerve gases or germs – but that win would follow a Second Holocaust of the Jewish people. Israel needed to bring to an end the war now. The Americans had dealt with Saddam and how Israel would address the issue of Assad being able to get out of this war pretending that he had some pride left.
While still angry at not being told sooner, and not willing to forget that, General Shomron gritted his teeth and only gave the politicians his full agreement as to their actions and goals. Of course he wanted to see an end to the war. He understood the danger from it continuing to go on and Israeli soldiers were still dying on the frontlines even if there had been no more great battles. He ended the call with them after saying that he’d recall his deputy Barak at once…
…yet still couldn’t believe how they hadn’t intended to tell him all of this until it was done. There were some secrets that people couldn’t understood needed to be shared further than they were. He told himself that he was dealing with amateur great schemers!
February 25th 1990 Revolutionary Armed Forces bunker, south of Havana, Cuba
Comandante en Jefe Raúl Castro had listened to rather than watched another one of Fidel’s broadcasts from Guantanamo Bay. His brother had told the world – at least those able to hear anyway – that Guantanamo Bay belonged to Cuba and always would. A great injustice had been set right and the Cuban nation was reunited. After thirty-one long years, the final goals of the Revolution had been achieved with Cuba as one and the norteamericanos banished from the island never to return.
He’d also stated that Cuban forces who held American soil weren’t about to leave anytime soon either. The United States could have the Florida Keys back (he spoke as if all were under Cuban occupation) and their captured prisoners of war when a public apology had been made, an indemnity paid and there no more of their cowardly air attacks being made against Cuba.
Until those conditions were met, there would be no weakness in the fighting spirit of the Cuban people. There’d be no parley, no talk of a ceasefire or armistice and no peace conference. Cuba would fight until it got the victory which was deserved, even if that meant that each and every Cuban had to give his and her life for that victory.
Jefe Castro thought it was a good speech, all things considered.
He’d heard Fidel make better ones and also worse ones too. Perhaps it had been better to view it on the television rather than listen on the radio. A couple of those here inside this bunker said so, though he wasn’t sure of their honesty on that matter. For far too many, undying loyalty to everything Fidel said and did was the natural order of things. However, there’d been the look on the faces of some of those men which Jefe Castro had seen when the bunker had shaken last night after American bombs had fallen to the ground up above: those had been expressions of pure terror as they realised how close the B-52s had come to killing them all.
Fidel had spoken an hour ago though, long before his brother had received the updated intelligence summary that he just had… which meant that everything which had been said from Guantanamo Bay was meaningless.
The norteamericanos were far from on the verge of defeat. They weren’t about to lose the war against the Soviets and their allies in either Europe, the Middle East or East Asia. Everything had gone wrong for the cause of Moscow in those wide theatres of warfare. Furthermore, their military forces which could be employed against Cuba were stronger than initially thought. All of the earlier intelligence had all been wrong, especially on the latter matter.
There had been an overestimation – to put it kindly – in how much US military power had been sent far overseas. Cuban intelligence efforts had either been faulty or they had been deceived. The norteamericanos had deployed their majority of their full-time, regular assets far away to Europe and Korea along with a significant portion of their reservists that had moved afterwards. Yet, there had been some regulars and a great number of reservists who had not gone so far away from the United States. Some of those were kept back for regional emergencies or needed extensive training while being mobilised in-place.
The result of this was that the belief that Cuba had operated under where the United States could be attacked as it was and little done in retaliation was wrong. The norteamericanos showed no sign of letting up in their strategic bombing of Cuba and were marshalling forces to retake the Florida Keys. The pre-war assumption that the United States would struggle to do either of those – and focus upon the latter rather than the former should they have some strength – was false. They were doing both!
Jefe Castro had personally ordered the updated intelligence study to be conducted and had his own loyal people involved. He had been concerned that what Cuban military intelligence as well as the DGI had said earlier hadn’t been wholly truthful and now he was seeing that that fear had been correct. They’d earlier reported what they had for other reasons, ones which he was working on getting to the bottom of, and those were wrong.
The B-52s were not going to be redeployed elsewhere and would remain available for bomb-runs against Cuba. There were fully-trained light infantry troops that had come up from Panama and weren’t going to the Korean Peninsula. Warships which had been in reserve or repairs and not initially available were not going out into the North Atlantic now but rather to the Caribbean. Maritime trained commandos from a whole host of units spread throughout the United States were gathering together after refresher training not to go to the Arctic but rather being consolidated in Florida.
The norteamericanos were assembling their military forces ready to win the war here. They were still fighting elsewhere around the world yet were at the same time ready to act decisively against Cuba. Jefe Castro could see all of this, he had evidence to the effect. Fidel though had just told them that he wasn’t giving in.
What, his brother asked himself, was he to do now?
February 25th 1990 Near Dinklage, Lower Saxony, West Germany
The key to a successful operation as a senior military commander is to have an effective personal staff. General Galvin had long ago been taught – through first-hand experience himself as a staffer – that the man in charge at the top needs to be surrounded by those who will allow him to do his job. He doesn’t need the most brilliant of minds, strategists and tacticians need not apply, but rather those who will support his ability to command. The posting of SACEUR brought with it the choice of picking his own staff officers from a wide talent pool and General Galvin believed that he had done well in that regard. He had staff officers, his Chief-of-Staff especially, who controlled the access of information and people to him. They made sure that he wasn’t overwhelmed with detail nor constantly bothered by visitors. It was a difficult task with the price of making a mistake being high indeed; an error could cost a war.
He didn’t blame any of his staff for what he was having to deal with this evening though. It wasn’t their fault that the Canadian Chief of the Defence Staff was making contact ready to get busy chewing his ear off. The man couldn’t be ignored and he had a legitimate reason to be making communication over the satellite link-up all the way from the other side of the world. General Galvin was making a visit to the headquarters of the US III Corps, which had torn deep into enemy-held territory in an offensive which they would later right about in the history books, but General John de Chastelain had to be heard. de Chastelain called from the Canadian military bunker at CFS Carp outside Ottawa using a link provided by the US military to make contact with SACEUR in the field. Canada’s representative on the NATO Military Council had already made the point which the Chief of the Defence Staff wanted to press yet in the interests of Allied unity, as well as professionalism, General Galvin was prepared to take some of that flak too.
Once the call was connected, de Chastelain was polite but firm. He made clear how unhappy that he and his country’s political leadership were with regard to the usage of Canadian military forces committed to NATO and under SACEUR’s command. The incident this morning at the Leda River crossings near the town of Leer was only the latest in a long list of disappointing events where Canadian lives had been sacrificed needlessly. Canada was committed to the NATO cause, de Chastelain was at pains to point out, no matter what yet there was only a finite number of young men that Canada could send overseas to be killed like they had earlier in the day. The reports which had come back to CFS Carp were of twenty-three men killed in the blink of an eye… and all for no reason at all other than carelessness, maybe stupidity. Canada had suffered several thousand military losses already, as well as hundreds of civilians killed at home, and would mourn every one of those. Many of those deaths had been avoidable too, though this accident was rather upsetting. A shrug and a comment of ‘friendly fire’ had been given in response to those deaths to the men on the ground who had just seen a NATO aircraft from an ally drop a series of bombs on their comrades. de Chastelain himself understood, and had made his Prime Minister and War Cabinet aware as well, that in the head of the moment and in the midst of battle things could go wrong. There were certainly arrogant Canadian flying officers like that American aviator too who failed to understand what they had done and made stupid, off-the-cuff remarks. Yet… this was the Canadian Airborne Regiment which had been again attacked by its own side. They’d been shelled by a Norwegian artillery unit when fighting with their allies near Bogen early in the war and then the US Navy had bombed them yesterday in a signals mix-up as they approached Leer and the Lower Ems Valley.
The Canadian Airborne Regiment was a national symbol for the Canadian Armed Forces. There were professional soldiers fighting with reservists from units across the country in an elite force that had been committed to action alongside their NATO allies in the mixed ACE Brigade–Group. They’d shed blood in Norway fighting with those allies and were doing so again down in West Germany now too. Could something be done to please stop the incidents where they were attacked by their own side? Canada was pained by the loss of every man, those fighting across Europe and in the North Atlantic, but to have their men killed by their own side and then a fool disregarding their deaths was getting too much to bare. If de Chastelain could please ask a small favour of the busy SACEUR? Would he be able to draft a short message to the Canadian Airborne Regiment stating that their service was valued and they’d done very well in assisting in the closing of the great NATO pincer move down on the North German Plain? The commanding officer would read it out to the men; it would help with morale. The men would still fight for their unit, their country and their allies – of course – but… the symbolism would go a long way.
General Galvin promised to grant the Canadian his wish before offering his personal apologies. None were needed, de Chastelain said, as these things happening in war as well as emotions which would run high, but he was grateful for the kind words.
Following the conversation, General Galvin moved back to why he had taken the dangerous trip forward up to Dinklage. The nearby small town was a ruin – like so very many in West Germany – but he was outside of it in the countryside through which American tanks had torn through earlier. The forward elements of the US III Corps were far away to the north and the northeast now where they had linked up with those light forces that had come into West Germany through Ostfriesland. The command problem with the Allied I Corps, fresh from Norway and including the Canadians, was still in need of resolution and so what advances southwards by them had been limited but still firm contact had been made almost everywhere. The US III Corps was also on the outskirts of Bremen too and pushing for the Lower Weser near there. He was here to meet with the corps commander and talk with him before moving to the west some and attending another meeting with a victorious commander, the general in-charge of the US I Corps which had been on the left flank of the advance north. The pair of commanders had done more than was expected of them and he wanted to congratulate them; they’d shut the escape route of the enemy forces across in the Netherlands faster than expected and eliminated all enemy forces thrown in their way to stop them. Four field armies – three Soviet and one Polish – lay defeated on the field of battle and another three were now surrounded with no chance of relief or the ability to flee. An enormous amount of occupied territory had been retaken, many of the enemy captured and large numbers of recently captured POWs liberated. Real celebrations could come post-war, when more victories like this had been won across West Germany, yet the corps commanders deserved to be shown that the efforts from them and their men had been amazing. Lt.-General Waller (US I Corps) had his national guardsmen drive across such unfriendly territory full of defences and with counterattacks coming against them continuously but got to Leer regardless. US III Corps commander Lt.-General Graves had taken his undefeated men back north and across the ground they’d previously retreated from through one field army, smashing into a second and facing off against an attempt by a third (admittedly a weak one) to strike at the base of their offensive.
In addition, General Galvin wanted to hear from both Waller and his counterpart Graves about the experiences of their men inside occupied territory so he could confirm some of the intelligence which he had received from other sources.
There had been ‘issues’ throughout the war with regard to the quality of the intelligence which NATO would gain on tactical, operational and strategic levels. It was known that the Soviets would use maskirovka efforts to a great effect plus there would always be the fog of war too, but on so many levels what SACEUR had been told was true just wasn’t. So many factors were involved in that from simple mistakes to enemy disinformation to stupidity: the latter where those involved tell their superiors what they think they want to hear.
General Galvin, inside a command tent where Graves’ staff was covering a short briefing concerning the progress of meetings with small surrounded Polish units throughout the corps occupied area to get them to surrender, could spend all day listing those errors made. So much that had gone wrong for NATO in this war, from how far they had been driven back westwards to the near elimination of the West Germans, had come from intelligence that had been off. A relevant case in point when here with the US III Corps would be two of those field armies that they had taken on in the past few days. Before Operation Eagle Fire had restarted after an initial setback, there had been another one of those which had slipped past them and gone into the Netherlands by NATO intelligence only to be spotted at the last minute; the Twenty–Second Guards Army was fighting in the central Netherlands but could have easily been in-place with those top-grade troops it possessed when the US I & III Corps broke free and started moving north. When intelligence said that all transport links across East Germany and into Poland – bridges, coastal ports and rail yards – were smashed to uselessness following NATO air attacks, those enemy forces had just rolled forward regardless and only just been avoided. Afterwards, the Soviet Sixth Guards Tank Army – four combat divisions with twelve hundred tanks! – had appeared from nowhere, or somewhere unseen, and charged towards the Lübbecke area. Those were understrength units with badly-led reservists fielding old T-55s with only some better T-64 tanks, but the whole field army shouldn’t have just appeared like it did under the nose of NATO intelligence efforts. Then there were those Polish reservists following them as well from the Polish Fourth Army. Aircraft in support of the US III Corps advance had been urgently re-tasked to first hit the Sixth Guards Tank Army in the field as well as to blow apart the crossings over the Weser which the Poles just put up overnight across the Weser to try to get over in number. Almost a fifth of the attacking ground forces with the US III Corps, as well as nearly half of the assigned air support too, had been redirected with urgency. Delays and casualties which shouldn’t have been incurred were.
If those had been better troops, like the Twenty–Second Guards Army which had preceded them…
General Galvin was being told that this time there were no more Soviet forces coming west. All identified major operational headquarters commands for field armies were in Western Europe now. He’d heard that before. Moreover, it was hardly comforting news. The Soviets and their allies had brought troops forward again and again past transport links which were destroyed and moved without the use of those fixed bridges and railway installations. It would take another two weeks, SACEUR was now being told, for the Soviets to bring forward a whole mass of mobilised troops from lower-grade reservists into Western Europe and flood the occupied regions with them. If he was to believe that, it gave him two weeks to win the war here. The Soviets were having as many problems with reservists as he was with intelligence, but when those troops came – no matter what the quality – there’d be no more operations on the scale of Eagle Fire again. Only the western part of the North German Plain had been recaptured. The majority of the Netherlands and Jutland, whole chunks of West Germany and most of Austria were under Warsaw Pact control. General Galvin’s task was to liberate those areas while smashing apart the enemy forces in occupation – and stop them from advancing any further forward too! – and to do so meant having accurate intelligence on the matter.
Surely an easy task, no?
Captured POWs were what General Galvin now spoke with Graves about. His subordinate – another US Army long-serving officer – had finished being told about those Poles being convinced to give in so SACEUR could discuss prisoners already taken.
The commander of the Sixth Guards Tank Army was one of the men in custody. A Troop of the 348th Cavalry, national guardsmen from Georgia protecting the flank of Graves’ men, had gotten lucky and taken that general and his smashed command group; General Galvin reckoned that they’d probably gather some well-deserved post-war fame from their exploit if the tales that came with that incident were true.
There were more POWs than just that one general though. Officers of all ranks and conscripts were in NATO custody after being captured in battle on the North German Plain. They were from many nationalities too: Soviet, Polish, and East Germany POWs had been taken. Military police units from multiple NATO armies reported up the chain of command to Graves’ headquarters and he now spoke when questioned about what recent intelligence had been gained from those captured. SACEUR asked about morale and the fighting spirit of them and was told that there was still little change as to what had previously been seen throughout the war. The Warsaw Pact soldiers were still sure in most cases that their side was winning. Even when surrounded and forced to surrender, the general feeling was temporary and soon enough the West would win the war and the situation the POWs found themselves in would be reversed. There were some of who held opposing views, as would be expected, but generally the belief upon the POWs was one of long-term optimism. There was no great relief to be free and mass attempts to defect to the West or even form exile armies or anything like that. Pre-war certainties from established thinkers that this would occur were showing again to be false.
Loyalty had been brought by the Warsaw Pact for their soldiers. Many did desert and asked for their freedom yet that was the exception not the rule. There had been a mass indoctrination conducted by the Soviets on their own troops and those of their allies and it was still holding sway over them: still, after all of this time! General Galvin knew already that the least loyal to the Soviet cause, those who were more likely to not believe the propaganda about the evils which the West had done and eventual Warsaw Pact victory, were Hungarian forces. Next in line were Czechoslovak forces (the Slovaks more than the Czechs), then the Poles before lastly the East Germans… then Soviet troops themselves. Warsaw Pact troops had rampaged throughout occupied territory as they robbed, raped, stole and murdered on a massive scale when discipline had been terrible. Overall though, orders were obeyed in the end and the troops still remained loyal. Graves was just as shocked as General Galvin was and declared that his military intelligence people were pointing to the continued loyalty coming from KGB efforts. They were doing their job of identifying, arresting and shooting troublemakers early and spreading lies throughout the ranks of the fighting men. Sometimes they made errors and paid for that, but wide success was being seen.
The US III Corps had run into many obstacles during their advance where the enemy wouldn’t yield when they should have. In a few cases there had even been outrages where parley talks were interrupted by KGB ‘actions’ yet in the main trapped forces wouldn’t surrender when beaten. They had to be blasted into submission with overkill used before, finally, after everything, the last survivors would give up… while ready to be later liberated themselves from captivity far much better than NATO POWs were being kept in.
SACEUR moved on afterwards to see what Graves was doing next.
The US III Corps commander reported that, acting under NORTHAG’s control, he was to pivot the bulk of his forces eastwards now and close up to the Weser. The British forces around Hameln were getting ready to push back the Soviets ahead of them too and a general advance, supported by Allied I Corps airborne units, was to be made to retake the whole western bank of the Weser. NORWESTAG behind was focusing upon a general effort to squeeze Soviet forces in the Netherlands – who held an area defined by the points of Groningen to the Port of Rotterdam to Arnhem – with the US I Corps to be freed up from that soon enough.
General Galvin had already spoken to those two army group commanders as well as those of CENTAG and the French First Army. An even bigger general counter-offensive, larger than Eagle Fire, was to soon get underway. To go east was the objective. It wouldn’t be easy, but with about a quarter of enemy forces now crushed or trapped in this offensive and enemy reinforcement assured to SACEUR being several weeks away, the time was now.
Victory wasn’t yet on the cards and there remained that threat that the Soviets would resort to their nuclear demonstrations again, but the only option was to attack. To try to sit back and defend when the Warsaw Pact held all of that NATO (and neutral Austrian) territory wouldn’t and couldn’t be done.
No, attack east was what it was.
END OF PART ONE
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 15:06:54 GMT
PART TWO
Eleven – Betrayal
February 26th 1990 The US Embassy, Belgrade, Yugoslavia
The President’s Special Envoy to the Balkans, Richard Armitage, didn’t have to be shaken awake like the two military men in the room with him. When the overhead light was turned on and the Diplomatic Security Service (DSS) lead agent announced that there was an emergency, he was up and out of the camp bed. On went his boots and his jacket; Armitage checked that the pistol he’d begged/borrowed from the Embassy’s Security Attaché was in there before he started moving. With Colonel Jones and Major Petraeus (from the US Marines and the US Army respectively) following close behind him, Armitage left behind the storage room where he and those two others who had come up from Greece with him had been sleeping as they were taken to where Ambassador Zimmerman was.
He was handed a satellite telephone and told that Robert Blackwill was on the line from Vicenza.
“Bob? It’s rather early in the morning.”
“Dick, this is a Rainbow situation. Get yourself and those with you into shelter. Do you understand? Rainbow is about to occur.”
“I do.” Armitage certainly did. “I’ll do so at once.”
“Good luck.” And the call ended with that.
Moments later, Armitage and nineteen other people who were currently within the US Embassy in Belgrade all crammed into the small fallout shelter in the basement. Above them there were others within the diplomatic compound who weren’t informed what was going on with the sudden rush by certain countrymen of theirs to seek such safety as they did and so were left behind.
Armitage felt bad for them, but what could he do? The fallout shelter was tiny and the urgency of the situation very real. Not once, but twice – twice! – his friend Blackwill who served on the National Security Council staff had used the codeword ‘Rainbow’ over the communications link-up. Whether the Soviets could have intercepted that call, deciphered what they had through the gibberish of jamming and then understood the word for what it meant was something else… but, still, Blackwill had used that word two times. That word had meant only one thing: Belgrade was about to be attacked with weapons of mass destruction and there was no time to waste.
Soon enough, the ground shook.
***
Arriving in Europe two days ago, after being appointed by the new Secretary of State Elizabeth Dole (whose husband he’d worked for a dozen years beforehand) to this post, Armitage had been extremely busy engaged in official and unofficial talks across Southern Europe as well as travelling throughout the region. He’d been to Italy first then Greece before making a flying visit to Turkey and afterwards going back to Greece and then up into Yugoslavia late yesterday. There’d been danger to his life as a senior representative of his government engaged in diplomatic activities in Europe while the majority of the continent was an active war zone, yet Armitage had faced danger in earlier years when back in Vietnam and hadn’t been that fazed by the danger of KGB assassins like others would have been… or so he’d told himself anyway.
When in that trio of NATO countries first, the danger hadn’t been as severe as was the case during his short time in Yugoslavia. Here in what Armitage regarded as the Balkans proper, he’d been briefed to be prepared to the possibility of the Soviets ‘taking action’ like they’d done in Paris: there was the murder of Dole’s predecessor as evidence of how serious the threat was. There would be people within Yugoslavia, Yugoslavs and foreigners, who’d want to put a bloody end to his posting and especially the diplomatic mission he was on. Moreover, Armitage was planning to go even deeper into the Balkans after his time in Belgrade.
The armed DSS agents had grave concerns about the security situation for their charge, his travelling entourage and themselves too when they reached Sofia across in Warsaw Pact member Bulgaria.
In Belgrade was where Armitage had spent late yesterday engaged in a series of brief meetings with high-level Yugoslav government, military and intelligence figures. Those had taken place at the Embassy compound rather than elsewhere in the city and were all supposed to be unofficial and secret too.
Yugoslavia was being courted by the United States into siding with NATO and the Allies in fighting the Soviets and the Warsaw Pact. Armitage was here to personally assist in bringing the Yugoslavs on-side though there were other diplomatic contacts being made too. His brief was to afterwards talk Bulgaria into dropping out of the war and to get Romania to close its borders to Soviet access as well, though this was all supposed to begin in Belgrade. Under the authority of President Bush as well as Secretary Dole, Armitage was to do what it took to achieve the geo-strategic aim of turning those Balkan nations against the Soviets to further the war aims of his country. There were those in the know back home who doubted that this could be achieved – Secretary of Defence Cheney and National Security Adviser Scowcroft were apparently actively opposed to such efforts – but Bush, Dole and the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff General Powell believed that there was a good chance of success. Yugoslavia was to join the war by attacking occupying forces in Austria and invading Hungary; then Bulgaria and Romania would turn against the Soviets as well, yet not as forcefully as the Yugoslavs.
Unfortunately, there had been a misunderstanding of the political situation in Belgrade by his government that Armitage had only discovered the full extent of not long before he’d decided that he and his team needed some sleep overnight and the Ambassador had insisted that they do that on the Embassy grounds rather than elsewhere. The Yugoslav President Janez Drnovšek (technically the ‘President of the Presidency’ as the country hadn’t had a President since Tito) didn’t have the full authority as expected to make the decision that Armitage was in the country to help him make. The Slovenian-born politician was facing strong domestic opposition to his own position – the Serbian leader Slobodan Milošević foremost among them – and talking with the Americans was the final straw for his opponents. While Armitage was telling Drnovšek that the United States would offer full support to the Yugoslav military in engaging Warsaw Pact forces throughout Austria and Hungary and trying to ease their concerns over not just Soviet nuclear retaliation but the idea of Italian troops in Yugoslav soil, the regime of President Drnovšek was crumbling.
The prospects of gaining Yugoslavia as an ally and co-belligerent were looking slim after the meetings had come to an end for the night yet nothing had been definite on that subject. Moreover, there was still the other two countries where Armitage was supposed to visit afterwards and hope remained that success in his country’s aims might be achieved in those if it wasn’t going to come from Yugoslavia due to internal difficulties.
He’d gone to sleep with a positive outlook, though with that pistol stashed in his clothes just in case.
Colonel James ‘Jim’ L. Jones Jr. was in the fallout shelter with Armitage. He too had a pistol with him, his service weapon, and the Marine Rifleman was well aware that was in his hip holster with his service belt. He’d brought it naturally when hurriedly getting dressed and worried over whether he’d have to use it for a different reason other than to shoot Soviet assassins, especially when the ground shook in Belgrade…
He shouldn’t even have been here.
The US Army officer here was directly attached to the Special Envoy’s staff, not him. Jones had been in Greece for another task when orders came for him to go up to Belgrade on that Yugoslav military aircraft that had flown down to Thessaloniki to collect Armitage and his diplomatic party. The US Marines Commandant had sent his Military Secretary to Greece to act as a troubleshooter and help facilitate the planned transfer to the country of the 1st Marine Division from the Middle East. That was to be no easy task with those US Marines on the ground in Kuwait, Bahrain, Qatar and the United Arab Emirates and their equipment either ashore with them or still aboard transport ships. The Suez Canal was still closed to maritime traffic and it wasn’t as if everything that the US Marines which were meant to be sent from the Middle East to Southern Europe needed to fight with could just be flown by air like the men could be. There were tanks, armoured vehicles, artillery and helicopters to start with – warfighting equipment – and then everything else from all of their trucks to stores to ammunition. The current plan was for all of the equipment and supplies for the 1st Marine Division to be sent to Suez by sea, transferred overland up to Port Said and then collected there by other ships already in the Mediterranean ready to be taken to mainland Europe. This strategy for redeploying the unused US Marines there in the Persian Gulf and to send them to Southern Europe to link up with those in-theater who had already seen some action earlier in the war had been chosen over the other option of a massive sealift all the way around the African continent as the political desire was to see their use against Bulgaria or possibly in the Alps.
It was a daunting and taxing task to move all that needed to be transported over such a distance. The situation in Egypt was still concerning and the worry was that undetected Soviet submarines may still intervene against this redeployment either in the Red Sea or the Mediterranean. Jones believed that those who had initially dreamed up the scheme to move the 1st Marine Division like that – politicians, not US Marines – hadn’t considered the logistical demands. The armour component to be shipped over such a distance consisted of a hundred and forty tanks, double that number of other armoured vehicles and easily two hundred pieces of artillery. There was everything else too that needed to go by sea first, then by land and back onto ships again. The Marine Riflemen themselves were easy enough to move but everything else ready hadn’t been considered for all of the difficulties that could bring. It was going to take some time to do this and problems had already occurred, hence why Jones had been in Greece before being effectively kidnapped by Armitage who’d demanded that Jones come with him to Belgrade as a military adviser because he’d heard about the reputation of his father and wanted that war hero’s son to come with him to meet with the Yugoslavs.
When meeting with those Yugoslavs, Jones had listened through the translators as they had asked Armitage about the US Marines currently in Greece and those on their way to join them: they were remarkably informed about the US military situation in many ways. The Yugoslavs had said that the Bulgarians were finished as a military force and the Greeks weren’t interested in marching on Sofia while the Turks could handle their objective of occupying the whole Black Sea coast of Bulgaria on their own without the US Marines. The 6th Marine Expeditionary Brigade hadn’t seen action since the first week of the war when it fought in the Turkish Straits region and was hardly going to land in the Crimea all by itself, neither when joined by the 1st Marine Division either. Jones had been impressed when the Yugoslavs had talked of the challenges of moving all of what the US Marines needed to fight from the Persian Gulf up to Europe. They understood how long that would take and shot down a comment from Armitage that those men would be available soon to fight in Austria should they join with the Yugoslav Armed Forces in advancing in that direction. Instead, the Yugoslavs had stated that they believed that only the 6th Brigade would be available and questioned the ability of that able but small force, especially since it lacked a credible armoured component, to fight on a battlefield in Central Europe. There were two tank divisions from Czechoslovakia held back behind the frontlines and while reserve units, their hundreds of T-55 tanks would overwhelm the 6th Brigade if the US Marines were caught out. Armitage had said that the US Marines would be fighting with Yugoslav forces and also parts of the Italian Army too, all of who had their own tanks, but he had clearly been caught out just as the Yugoslavs had said that Jones’ fellow US Marines might end up being if everything didn’t go to plan. Armitage had been seemingly unfazed by that: Jones was horrified at the thought of these promises being made that even the Yugoslavs could see through. They were not happy at all of having Italians in their country and when Armitage mentioned that the US Army National Guard was deploying the 28th Infantry Division to Southern Europe they again shot him down with that; the Yugoslavs said that their information was that those men from Pennsylvania were a week away and were again without a strong armoured component. In attacking northwards into both Austria and Hungary, Yugoslavia’s own tanks would be busy elsewhere and couldn’t be relied upon to save American troops when the United States was supposed to be helping them instead!
Jones knew that Armitage wasn’t an idiot nor callous when it came to American lives. He spoke privately to the veteran US Navy officer, suspected CIA operative and career diplomat and affirmed that the Yugoslavs had accurate information. In addition, General Powell would share those concerns too. Armitage said he understood and was in agreement with Jones; he was surprised at how informed the Yugoslavs were. That didn’t matter though. The aim was to get the Yugoslavs into the war. Once they did then the Bulgarians would drop out of the war and the Romanians would show hostility to the Soviets. This would assist the United States and its allies in the war greatly and was of immense importance. Getting the Yugoslavs on-side had to be done. At the same time, he did inform Jones that if the worst happened and the Yugoslavs weren’t going to play ball, then he was sure that the Bulgarians and Romanians could be convinced that they might do and he hoped to get them to act first if the Yugoslavs didn’t.
This was one of those whom Jones was in the fallout shelter with and feared tonight he was about to die alongside: this gambler!
Major David Petraeus was in the same boat as his US Marines comrade-in-arms. The US Army junior officer had been serving in the Chief-of-Staff’s office at the Pentagon when the war started. He’d requested a combat assignment from General Carl Vuono after there had been a decampment to Raven Rock of the vital elements of the Pentagon’s headquarters & staff elements though been initially turned down. General Vuono had wanted the young airborne officer to stay with his staff at the massive bunker beneath the Blue Ridge Summit near the Maryland–Pennsylvania state line. There was still vital work to do for Petraeus there.
After a long wait, an opportunity had opened up though and Petraeus’ wish to leave and serve in the field was granted. From down in Arkansas at Fort Chaffee where the Joint Readiness Training Centre was, the battalion of US Army troops deployed there was being sent to Europe. The 1/509 INF needed to be brought up to strength as a regular unit rather than just for advanced training and Petraeus was assigned to the battalion headquarters as the operations officer. The posting took him then to Italy where the 1/509 INF went to link up with another US Army airborne battalion – 3/325 INF – that had earlier fought in the Alpine passes when those had been seized by Soviet Spetsnaz at the first opening of hostilities. The 3/325 INF had taken losses, including its commander Lt.-Colonel Abizaid (who’d been recommended for the Medal of Honor for his actions fighting alongside Italian Alpini Paracadutisti on February 5th), and was being reconfigured for more combat operations following those battles. Moreover, there was a battalion of Vermont Army National Guard mountain-trained troops which went to Italy as well along with combat support and service support elements from regular, reserve and national guard forces so that the 173d Airborne Brigade could be established for further operations through Austria.
Petraeus had been in his element as he prepared for combat operations. He’d been assigned to the 1/509 INF as a young lieutenant in Vicenza back in the late Seventies. Now, weeks into World War Three he and them were back. The Italians and French had troops in the Alps alongside the Austrians and some West Germans as well. There were Spaniards and Portuguese arriving to link up with the multi-corps Southern Army Group and the small American airborne force would be part of that; later the US Marines and the 28th Infantry Division would join them. The frontlines were generally stable with the Soviets and Hungarians contained within Austria though holding some parts of Italians and West German soil in a few places. A major offensive was being planned by the time Petraeus reached Vicenza where the 173d Brigade was forming up.
Then came new orders: leave your post and travel down to Thessaloniki. Petraeus had fumed at that but had no choice but to obey. He was on the path towards a glittering career due to the appointments given to him beforehand – including with the staff of SACEUR and the US Army Chief-of-Staff, positions not given to just anybody – and there was faith in him. To go with the diplomatic party was not what he wanted to do despite knowing the further opportunities it would bring for him. He had trained with the 1/509 INF as they got ready to fly to Europe and then when in Vicenza the men were all getting ready to fight the Soviets to liberate Austria. But to Greece he went and then up to Belgrade.
Petraeus hadn’t believed that the Yugoslavs were serious about entering the war. Before Armitage had flown here with Petraeus and the others – Colonel Jones, State Department officials & translators and the security detachment – there had been contact made which he was told had been very promising, but it hadn’t seemed the case. Either lies had been told or there been a mistake made. Yugoslavia may have mobilised its armed forces, shut its borders and broadcast state propaganda declaring that the Soviets were launching an illegal war of aggression against other countries, but Petraeus didn’t think they wanted to go to war. When listening to what they said to Armitage where they questioned everything he said, not just on military matters but diplomatic relations too, he wasn’t convinced. He understood why they wouldn’t be: the risks to their country were grave if everything didn’t go to plan… but even if Armitage’s schemes did work then Yugoslavia still faced devastation regardless.
Petraeus couldn’t see the Yugoslavs being able to achieve all that was hoped of them in combat. He didn’t feel that they could successfully cause the defeat of the Warsaw Pact forces in Austria by hitting them in the rear. Furthermore, the Soviets would hit back and hit back hard too. Yugoslavia’s ability to defend itself from conventional counterattack depended far too much on Romania’s planned supposed neutrality that would be of a hostile nature to the Soviets: would this country want to truly rely on someone like Nicolae Ceaușescu? Away from the battlefield, was Yugoslavia able to remain as a stable nation too with current events and further political troubles that would certainly come from being engaged in war?
Down in the fallout shelter underneath the Embassy, Petraeus was thinking on this when he felt the ground shake like everyone else did.
***
The Soviets hit Yugoslavia with two thermonuclear weapons used against one strategic target: the second in case the first failed. It was another demonstration attack to show the resolve of the Soviet Union and frighten their opponents. Chairman Kryuchkov was personally involved in all stages of the attack from conception to the final issuing of orders.
Belgrade International Airport was that target. The nuclear warheads aboard a pair of cruise missiles, fired from a strategic missile-bomber flying back over Soviet Ukraine, detonated above the airport each with a force of fifty kilotons. These were relatively small detonations but enough to cause immense devastation. The airport was gone afterwards. It was totally destroyed by the twin explosions. The city center located less than a dozen miles away to the east of the airport was in the main physically untouched by the blasts, though there was much glass broken in places and the ground shook. Destroying Belgrade wasn’t the aim of the attack, nor so much eliminating the airport itself.
The attack was made for a political point to show Yugoslavia what the consequences would be of taking offensive action against the Soviet Union.
Sofia was targeted too.
Again, two cruise missiles blew up one after another in air-bursts using small thermonuclear warheads. One exploded above the Bulgarian capital’s airport (located much closer to Sofia than Belgrade’s airport was to Yugoslavia’s capital) and the other detonated southwest of Sofia above the summit of Vitosha Mountain; the second missile had overshot its target.
The Soviet attack upon their purported ally Bulgaria was done to frighten them as was the case with Yugoslavia. There was KGB intelligence that Bulgaria was about to drop out of the war and order what few Soviet forces that there were in the country out. Kryuchkov wasn’t about to allow that betrayal though at the same time destroying Sofia was considered by him to be a step too far when only certain elements of the Bulgarian government had made noises about doing so. Weakness couldn’t be shown in the face of betrayal though so Kryuchkov launched a very limited attack against the country to make sure that there was no desire by the Bulgarians to see what could happen if they really did abandon the war.
No nuclear detonations struck Bucharest.
Ceaușescu’s Romania was busy fighting itself as the partial civil war which had begun last December still rumbled on. Security forces were still shooting protesters and guerillas were still fighting their government. A few hours after the attacks upon Belgrade and Sofia, a message came from Bucharest sent to Moscow: Romania wasn’t about to act in any hostile manner against their ‘socialist allies’ in the Warsaw Pact.
Several hours later, all twenty men and women underneath the US Embassy in Belgrade left their fallout shelter. They were alive and no one had shot themselves or anyone else. Armitage’s diplomatic mission was over as he, his party and the rest of those at the Embassy were now to look at getting out of Yugoslavia as fast as possible.
February 26th 1990 Veluwezoom National Park, near Arnhem, Gelderland, the Netherlands
The West had fomented the violence which had shaken Eastern Europe late last year, Lt.-Colonel Putin had been assured, and then murdered General Secretary Gorbachev in January. Soviet and Warsaw Pact forces had invaded Western Europe afterwards to bring down the governments within the NATO war alliance which had allowed that to happen. Once those regimes were destroyed and new, truly democratic governments installed in their place then – should those countries want that – Soviet troops would withdraw. Putin had been told that there would remain a presence from the security apparatus within Western Europe afterwards yet that would be limited in number and only necessary to make sure that hostile and illegal regimes didn’t return to power afterwards.
At different times, Putin had believed more of this official narrative more than other parts. Overall, until this morning, he had remained convinced that despite some unfortunate occurrences where failings were of a personal nature and not systematic that the Soviet cause was right. He had seen for himself how the citizens of East Germany had been corrupted by outside influences last year and nearly brought down the German Democratic Republic. Gorbachev’s assassination was an outrage, a dastardly attack upon all Soviet people. Putin and many others might not have agreed with the direction in which he had been taking their country, and were relieved when Kryuchkov took over, yet to kill their nation’s leader as they had done was a clear sign of the intent that the West had. Once the war had begun, Putin had come across to West Germany first and was now in the Netherlands. He had seen these foreign nations up close and personal and been disgusted at how the people of them had been used by their ruling regimes to fight their own ideological battles against his own nation: the end result had been all the death and destruction in places such as Arnhem.
But his eyes had been opened this morning by what he was witnessing here in the small forest northeast of Arnhem. The firing squads were busy and his new posting was to them. Putin understood now that everything was all one big lie. There had been dishonesty and a great betrayal as the bullets flew and he was forced into shouting the orders for them to do so into his fellow countrymen.
Putin had been reassigned yesterday away from assisting in the political transformation of the Netherlands to move instead to maintaining KGB control over the morale of officers present with Soviet forces inside the pocket which had been formed by advancing NATO armies. Trapped between the North Sea and the Ems, though only temporarily because orders had come to the Netherlands Front for a breakout to be made, three field armies and supporting forces were surrounded on all sides by the enemy. There had come firm instructions from Moscow where the new Defence Minister, General Rodionov, known to many as ‘the Slaughterman’ for his actions in the Caucasus, wanted the encirclement to be ripped back open and at the same time he passed on Kryuchkov’s orders that morale must be maintained by KGB officers considered fully loyal too.
Putin had been told that he was one of those who loyalty wasn’t doubted.
General-Major Sergey Nikolayevich Lebedev – the overall commander of all KGB men inside what was being called ‘the Dutch Pocket’ – had spoken to him personally when ordering him to transfer across to the Netherlands Front headquarters security force. Putin was untainted by any hint of being associated with any of the reform-minded men (those who had been taken in by glasnost and perestroika) who had shown weakness and his recent behaviour during the war had shown that he was loyal to the true Soviet cause of defending the state in a manner which made many other baulk. His duty would be to clean house and get rid of those who had a lack of character within the senior command structure.
What Lebedev had meant by cleaning house and those who lacked the necessary character, Putin was finding out. Those who were weak and doubted the ultimate victory of the Soviet cause were to be shot. There were many military officers (enlisted men weren’t being shot, just officers) all across the Dutch Pocket, Putin had discovered, who fitted the bill and he was to assist in getting rid of them. He hadn’t created the criteria of those whose loyalty wasn’t considered as strong as his was and had no say in who was to be shot and who wasn’t. His task was to supervise the shooting of them and the subsequent disposal of their bodies, no more than that.
The nearest frontlines to the Veluwezoom National Park were to the south near Nijmegen on the River Waal and across to the east around Winterswijk on the Netherlands – West German border. Gunshots echoed throughout the area though as the firing squads got to work in the pouring rain just after dawn.
None of the men who Putin commanded the shooting of were traitors nor deserters. These were men who had raised objections or refused to follow orders. They were men who wore the uniform of the Soviet Army, the Soviet Air Force, the Soviet Air Defence Force, the GRU and the KGB; he hadn’t been tasked to supervise the shooting of anyone in the Soviet Navy. They were executed one at a time after being adjudged elsewhere and then taken here. Blindfold were given and there was no torture involved, not here anyway. They were taken to the chosen spots, bound to trees whether they offered resistance or not and then shot by the four men in KGB service whom Putin commanded who carried rifles. On each occasion, Putin then delivered a final coup de grace to each of them afterwards with his pistol whether they had been killed or not by the bullets from the rifles of his men. Then they were dragged to holes in the ground dug by Dutch civilians who had ‘volunteered’ to assist – those given extra rations – and the earth would be shoveled into those shallow unmarked graves.
As the killing went on, with one man after another brought before him to be shot, Putin tried his best not to look into their faces nor to listen what they said. This was immensely difficult, no, wholly impossible.
There were some who were terrified and others who tried their best at stoicism. A few had bruises on their faces while more were weeping. They called out to him for mercy or cursed him. Putin heard claims that they had nothing wrong because they had received conflicting orders from above or that what they had been asked to do was militarily impossible. Lebedev had told Putin that this would all occur when tasking him with this duty and told him to ignore all that he saw and heard. The decisions on the fates of these men had been made elsewhere and he was here to shot them, not second guess those who had decided the fates of the men to be shot. Being warned beforehand hadn’t prepared Putin for all that he witnessed though.
And he also believed that maybe some, maybe many, of those he was killing here didn’t deserve this punishment which had been decreed for them. Putin was aware that they would have been unable to follow the orders which they had been given for various reasons due to the military situation that those in the Dutch Pocket were in before and now after being cut off as they all were. Sometimes the enemy doesn’t cooperate, sometimes your own side won’t cooperate. Mistakes could be made in understanding the limitations and capabilities of the military situation. Furthermore, the Netherlands Front was commanded by General-Colonel Dubynin with Marshal Gromov above him in charge of the West-TVD. Yet, Lebedev was in the Netherlands issuing orders under KGB authority; there were also senior officers such as (full) General Varennikov and General-Colonel Kalinin who were with Rodionov the Slaughterman sending their own orders to the front which often bypassed the established chain-of-command.
In such a situation as that, how could anyone effectively do what was expected of them, especially with NATO attacking them at the same time? These men were being shot by him because of the foolish decisions made by others who were then diverting the blame away from themselves afterwards.
Another man was brought before Putin and the firing squad.
This time it was an engineering colonel with the Soviet Army. He shouted protestations that it hadn’t been his fault that NATO aircraft had destroyed bridges over the many rivers across the Netherlands as they had done. No, instead, blame should be on the air defence forces of the Soviet Army for not protecting them properly and therefore bringing the advances southwards to a halt. He was not to blame: someone else was and they should be the one here being shot. If the KGB man here – he pointed to Putin watching on – would listen to his case he would be able to understand and see that it wasn’t his fault.
The colonel might have had a point in his innocence or he might not have. That didn’t matter though. Putin was here to shoot him and not listen to his pleas. He started issuing the orders for the condemned man to be bound to the tree before the process of his execution began.
It could have been worse, Putin told himself, at least it wasn’t NATO POWs or Dutch civilians being shot here like this.
February 26th 1990 The Weser Valley south of Hameln, Lower Saxony, West Germany
The Soviets had been falling back to the Weser all through the night and continued doing so this morning. Brigadier Dair Farrar-Hockley led the 19th Infantry Brigade as the British Army followed them towards the river with the aim of engaging and destroying as much of the enemy on the western side to make sure that only few of them managed to get to the eastern banks.
Farrar-Hockley kept close to the fluid frontlines as they moved eastwards. He and his mobile command column were constantly on the move as the nearer and nearer the fighting came to the Weser. His desire was to stay close to his men as they liberated territory which the occupier had held while at the same time making sure that the majority of the casualties incurred during the Soviet’s fighting withdrawal were incurred by them, not his men. The 19th Brigade, like the whole of the British Army, had been bled during the past three weeks and couldn’t take any more unnecessary casualties. The enemy were falling back as they were retreating to avoid grand encirclement and they weren’t making a determined stand. Where they fought, they fought to kill and wound their pursuers and give themselves time to get away to the safety offered by the river, they didn’t need to be dug out of the temporary positions which they stopped to fight from.
There was a general understanding of this throughout his command of this need to not take unnecessary losses, but it wasn’t universal. Farrar-Hockley was frustrated and angry at the reports which kept coming to him from his unit commanders as their men engaged in fierce fighting across the burnt-out forests of the Weser Uplands and down into the Weser Valley. Too many officers didn’t have effective control of those in the chain-of-command beneath them. Heavy fighting, at close quarters too, was taking place everywhere and the 19th Brigade was suffering.
Farrar-Hockley’s command didn’t have the men to lose, especially not for a cause like this.
The enemy was falling back, they were running away. Let them run, he had told his subordinates, and we’ll conserve our strength for when we eventually tackle their river defences in the coming days. He might hadn’t been listened to but far too many seemed to have forgotten what they had heard. His opposing enemy commander, whomever that was, wouldn’t be feeling the same as the men he had making a stand of it in isolated spots would have already been abandoned – whether they knew it or not – and were clearly following their orders to delay and hurt the British troops following them.
Despite everything he was doing, with orders sent over the radio and aides dispatched with verbal and written commands for subordinates to bring their men under control, this was still occurring and it wouldn’t stop. Farrar-Hockley understood full well that his men were wanting revenge against the Soviets for all that they had suffered and were enjoying taking the fight to them rather than the other way around, but whilst they were doing so they were forgetting everything that they had been told.
He asked himself what he could do to stop this when everything else he’d tried beforehand had failed… the answer came quick enough: nothing.
At the divisional briefing yesterday evening conducted by Major-General Mackenzie, Farrar-Hockley and the other brigade commanders (those of the 11th & 20th Armoured Brigades) had been told that the whole of the Soviet Seventh Tank Army was to pull back to the Weser. The enemy field army which had conducted the forced crossing over the Weser when the fighting recommenced after the short ceasefire had never got that far away from the river and its general advance in the direction of Bad Pyrmond – to Paderborn and the Ruhr beyond – had been stillborn. The American advance across the North German Plain through the Soviet Army’s rear had been the cause of this; the two tank divisions which the Seventh Tank Army had been holding ready as an exploitation force had gone back first over the river near Hameln and everyone else was following them.
Farrar-Hockley had been given firm instructions to conserve his strength when closing up to the river. General Mackenzie had stated that the corps commander had passed down that instruction and that had ultimately come from NORTHAG too. When the Weser was assaulted and the advance begun to liberate West Germany east of the river, there would come the hard fighting where the enemy would be dug-in in fixed defences and it was there were all effort would be needed to engage in close combat. The Soviets were falling back at the moment and they were to be chased with opportunities taken to hurt them but not get involved in costly battles. Where the enemy made a stand, that would be to slow down the chase, not to hold on to anywhere this side of the river. The Soviets were to be engaged when in the open and falling back and if they could be cut off during that retreat then that was to be done, but fire support assets – artillery and aircraft – would be used to finish them off.
He had passed this all down when briefing his own men, only to see the unfortunate results which had come.
Just after eight o’clock local time, Farrar-Hockley’s chief-of-staff alerted him to a message coming from the King’s Own Royal Border Regiment (1 KORBR) battle group commander: the Lt.-Colonel in-charge personally had the Weser in sight.
When talking with his subordinate, Farrar-Hockley learnt that the I KORBR was above the Weser opposite where the village of Latferde lay on the eastern side. He had looked at the area on the map not long beforehand when knowing that elements of the battle group were heading that way and did so again now. Standing out clearly on his map was the nuclear power station very nearby as well as the road network on both sides of the Weser. There was no fixed civilian crossing of the river in the area which might have been used by the British I Corps when withdrawing during the ceasefire nor the Soviets when they had advanced afterwards. Now the Soviets were making use of the area as they had pontoon bridges down there on the river, Farrar-Hockley was informed, and the 1 KORBR was firing mortars down on them. Artillery support was being called upon and so too was armoured support: the battle group commander wanted to charge down there and take those bridges intact.
Farrar-Hockley asked him what exactly was his situation. Where were the enemy and what was their strength, what were they doing too? How much of his battalion did he have with him in a position to attack and did he really need tank support to get down to the river itself? Could he see the enemy on the other side, especially if they had any long-range weapons? In addition, how close exactly was he to that power station and was he aware of the ‘issues’ surrounding it following reported wartime damage?
Upon receiving answers to those questions, and pleased that the opportunity he was after was before him, Farrar-Hockley started issuing orders. He told the 1 KORBR to wait where it was as he was sending armour their way (Chieftains from the Royal Hussars) as well as trying to get them air support: Farrar-Hockley would get whatever NATO attack aircraft which responded to hit the eastern slopes rather than the western side or the river crossings. His operations officer responded to the query as to who else was close by as he told Farrar-Hockley that elements of the third battalion Royal Anglian Regiment (3 R ANGLIAN) battle group were close enough and two of the assigned company groups were not caught up in fighting that they couldn’t back out of with haste.
More orders were now sent out to get the 19th Brigade back to the Weser.
An hour later, Farrar-Hockley saw the Weser near Latferde for himself. The tiny village on the other side was a smoldering ruin, like Grohnde on this side was too. Around him was a battlefield where across the fields men under his command had charged towards the river and fought their enemy in a fast but brutal fight where, again!, too many had died or been wounded. The pontoon bridges were gone after being blown by the Soviets who managed to escape while stuck on this side were hundreds, maybe thousands of them who had failed to get away and would have to be dealt with: fought until they all died or were convinced to surrender when they realised their situation, the latter option far preferred by Farrar-Hockley.
Yet, he stared not at what was here on the western side of the river which ran down across northern West Germany, cutting it in two, but over there towards all that enemy-occupied parts of the country. Across there the Soviets and their Warsaw Pact allies still held control over the land and the people who hadn’t managed to get away like the majority of the 19th Brigade had been able to do during the ceasefire.
There were those civilians who hadn’t, couldn’t, wouldn’t flee and had all been left behind. There were soldiers who’d not been able to get away at the time too when all that territory that the British Army had so successfully defended beforehand had been abandoned when elsewhere the enemy had run riot; including men under his command. He thought of all of those people – in uniform and not – who were over there and in the hands of the enemy. No one had openly said that a betrayal had been made of them made when that withdrawal had taken place and everywhere east of the Weser abandoned during those turbulent times – which seemed such a long time ago now, even though it really wasn’t – but Farrar-Hockley knew that so many had been thinking that that had been what it was.
Soon, he promised himself and the rising hills beyond, we’ll be putting that wrong to right.
February 26th 1990 Outside Varel, Lower Saxony, West Germany
The 177th Armored Brigade was also advancing, with the American troops under the command of Brigadier-General Wesley Clark moving eastwards as well.
Bypassing the town through which the main road ran, Clark sent his men following the course of the railway line before linking back up with that road on the eastern side. Reconnaissance pointed to enemy troops – Poles probably, Soviets maybe – dug-in there with heavy weapons after making an effort to fortify Varel as a blocking position. Other troops coming up behind him would deal with that resistance, at a time of their choosing not that of those who wanted to make a stand, and Clark kept his men in their armoured vehicles moving instead. There was a distant objective to reach and the day was dragging on.
Clark had a schedule to stick to and a rendezvous to make.
Using a tracked M-577 command vehicle rather than a light transport helicopter as he would have done if this had been the desert training area back in California where the 177th Brigade would usually see action, Clark avoided being killed while controlling the movement of his force. To be in a Huey or maybe a Blackhawk would be suicide in such a hostile anti-air environment. He would have been able to see more and get where he was going faster, yet a Warsaw Pact fighter pilot or a man on the ground with a missile would have put an end to Clark’s war just when it really was getting started. The M-577 was packed with radios and maps like the helicopter would have been but was nowhere near as vulnerable.
Moreover, its movement through the countryside near to the North Sea coast allowed him to truly keep track of the progress of his command as he was with the 177th Brigade as it charged towards the Weser and the airborne troops there whom he was to relieve and link-up with. As he had told his men, and himself too, this was the real thing and would be nothing like all of those training exercises which they had run, the ones which they had set the rules. Here happenstance, a deadly enemy and plain bad luck would mean death rather than an umpire blowing a whistle and pointing with the comment ‘you are dead!’. To be down and among those he led rather than observing from a distance would keep their minds fixed on that… as well as his own too.
With the vehicle rocking about as it rolled forwards along the path of the railway line, and Clark having no view at the moment of the outside, he focused upon his maps while also keeping an ear on the radio too. Up ahead soon there would be the Bundesstrasse-437 to join again once Varel had been bypassed. Just before the road bridge over the railway line – which had been brought down by explosives at some unknown previous occurrence – there was a track leading away from the railway and leading up to the highway. His forward scouts were well-aware where that was and he was waiting for their commander to send word that they’d reached there and were up on the road. Afterwards, they would then lead the 177th Brigade along the course of the main road (the tracked vehicles would stay off the road directly to avoid giving the enemy an easy target for an air strike but follow it along the sides through cover) and towards the next bridge, the one over the Jade River which was standing and held by those West German paratroopers.
Wapelergroden was marked on the map there, a hamlet which the Fallschirmjager were in possession of. They’d be the first airborne troops he’d link up with, but there were many more of them, British soldiers along with the West Germans, at various points all the way to the Weser Estuary and a ferry crossing north of the small port city of Brake. All of those men were waiting on him to bring his men to meet up with them to establish a connecting corridor. Along that route, and on the immediate flanks too, Clark was to oversee the defeat of any enemy forces who wished to intervene: if there was anyone foolish enough to try they would find out just how well the 177th Brigade understood how those who followed Soviet military doctrine fought.
Clark was reflecting on that with a wry smile when the forward scouts reported they found the track right where it was meant to be and were charging up it in their M-3 Bradley armoured reconnaissance vehicles with M-60A1 tanks right behind them.
The 177th Brigade was assigned to the Allied I Corps under West German command. Clark and his men had arrived in Norway far too late to see the fighting there and been soon shipped down from Trondheim southwards to a staging point near Bergen and then later into Ostfriesland on the West German coast. The forces from the National Training Centre which arrived in Europe was far stronger than what it had been in peacetime while at Fort Irwin and was in many ways a mini division rather than a traditional stand-alone combat brigade. Clark had five combat-maneuver battalions under command (instead of two before overseas deployment) along with substantial combat support (artillery and engineers) and service support (logistics) elements. There were regular US Army forces as well as units from the US Army Reserve and Army National Guard men from various states. His reinforced command was vastly different from the advanced training unit which it was and now operating as an armoured assault force ready for a deep penetration mission into lightly-defended enemy-held territory with the focus upon speed as well as shock and awe. Direct from Fort Irwin were a battalion of M-1 Abrams tanks and a battalion of infantry who rode in M-113s; the M-551s which were usually used with their visual add-ons to make them look like Soviet vehicles had been left behind in California. From out of Arizona there was a Reserve unit with their M-60A1s and those tanks were also joined by self-propelled M-109 guns crewed by Arizona national guardsmen. Texan national guardsmen in M-2 Bradley infantry combat vehicles had come with Clark and so too had a light infantry unit of regular troops from the artillery school at Fort Sill in Oklahoma mounted in trucks. Engineers, signalmen, military intelligence specialists, supply troops and so one – regulars, reservists and volunteers from their state’s – had all been attached making the 177th Brigade the force to be reckoned with that it was.
Following that outrage back in Norden two days ago with the assassinations which hit its senior commanders, Clark had feared that his brigade along with the rest of the corps – what had been the ACE MF-L – would have been sent westwards down to secure the perimeter surrounding Soviet forces trapped in the Netherlands. He had foreseen the 177th Brigade along with the 10th Infantry Division coming under Dutch command of NORWESTAG and feared that only the mixed West German-British-NATO airborne forces who had come with them from Norway would head off to liberate West Germany. Thankfully, that hadn’t been the case at all. Instead, those US Marine Reserves who’d been evacuated from Schleswig and West German Territoralheer troops from Ostfriesland under the command of US Marine General Anthony Zinni were off to the Dutch border area. The rest of the Allied I Corps, Clark included, were to be available for ‘operations to the east’.
‘Operations to the east’ meant that the Allied I Corps’ mobile striking forces were tasked to NORTHAG for exploitation missions. The British-led NORTHAG now had many Americans within its command staff at the top levels including Lt.-General John Shalikashvili. Shalikashvili had been CENTAG’s deputy before coming north to replace the West German who had departed during the ceasefire; he was handling US forces within NORTHAG which by now far outnumbered British troops. For political reasons, the army group was still commanded by a Briton yet US forces were more numerous. When Clark had a short meeting with Shalikashvili, he was informed that the majority of the US Army and Army National Guard heavy forces on the North German Plain were turning eastwards heading for the Weser south of Bremen and on their flank the Allied I Corps was to operate. Helicopters would be available to transport the 10th Infantry Division and the force of paratroopers would use those and other aircraft too. The 177th Brigade was to race forward when given an opening to do so.
There had been others in attendance with Shalikashvili when Clark had been personally briefed by him on what he hoped could be achieved with the 177th Brigade. There had been Brigadier-General Barry McCaffrey among them, someone who Clark had been unable to welcome the presence of. McCaffrey had a good reputation but his assignment to Shalikashvili’s personal staff was to wait for someone to die and replace them. Elsewhere through the US Armed Forces currently engaged in wartime operations across the globe, when senior men died or were wounded in battle, subordinates were generally promoted to replace them. In some cases though, high up in terms of rank, there were men like McCaffrey who had been brought from staff or training posts back home and were waiting in the wings to step in where needed after being acclimatised to the local situation. That was harsh and not widely publicized due to morale concerns, but he understood that it was far from a betrayal of men like him. If they were knocked out of action and no one senior or experienced enough available to take charge, then that would be the real betrayal for all that they and those under them had fought for.
Clark had told himself that McCaffrey wouldn’t be replacing him any time soon because he would be careful, yet his fellow officer had been aware of his mission and the strengths of the 177th Brigade.
There had been a senior special forces officer in the form of Major-General William Garrison along with a tough-looking young subordinate by the name of Major Stanley McChrystal who were planning operations in the general area where Clark was to operate. They ‘borrowed’ his truck-borne infantry battalion for the time being to assist them in that yet what they were doing, where and when were all factors Clark wasn’t briefed on though.
Clark had been told by Shalikashvili that he was given belief in to go so far ahead to the Weser as he would because of the strength and capability of his command as well as the men serving within the 177th Brigade. During the lead up to the war, before and after the New Year, when tensions had risen with the Warsaw Pact, three separate combat brigades from US-based formations tasked for wartime REFORGER roles had made hasty training deployments through Fort Irwin. Clark’s men had given refresher training to each with speed and the results had been excellent as shown by the fighting down in CENTAG’s area of operations. Not all of the equipment issued to the 177th Brigade was the latest and many of his attachments weren’t full-time regulars following reinforcement before coming over to Europe, but the core strength of Clark’s force was sturdy and reliable.
The general axis of advance would be the Weser Estuary – Hamburg – Lubeck, Clark was told, though one step at a time. To reach the lower stretches of the river where the 1st Fallschirmjager Division was located was where he was to begin.
Bundesstrasse-437 ran towards Brake, a center of shipping near where the ferry was linking both sides of the Weser. The road didn’t go in a straight line from the Varel area and there were villages along the way, but no more big towns were nearby. The ground was flat and generally open with cover in places but none in others. In another M-577 behind Clark’s, there were two West German officers who knew the area well to help with getting the 177th Brigade to the Weser making the best use of hiding from enemy aerial observation which could lead to strong air attacks.
Clark had his tracked vehicles stay off the highway as much as possible and this slowed them down but it worked. No aircraft bombed them and when helicopters were seen they were active elsewhere. The enemy was evacuating the area with what elements of the smashed Polish First Army which could move trying to do so. They wouldn’t be able to get over the Weser with the NATO paratroopers there near Brake, but they didn’t know that. Clark’s subordinates attacked those retreating units where they were spotted, with attacks made from distance rather than up close and also calling in fire support.
Outside of Schwei, a village along the way, Clark watched from a distance when one of his artillery battalions opened up on Polish troops moving northwards away from there and out in the open. The eighteen guns fired barrages of 155mm shells with great frequency in rapid-fire fashion with high-explosive tipped shells fused for air burst but not far off the soft ground. There were white phosphorus munitions used too and Clark could imagine the effects upon dismounted infantry with no cover. It wouldn’t be a good day for those caught up in that artillery strike, nor others when his attached liaison officers called in an air strike not long afterwards as well.
He had to pull himself out of that mindset of being distracted by such horrors of war though as he had a mission to achieve: linking up with those paratroopers and fulfilling the goal he had been set of getting far out ahead and spreading fear throughout the enemy’s high command by reaching the Weser so fast.
February 26th 1990 The Elm Hills, Lower Saxony, West Germany
Getting out of vehicle with great haste, jumping down to the ground and feeling several weeks-old aches scream at him, Marshal Gromov followed the young officers with his command staff as they departed the BTR-80 via the side hatch. They all had their pistols in their hands and several pointed those inadequate weapons skywards; others beckoned him towards them as the country road was left behind and they ran forward into the trees. They called out to him, urging their commander to get away from the column of armoured vehicles due to the imminent air treat and seek shelter. He saved his breath for the excursion of running like the aging man he was through the mud and snow.
He couldn’t afford to waste a second.
Then came the sound of aircraft. There was the roar of jet engines and Marshal Gromov could heard nothing but them. Those aircraft were low and close! One of his command staff dived to the ground and another did the same before a third motioned for their commander to do the same too. Overwhelmed by fear and caught up in the moment, he copied them and landed face first on the ground. Pain hit him again before there was a rush of warm air, a flash of blinding light that he shut his eyes against too late and a lot of heat that he felt stinging the back of his neck.
Afterwards came the terrifying sounds of multiple explosions seemingly all around him.
Fighting for breath, yet desperate to get out his rage, Marshal Gromov screamed curse after curse in guttural Russian tones into the air that he nor anyone else with him on the ground could hear as the vehicles behind him and them continued to explode following secondary blasts.
This was far from the end to a day like today which he wanted!
*
Not minutes before the sudden air attack which had come with NATO aircraft spotted flying low this far deep into Soviet-held territory, Marshal Gromov had left one of his multiple major command bunkers: this one near the Inner-German Border and constructed beneath the Elm Hills near Helmstedt. There were several locations on both sides of the dividing line between the two Germany’s which were available for the use of him and his staff though he rarely visited them and preferred to stay on the move. His predecessor had been killed when inside one and others had been struck at when he himself hadn’t been present. How the Americans – it certainly wasn’t any other NATO member striking with laser-guided bombs dropped from aircraft invisible to radars! – had managed to find out about and locate those sites Marshal Gromov didn’t know. They were hitting them and other command bunkers for his front commanders on a regular basis though and so he had been staying away from them as much as possible.
However, there were times when he was needed to meet with his command staff for large-scale briefings when intelligence and operations would be discussed. One of his aides had made the suggestion today that perhaps the best thing to do when holding such gatherings was to not use those bunkers and instead meet elsewhere: out in the open of a forest if need be, anywhere but the command bunkers which were a magnet for the Americans. It had been an idea which Marshal Gromov had started to consider before leaving. There would be difficulties in the logistics of doing such a thing, but arranging for a few hundred men to meet at a time and place of his choosing rather than a supposedly secure location chosen by others couldn’t be that hard, could it? Marshal Gromov was responsible for the wartime operations of hundreds upon hundreds of thousands of men engaged in wartime operations across Europe easily doing an equal number of far greater complicated tasks.
The next rendezvous aside, Marshal Gromov had gathered up all those he had in the Elm Hills for a very important reason: his forces were on the verge of defeat.
NATO’s counter-offensive in the north of West Germany was still underway and the in central and southern regions there was intelligence that further major operations were about to begin too. This all had to be stopped, the tide reversed. Some subordinate field commanders attended the briefing though Marshal Gromov had mainly asked for key staff members of his junior commands to attend so as to not take important people away from their posts at such a crucial time. Those who he had met with had all been made to understand the urgency of the situation and the orders that had come from Moscow to Marshal Gromov which would be passed down the chain of command.
NATO was to be stopped from advancing any further westwards.
It was as simple as that. Whatever it would take, Defence Minister Rodionov had said, should be done to bring their counter-offensives to a halt so that no more occupied territory could be retaken by them throughout Denmark, West Germany and Austria. If NATO kept on unchecked, eventually they’d end up on the borders of the Democratic German Republic and Czechoslovakia: that couldn’t be allowed to happen because the consequences would be too severe to even contemplate. Stop them, smash their armies apart and go back on the offensive westwards as soon as possible: such were what the words of Rodionov that Marshal Gromov passed on.
How was this to be done?
Unfortunately, the current situation in the Netherlands was irreversible.
NATO forces had cut off the Soviet troops there by smashing through the rear and defeating Warsaw Pact forces meant to protect their flank. Those that were there – near Groningen, in Rotterdam and even on the shores of the North Sea at the wrecked Europoort – were all going to have to be abandoned. Orders would be sent to them telling them to keep fighting and promises made of help on the way, yet they had to be forgotten for the time being so that the situation could be saved elsewhere. It was the same with those lesser number of troops in the very north of Jutland, above the Limfjorden; again where the enemy was, this time US Marines, those Warsaw Pact forces there were beyond help and would be told to keep fighting while waiting for assistance that wasn’t going to come their way.
Elsewhere, along the river valleys of the Weser, the Fulda and the Main as well as into eastern Bavaria and down across western parts of Alpine Austria, the new frontlines would run. Forward positions would be manned with expendable troops already shattered from earlier instances of fighting while those formations which still had mobility and numbers on their side would conduct a mobile defence behind them with localised counterattacks being their mission. This was something new for Soviet troops but the men would have to do it. There would soon be a massive movement through Eastern Europe of Soviet reservists, a hell of a lot of them, and new major offensives would be launched in the future. For the time being NATO was to be stopped and bled out while that was all put together.
Such had been what Marshal Gromov had told those who had attended the briefing and orders group. He passed down what he had been told by Rodionov and Varennikov as his superiors (the latter the Chief of the General Staff) had instructed him to, putting in the best possible light but being honest with his own subordinates too. That general honesty hadn’t been what they had told him to do, and he hadn’t told those who’d come to the Elm Hills everything, but it was what he had thought best. Enough lies had been told already with many more to come and for the time being those who he had fighting for him deserved to know (come of) the truth.
Marshal Gromov hadn’t told them what Rodionov and Varennikov had said if this all failed and NATO did get its troops as far as the borders of East Germany and Czechoslovakia. Should that occur, and they were poised to invade, then the time would come to ‘avert that situation’ with ‘special weapons’. He himself had overseen the use of chemical weapons in this war and there had been the small-scale nuclear attack (though with big geo-political effects) upon Flensburg.
What those two men in Moscow with Kryuchkov meant was something different though, something much bigger in scale.
*
Marshal Gromov was helped to his feet. His aides brushed snow off him and asked him if he was hurt. Still somewhat dazed by all of the violence which had come so very close to him, he mumbled that he was okay before having to be clearer when they continued to fuss around him checking for injuries. He started issuing orders soon enough, telling them to check on everyone who had got away from the command column before the bombs fell and to see what was salvageable with the vehicles in terms of communications equipment. There was also the issue of weapons which he told those with him to get sorted out. If there were no working vehicles they would have to get back to the nearby bunker on foot, in the dark too. This was the Federal German Republic where NATO special forces and also guerrilla-terrorists were known to be active.
He felt immediately better after seeing those with him attend to their duties with purpose. There was work for them to do and he could supervise that too. For the time being it took his mind off the guilt he was feeling. Maybe when he was able to get back to somewhere more secure and return to his proper duties he would start to think about the betrayal that he was to oversee, that of the men still fighting and dying while abandoned without their knowledge away to the west inside the Netherlands. Yet for now he pushed that out of his mind and got his own pistol out. There was plenty of light from the burning fires around though much smoke too. His vision was obscured and he remained a little bit deafened by all of those explosions, but he was alive, armed and with trained & trusted soldiers under his command.
The worst had happened with NATO targeting him for death yet he’d survived and he had so much to do.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 15:09:51 GMT
Twelve – Digging-In
February 27th 1990 Dordrecht, Zuid-Holland, the Netherlands
The divisional commissar had been told to keep his head down. General-Major Alexander Ivanovich Lebed told him personally that there were snipers active. Yet the arrogant, foolish KGB man new to the 106th Guards Airborne Division (also known as the Tula Division) had refused to listen. He had never seen a war zone before and wouldn’t take heed of what had happened to others who walked around seemingly without a care in the world.
The Chekist was dead now: half of his head was missing and his corpse splattered with skull, brain matter and blood.
Lebed was unfazed by the departure of the man in such a manner. He had been an evil bastard, a fascist in the making. More than a dozen junior officers assigned to Lebed’s command had died at the hands of the deceased Chekist and his equally dead predecessor. Lebed wished that the next one assigned to him – and there would be another – could be killed before he arrived in the occupied Dutch city and started shooting Soviet Airborne Troops officers under his command for imagined crimes rather than afterwards.
Once he’d finished taking a brief look at the body, Lebed ordered him to be taken away. He had other tasks to attend to and many more people, those whose lives were valuable, would be killed today. His troops were busy digging-in inside and all around the city here with defences facing southwards towards the water there as well as in key locations to make retaking Dordrecht impossible for NATO without them shedding too much blood. He needed to continue overseeing that in addition to finding out when supplies would finally arrive. Those were to be time consuming tasks and in comparison the death of that KGB murderer mattered little.
Yet, Lebed continued to think about him as he came out of the building where the divisional commissar had been killed when up on the flat roof looking across the waterway known as the Hollands Diep. If that fool had spent time with the Tula Division during training and operations before the war down in the Caucasus or when seizing Schwarmstedt in a parachute assault or when taking Arnhem in an armoured attack using their BMDs, then he wouldn’t have done what he had. The Chekist’s role had been performed then by a Political Officer – a whole different role from the reestablished position of a commissar – who was trained in combat and had seen it for himself. The political officer had acted as a deputy commander for the Tula Division too (allowed to overrule Lebed if necessary) but the Chekist shot this morning instead just wanted to shoot those he decided were defeatist, disloyal or dangerous to morale.
It was people like him that he was being sent to Lebed rather than what he needed: ammunition, food and medical care for his soldiers.
The Tula Division had come to Dordrecht from Arnhem.
The physical connection that was maintained back to there ran through the Rhine Estuary, around all of the wide rivers that ran through the southern parts of the Netherlands. On both sides there were NATO troops pressing against the flanks, there were aircraft operating above and within there were stay-behind units & special forces active. The Twenty–Second Guards Army along with the 76th Guards Airborne and Tula Divisions were inside that corridor that consisted of flat terrain that was heavily urbanised and surrounded by waterways: natural and manmade. The entire focus when the order had come to advance towards the sea beyond had been to get tanks and combat troops forward. The necessary logistics support trailed behind them yet units for supply, maintenance, communications and medical assistance had been pushed aside going over bridges by those combat units. At the time, NATO forces with the weak Allied II Corps had been withdrawing with haste and were being chased with the aim of destroying them and there had been many who had been comfortable delaying support forces from following those in combat.
That mistake was now being seen for what it was.
Fixed civilian crossing links were downed and combat engineers who had put up pontoon bridges had been targeted by NATO just like the former. There was debris and even floating mines in the various waterways to stop further crossings being put up. Using helicopters for resupply had been suicidal with the corridor being so narrow and ground-based attacks taking place against any aircraft in the sky.
Promises had been made to commanders like Lebed that efforts were being made to get supplies through. Massive artillery barrages were being unleashed north and south of the corridor to eliminate guns and missiles being fired against those trying to move through it. More engineers would lead the way and put up crossings over the water everywhere possible while at the same time sappers would disable improvised defences to stop those. High-flying transport aircraft would parachute in more supplies as well. Everything was being done, the message was passed on, to not just support those in the Rhine Estuary area but throughout the whole of the Netherlands. Moreover, enemy propaganda being broadcast that all those who had made it this far west were actually cut off by a NATO counter-offensive on the North German Plain was a lie.
Hold on and dig-in: that was what Lebed had been told.
The men and the officers of the Tula Division would fight no matter what. Even the activities of a Chekist – as long as one didn’t go too far – wouldn’t brake the morale of the men whom Lebed commanded. These men had won victory after victory where they had fought in West Germany and into the Netherlands. They had fought infantry, tanks and attacking aircraft – winning every engagement and fulfilling their assigned tasks. The Airborne Troops had a fantastic esprit de corps, one which Lebed encouraged all of the time among those he led. Those missions which they had been given and achieved had led to breakthroughs made through enemy lines.
However, the Tula Division could only keep fighting after initial assaults were made if it had access to supply links.
The resistance being put up in isolated spots across Dordrecht came from a few men with rifles, pistols and improvised explosives. Those Dutchmen were brave but doomed to be hunted down and brutally killed by Lebed’s soldiers. The Tula Division was able to do this because there remained plenty of ammunition for their own rifles… and they had their bayonets and digging spades as well should the worst happen.
To fight against regular NATO forces other ammunition was needed. There had to be a resupply of SAMs for their mobile air defence systems, high-explosive & smoke shells for all of their mortars & towed howitzers and rounds for the cannons mounted to the BMDs. Moreover, the men needed rations, not spoils which they had liberated from the city which they were in. Equipment had broken down or was damaged and parts needed replacing or major repairs undertaken. New radio transmitters were needed to replace those so carefully targeted by NATO. Then there were all of the wounded men who needed medicines and evacuation.
Lebed’s men wouldn’t be able to fight a battle to defend Dordrecht should NATO make a move against the Tula Division. There was a good chance that maybe they would be bypassed when or if an offensive was undertaken in the general area, yet if a real attack came against them they wouldn’t be able to effectively respond to enemy firepower unleashed against the positions which he had them digging themselves into.
The overnight rocket strike which had hit the radio transmitters had come from a multiple-barreled rocket launcher. Lebed knew that the barrage had come from the south and killed eleven of his men, but more than that he had no information on the specific weapon and whether it had been a targeted or ‘lucky’ attack. Either way, he had no way of securely contacting the Twenty–Second Guards Army headquarters staff. There was a new commander of that field army, replacing the previous man whose death he had heard disturbing rumours about yet not believed himself, and he had yesterday passed on word that resupply was coming today. No specifics had been given, much to Lebed’s fury, and so he needed to talk to his senior command.
Runners were to be sent, two men assigned to physically visit that headquarters. Lebed left the specifics to his chief-of-staff in choosing the men to go as well as arranging for the necessary documentation (so they weren’t shot as deserters), giving them instructions, securing their crossing off the island on which Dordrecht sat and making sure that they knew who to speak to at the Twenty–Second Guards Army. He went to see them before they left.
The runners would cross by boat from Dordrecht to Zwijndrecht on IJsselmonde Island. The Oude Maas was in between the two locations with the connecting bridges destroyed. A small wooden boat was to be used to get across the water and cover given by the fog present this early in the day.
Yes, this was the state of things that Lebed was facing just to talk to his higher headquarters. It was 1990, for Goodness sake, and he was inside the Netherlands leading an elite unit of the Soviet Army. And he was using messengers to communicate who were forced to cross a very narrow stretch of river in a wooden vessel requisitioned because it wouldn’t attract mines feared to be in that water.
It was not a good situation to be in at all but this was what he had to deal with for the time being. Assistance would come eventually with resupply and reinforcement. As a soldier, even a one-star general officer, Lebed would accept it… as long as those promises were kept of course.
February 27th 1990 Revolutionary Armed Forces bunker, south of Havana, Cuba
The norteamericanos had dropped their bombs on Cuba for ten nights in a row. Havana had been targeted every one of those nights, far more than anywhere else on the island. Government and military sites in and around the Cuban capital city had been struck along with transport links, power & water infrastructure and telecommunications systems. Once the city’s permanent air defences had been eliminated in the first few nights their replacements had failed to stop the ongoing attacks and been targeted themselves too.
Aircraft coming southwards from the United States had continually dropped their bomb loads over Havana during the hours of darkness.
There had been an emphasis on the part of the norteamericanos to hit their targets well rather than flatten the whole city. Their bombs had fallen upon the selected installations which they wanted to hit with a good degree of accuracy, then more aircraft came back the next night to bomb the same target again even if it was wholly destroyed as those sites were pulverized under such a furious and repeated bombardment. However, as was the case in any war, there were always unintended consequences due to military action. Some bombs went off target due to malfunctions, bad guidance, weather interference or just plain bad luck. Civilian losses were incurred in the city, directly and indirectly by the bombing. There was a breakdown of civil order at times where the security situation following the bombing that wouldn’t cease for even one night drove the people of the city to distraction.
Gunfire had followed those riots and each time the morning came an eerie silence came to Havana as the fires from the night before continued to pour smoke into the sky but Havana was quiet with people asleep afterwards. Between first light and late morning hundreds of thousands who couldn’t sleep during the night due to the explosions and shooting did so, surprising themselves at the ability to do so so easily.
Jefe Castro was not one of those sleeping this morning.
He came up and out of his bunker along with aides and bodyguards to get some fresh air after spending another one of those ten long nights underground. Around him, those with the Defence Minister smoked cigarettes, talked among themselves quietly or looked towards the city surrounded by clouds of black smoke. Jefe Castro did the same: staring at Havana and wondering what was burning there.
Oil tanks, maybe?
He knew that if he wanted he could very quickly find out what was alight in such a manner. He would issue orders for the information to come to him and those beneath him in the chain-of-command would jump at his instructions and report back with speedy haste. They’d sugarcoat the news though, as they continually did, even while being fully aware of the consequences suffered by others when doing so. Jefe Castro had got rid already of many boot-lickers who wanted to tell him only good news, lying to him in the process, in the belief that their own careers would be furthered by doing so. Those dismissed had ended up in penal units after being stripped of their rank when they fell afoul of him yet more would show up. Posting to his staff was considered too much of a good opportunity by those within the officers ranks of the Cuban Revolutionary Armed Forces to pass up and so there was never a shortage of volunteers.
Boot-lickers were better than traitors though.
Jefe Castro had plenty of the latter to deal with. There were those who were serving within the ranks of the military and the intelligence services who had decided that they would fulfill the wishes and aims of foreign powers. It was not for the norteamericanos that they betrayed him, his brother and the Revolution, but for the Soviets. The KGB had penetrated Cuba by establishing men into influential positions within the Revolutionary Armed Forces and the DGI who dared do their bidding rather than that of their own country. Cuba had gone to war after being manipulated into a situation where the truth hadn’t been told and was now paying the consequences for that. Jefe Castro had his own ego, his brother a far larger one, and he could admit to himself that it was the decision made by him and Fidel to go to war, but that was the final decision after ‘evidence’ and ‘intelligence’ had been presented to them showing that they would take part in winning a short war against the norteamericanos. Moreover, once hostilities opened, those same traitors continued to carry out their deception by further manipulation as well as sending out orders to certain subordinates of theirs engaged in battles with the United States.
Cuba was going to pay for the activities against civilians in Florida, not the traitors or the KGB.
Having spoken to Fidel and explained what he had been able to find out, Jefe Castro had been told by his brother to arrest and shoot such people. It had been done after the Revolution, Fidel had said, where his brother had acted in such a way against those who had betrayed Cuba then and it should be done again now. Meanwhile, Cuba was at war come what may and there needed to be a concentration on winning that conflict rather than navel-gazing about previous events. This was the war that would finally win the Revolution once and for all: that, Fidel said, was all that mattered.
The telephone call from here at the bunker near Havana down to Guantanamo Bay – where Fidel still was – had ended after that.
Jefe Castro remained without a notion of how to get his country and the regime which he and his brother led out of this mess. The norteamericanos were going to keep bombing Cuba and were getting ready to invade at a later stage. There were troops in Florida, aircraft in the Yucatan Peninsula across in Mexico and many warships at sea in the waters surrounding Cuba. Elsewhere in the world, if he read the situation correctly, the Soviets were fighting the United States to a draw where he feared that the only eventual solution would be nuclear warfare to end it all. If, when that occurred, before or after an invasion of Cuba commenced, Jefe Castro feared that the use of thermonuclear warheads would spread fast to Cuba. It would be military targets first, then the cities. All of the Cuban troops digging-in around Havana and down near Guantanamo Bay, and those isolated in the Florida Keys too, would have no part to play in that endgame for his country.
Cuba couldn’t be defended against conventional attacks, let alone those of a nuclear nature. Those aircraft which bombed Cuba were almost unchallenged. Six had been brought down over Cuba with apparently another dozen seen crashing into the sea when flying away damaged. Of those confirmed destroyed, only one was a B-52 bomber: the aircraft which were hitting Havana with such frequency and with devastating effects nightly. The rest were tactical aircraft with the few surviving aircrews from them joining all of the military hostages which Cuba was holding, those from Guantanamo Bay who weren’t being treated as Jefe Castro knew prisoners of war were supposed to be.
In exchange for those few aircraft, Cuba’s air defences had been massacred. There were no more MiG-29 fighters left and the fleet of MiG-21s and -23s were at less than a fifth of pre-war strength. SAM-launchers and anti-aircraft guns were bombed when stationary and when on the move: the missiles and shells they fired had barely hit anything. Cuba’s naval force, not much to speak of before February 17th, was no more either. Troops were out of their nationwide barracks and deployed into defensive positions to fight off an invasion – and to not be in fixed known locations during a nuclear war – but they had come under attack too with the norteamericanos having watched their movements and bombing them when they were meant to be under cover. Some communications out of the country were still open, including links to Moscow, but not many at all. It was clear to him that for years this had all been planned by the United States Military and they were doing what they had so long wanted to do: smash the combat forces of Cuba and prepare the way for an invasion.
The Soviets had sent urgings for Cuba to continue to fight. Fidel had promised them and everyone else that Cuba would do just that. No real help had come to the country from their supposed allies though. The Soviets had actively poisoned the chances of any sort of truce, ceasefire, armistice or peace between Havana and Washington – Fidel wouldn’t have allowed that and Jefe Castro probably wouldn’t have either – and done nothing else. Only Nicaragua was offering any form of assistance to Cuba and that was just in the form of being able to help get Cuban propaganda out. The Nicaraguans would go no further than showing images of a hospital in Havana alight after being hit by ‘American bombs’ (an out of control SAM had actually struck the building) and calling for an end to the fighting. Every other country in Latin America had either declared neutrality or was supporting the norteamericanos. Outside of the Western Hemisphere, there was no one else who could, let alone would help Cuba either.
Back down into the bunker, Jefe Castro went. There were meetings to attend to and orders to give. His entourage followed after him with several preparing to speak up in such a way that would hopefully show their loyalty and bring further advancement.
High above, far above the smoke from Havana and low clouds too, the bomb-bay doors of a B-1B Lancer opened and two dozen 2000lb bombs started falling. These were fitted with non-nuclear warheads deployed from a usually-exclusive nuclear-platform. Those bombs were Mk.84s with BLU-109 warheads, which would be finding out how well protected the bunker was where American intelligence had pointed to Jefe Castro was hiding inside.
Those bombs fell towards the ground below with the B-1B and its distant fighter escorts turning back northwards heading home straight afterwards.
February 27th 1990 Amman, Jordan
General Shomron had left Tel Aviv and his command headquarters there for the first time this month and taken the short flight across to the Jordanian capital. His visit was secret and he was well-protected. Later today, the IDF Chief-of-Staff would be heading back home though first he was taking part in a little bit of military diplomacy.
Following a ceremony remarkably short on the usual formalities for such a high-profile visit, but the reasons behind which he well understood, General Shomron met with those he had come across to Jordan to see. There was his opposite number, Lt.-General Fathi Abu Talib who was the Chief-of-Staff of the Jordanian Armed Forces, and also King Hussein’s National Security Adviser and Talib’s predecessor Field Marshal Zeid Ibn Shaker; both of whom welcomed him in a stiff and formal manner. The necessary respect for his position was shown by them and he returned that, but there was no friendliness given nor expected. That just couldn’t be done.
Meeting at a command post for the Jordanian Armed Forces, General Shomron was briefed by junior men serving Talib on the state of the ongoing fighting within Jordan. General Shomron had his translator tell him what was being exactly said though with the maps he was shown as the briefing went on he was able to follow what was said in Arabic to him even without the use of the young IDF major assisting him. The Jordanians were using symbols on their maps in the NATO standard formula, which he could understand. These would not be what they usually worked with, he was sure, as those wouldn’t be shown to a foreigner such as he.
The Jordanians had their 3rd & 4th Divisions engaged in battle since yesterday with those two formations driving northeast and north respectively. Reinforced by many reservists, the divisions were retaking Jordanian sovereign soil held by the Iraqis. It was a difficult fight for them as they were engaged in operations on their own soil with Jordanian civilians still in-place, but they were making good progress. Talib’s man stated with firm assurance that the Iraqi’s in north-central Jordan would be completely eliminated by this time tomorrow…
…when the 3rd & 4th Divisions linked up with Israeli forces which remained inside Jordan too.
Another one of Talib’s junior officers started putting markers on the map. They were placed at certain points south of the Jordanian-Syrian border and he asked one of General Shomron’s traveling party whether those were the correct locations of Israeli Army units. After a quick check, that was confirmed. Talib then had his staff officers talk with those of General Shomron about the procedures both sides would work with for establishing communications in the field so as to make sure that when the link-up occurred, there was no shooting between them: only the invading Iraqis were to be engaged. What radio codes would be used, which flags would be hoisted in case of electronic jamming and the formalities of handing over to the Jordanians all Iraqi prisoners captured in battle inside Jordan were discussed. More details were then covered concerning the staged withdrawal from Jordan of Israeli units after firm contact had been made with the Jordanian Army so that there could be no gaps which any more Iraqis could escape through and also to make sure that there weren’t any instances of gunfire exchanged. Israeli forces had entered Jordan by coming down from Syria but weren’t to withdraw north, but rather northwest and into Israel proper. There would need to be an establishment of a security corridor which could be used to make that transit so that it could be done securely and with haste. In addition, General Shomron had his officers pass to the Jordanians intelligence gained on where other Iraqi forces were located away to the east, those beyond the scope of the ongoing fighting and stretching back to the Iraqi border. Talib was to send his army that way afterwards and General Shomron had his translator explain that by using such intelligence he hoped that Jordanian casualties wouldn’t be too severe in finally ridding their country of the Iraqi invaders. The Iraqis had been digging-in, drawing a line in the sand there beyond their recognised border.
Shaker had one of his aides address General Shomron afterwards. He told him that the Jordanian Army would reach the Iraqi border within a few days and his king would be relieved that by then all foreign military forces would be off Jordanian soil: General Shomron clearly understood what he meant. In addition, Shaker informed him that Israeli military personnel who were ‘guests of the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan’ were today to be returned. These were mainly pilots of downed aircraft and a few Israeli Army stragglers who’d ended up in Jordanian custody. They had been treated well, not abused nor interrogated. All thirty-five of them were being brought to the military airport from where General Shomron would be flying home from after this briefing.
Thanks were given to Shaker for the treatment he said that Israeli soldiers and pilots had received. General Shomron wished the Jordanian Armed Forces well in their ongoing battles and those to come afterwards in driving out the Iraqis. He told Shaker and Talib that the Iraqis were paying dearly for how they had betrayed their ally and he also wanted to unofficially pass on his own hopes – beyond those made by diplomats – that there could be better Israeli-Jordanian relations following the recent fighting here. Only the Soviets, not even the Iraqis, had gained by the war which had taken place: differences between Arabs as well as Arabs and Israelis should be settled by themselves as they were here, not by those outsiders.
No response came to such remarks, yet General Shomron was certain that Shaker agreed with him on that point. No one in Jordan had wanted to see their country made a battlefield as it had been with all the losses that had come to civilians and soldiers alike: certainly not for Soviet goals either.
Afterwards, it was back to his aircraft for the head of the IDF.
Once he returned to King Abdullah I air base, located at Marka outside of Amman, General Shomron found that Shaker had been as good as his word. Those missing Israelis were there, though the Jordanians clearly hadn’t put enough thought in to how difficult it would be to get them all aboard his aircraft. There would be room, General Shomron would make sure of that, but he did wish the Jordanians had mentioned this earlier so better preparations could be made. Regardless, those men were coming home with him.
He felt that he had done well in Jordan. Much of the initial ground work had been done before he had come to Amman, but he knew that how he behaved and what he said would be of great importance into making sure that not just short-term gain for his nation was achieved but medium-term objectives were met too.
He had been acting the role which he was told to do and believed that he had achieved that. General Shomron had been reminded that the national security of Jordan was of great importance to Israel and assisting the Jordanians in reestablishing control over their country aided Israel. He was to treat them with respect and dignity for they would be naturally sensitive at times like these to anything which they regarded as patronising. Remind them of how they had been screwed over by their supposed ally, Defence Minister Sharon had told him before leaving Tel Aviv, but don’t push it: they will already know that very well. General Shomron had also been told to make sure that it was clear that Israel was just as eager to have its troops off Jordanian soil as the Jordanians were too.
He hadn’t questioned those orders. He agreed with them certainly and those had come from Sharon. Sharon, who’d recently shown what diplomacy was all about with his time in Syria and getting them to drop out of the war. General Shomron had doubted that such a thing could be achieved, especially with such a man as the Defence Minister personally involved, but he had been oh so very wrong. He’d wooed Assad’s son with courteous behaviour (yes – really!) and got the Syrians to understand that they were defeated in battle. Sharon had promised them a fast withdrawal of Israeli forces from their soil, a commitment of non-interference in Lebanon by Israel to Syrian activities (the Israeli Army had already withdrawn from there) and given them a firm assurance that Israel was willing to open talks on post-war joint sovereignty of the Golan Heights. All Syria had to do for that was to stop fighting Israel. If they wanted to, Sharon had told Bassel al-Assad, the Syrians could expel the Soviets from their base at Tartus. Should that be a step too far – especially in light of the nuclear attacks upon Belgrade and Sofia where those who were about to turn on Moscow had been struck at – then there was always the Iraqis which Syria might want to settle some old scores with.
General Shomron had learnt that the Defence Minister had put a lot of effort into trying to convince the Syrians that they had been betrayed by the Soviets. As the Jordanians had found out, the Iraqis had been favored by Moscow in giving Saddam the green light to roll into Jordan like he had done. If Iraq had been successful in Jordan, where would that have left Syria, Sharon had asked Bassel al-Assad. They would have had their long-term enemy, one whom they shared a more bitter enmity with than more than Israel, surrounding them on two sides. In future, should they want allies, Sharon had recommended that Syria look to Turkey or the Gulf States or even Pakistan; any of those nations would be better partners for Syria than the Soviets.
In the long-term, whether all of this would work, Sharon in Syria and his visit to Amman, General Shomron wasn’t sure if all of his country’s objectives could be gained. Jordan was more important that Syria he felt, but he wasn’t certain whether his nation’s leaders understood that. Regardless, for now and in the immediate future, Israel was no longer at war. They had won their fight against an outrageous attack, and won that with devastating effect.
Furthermore, despite the Iraqis having troops still inside Jordan, their home country was in chaos due to internal conflict of which further reports of new outbreaks of violence came to Israel’s attention every day. Surrounded by enemies and running fast out of military supplies, Israel had once again escaped destruction. General Shomron was proud of the role he had played in that fight.
February 27th 1990 Fort McPherson, near Atlanta, Georgia, the United States
The headquarters of the United States Army Forces Command (FORSCOM) was located on the outskirts of Atlanta. General Edwin Burba, FORSCOM’s commanding officer, had absolutely no objection at all to having his headquarters down in Georgia rather than up to the north in the wider D.C. area. He had a job to get on with and didn’t want the physical interference to that which would certainly come with being located in Washington, Maryland or Virginia. Being safety tucked out of the way down in Dixie meant that those who wished to impose themselves and their opinions on the conduct of the ongoing war would truly have to make the effort to bother him and his duties: his command wasn’t seemingly within touching distance for all of those so-called power-brokers who were active up north.
Burba was tasked to concentrate on having United States Army, Army Reserve and Army National Guard forces assemble and be transported overseas to where they were needed to engage in combat operations either at the frontlines or behind them. To do this was difficult enough in the face of the numbers available and enemy intervention at times. However, it would be far worse should he have faced the barrage of interference that many wished to give to such a task. Up at Fort Lee in Virginia, where the leadership of the US Army was now located after leaving the Pentagon on the eve of war, there were politicians who wanted to have their views heard on the conduct of the war. It was the same with influential ‘concerned citizens’, retired military officers, lobbyists & those from think-tanks and also the media. The Chief-of-Staff, General Vuono, was away with the Joint Chiefs at Raven Rock and so the responsibility for fending off all those who wished to call and visit Fort Lee fell upon the Vice Chief-of-Staff General Robert RisCassi. The military presence at Fort Lee was meant to be a secret so that it couldn’t be targeted by enemy action or intelligence-gathering. Burba was alarmed at how widely-known the knowledge of the presence of the headquarters staff was: no one was meant to know, but that was far from the case. Many of the same people knew about his headquarters, but they concentrated upon Fort Lee because it was regarded as where their influence could be better felt and in the main closer to where they themselves were too.
When speaking to Burba last night on the telephone, RisCassi had said that he had requested that he move back with his staff to the Pentagon rather than stay in Virginia: there was far more security there and better control could be maintained to keep back those who were hell-bent on disrupting him and his staff as they went about their work.
Those who were causing RisCassi all of the problems which he was having were generally well-meaning, but that wasn’t always the case. There were those who wished to offer advice when it came to the deployment and growth of the United States Army; others who wanted to make sure that soldiers weren’t killed due to problems which they foresaw occurring. Some wanted to secure appointments to important positions for certain officers (with or without the knowledge of those involved) over others; elsewhere there were people who were trying to get loved ones out of harm’s way while asserting it was being asked for the greater good. The media had questions and they believed that they had the right to know and broadcast everything that was going on with the United States Army while it was engaged in warfare. There were efforts being made by certain people to try to sell their products or services – valuable or not – in the middle of the ongoing war. Retired soldiers, high-ranking and lower down the chain, who hadn’t already been recalled to the colours wanted to know why this wasn’t the case and were wanting to present their case right to the top when all other efforts had failed.
For many of those people, Burba should have been those whom they should have contacted in they wanted to get what they were asking for, but thankfully they focused their attention upon RisCassi. Being out of the way, being thought of as not important enough therefore suited Burba fine!
FORSCOM had been busy since before the war started, engaged in moving troops and units around ahead of REFORGER and even the New Year. It had been under Burba’s orders that following events late last year in Eastern Europe there had been an increase in readiness throughout forces which would eventually go off to war like they had done so. Formations tasked for REFORGER deployment to NATO had been sent for hasty cycling through Fort Irwin so to prepare them for possible action. Meanwhile, mid-ranking and senior officers who had been slated for retirement (early and at the required end of their commission) had seen that deferred for the time being had been reassigned due to instructions coming from Burba’s staff; this had caused a minor political scandal when later revealed though forgotten once the war begun. Once REFORGER finally got under way, too late for many and so close to the outbreak of hostilities, the changes to the deployment schedules of many units were all done under orders from FORSCOM.
Worldwide, active combatant commands – Pacific Command, European Command and Southern Command – had received those troops sent to them under REFORGER and other strategic deployment plans. There were the initial and follow-on forces dispatched to them with regulars and reservists. Afterwards, FORSCOM then oversaw the fast mobilisation of the third-wave of units which were deployed: mainly from the Army National Guard but a few units from both the Army and Army Reserve too. This was the long-established Total Force policy which had been a mainstay of planning for World War Three since the end of Vietnam where regular forces would fight alongside those reservists trained to do so.
All eighteen regular divisions had ended up in wartime positions (fourteen going to Europe, three to South Korea and one in Alaska) along with independent brigades and combat regiments. In addition, FORSCOM had then issued orders to those divisions of national guardsmen as well as their individual brigade-sized units to begin deploy once they had been mobilised for federal service. There were ten Army National Guard divisions organised pre-war with five of those having REFORGER missions and a sixth, then a seventh too, gaining late orders to join the others in Germany.
The dastardly attack conducted by the Cubans against Guantanamo Bay and Florida immediately upon the termination of the ceasefire came as a strategic surprise for the United States. There were some troops that FORSCOM had sent to Southern Command (the unified combatant commands were organised to control joint operations of all US armed services deployed into their theater of operations) but more were needed there. The fighting in South Korea was also demanding upon FORSCOM, those troops sent to Alaska were seen by many as being wasted and there was also the issue of none being deployed to the Middle East and Central Command there. The Joint Chiefs under General Powell’s command and following instructions from the President, the Secretary of Defence and the National Security Council made the overall decisions but it was down to Burba and his staff to put those strategic decisions into practice with where units were deployed to. Moreover, combat replacements and equipment to supplant what was used up / destroyed was also ordered to move where they did from Fort McPherson.
Combat soldiers were not just whom FORSCOM sent overseas.
Fighting men were vital, but so too were all those who supported them in the field. This mean everything from artillery gunners and combat engineers to truck drivers and dentists. There were so many men, and women too, who needed to be deployed to various worldwide locations to keep the war going. They all did vital jobs even if their lives weren’t directly in danger by being at the frontlines. Those troops who were fighting for their lives against Soviet tanks across battlefields of West Germany wouldn’t be able to do so if there weren’t all of their fellow soldiers behind them providing them with all of the services and equipment which they needed to have. Burba worked extensively with the United States Army Material Command (AMC) under General William Tuttle out of Fort Belvoir – located between Washington and Quantico in an extensive facility there – in making sure that what those who were being sent off to war got what they needed. Again, it wasn’t just tanks and guns but everything else too: ammunition, trucks & other vehicles, rations & medicines and so on through a list that seemed endless.
The behind the lines support network within West Germany was something which Burba and the AMC led by Tuttle had lately put a lot of effort into reestablishing there. Before the ceasefire and significant parts of the West Germany military falling apart like it had, there had been a massive local logistics network in-place there. West Germany had more men in non-combat roles than those at the frontlines so that they could support themselves and their NATO allies too in the fighting. Men and units simply melted away when West Germany was engulfed in political crisis. When the war restarted, the majority of West Germans – those who hadn’t been taken into custody by the Soviets or deserted further afield than just their own homes – returned to their units… or tried to anyway. The destruction caused directly and indirectly was widespread though and other NATO countries were joining with the American forces in West Germany in trying to repair that network for supplies, transportation, communications, medical support and rear-area security. More than just logistical units went to replace West German units that had fallen apart though. FORSCOM was assigned responsibility for working with SACEUR’s staff in Europe for the replacement of West German commanders and staff who were superseded in many places by those in American uniforms: other NATO countries were doing the same too following the collapse in faith of West Germany loyalty to the war to defend their own country.
In Western Europe, a total of twenty-two Warsaw Pact field armies were identified as seeing action up until this point: sixteen Soviet, three Polish, two Czechoslovak and one Hungarian (the East Germans had theirs broken up pre-war with units deployed individually). Each of those consisted of between three and five combat divisions along with all of their supporting arms. They fought from Denmark down through West Germany and into Austria and the Italian border. Those came in three waves, one after another thrown against NATO forces. Burba had been informed that transport links connecting Eastern Europe with the Soviet interior where more field armies were to come from as part of a fourth echelon reinforcement were cut by air power. However, FORSCOM had learnt that SACEUR had been told that those same air strikes should have stopped the third echelon: those troops had reached the frontlines regardless of how many bridges were downed and railway yards blown to pieces.
All NATO countries were deploying as many troops from their reserves as possible to fight all of the Soviet-led forces on NATO territory, the United States among those. FORSCOM was currently engaged in the process of sending second-line Army National Guard forces to Europe though at the same time needing to deploy units elsewhere to South Korea and Florida as well. As before, those decisions were made elsewhere and it was Burba’s task to make sure that they went where they were needed.
Co-located at Fort McPherson was the headquarters of the United States Third Army. In peacetime the staff were here in Georgia with a wartime mission to command combat forces sent to Central Command. There were supposed be one or more corps assigned (a NATO corps was equivalent to a Warsaw Pact field army, the Third Army would equal a Front organised by the Soviets) to fight there in the Middle East should the situation require it. Third Army headquarters already had some men on the ground in Kuwait and the United Arab Emirates, but Lt.-General John Yeosock had remained at Fort McPherson. The decision had come that the realities on the ground didn’t call for any United States Army forces, nor reservists or even as it seemed those US Marines already there in-theater, to be needed to fight in the Middle East. Instead, the Third Army was to be sent to West Germany to command American forces fighting on the North German Plain already and more which FORSCOM was to deploy. General Schwarzkopf as Central Command commander was not best pleased; more so Lt.-General Shalikashvili who was in West Germany. The internal politics of all this were supposed to be something which Burba was to have nothing to do with, but he did regard the decision to send Yeosock to effectively take over in northern West Germany from Shalikashvili as rather unfair. Yeosock had been up at Raven Rock before Powell cut the orders and Burba believed that post-war something would come out of all of this.
Yeosock was a damn fine officer but so too was Shalikashvili: the latter had on the ground combat experience there already and was effectively commanding both the US I & III Corps as part of the British-led NORTHAG. Now he was to assume command of just the newly-arriving US II Corps which was to come with Third Army. It was a demotion dressed up as a sideways move. Third Army would therefore fight on the North German Plain with a trio of corps under command, two thirds of which contained Army National Guard troops. The I Corps was almost completely made up of units from multiple states across the nation and there were more national guardsmen with the III Corps. Now to join them were three more combat divisions, plus supporting assets, in the II Corps. One of those was a pre-war established division and two more had been created by attaching separate formations together (the 28th Infantry Division was joined by the 30th Infantry & 31st Armored Divisions). Overall, the II Corps had none of the effectiveness yet that the I & III Corps had, but Burba was confident that once they saw action they would make a good show of themselves for there had been much training done as well as additions of experienced officers and newer equipment. There were other politics at play there beyond those US Army officers with the Third Army being deemed the NOREASTAG (North-Eastern Army Group) alongside NORTHAG: Seventh Army fighting in central West Germany was CENTAG. British sensitivities about playing an important role in the command structure were soothed over by this designation, Burba had been told, and they controlled their own, Belgian and other European NATO forces in NORTHAG’s former area of operations.
He wasn’t so sure about how all of that worked with allies there, but that was far beyond the scope of his responsibilities.
Two more pre-war divisional headquarters were to remain in the northeastern and mid-western United States with more national guardsmen who had been at a lower readiness undergoing refresher training before later deployments. Other national guard units which FORSCOM had recently had sent to Pacific Command and Southern Command had seen merging into new higher formations where they were. General Louis Menetrey had the 2nd, 7th and 25th Infantry Divisions under command within his Eighth Army’s IX Corps as well as a brigade of the 82nd Airborne Division. There were four Army National Guard brigades too with the headquarters for the 41st Infantry Division formed to command three of those (those from Hawaii, Illinois and Oregon) and the other (from Montana) left separate. The 41st Infantry Division had a glorious history from World War Two action in the Pacific and was now engaged in the fighting to push the North Koreans back to the DMZ. FORSCOM had sent those national guardsmen there and the two regular divisions as well. Moreover, with the 7th Infantry Division being short one of its three brigades, the headquarters of the peacetime stood-down 174th Infantry Brigade was sent to the Eighth Army to reinforce that division with the sub-units attached to it: Army Reserve combat battalions from Colorado and islands across the Pacific were joined by a regular battalion detached from Alaska.
The ill but determined General Maxwell Thurman – affectionately known as ‘Mad Max’ or sometimes ‘Maxatollah’ – who commanded Southern Command had the task of preparing to liberate the Florida Keys, retake Guantanamo Bay and possibly later lead an invasion of Cuba. The United States Army South (his subordinate command under Major-General Bernard Loeffke) had a total of seven separate combat brigades sent by FORSCOM or in-place before the war: two regular and five from the Army National Guard. There were men in Panama and Puerto Rico though his troops were generally concentrated in Florida. Any later landing in Cuba would require far more men than this, with external support from the US Marines needed for that too. Liberating the Florida Keys was the first priority though so when three of the brigades of national guardsmen in Florida were brought together into the 27th Infantry Division (units from Michigan, New York and Oklahoma) the other pair of brigades slated for smaller-scale operations against Cubans on US soil stayed independent. FORSCOM oversaw the deployment of special forces teams and helicopters down to the United States Army South. In addition, FORSCOM made sure that sufficient training in-theater would take place for the brigade from the 7th Infantry Division and the Florida national guardsmen who were set to enter the Florida Keys very soon.
The deployment to Europe of both the 173d and 177th Brigades was undertaken by FORSCOM. The former was created from the ground up and the latter reinforced from the existing formation. There was too the 4th Cavalry Brigade to become part of the 82nd Airborne Division: national guardsmen manning HMMWVs carrying TOW-missile launchers were grouped together and sent to replace the missing third combat-maneuver element that that division was lacking with its other brigade being in South Korea.
Away from complete combat formations (as well as those in supporting roles too) sent overseas by FORSCOM, individual men were deployed through orders coming from Burba’s staff.
The fighting in Europe and on the Korean Peninsula had been brutal as immense casualties taken. Some thinkers pre-war had speculated that combat in modern combat the lethality of modern weapons would mean that American soldiers fighting would all be killed and the numbers of wounded would therefore be lower than in previous war: this theory was shown to be false. Soldiers were wounded indeed, but medical care at the frontlines and in the rear was in-place to treat and evacuate the wounded. Men were killed too though, so very many of them. They were killed in direct combat on the frontlines and behind them. Soviet-built multiple-barreled rocket-launchers in their own armed forces’ hands, those of their Warsaw Pact allies and the North Koreans took the lives of many and hurt plenty too. Then there were the casualties from nerve gases, thermobaric weapons and artillery-delivered mines.
The losses kept mounting and they all needed replacing.
Enlisted men and officers on training courses left those to take the places of those killed and wounded. So too did others from staff positions back in the United States where it was judged that their places could be filled by others. Army Reserve and Army National Guard soldiers who were not directly needed with deploying formations from those services – as judged by FORSCOM – were directed to take the places of those who were unable to carry on fighting.
Yet, there was only a finite number of replacements already in uniform who could be sent from the available pool of men. During three weeks of war interspersed by two days of the ceasefire – which hadn’t been wasted at all by Burba or anyone else – so many losses were taken. Casualties were unreasonably high among the replacements who were sent overseas, just like in previous wars. SACEUR commented when Burba spoke to him that there were cases where men sent to his units in the field might not last an hour!
Using pre-existing legislation, when Congress declared war on the Soviet Union and its allies late on February 4th, the Selective Service Administration was authorised to begin the process of mobilising draftees. There would be a lottery following established procedures and men aged between eighteen and twenty-five called up for military service. Everything was in-place to do this just as had been done in previous wars which the United States had fought and so it had begun. Technical problems had come with personal details not being up to date and other men unable to attend registration. Regardless, there were already a wave of volunteers who presented themselves ahead of being drafted.
The Draft meant that millions of men would be in uniform serving their country… in six months.
There were talks ongoing at Raven Rock between the Defence Secretary, the Joint Chiefs and an army of advisers as to what to do about this situation. Could there be a shaving of the time which it took to train those men? Would that result in more unnecessary deaths where those men would very quickly be killed or wounded? Would the war last that long? If it did, would there be any non-draftees left still able to fight by that time if the casualties continued to mount as they did? In addition, those engaged in combat action needed a rest eventually and couldn’t fight continuously as they were without burnout resulting in more casualties – when could that occur when the Soviets and North Koreans kept on coming forwards no matter what?
Burba didn’t know the answers to those questions and the ultimate solution to the problem. All that he could do for now was to try to give refresher training to all those sent and work with the combatant commands in the field to do anything possible to lower casualties.
This all tied into the situation with REDBEARD. Certain intelligence information, tactical and strategic and of excellent quality, was being sent to SACEUR, Thurman and the commander of Pacific Command Admiral Hardisty under that codename. Powell and the Joint Chiefs sent it out after it came to them from the CIA and Burba wasn’t on the list of those who received it; he only heard about REDBEARD unofficially and had kept his mouth shut. The specifics hadn’t been told to him, but he was aware of the general idea. That intelligence given had allowed for select military operations to take place against the Soviets bringing successes in the field. Whoever was sending it – or maybe it was more than one person? – was establishing their bona fides though before the bombshell that they had dropped on the United States.
The Soviets regarded the conduct of the war at the minute where they had suffered serious reserves as only a temporary setback. They intended to keep the war going in a fight to the finish where ultimate victory was their goal. Burba didn’t know what that ‘ultimate victory’ was, and also whether this REDBEARD intelligence was all some sort of game for smarter people than he, but he did know that the latest word from Europe and South Korea too was that the enemy was digging-in everywhere and showing no sign of believing that they might have lost.
The war, if that intelligence was to be taken as truthful, might last six months – or longer – and those draftees could see action. Burba tried not to think about that in terms of how many casualties would mount up by then, but it was a dread that he couldn’t remove from his mind.
February 27th 1990 The White House, Washington D.C., the United States
Security through Washington and especially in the political core of the city – the general area around National Mall, the Houses of Congress and the White House – remained extremely tight. Armed police officers, D.C. Army National Guard soldiers and US Marines remained out in force and a visible presence. The White House was an armed camp with Secret Service men carrying weapons openly and above them helicopters with snipers aboard.
Professor Condoleezza Rice was driven once again through all of those ready to shoot to kill at what might have seemed like the slightest provocation. She was taken in an official vehicle onto the White House grounds and then escorted through multiple checks. Those who questioned and searched her did so gently and with respect, but with utter thoroughness. She’d been informed that there had been another ‘incident’ here or close by before coming to see the President again, but not the specifics. Whatever had occurred had ramped up security here to a near overwhelming degree. This was her fourth visit in the past couple of weeks and there had been heavy security beforehand, but nothing like today. Her FBI bodyguard was treated just like her: with manners but questioned and searched like he’d never been here before and only had malicious intentions.
Before moving to Colorado aged thirteen, Rice had grown up in Alabama. She knew what intimidation was and what too was a state of siege. Those were present here at the White House and to be inside all of this security would sooner or later affect those within negatively as well. The very real need for paranoia and to be kept safe would only be increased to an alarming degree to those – or, to be honest, just one person – protected like this.
Going through all of the security checks, she worried about the resulting mental state of President George H. W. Bush.
Rice was on unofficial leave from her post at Stanford University in northern California since last October and the beginning of the Bloody Winter in Eastern Europe. Civil strife and the resulting diplomatic crisis’ which originated in East Germany had spread to Poland first and later both Hungary and especially Romania. An expert in international relations throughout her political science teaching career, and with recognised expertise on the Soviet Union, Rice had long been associated with US Government work when it came to the Soviets. She’d worked for the State Department in the Seventies and throughout the Eighties been assisting in arms control and diplomatic strategy with many influential Washington figures: chief among those former Secretary of States George Shultz and current National Security Adviser Brent Scowcroft. Scowcroft had brought her into President Bush’s circle when it came to dealing with the Soviet Union since Eastern Europe erupted in bloodshed and she’d become one of his chief advisers on the mindset of the Soviets, not so much the inner workings of their state.
When she spoke, he listened.
Rice was with the National Security Council (NSC), a body which remained working chiefly at the White House though with functions undertaken too at Raven Rock. The top people, those key to advising President Bush during the war were here in Washington though. Officially, he was here constantly and wouldn’t leave the nation’s capital during the war; in reality he was out of the city more than being in what had to be the #1 target for Soviet missiles should the very worst occur. However, when he met with his advisers for meetings President Bush was back from those other ‘undisclosed locations’ while others would attend remotely via telephone links. She herself was working underneath R. Nicholas Burns, the Director for Soviet Affairs on the NSC, and he met with her before those attending this evening’s meeting gathered down below the Executive Wing in the Situation Room.
Burns told her the bare-bones of the latest security threat where an armed intruder had been spotted trying to get into the White House grounds last night and subsequently shot dead. In addition to a pistol, that man had apparently been carrying a rucksack with a bomb inside. He knew no more details that, but the further increase in security here was to do with that. There was an external security situation ongoing in West Virginia which might be related as well. Moving onwards, the two of them spoke about who else would be attending the briefing soon to be underway and Rice was surprised that there should be so many attendees who weren’t currently directly employed by the US Government in the Bush Administration. She was one of those as well, someone who usually advised President Bush personally (with a few others present) rather than a large gathering. Burns replied that the current situation called for it.
The Secret Service then came and collected the two of them and checked their names off the list approved by White House Chief of Staff John Sununu as well as Scowcroft before they were led downstairs.
In recent months, Rice’s security clearance had been upgraded multiple times at the direction of Scowcroft. The FBI, Secret Service and probably the No Such Agency would have repeatedly assessed her background and current contacts. Her time in Moscow in 1979 would have been looked into along with her childhood split between Alabama and Colorado. Everything she’d done, said and written that had any hint of a political connotation would have been examined from Birmingham to California. She knew damn well how to keep a secret and be aware of those who might be interested in what she knew; how someone with hostile intentions towards her country might try to influence her was something she was also conscious of too. Coming to the White House and talking with President Bush, Scowcroft and the late James Baker had been one thing as they listened to what she had to say and read what she wrote. Now she was here for a different reason though, to attend a briefing down in the Situation Room: her clearance would have been upgraded again to have her in this room.
Elizabeth Dole, Baker’s replacement as Secretary of State, met her once Rice entered the room which was smaller than she expected. Dole had moved across from the Department of Labor and there had already been whispers which Rice had heard that even with Jim Webb having assumed the role of Vice President after Dan Quayle’s murder, Dole was being considered to run for office on President Bush’s ticket in two years time. Rice had heard it said that Webb had only taken the Oath of Office as an interim measure at a time of national crisis and Dole would eventually replace him come that election which was in Rice’s opinion very far away and something which no one should really be considering at the moment. But this was Washington after all…
Scowcroft was present along with mid-level Administration figures such as Wolfowitz, Hadley and Rowen. Rice was told by Dole during a quick chat, where the Secretary of State assured her that her input at the White House was something that she had fast come to value during her short time in her new position, that Webb was in London with Gates and CIA Director Webster was absent too. Rice saw that aside from President Bush, who would arrive when he did – this was his meeting and it would start when he got here –, others she might have expected to see were missing: Cheney foremost among those. The Defence and (especially) the State Department’s both had few officials in attendance and instead there were others like her: advisers not on the Government payroll but serving their country at this time of grave need.
Among those were people such as the ex-Senator John Tower and several from the President’s Foreign Intelligence Advisory Board: Anne Armstrong, Philip Zelikow and the towering figure (reputation-wise) of Zbigniew Brzezinski.
Scowcroft, the retired USAF Lt.-General and serving National Security Adviser, led the briefing which started off the meeting once President Bush arrived. He spoke about the general situation of the war with regard to the current state of affairs. The Soviets and their allies were on the back foot and in retreat almost everywhere. The Rodina was under attack itself from the coasts off the northwest, the Crimea and the Pacific Far East. There were widespread revolts underway across the Caucasus and in isolated incidents in the Baltic’s and Central Asia. North Korea had been beaten in battle and Cuba cordoned off. On the all-important battlefields in Western Europe, the Soviet Army’s forward-most penetration deep into the Netherlands had been cut off and across West Germany their armies were pulling back to shorten their lines. NATO’s strength grew there every day and on the Korean Peninsula the armies of the Allies were getting stronger too. The Soviets were reported to be digging-in and attempting to create massive defences, but the current trends pointed to NATO’s armies rolling over those if everything went as planned. Countries worldwide were with the Allies or neutral: the Soviets had no significant allies.
The question was what to do next.
Dole took over and explained that the NSC and President Bush were seeking opinions and viewpoints from those present. There had been discussions already with allies aboard concerning whether to advance into Eastern Europe – liberating West Berlin key there – and also to invade North Korea; the ultimate end-game with Cuba had already been decided and wasn’t to be talked about here. The United States wished to fight the current war to a conclusion so that it was won in a decisive manner and the Soviets wouldn’t be able to restart it again like they had already done once. Several European allies wished to see Eastern European regimes toppled and East Asian nations fighting with the United States as part of the Allies on the Korean Peninsula certainly wanted to see the North Koreans brought down. But, there were voices of opposition too from those allies on those proposals.
Moreover, a decision needed to be made here in Washington as to the direction which the United States would take.
The risks of moving into Eastern Europe were clear, Scowcroft affirmed. This could bring about a Soviet nuclear strike, one dwarfing Flensburg & Belgrade & Sofia. They could fear that American and NATO forces driving on Berlin and Prague, then maybe Warsaw afterwards, would ultimately follow that up by the crossing of Soviet borders. In such a situation, where they were unwilling to see a Second Barbarossa, the missiles would fly. Was this thinking justified? Could the Soviets be made to understand that NATO’s armies weren’t to try to emulate the aims of Hitler’s? Was there anyone there capable of rational thinking on that matter? With regards to North Korea, was the price that would come from occupation be worth it for the United States?
President Bush asked to hear what those brought here thought.
Rice was no shrinking violet. She wouldn’t have achieved all that she had in her life, including being here, by keeping her head down and her opinions to herself: that wasn’t her. Yet with people such as Brzezinski, Tower and Wolfowitz present to articulate what she wanted to say was difficult. They had their own strong opinions and clashed among themselves. Rice tried to explain the thinking of Kryuchkov and those close to him – what she had been able to interpret of those – but several times was unable to finish.
Scowcroft and Dole didn’t lose control of the meeting but there were heated debates and a frank exchange of differences. A lot of the talk went off subject in her opinion too. There was speculation as to the cause of the war and what Kryuchkov aimed to get from it. No one, not her or anyone else, here or aboard, had been able to give an adequate explanation as to why he had launched the war which he had. To not know this, and to have so many with different ideas as to what they were, made the debates as to what endgame to the war should be complicated. The assertion from Brzezinski that an invasion into Eastern Europe would bring about a nuclear response, Tower’s push for West Berlin to be liberated to win the war and Wolfowitz’s claims that unless Eastern Europe was overrun there’d be another war this year or next were all lost in that. Rice’s unfinished points where she cautioned about pushing the Soviets too far but also making them realise they had lost the war, and having surviving moderates in Moscow get rid of Kryuchkov and his dictatorship, weren’t listened to enough as far she was concerned.
When the hour-long meeting ended, following contributions from others too, which included Sununu’s promise that the American people would demand a victory following the unprovoked and terrible war unleashed against them in what was effectively a trio of surprise attacks (the first and second Soviet attacks and the Cuban action), Rice was left rather dissatisfied.
Sununu told Rice as she was getting ready to leave that President Bush would like to see her afterwards. Burns went upstairs with her into the West Wing where she talked with him for a few moments about their shared frustration. There had been too many voices, all clashing together in trying to get their opinion heard. Burns was sure that there would be no more meetings like that and Rice agreed.
Rice met with President Bush in the Roosevelt Room. Scowcroft was there, so too was Sununu and Richard Kerr who served as the Deputy Director of Central Intelligence. There was a wait for another attendee but General Powell soon arrived and they were all asked by their president to sit close to him at the head of the room so the meeting could be informal.
President Bush asked his guests if there was someone in Moscow who’d met with Kryuchkov and claimed credit for the recent violence which had taken place in several American cities: New York, Los Angeles, St. Louis and Oakland. Powell asked what he meant and the president explained that the riots which had rocked those cities where looting, arson and mayhem had taken place due to what was criminals taking advantage of police shortages would be claimed as a success by someone from the KGB? Would Kryuchkov be told that political violence was taking place in the United States and that the KGB had fermented it? Scowcroft was polite but firm with his answer when he told the president that there was a difference between events which were known about in parts of the Soviet Union where there was civil disturbance and what had happened here at home. Kerr – here in-place of Webster – stated that he had seen firm intelligence that that violence inside the Soviet Union was not criminality like it was in the United States.
Rice spoke up and stated that she understood what the president meant. President Bush was cautioning them that if someone wanted to look at something one way they could, especially if it suited their own aims and agenda, despite all evidence pointing to the opposite. After an appreciative smile, President Bush told the others that he wanted to include Rice in elements of RAINCOAT intelligence to gain her insight into some of that.
Nods came from all around.
Kerr told her that RAINCOAT was one of the codewords being used for intelligence of the highest calibre gained by the US Intelligence Community coming from an external source. When shared, it was deemed other names: REDBEARD and REUNITE among those. The CIA was being sent military and intelligence information by an external source whose origin they weren’t sure of; the transfer to the CIA wasn’t going to be discussed here because neither Rice nor even Powell and Sununu had the necessary security clearance. Anyway, the source was unknown. It could be someone from the GRU or serving on Stavka, the Soviet General Staff… or maybe several people cooperating. It would be surprising if RAINCOAT intelligence came from the KGB. What was being sent was all sort of useful nuggets of information that had been put to use in hurting the Soviet war effort. However, despite Soviet Armed Forces and GRU assets catching ‘friendly fire’, it was truly the KGB ultimately losing out as their plans and schemes were scuppered.
There was a Soviet commando team massacred when landing on the Yorkshire coast of the UK who had been betrayed. A Soviet commanding general in the Netherlands had had his location given away for a kill mission. There was a submarine armed with land-attack cruise missiles steaming towards the Panama Canal from the Pacific side that the US Navy had been able to ambush and kill. Soviet commandos active in West Virginia were being hunted and engaged at the minute by Delta Force and the FBI’s HRT as they moved upon The Greenbrier where Congress was. Powell told of these successes with pride though with a caution too that Rice was sure she could detect. The ultimate aim for whomever was sending RAINCOAT intelligence was for the United States – for it was to the CIA it came – to strike at KGB-led operations before they could get going even if that meant Soviet military deaths.
What RAINCOAT was saying now, Rice was further informed, was that Kryuchkov was starting to understand that the war was being lost. In public, the Soviets were still claiming they were winning, but in private their leader realised that defeat was more than possible. He was ordering troops to start digging-in but more than that had looked at the possibility of using nuclear weapons again. This time it would be on the borders of the Warsaw Pact states in tactical form ahead of NATO armies, maybe even lethal biological weapons too. RAINCOAT intelligence said too that Kryuchkov, when presented with that option by several top advisers, had himself spoken of the blow-back which would occur against the Soviet Union in the terms of fall-out from those nuclear weapons – Chernobyl writ-large! – and also germs infecting Soviet citizens before diseases getting out of control.
Those reports only spoke of the effects of Soviet weapons upon themselves, not in addition to a NATO retaliation.
What did Rice think of all of this? Not so much the intelligence game someone was playing, but whether Kryuchkov and his senior people would see sense from such reports shown to them. President Bush told her that he was already considering advancing into Eastern Europe and he had Webb in London now, Paris next, trying to bring the leading Western Europeans on-side. Would Kryuchkov believe what he was told? Could he keep a-hold of power? Was the monster which was the war which had unleashed be something he could keep control of?
Scowcroft told Rice that an answer wasn’t expected now from Rice, though there wasn’t too much time to waste. Again, the president would be speaking to others, but her opinion was valued. President Bush told her himself he wanted a response that was wholly honest, cold and analytical and not something that she would think he might want to hear. However, Sununu did add that the wishes of the American people to see a just finish to the war would ultimately weigh on that final decision. This brought about a side discussion between Sununu, Scowcroft and President Bush where they talked politics while Kerr, Powell and Rice all remained aloft from that until they would get back on track.
Rice was aware of the polling numbers which they discussed. Public support for the war was most recently shown to be between ninety-seven and ninety-nine per cent in favour. She wasn’t a politician, but those were amazing numbers. There would always be some opposition to war… but 97-99% was very high. There were other numbers for recent domestic political polling: public approval for President Bush and his Administration’s conduct of the war was between seventy-five and eighty per cent. Again, 75-80% was huge, but not 97-99%. Both Houses of Congress had voted to declare war on the Soviet Union, the Warsaw Pact nations, North Korea and Cuba with no opposition at all apart from one abstention in the House of Representatives. There were no peace rallies of any significance, thousands of potential draftees weren’t running off to Canada and the country wasn’t torn down the middle. The United States was united behind the war. Rice listened though as Sununu told Scowcroft that this all mattered. Politics needed to be factored into the course that the war was to take and it really couldn’t be ignored.
While keeping her counsel on the matter, Rice did agree that Sununu had a point. The American people would want a successful conclusion to the war which they deemed as worth the lives lost and treasure expended. If they didn’t get it they would blame President Bush. Scowcroft wasn’t an idiot and he explained that he understood that, but domestic politics couldn’t drive strategic military policy. President Bush wasn’t acting as a peacemaker when he stated he shared both points of view and would take it all under consideration; Rice knew he was just being realistic.
Not long afterwards, her president wished her a goodnight as the meeting broke up. It would be one to be continued later, Rice knew, especially as she had been asked to return with a conclusion to the conundrum which her country faced.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 15:12:31 GMT
Thirteen – Homecoming
February 28th 1990 The Barents Sea
A true homecoming for the Soviet submarine K-292 would have meant returning to Vidyayevo and docking at one of the piers in Ura Bay there. The crew of one hundred and fourteen who had left from there aboard the K-292 four and a half weeks ago, men from all over the Soviet Union, would have welcomed the sight of that naval base more than could be imagined by anyone not aboard her today.
The K-292 was far from a happy boat. Tension, fear and terror was inside almost everyone aboard. At any moment a horrible death could come to all of them and they all knew that. There had been arguments aboard, many of which had got physical. One sailor had been shot, another pair frightened into submission with the threat of the same. A few of the crew had become ill from food poisoning; a rumour spread that they were suffering from radiation sickness instead. The Captain was seen walking around with a look of dread upon his face while the Political Officer – after disciplining that one unruly sailor in such a fatal manner – was observed by others to be muttering to himself while carrying his pistol openly… or so another rumour said anyway. There had been an outbreak of thievery among the personal possessions of some sailors and an unexplained small fire, one which could easily have killed everyone. The submarine had come under attack and while surviving no one seemed confident that the next time there would be an escape again; when attacking the enemy there didn’t appear to have been much success.
To return to Vidyayevo was what those aboard wanted and to get off the K-292 as soon as possible too.
The K-292 was heading in the direction of Vidyayevo and that Northern Fleet naval base where she was home-ported was currently not that far away, but there was no homecoming underway. Instead, the Type-671RTM Shchuka (NATO codename: Victor III) nuclear-powered fast attack submarine was going into battle…
…or trying to anyway.
There were American naval forces within the Barents Sea and the orders which had come to the K-292 were to engage them. This had meant that a week ago, when the submarine had been far away in the Labrador Sea – between Canada and Greenland – the war patrol there had been abandoned due to the need to defend the shores of the Rodina. There had come a difficult journey back towards home and an approach made to come at the Americans and their carrier battle groups from the rear, a supposedly unexpected direction of attack. However, those issued orders, sent out several times due to communication difficulties experienced in receiving them, had underestimated the enemy which the K-292 was to face.
The Americans weren’t docile and were watching their rear for submarine incursions. The K-292 was being brought into battle slowly and carefully with the intention to achieve something this time rather than the failures met before, but the gap, the hole in the enemy’s defences, couldn’t be found. Unless the K-292 could attack from inside the external defensive lines, then there was little chance of overall success. Again and again, while moving deep below the surface of the Barents Sea, the struggle to do that continued.
In the Control Room, where the K-292 was commanded and fought from, the officers and men stationed here were under immense stress. There was silence enforced throughout the compartment as well as the rest of the submarine, but those here knew more than most the need for that. Information from sensors fitted to the submarine had informed them that there were multiple warships up above them with their own sensors active and those hydrophones were listening for any noise that might give away the presence of a submarine such as theirs. When speaking was necessary, it was done in whispers.
The Captain issued instructions to the Navigation Officer to have the enlisted men who ‘drove’ the submarine move around. He was trying to avoid the destroyers and frigates up on the surface as well as sonobuoys dropped into the water by them as well as from helicopters too. Each movement made created sound though due to the turning of the rudders and the motion of the hydroplanes to increase & decrease depth. When one of the helmsmen moved to scratch an itch, everyone noticed and shot him hostile glances. The Political Officer, the man who terrorised not just the conscripted sailors but the officers too, whispered something in that poor man’s ear which resulted in several others seeing the helmsman shudder afterwards. Another sailor, this one from engineering, who’d been sent by the (not present) Engineering Officer up to the Control Room to hand over a message slip with information concerning the condition of the power-plant, entered the compartment making too much noise for the liking of many and was given the same treatment.
Noise killed, everyone knew, but too many people were making it for the liking of some.
There wasn’t a gap which could be found.
The Americans were moving their defensive assets about all over the place covering seemingly every inch of the ocean with their sonobuoys. The K-292 was maneuvered around one only to come close to the known range of another. The amount of those being deposited into the cold water was ridiculous! They were forming a barrier which the K-292 couldn’t cross without giving itself away. The Captain concluded that in fact his submarine would have already been detected due to all of this effort being made by the enemy but they couldn’t gain a track on him enough to even launch a speculative attack. Soon enough that would change though, probably very soon.
He started to issue new orders – more whispers – pulling back and away from the Americans. The Political Officer came over to question him at once, but he would explain the truth to the man: it would be suicide to carry on and a new approach needed to be taken. This didn’t mean changing the angle of attack but utterly changing how the K-292 was to get at the Americans. The orders stated that capital ships – ‘aviation vessels and battleships’ – were what the K-292 was to engage, not defending frigates and destroyers who would afterwards converge together to overwhelm the submarine and stop a follow-up attack furthering one against them. A plan needed to be formulated and the Captain couldn’t do that at this time.
It was another disappointing time for the K-292, a supposedly state-of-the-art and undefeatable weapon of war. Again, the submarine had been unable to achieve all that it should have been able to when going up against the enemy.
In the war’s first few days, the K-292 had met failure when launching the two land-attack missiles which she carried with her against their target on Iceland. Both of the brand-new S-10 Granat (NATO: SS-N-21 Sampson) wouldn’t have impacted as they were supposed to against Keflavik Airbase there. The first one didn’t even clear the torpedo-tube from which it was ejected properly and instead fell towards the ocean floor while the second one failed in its final launch in not breaking free of the surface as it supposed to and floating away.
A few days later when the K-292 was transiting the Denmark Strait, the waters between Greenland and Iceland, there had come an encounter with American naval forces heading east while the submarine was going west. No attack position could be found at first and even when an angle of approach was made where success might be achieved, the firing of a wave of torpedoes from the K-292 was disrupted by torpedoes entering the water from above. The submarine had to break off her attack and flee. There had been a battleship detected up above and an hour afterwards, when the Americans were gone, the K-292 had tried to broadcast news of that warship and her escorts as to where they were and where they were heading. There had been a communications failure though with the submarine being unable to talk to the Northern Fleet for several days.
Later, the K-292 received word that the battleship USS Wisconsin was active in the Norwegian Sea off Norway and engaging the surface forces of the Northern Fleet after making a ‘surprise’ attack.
When later in the Labrador Sea, there were no further attempts at engaging the enemy. This wasn’t for lack of trying, but instead there had been no warships or civilian shipping – the K-292 had very relaxed rules-of-engagement for her war patrol – to be found. An aircraft had found the submarine though. Thankfully, the airborne attack had failed and the submarine had managed to get away, but that hadn’t been good news really because it had been a close-run thing indeed.
Now, when back so near to home but so far away too due to what appeared like a wall of enemy warships between the submarine and Vidyayevo, there was again no success to be had as the K-292 was unable to fulfill the role assigned to her and her crew. The Americans were too strong where they were operating off the Soviet coast as they were in such numbers with so much protection.
February 28th 1990 Dover AFB, Delaware, the United States
Aircraft were flying into and out of Dover AFB night and day. There were military aircraft and civilian aircraft making use of the expansive facility near to Delaware Bay and the North Atlantic beyond. To and from all over the world those aircraft flew with Dover AFB being used as a departure point, a destination and a transit route for refueling too.
The military aircraft were primarily those of the USAF and USAF Reserve with cargo-lifters and air-freighters visiting the airbase to load, unload and refuel. There were C-5 Galaxys and C-141 Stratolifters, large aircraft with large holds to carry impressive amounts of men and equipment. A few foreign military aircraft configured for heavy-lifting were seen at Dover AFB on occasion too, but when a military aircraft arrived it was almost always exclusively either one of those or sometimes a transiting KC-135 Stratotanker airborne refueling aircraft. These big aircraft with four turbofan engines attached to their wings were engaged in moving their cargoes, human or material, to and from all around the globe. Use was made of the two long runaways and the logistics handing capabilities of men and facilities found at Dover AFB.
When civilian aircraft came to Dover AFB those were being flown for military purposes exclusively. There were airliners and cargo freighters who came to the airbase located in Delaware from across the globe, carrying men and other cargoes just like the military aircraft. Airline companies from across the United States, Western Europe and a select other few parts of the world had had their aircraft requisitioned to serve the war effort; many of those aircraft came with their crews either as direct volunteers or whom had been nationalised to serve their country just as the aircraft which they flew. Of these civilian aircraft, it was again bigger models which were making use of Dover AFB with those built by Airbus, Boeing, Fokker, Lockheed, McDonnell Douglas and Vickers – two- and four-engined aircraft ideal for long-range, over-the-water flight – being seen at the airbase on a regular basis.
To say that the airbase was important for the NATO war effort would be a vast understatement. What Dover AFB provided for the war effort on behalf of the United States, NATO and the wider Allies too was a perfectly secure transport hub located at an ideal location on the Eastern Seaboard. It was near to transport routes internally within the United States as well as close to the ocean too. Those who worked there and all of the facilities were already in-place to handle large numbers of big aircraft coming in and out fully loaded with passengers and military equipment. There were, of course, other sites too – both military and civilian – doing the same yet Dover AFB was one of the biggest and busiest air transport hubs which the West was using for the war effort when it came to trans-Atlantic flights being supported. So many soldiers and so much cargo went through the facility that Dover AFB had already broken peacetime records for flight and passenger movements set by the most busy international airports.
Also coming into Dover AFB on a regular basis were caskets containing the remains of American military war dead making a homecoming.
Co-located with Dover AFB was the Dover Port Mortuary, a military facility of just as much importance as the airbase itself. Prewar planning was for – as was the case in recent American wars abroad – bodies to be brought here so that they could afterwards be sent across the nation for burial. In the main they came by air into Dover AFB though there were others which arrived into maritime terminals such as the nearby Port of Wilmington or others further afield such as Savannah in South Carolina and California’s Long Beach. Regardless, all came to the Dover Port Mortuary in the end despite the method of bringing them into the United States and where they had fallen around the world.
There were peacetime staff in-place already and those had been joined by reservists to handle the necessary work that needed to be done. The caskets arrived at the facilities and were brought inside where the identities of the bodies which they contained were given a final official check: they weren’t going off to families with the remains of someone else inside. Much preparation work had been done overseas before transit with the bodies inside each casket but there were still some other tasks which needed to be done. This was not work for the fainthearted and no one here found their job pleasant. They knew it was important though and went about it with the dedication expected.
As a general rule of thumb, each casket contained the body of either a solider, sailor or airman who had been prepared overseas before sent by air or sea on the long trip to Dover Port Mortuary. The caskets had been sealed and the paperwork was attached. Each casket had to be opened here though for checks to be made on the embalming and identity of the body. Yet there were also caskets which contained only partial remains though or others that needed ‘special treatment’. In the latter case this meant that the bodies had been exposed to chemical agents or even radiation (expose from civilian or military nuclear reactors) and had to be handled in a different manner than others.
Caskets afterwards left here by road or rail and began the final stages of the journeys which would take their contents home. And overhead, outside of the mortuary, aircraft flew into Dover AFB carrying more caskets and the bodies within them.
When the war had initially opened, it had taken a few days for the caskets to start arriving. Military personnel arrived at Dover Port Mortuary first to get everything set up for the incoming tide that was expected due to prewar studies on the number of casualties which could be expected and word coming from the frontlines in Europe and the Korean Peninsula that those figures were being met, even excelled.
A backlog built up fast.
The staff worked long shifts and the facility ran twenty-four hours a day but the numbers were just too great. The reasons for the delays and the piling of caskets needing attending to were several. There was the issue with paper studies in peacetime being too optimistic as to how fast the necessary processes here could be completed; staff burnout also hadn’t been factored in. There were delays caused by the wrong identities being given to the bodies in many caskets and then the special treatment which needed to be done to the remains of those which needed them. So many fatal casualties were being inflicted overseas as well and all of the bodies were being sent here to this one location.
With the facility being military-run, there was great sensitivity to what had occurred with the backlog. Moreover, it wasn’t just the staff here who were not happy with how the caskets were being stacked up as they arrived and not shipped out to families quick enough but everyone else who saw or heard about this too. At Dover AFB the airbase’s commanding officer was informed and joined the Adjutant General of the State of Delaware (chief of the Delaware National Guard) in offering any assistance possible to Dover Port Mortuary to ease the difficulties. Both men were aware of the morale issue that could come as word spread and wanted to alleviate that as fast as they could. In conjunction with the commander at the mortuary, they sent word up the chain-of-command.
Very quickly, this was brought to the attention of the those right at the top. General Vuono as US Army Chief-of-Staff heard about it first and informed the Joint Chiefs and General Powell. Orders were cut for further reservists from the medical profession with mortuary training, who’d been recalled to active service for their nation but not yet deployed either overseas, to be sent to Dover Port Mortuary. A senior USAF man was sent to Dover AFB to report on the methods of shipping across from there to the mortuary – he found no errors being made – and the US Army dispatched a team of transportation specialists to help move processes caskets containing bodies out and on their final journeys as fast as possible too.
Politicians noticed as well.
The matter was brought to the attention of Congressman Les Aspin, a Democrat from Wisconsin. He was at The Greenbrier where as chairman of the House Armed Service Committee there was naturally a great deal of attention being paid by him and others to the conduct of the war. Whereas his counterpart heading the Senate Armed Service Committee had immediately before and then during the war clashed with the Bush Administration concerning the conduct of the war – there were quite a few points of contention, many justified but others not – Aspin had instead tried to steer his committee into maintaining what he regarded as the national interest. This brought him problems with other members on his committee as well as throughout the ranks of senators and representatives secured safely in West Virginia at their luxury resort, but he weathered the storm. When he heard that there was a backlog of bodies of American servicemen stacking up at Dover Port Mortuary he at once went straight to Secretary of Defence Cheney, not the media or anyone else, but the man ultimately in charge.
Cheney had been maintaining a delicate balancing act with Congress since the war began. He himself was a former congressmen – ten years as the representative-at-large from Wyoming – and been House Minority Whip before assuming his role following Bush’s succession of Reagan. He understood how Congress worked and knew that there were certain personalities there who had been launching attacks in the media against staff members of his who remained at the White House and been involved in the initial discussions surrounding the replacement of Dan Quayle as Vice President. He was leading the US Armed Forces in a global war and knew when to pick his battles; when the clamor for the appointment of Jim Webb as a replacement came, Cheney did nor said nothing… he would state in later years that he saw first before many that Vice President Webb would be a disaster but knew that no one would listen to him. Away from those political battles fought and walked away from, Cheney maintained a good relationship with Aspin despite their partisan difficulties.
The two of them, Aspin and Cheney, had gone to Dover Port Mortuary themselves to see what was going on and try to address the problems. Unfortunately, there was no instant magic the pair of politicians could work; no instant solutions to the issues could be done by either. They saw what was occurring for themselves and spoke to those involved though before going back to The Greenbrier and Raven Rock with a determination to act elsewhere to change things.
There was already a Joint Chiefs of Staff directive in-place that a second, temporary facility to mirror what was being done in Delaware to take place in Hawaii too. Caskets with the remains of fallen servicemen from the Pacific theater of operations were to be dealt with there, taking some of the slack off Dover Port Mortuary. The logistics help sent by General Vuono was also expected to show progress in the sending of bodies back to their families as well. It was an ongoing process to fix the issue despite the wishes of so many for instant change.
In an upsetting incident, a C-141 coming to Dover AFB laden with caskets went down over the North Atlantic just as improvements started to be made. The crash was unexplained and came out of the blue with no sign of enemy action nor any evidence to show what had happened. The aircrew aboard were all lost and so too were the remains of servicemen aboard taking part in a homecoming. Another aircraft on a similar mission only days into the war had been shot down by an enemy aircraft over the British Isles too, but the second incident was regarded as worse due to the total lack of knowledge as to what exactly had occurred and no method of getting to the bodies being carried.
Today, just as every day, aircraft continued to arrive at Dover AFB. Many of those brought caskets with them with bodies inside.
There was no sign at the minute of any halt coming to this.
February 28th 1990 Oldenburg, Lower Saxony, West Germany
After holding out for two days when surrounded on all sides, the garrison of Warsaw Pact troops which had been holding on to Oldenburg when cut off with the stated intention of not surrendering did just that this morning.
An Oberst (Colonel) with the East German Grenztruppen (Border Troops) surrendered the city and its defenders to NATO forces outside who had been investing Oldenburg. He announced that there had been ‘incidents’ overnight where Soviet and Polish senior officers, those above him previously, had ‘fallen to German bullets’ and so he was in charge and eager to surrender. The Oberst cut short all of the formalities expected in such a scenario and told the West German and American military officers with whom he met at the airbase outside the city that entrance into Oldenburg was granted for them and he had his people ready to hand over their weapons as soon as possible. There were some prisoners as well, captives he was eager to get rid of before some of his men shot them and they wouldn’t be of any use to NATO.
Just before nine o’clock, NATO forces entered the city to liberate it.
Retaking Oldenburg was not a military priority at the moment for NATO. They had their forces fighting far away to the west in the northern Netherlands surrounding a more active and larger pocket of cut-off Warsaw Pact troops who were trapped there while to the east the effort was focused on securing the whole of the left bank of the Weser. Oldenburg had been surrounded because a whole range of enemy rear-area troops on supply and occupation duties had withdrawn into there in a panic but had no mobile combat capability – tanks, armoured vehicles and fuel & ammunition for those – to make them a threat to NATO objectives on the western side of the North German Plain. There had been no artillery or air barrages of the city, especially because there were still known to be civilians there, and intelligence-gathering forays around the edges had been limited too.
Politically there would be gain achieved in liberating Oldenburg as the biggest urban location in recently recaptured territory but even then there was a limit to that. The West German government down in Munich didn’t have much influence in the north of their country and most NATO nations weren’t anywhere near as concerned when it came to keeping them onside as had been the case before the act of betrayal which had come with that ceasefire in the middle of the month. It would be good in the long run, that was acknowledged, but there was no pressing political need to move in there straight away.
Nothing would be gained by fighting a battle for Oldenburg. There would be a light infantry fight across an urban terrain for NATO in taking the city where casualties would be huge for the attackers, the defenders and the civilians known to be in there. The road and rail links inside Oldenburg were known to be just as destroyed as those outside – negating any logistical gains – and the prewar busy canals were blocked due to sabotage. When making an effort to take the Luftwaffe facility, where Alpha-Jets flew from before the war, the deliberate damage there had already been seen and it was known the West German and then Warsaw Pact efforts at that would have been repeated in the city around anything of any military value. The actual strength of the trapped Warsaw Pact forces was unknown and so too was how many civilians were in Oldenburg.
The plan had just been to surround it with second- and third-line troops, West Germans preferably, and bypass the city; this had been how things were going until the sudden surrender.
In an unhappy situation for seemingly all of those involved, the Allied I Corps and the higher command of that formation NORTHAG had operational control over the troops which had invested Oldenburg. NATO forces in northern West Germany were undergoing a command transformation with the US Third Army arriving to assume command of the growing American military commitment on the North German Plain and during that shuffling of troops around the former Allied Mobile Force was now under British command. NORTHAG’s main combat strength, its corps of regular British and Belgian forces, was active far away to the south in the Weser Uplands with the Americans taking charge of their own troops now advancing to clear the enemy along the Weser further downstream. There was though that vast region of recaptured territory behind the Americans and stretching back to the Dutch border which the Allied I Corps was directed to supervise the operations within over with West German troops brought from Ostfriesland in the north and from the Ruhr area to the south meant to secure against bypassed pockets of resistance, including Oldenburg. Furthermore, almost all of the Allied I Corps’ previous fighting soldiers, airborne and airmobile troops who had fought in Norway before coming to West Germany, were already effectively under American command as it was: the (US) 177th Armored Brigade, the (mixed British, West German and NATO) 1st Fallschirmjager Division and the (US) 10th Infantry Division were semi-detached from their corps command acting independently under US Third Army command.
The troops outside of Oldenburg which the East German colonel surrendered to were a mix of men from all over the place with only a very few frontline soldiers. The Americans there were Green Berets studying the enemy up close while the West Germans, far more numerous, were a collection of rear-area troops forming a cordon around the city but tasked with communications and transportation duties elsewhere. The surrender came out of the blue and with haste NATO troops entered Oldenburg. It could have been a disaster, a trap for them, but thankfully it wasn’t.
For the West Germans who moved into Oldenburg so unexpectedly, it was a homecoming for them which they had feared would never occur.
Flakbatterie 243 was a Luftwaffe mobilisation unit based in Oldenburg armed with twelve Rh-202 towed anti-aircraft guns (organised into three platoons of four guns each as well as a platoons for headquarters and supply/maintenance) which hadn’t given up the fight. The reservists who were with this small formation came from the city and its surrounding area and fought throughout the war in multiple engagements. Their twin-barrelled guns had destroyed and damaged many aircraft and helicopters when first supporting the rear-area ground defence of NORTHAG in the first round of fighting and then withdrawing with the Americans when the ceasefire which their government had signed had been announced. That betrayal had been personal for them as their home city had been surrendered to the enemy; the commanding Hauptmann had sent an obscene message to his own commander refusing to obey orders before linking up with the nearest American unit. Now these men went back into Oldenburg as part of a convoy of Territoralheer troops – men whose homes were in the Rhineland and who hadn’t given in either – who entered the city first. They had their guns with them and were ready to use them against aerial threats if need be, but also possibly against ground resistance too… they’d done so before with the fire-power and the ability to depress the barrels being made use of previously.
Military police units – Feldjäger – also entered the city, more reservists. These came from units which had fled to Ostfriesland several weeks ago with prewar formations consolidated due to desertion and enemy action into new units. With these Feldjäger came a detachment of civilian intelligence officers who served with both the BfV and the LfV. These federal and state level domestic security services were organisations which had been riven by betrayal and desertion throughout the war on a scale comparable to no West German military formation. There were some men who hadn’t sold out their country or ran away fearing the worst though, and they went with the troops entering Oldenburg. Among them were a few men from the Lower Saxony LfV field office that was located in that city and somewhere that they knew the occupiers would have been to themselves.
Apart from those who called Oldenburg home before the war, the other West Germans who went with them were taking part in a homecoming too. This was a West German city which had been occupied by the enemy. There would have been crimes committed against the people there to add to the general destruction and death which came with war. It had been seen elsewhere across the nation in liberated territory and the news had spread of what had occurred in those places. Those entering Oldenburg knew what they were to expect and tried to steady themselves for the horrors which they anticipated seeing inside the city. What exactly had occurred with reported infighting among the occupiers would be of no immediate concern to them, but rather the fate of their fellow citizens who hadn’t got away in time before the occupation was of importance.
That was whom they were returning to rescue, even with the knowledge that for so many it would be far too late.
February 28th 1990 RAF Abingdon, Oxfordshire, Great Britain
It was far from ‘the flight of the condemned’, despite the comments from a few aboard.
The BAC One-Eleven in UK Air livery arrived at RAF Abingdon with two aircrew, fourteen attendants and sixty passengers; the latter all medical evacuations. Those British Armed Forces personnel had been evacuated back to Britain from West Germany with this flight on a civilian aircraft requisitioned for military use originating from Belgium. There had been a storm active over the English Channel and southern half of the North Sea which the One-Eleven had been routed around but otherwise it had been an uneventful flight. For the aircrew – a pilot and co-pilot who flew with One-Eleven’s in peacetime though with British Airways, not the smaller UK Air – and the specialist medical & military intelligence personnel assigned as attendants for those being evacuated they were grateful after other unfortunate experiences so far during this conflict. They had a difficult job to do and were aware of the sensitivity of the matter so every little helped.
The passengers, unaware of the storm and the threats from enemy fighters which had been avoided due to the flightpath taken, were what mattered and keeping them safe and in comfort was essential.
Once on the ground, the One-Eleven taxied off the runaway and towards the flight ramp. It was just starting to get dark outside on this cold February night and up on the flight-deck the aircrew looked out at their surroundings as they were soon towed into position by ground transport. There were a dozen ex-civilian VC10 airliners visible all out in the open. Those former airliners had been brought by the RAF back in the early Eighties and stored for parts or if there was a national emergency; the latter had come about and there was hasty work going on with them here to get them in flying condition for either transport or tanker roles. Elsewhere, the aircrew saw other personnel working out in the open on smaller combat aircraft with what liked major repair or regeneration work being done to them.
In the passenger cabin, the attendants fussed around some of the carried military personnel. They had lists of what passenger was in what category and therefore the level of attention which was supposed to be shown to each of the men was given. They needed to get ready to deplane the men who wore a various collection on uniforms. Many would be able to get off the aircraft themselves, others wouldn’t even if they declared that they would be able to. It was difficult work for the attendants but this wasn’t the first of one of these flights carrying such passengers which they had been on and nor did they expect it to be their last either.
The passengers themselves were all medical evacuation cases. These were not men carrying serious physical injuries though; they weren’t in stretchers, needed wheelchairs or to be carried off the One-Eleven. Instead, their injuries were those unseen to the untrained naked eye. These were men who had recently been liberated from enemy detention when held in captivity on the Continent and who it had been decided weren’t in a fit state to return to their units or immediate reassignment elsewhere within the British Armed Forces fighting there. Their stories varied from how they had been treated, what they had seen and what they had endured. Their length of captivity had been between two and nine days which meant that each had been through the tough process of being captured by the enemy and then sent through ‘processing’ on their way to distant (and unliberated) POW camps back in Eastern Europe before they had been liberated by advancing NATO troops. Each of them had watched others whom they were with either sent for urgent medical attention or returning to the war while they themselves had been sent to Belgium and then to this aircraft.
The majority of them understood what was going on and some of the most vocal of them declared that the flight to RAF Abingdon contained the ‘head cases’; in polite terms, those judged when back on the Continent that they needed psychiatric care either in the short- or long-term and so couldn’t remain in a war zone. There were statements made from some that they were fine and wanted to join their buddies back fighting the enemy. Others put up no resistance to being evacuated and were very glad to be leaving. A couple voiced their opinions of doom and spoke openly that they were to be condemned as cowards and traitors. Then there were those that said and did absolutely nothing at all and were treated by the attendants with care but by a few of the others as one would a leper.
For all of those involved, the transport of military personnel who were classed as needing this form of medical evacuation back to Britain with their homecoming taking such a form was a difficult time.
When the evacuees came off their aircraft they were a wide mix of military personnel. There were officers and enlisted men, regulars and reservists. Fifty-five of them were from the British Army and the Territorial Army with the other five being from the RAF. Infantrymen were present along with armoured vehicle crews, gunners and engineers. There were staff officers, storesmen and technicians. One of the RAF men was a pilot while the others were ground personnel. The majority had been captured when fighting in the Netherlands and were being transferred back across the North German Plain though there were stragglers already in that area (along with the downed Jaguar pilot) who’d only recently been detained by the Soviets after long being behind enemy lines.
The ordeals that these men had been through when in the hands of the enemy were disturbing when it came to their own treatment as well as what they’d witnessed happening to others. These evacuees had afterwards been spoken to following American tanks liberating the holding facilities where they’d been held with several talks taking place with each. Medical professionals and military intelligence staff had decided that these men couldn’t stay on the Continent and needed to go home to be cared for. There might have been some mistakes made with a few of them… and also with fellow captives of theirs too who had been released to rejoin their units and shouldn’t have been. The situation on the ground back in West Germany, even in Belgium far behind the frontlines, was dangerous though and matters had been rushed. In most cases with these particular men it had been obvious that they needed medical evacuation from those who’d dealt with others before them; a couple of borderline cases had been sent too even when official orders on the ground for the personnel teams who spoke to liberated POWs that they should endeavor to return men to their units because every available man was needed. Well, it was thought by those whose job it was to judge the mental well-being of former captives that in many cases it was better to be safe than sorry: they’d heard of a few shocking incidents where earlier released captives had returned to the fighting and taken the lives of themselves or others because they were suffering gravely and that hadn’t been noticed or adequately dealt with.
Ground personnel – orderlies and nurses – met the evacuees and brought them to the waiting coaches as well as a couple of parked ambulances. Calmness was the order of the day, getting everyone loaded quickly and with no drama into the vehicles so they could set off from RAF Abingdon to the next location. There were aircraft making use of the air base though this was far from a frontline location nor a major transport center so there were little distractions or delays to the process.
Soon enough the vehicles started moving and the One-Eleven, along with those who had brought the evacuees here aboard, were left behind.
It was to the military hospital at RAF Bicester where they were going.
That lay on the other side of Oxford, twenty miles away by road, and was an American-manned facility despite the British designation for the whole site. A few RAF operations took place there in peacetime, but there was a combat hospital on-site run by the US Air Force with a skeleton staff ready to be reinforced heavily in wartime as the main tenant. As the war had gone on, RAF Bicester hadn’t been as thoroughly used by the Americans such as RAF Little Rissington in Gloucester had been, especially since there had been many casualties flown back to the United States for MEDEVAC when military bases across Britain had been attacked as they had been. There were facilities at RAF Bicester for dealing with post-traumatic shock patients and – following Soviet reverses in the air where they were left almost unable to attack Britain anymore – there was relative peace and quiet there. The British Armed Forces were struggling with bed space with so many casualties in military hospitals up and down the country as well as problems which had arisen with wounded being put into civilian hospitals too.
Medical personnel who were trained in dealing with psychiatric care – regular doctors and nurses reinforced by reservists – were thus dispatched to the hospital in rural Oxfordshire. RAF Bicester had become a center for treating those who needed specialist care in relation to mental health issues in relation to the war and the British additions to the on-site staff worked alongside the Americans already there. It wasn’t going to be perfect and no miracles were going to be performed, but those who were being sent there needed care and there was a duty to help them.
Not all those at RAF Bicester were former captives, but when it came to the men such as those who’d arrived at RAF Abingdon tonight there would be questions for some of them to see if they could also assist in military intelligence matters: identifying missing personnel who might have been POWs, relating the activities of KGB & GRU interrogators and giving statements as to war crimes which they’d seen occur before being taken into captivity. This was always going to be of importance to the overall war effort. Furthermore, there would be questions for a few of them about the level of cooperation given by other captives to those who had detained them as well. No one wanted to do all of this due to what damage it might do to already damaged men, but it would have to be done regardless and there was the hope that what knowledge could be solicited would be elicited in the least harmful manner.
February 28th 1990 Panmunjom, near the Joint Security Area and the Demilitarized Zone, North Korea
The Australian Armed Forces had been active in the Second Korean War almost since the very beginning. Within days of the start of the fighting on the Korean Peninsula, Australian troops and aircraft took part in engagements there defending South Korea against North Korean aggression. This immediate involvement was not due to any form of direct alliance between Australia and South Korea nor the ANZUS treaty obligations which Australia had or even the Commonwealth-organised Five Power Defence Agreements (FPDA). Instead, Australia made an early commitment to the defence of South Korean territorial sovereignty, and therefore independence too, due to United Nations responsibilities which the country had back from the early Fifties.
More than two thousand troops at a time from Australia had been present on the ground during the First Korean War with a drastic scale-back afterwards that saw the country left devoid of an Australian military presence through most of the ceasefire which lastly nearly forty years. There had remained an Australian detachment in Japan under the United Nations Command Rear (UNC-R) organisation with that eventually falling to a few staff officers posted to Yokota Air Base near Tokyo. The legal requirement remained for Australia to assist in defending South Korea and it was actually something taken seriously by successive governments in Canberra. When tensions rose as they did in Europe, and then there came ominous warnings that something was going to happen on the Korean Peninsula too, Australia had started to prepare for the worst. To send the Australian Armed Forces to Europe wasn’t something that was desired, but South Korea – a trading partner, a friend and a democratic nation menaced by one which was not – was different.
By February 6th, two days after the start of the war, a battalion of light infantry trained in the intervention role departed from their forward base in Malaysia where they were located as part of the FPDA. They went to Japan first, followed by part of a squadron of multi-role combat aircraft. The initial intention was to work with the UNC-R as part of those long-standing commitments to support the flow of supplies and reinforcements into South Korea to defend that country. Then Yokota came under attack by cruise missiles as Japan was targeted not by the North Koreans but by the Soviets: Australian lives were lost due to Soviet attacks. There were political debates back home before Yokota was attacked with fears from some that Australia was to be drawn into a major Asian war again (Australian forces had fought in Vietnam) and those debates were even more heated following that Soviet action. However, Australian forces deployed aboard on international duty had faced an unprovoked attack like they had.
Australia was left with no choice but to further their commitment to the defence of both South Korea and Japan now and take part in operations against Soviet forces – where found – as well as those from North Korea.
North Korea’s armies drove the South Koreans and Americans back further and further away from the border. Seoul was threatened with envelopment within a week of the war commencing by North Korean forces. It wasn’t just civilians soon to be trapped in a massive pocket around the South Korean capital, but large parts of the South Korean army as well as American forces within the region too. Australia was given notice of the use of American nuclear weapons to reverse the tide though not a veto over that decision. At that point they still had their combat forces far from the frontlines on security duties in the very south – where they saw action against North Korean commandoes – and across western parts of Japan. Moreover, in realpolitik terms away from diplomatic niceties, the views of Australia weren’t that important. South Korea could have fallen if the North Koreans had been able to achieve the completion of their drive to surround Seoul, Inchon and the Hwaseong-Osan-Suwon area: that hadn’t been something that the Americans, nor the South Koreans either, weren’t going to allow.
There had been no Australian forces anywhere near the site of the three detonations of tactical thermonuclear weapons on February 12th. Those had taken place in low-laying areas, among valleys where the weapons effects were supposed to be multiplied by the local geography as American and South Korean forces sheltered from those blasts. Two of the multi-divisional corps commands which the North Koreans were using to invade South Korea were left devastated with less damage done to the third. Regardless, the North Koreans were left dumbstruck by such an attack and helpless when South Korean armoured forces hit them with a counterattack. The ceasefire that came into place elsewhere in the world didn’t take hold on the Korean Peninsula and so since then the war had been taken to the North Koreans with their forces being pocketed in places, obliterated to the last man in other locations and elsewhere drive back. To their crossing points over the upper reaches of the Han River it was first then to the Imjin River before the DMZ and finally back into their own country, that was where American and South Korean forces – technically operating under United Nations command structures such as what Australia had joined – were pushing the North Koreans.
Other countries joined Australia in sending military forces to South Korea. Canada and New Zealand promised a contribution while Malaysia and Singapore – FPDA partners – also started the process. Taiwan offered to do the same, but the Americans dissuaded them from doing so for one reason and one reason alone: keeping China out of the fighting on the Korean Peninsula so that the Second Korean War wasn’t like the First. However, Canada’s need for more troops to go to Europe cut short their planned deployment and the use of nuclear weapons by the Americans had the predicted effect that it would upon New Zealand. From Wellington came the word that the planned New Zealand military deployment wouldn’t be happening. There would be no link up with Australian, Malaysian and Singaporean forces under a Commonwealth banner from those now not being sent by New Zealand.
Once the counteroffensive got underway and success was met in forcing back the invaders, as bloody as that was due to stubborn North Korean resistance, the Australian Government acted to increase their commitment. There were two squadrons of FA-18 Hornet strike-fighters in Japan which moved across to South Korea to be joined by another pair of combat squadrons from the Royal Australian Air Force which were operating F-111 strike-bombers. Several warships and submarines with the Royal Australian Navy were already in the region but more were sent. On the ground was where the largest reinforcement came with the decision made back in Canberra that troops held ready at home were to be released for full-scale combat operations on the Korean Peninsula. There would be two brigades – the 1st and the 3rd all with regular troops – who would go to South Korea to fight, a significant increase over the lone battalion held back on security duties in the rear. The third battalion of the Royal Australian Regiment had taken part in many fights beforehand, but not seen action on the frontlines near Seoul. Now, those troops which had been trained and assembled for movement across Australian previous to the increase in commitment began to deploy. There was some American logistical assistance, but overall Australia moved its own forces that considerable distance. Command-wise, Australian forces in South Korea would come under American command; they’d no longer work under a United Nations headquarters which wasn’t being used due to the realities on the ground.
Now, at the end of the month where large parts of the world had erupted in violence and so many countries had been drawn into the ongoing conflict which was World War Three, Australian forces on the ground on the Korean Peninsula were moving forward soon to go into action… and inside North Korea too.
National Route 1 was the designation for the highway on South Korean territory which ran up the western side of their country. In the north, this major highway went over the Imjin and as far as the Joint Security Area inside the DMZ. Beyond lay the road into North Korea and the city of Kaesong which connected to National Route 1 but was hardly a major civilian highway like what was in South Korea. Furthermore, the road which ran inside North Korea on the other side of the DMZ was for military traffic only.
That was the case now, but it was South Korean, American and Australian military traffic which was using the road in what many were calling ‘Invasion Route 1’.
The whole of the Joint Security Area had been obliterated, wiped from the face of the earth by extraordinarily North Korean demolitions there on that site where talks of a military nature since the 1953 ceasefire and the outbreak of the Second Korean War had been held. Such scenes had been repeated elsewhere on South Korean soil at certain locations where the North Koreans believed that their own twisted propaganda needs demanded that such places no longer existed. Australian troops moving into North Korea to join the fighting around Kaesong went through there without really noticing that there was anything to see, because there was nothing after the North Koreans had done their work.
It was the same with Panmunjon, an abandoned village past which the road ran.
As the armoured vehicles and trucks with Australian soldiers inside them who were so far away from their own country and with no homecoming long in sight for them went past, none of those soldiers saw anything there. There was just bare countryside all around them. It looked odd to those who took the time to stare at their surroundings as they made their way to the fighting up in the distance, though they couldn’t put their finger on what exactly was wrong. What was wrong was that there was nothing to see. None were able yet to understand the devastation which had been so organised and so thorough which they were going to continue to encounter during their time inside North Korea.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 15:16:13 GMT
Fourteen – Defection
March 1st 1990 Geneva, Geneva Canton, Switzerland
A man had called the British Consulate-General in Geneva and asked to speak to the Second Assistant Passport Officer. His English had been terrible and difficult to understand over the telephone when the call was taken and he had refused to listen that there was no person with such a title working within the diplomatic compound. Nonetheless, in spite of such an answer he wouldn’t get off the line. He carried on by stating that in fifteen minutes he would be at the main entrance to the Consulate-General and he wanted the Second Assistant Passport Officer to meet him there, one Richard Dearlove. He himself would be at the gate and would require the man he asked he to see to be there then; no, he wouldn’t call back at a later date or be willing to meet anywhere else.
A quarter of an hour later, two men met at the gate in the early morning fog.
The foreigner was putting a brave face on the whole thing, in the opinion of Dearlove. He was pretending that he was calm and confident though in reality he was nervous and scared. Once Dearlove came out to see him, the man who said that his name was Vladimir rushed what he had to say where he continued to speak in broken English. He said that he was an officer with the KGB, working for Line X and assigned to Paris. He wished to defect to the United Kingdom and wanted to do that right at this moment. He wanted safety and the promise of a reward for all of the information which he could give, information that he affirmed would be of vital importance to Britain. But it had to be done now, there was no time to wait.
His left hand was bandaged and his face looked swollen as if he had been in a fistfight recently. He fidgeted and couldn’t keep still. He stunk of cigarettes and maybe alcohol too behind the mouthwash. His clothes were disheveled – as if he’d slept in them for several days – and he gave off an unpleasant air of someone whom good company wouldn’t come from. Dearlove could have turned him away, maybe might have but…
…he clearly knew a lot. He knew the real name of the MI-6 man who had come out to meet him, not his working name which he used when abroad, and when calling he had requested that he speak to the Second Assistant Passport Officer: there was no official duty named as such within the diplomatic missions of Britain abroad but instead it was a tongue-in-cheek term used by MI-6 officers abroad amongst themselves to describe what they didn’t do. Moreover, at times like this, with the world at war and Britain intimately involved in that, this man who said he was from the KGB and wished to make a defection was someone that Dearlove should at least talk to.
If the man was someone whom Dearlove considered he and his country had no use for than he would always eject him from the compound and hand him over to the Swiss. With fighting raging among all of Switzerland’s neighbours and a heightened sense of security across their nation, they would take care of this foreigner who Dearlove reckoned didn’t have the correct papers on him to be in their country at this time.
Once on the grounds of the Consulate-General, Lt.-Colonel Viktor Alekseevich Oshchenko – ‘Vladimir’ – let out a sigh of relief.
He was safe!
He would live!
Following the British spy through the building, Oshchenko went upstairs with this Dearlove character and into an office. No words were exchanged between them and he noticed that several other people present all averted their gaze from him. He was aware of his physical appearance but knew that it wasn’t that. Instead, those here had been trained to mind their own business and look away. They were professionals here, just as he’d known, and only professionals could keep him safe.
Soon enough, he’d be taken to Britain. There he’d talk, he’d tell them everything that they wanted to know and more. He would reveal to them so much so that there wasn’t even the thought of getting rid of him. Sending him back to his own country nor to France, which from both nations he was fleeing, wouldn’t be considered once he started talking to the British. He hoped that they’d take him to a country manor somewhere in the English countryside. Somewhere nice and relaxed, far away from danger. He would like that.
Dearlove brought the Russian into his own office deep within the building which was a small windowless office. He sat the defector down and offered him some tea. A recording device was activated and so too was the open telephone line which he had set up back to his supervisor in the Swiss capital Bern where the senior MI-6 man in Switzerland’s capital at the Embassy had been alerted and was waiting so he could hear what was said. This whole odd occurrence was so unlike how things would usually be done but with the war almost a month old and Switzerland a battlefield of diplomacy and intelligence work rather than armies, Dearlove and MI-6 were working with what they had been given not what they had sought out in the usual manner of courting contacts and defectors.
Getting down to business, Dearlove asked the man what his real name was, what was his rank & assignment and what did he expect from his defection here.
The Russian gave a name and then told him that he was a lieutenant-colonel within the KGB’s First Chief Directorate, it’s foreign intelligence arm. He stated that he was with Line X, which dealt with obtained military technical intelligence. He was currently assigned to the KGB staff in Paris and had gone undercover on the eve of war where he had been tasked to support ‘special operations’ within France conducted by others. In undertaking his defection, he expected that the British would be grateful for all that he could tell them about the various intelligence related matters he knew: not just during the war, but beforehand when he was in France and previous to that when he was assigned to work in Britain. He invited Dearlove to check with his home office back in London. Oshchenko stated that he was sure that his picture was on file along with some intelligence about him and that by checking that they would be able to see that he was who he said he was.
He wanted to go to Britain and to go there fast. He would talk here in Geneva, but he would be able to talk more when he was safe in Britain. When Dearlove asked who he’d feared was after him, Oshchenko gave him an incredulous look before telling him that the KGB would be after him. He had abandoned his comrades and they might have guessed by now that he was defecting. They would be looking for him in Paris but soon would be widening their search. Geneva wouldn’t be safe, he declared, because nowhere in mainland Western Europe was safe: the KGB still had an active presence with NATO intelligence forces having failed to detain all of its operatives on their soil here on the Continent. Back in Britain he’d feel safer though.
There was a lot more to all of this, Dearlove could see, but once Vladimir aka Oshchenko started talking, he realised that this man was a prize catch. He wasn’t saying everything and maybe telling lies in places, but there was still a lot about him that was genuine. His mentions of being in Paris and hiding out there to support ‘special operations’ was interesting of course – the commando attack at the French Foreign Ministry – and so too was his time he said he’d spent in Britain. What could he tell Dearlove about KGB operations in the United Kingdom?
There was an art to all of this, Oshchenko knew. In the game which others had played before him, certain information would be revealed slowly by the defector to those who he was running to in a careful manner with the promise of more to come later. The defector would allow it to be teased out of him when he was safe away from danger and those who had questions would always have more. There wasn’t the time to play that game now though.
He told the British spy that he knew the names and occupations of traitors in his country who had willingly or unwillingly betrayed their nation. There were those he had worked with and those ran by other KGB people. He could inform the British about shipping agents used for moving people and equipment about. He knew where safe-houses where located as well as dead-drops. He knew about bank accounts used and safe deposit boxes by KGB people and British traitors. Maybe the British had all KGB people in their nation under arrest, maybe they had missed some: either way he could help with that giving rank structure and details of the KGB presence in Britain.
It all came out fast and hurried.
He knew that he was tired and stressed and wasn’t playing the game how it was supposed to be but after all that he had been through Oshchenko was tired and his artistic strategy for making this defection perfect which he had planned out on the way here fell by the wayside. He had traveled overnight though on a difficult journey where had had faced the danger of being caught by the French on plenty of occasions and then had to get past the hardly passive Swiss either.
He tried to read the face of the British spy to work out how all of this was going but found that impossible as well. All that he himself could do was to talk and when not talk sip at his tea while the man whose life he had put his hands in stared at him and tried to read him. He was sure that he’d given this man enough to get him safely away from here. His own people would eventually look in Switzerland, searching for a traitor who’d ran. So too might the French, even the Americans – both would be out for vengeance because he was sure by now that both nations knew how he had played a major part in supporting the efforts to kill their diplomats – but the British should be able to get him out of here for their own selfish ends.
That’s why he’d come here, not elsewhere.
Dearlove left the Russian alone and went into the next office where he was quickly on the telephone. He spoke to his superior in Bern (who’d swapped phones) and got the permission he expected from him: Oshchenko would be accepted and they’d arrange to get him out of Geneva as soon as possible.
His defection might be odd and there had to be so much more to it, but for now he would be valuable. There would be a great deal more that he could tell them when he was in a better state than he was now. Professional interrogators would be able to sort out the truth from lies or exaggerations. Moreover, Oshchenko would end up telling them things he didn’t want to say or even wasn’t fully aware that he knew. All that would be done when they had him back in Britain. They’d get him somewhere he could see he was safe, let him wash and be fed before sitting him down and talking to him nice and slowly.
Dearlove went back into the other office to tell him the good news.
Freedom!
Oshchenko tried very much to try to control himself but couldn’t help himself. He stood up and shook the hand of the British spy. This man would allow him to live, not die at the hands of his own furious countrymen nor be tortured by the French or the Americans.
He’d made it. He’d got away. His running had paid off. The deaths he’d caused on the way to get here – unfortunate, unlucky people who’d been in his way – were justified in his mind because he was going to live.
He’d tell the British all that they wanted. Once he was in Britain though.
How soon exactly was that to occur?
March 1st 1990 Manama, Bahrain
General Schwarzkopf received confirmation that it was Tariq Aziz who had fled from Iraq and landed in Kuwait, not someone claiming to be him. Iraq’s foreign minister was inside the small country which neighbored the bigger Iraq after making a desperate dash there to save his own life. The defection would be a great political coup, one for diplomats and politicians to savor.
To Schwarzkopf, it really wasn’t important.
Tariq Aziz might be rolled out for the media and he could make statements all he liked, it didn’t change anything for Central Command (CENTCOM) and the American military presence in Middle East… as little as that was. He’d been told that the mad Qusay Hussein was running around Iraq personally executing people himself, even his father’s own cousin Ali Hassan Abd al-Majid al-Tikriti: such a person had the unfortunate sobriquet of ‘Chemical Ali’. It didn’t change a thing here in Bahrain though for Schwarzkopf. That defection nor the murders of Saddam’s former circle mattered not as far as his immediate responsibilities were concerned.
All he was concerned with was the opportunities missed that CENTCOM could have shined due to if things had gone differently. Now, he was not going to war but effectively packing up and preparing for CENTCOM to go back home to Florida.
Against his advice as the senior man on the ground here in the Middle East, because there would be no major combat operations within the region that the United States would take part in here there was no need for CENTCOM. Iraq’s armies had been defeated in Jordan and their country was left in chaos following Saddam’s assassination. The Soviets weren’t going to attempt to seize the oil fields around the Persian Gulf due to the troubles which they were experiencing in the Caucasus and the commitment of elite assault forces elsewhere. Pakistan’s war in Afghanistan was slowing down now that they controlled Kabul. Here in Bahrain and the other Gulf Arab states, the Peninsula Shield Force which they had put together would at the most maybe move into Iraq at some unspecified later date; when they did that it would probably be peacekeeping, not combat. Even if it was the latter, they wouldn’t be joined by American forces and Schwarzkopf wouldn’t be here to command the troops of the Gulf Arabs.
Most of his CENTCOM staff had already been redeployed elsewhere due to urgent needs for such skilled and experienced personnel in active wartime theaters such as Europe, the Far East or the Caribbean. The wing of US Air Force F-16s had departed for South Korea. The US Marines which had been here were moving through Egypt and heading for Italy. The US Navy still had their carrier battle group based around the USS Enterprise in the region, but many escorting ships of her once immense flotilla were already sailing away elsewhere. As to the US Army, his own service, there had never been any combat troops that had made it here and what service-support forces were present were to be redeployed soon enough. Then there was all of those unused munitions sent up here from Diego Garcia, some of which were now going to Israel and the rest to Europe.
It was all rather frustrating to be honest. Schwarzkopf had no desire to see any blood spilt from American servicemen but he had come here for a fight. That fight had been undertaken by others and he had been able to do nothing but observe from a distance. He and his staff hadn’t been needed. All of the preparation which they had undertaken had been for naught in the end because CENTCOM was unneeded to fight the wars of others here.
John Bolton and Richard Clarke, two assistant secretaries of state from the State Department who had come here like the Vice President and the deputy national security adviser before then – they’d been making a grand tour –, had told him when the news had come yesterday and they were meeting with him concerning relations with the Saudis that it was all for the best. Bolton had told him that ‘some of the greatest victories are won with the stroke of a pen rather than a fusillade of bullets’, or something like that anyway: Schwarzkopf hadn’t enjoyed the man’s company. Clarke, a more likeable man, had said that the American forces not required here were doing a good job of fighting the war elsewhere against the Soviets, the Warsaw Pact, Cuba and North Korea. To not have to fight here was a victory even better than anything that could have been achieved on the battlefield. Defence Secretary Cheney had sent a message to Schwarzkopf telling him that he had done well in getting everything ready for a war in the Persian Gulf to defend American interests there and it wasn’t something that would be forgotten…
…ah and could Schwarzkopf hurry up sending his staff to where they were needed as soon as possible, thank you.
Maybe Schwarzkopf could have argued the point. He’d heard there had been some voices back in the United States which said the transfer of forces out of the Middle East was short-sighted. CENTCOM was responsible for American interests further afield than just the Persian Gulf. Yet there had come a rapprochement of sorts between Yemen and Saudi Arabia. In Egypt the initial worrying situation with the failed coup d'état there had calmed down. Iran was showing no sign of invading Iraq or the Gulf Arab states. India wasn’t about to go to war against Pakistan to save the defeated Afghan regime at the behest of the Soviets. There wasn’t going to be a war here which CENTCOM needed to be present to intervene in anytime soon.
Major-General Pagonis, the logistics chief for CENTCOM, told Schwarzkopf that it was all a job well done. They’d been ready for a war and not had to see one fought in the end. Moreover, had there come combat what few American forces that would have been here would have had to rely far too much on the support of regional allies and their militaries: not something that he thought would have worked out well given the state of them which he had seen up close and personal. The Pakistanis had shown that they could fight and the Egyptians would have made a good show of themselves if called upon, but the armies of the Gulf Arabs… paper tigers with all of their fancy equipment that they couldn’t maintain themselves and there was no concept of logistics here either.
Schwarzkopf had orders for his return to his headquarters back at MacDill AFB; his executive officer was to stay here in Bahrain. There were CENTCOM staff who had already gone there before they had joined up with Southern Command (SOUTHCOM) and it’s subordinate headquarters in the region. He was to stay at his post though, playing a waiting game until called upon to serve his country elsewhere.
March 1st 1990 Near Leuven, Brabant, Belgium
Since before the war started, back at the beginning of last month, SACEUR had been facing political interference. It came with the job though, General Galvin knew. The role which he fulfilled was as much about politics, about keeping allies content, as it was about overseeing the war in Europe. His counterparts such as SACLANT (Supreme Allied Commander Atlantic) and the head of PACCOM (US Pacific Command) had to deal with similar situations such as he did with certain countries within the war-fighting alliances causing problems for them. General Galvin had been given the role which he had because he could handle the flak which would come when everyone couldn’t be pleased. In peacetime and now in wartime, he did his best to deal with problems caused to him – some with noble intentions, others without those – from those who believed that their own concerns overruled everything else.
The latest case of political interference causing him to be distracted came from the Netherlands. There were elements of the Dutch Government which continued badgered him directly and indirectly for their country to be liberated of occupying Soviet troops at the soonest opportunity, preferably yesterday. That was an administration of politicians who were all democratically elected and would usually be very reasonable people. Significant parts of their sovereign soil was under foreign occupation though with far too many civilians still behind enemy lines and suffering from the ravages of Soviet control; the details which they and everyone else knew all about in all of those horrors. The occupiers were cut off and surrounded on all sides with intelligence stating that they had been abandoned to their fate: that had been proved by everything seen so far. The Dutch wanted the Soviets finished off and their country and civilians freed. They pointed too to the number of POWs under Soviet control inside the pocket formed inside the Netherlands as another reason for the liberation. Moreover, Dutch troops would be taking part in the freeing of the occupied parts of their own country so it wasn’t as if the Netherlands wanted to sit the fight out and let everyone else do the work for them.
The timing wasn’t right yet though. SACEUR wasn’t going to give the order for the Soviets there to be finished off just yet. The Dutchman commanding NORWESTAG – a mix of Dutch, Belgian, British, French and West German troops; many prewar reservists but all battle-hardened veterans now – was complaining to General Galvin and his government was busy at the North Atlantic Council pushing for the liberation. The situation on the ground wasn’t yet right though and NATO needed to wait just a little longer.
Why was this the case?
Weakness was overcoming the Soviets trapped there and soon enough the time would come were they were incapable of combating an attack against them effectively. Not just SACEUR, but almost everyone in the know and with authority could see that the Soviets there were almost finished. Very soon they wouldn’t be able to offer any more meaningful resistance to the final assault when SACEUR gave the word for NORWESTAG to strike. There were the remains of three Soviet field armies there trapped in a pocket shaped like a backwards ‘L’. They had no resupply and no reinforcements for their position – and no hope of averting their eventual death or captivity. High-level intelligence games were still being played to seed or stir trouble within their ranks between the Soviet Army and the KGB forces within, but General Galvin believed that before – or if – that all paid off they would collapse on their own first.
The Soviets trapped within the Netherlands were running out of everything which they needed to hold their positions against a counterattack. They had little surface-to-air missiles left and not a single aircraft was left flying from the very few smashed air bases within the pocket. Anti-tank missiles, munitions for their multiple-barrelled rocket-launchers and shells for their heavy artillery were almost depleted. So too were basic war supplies like tank shells, machine gun bullets and mortar rounds. There was hardly any food and a dearth of medical supplies. The Soviets had rifle ammunition and their morale was still holding up, but they needed everything else.
SACEUR was planning to wait a few more days and then give NORWESTAG the word to strike. The Soviets would be blasted from their air and then the pocket cut in two around Arnhem by British and French forces. Dutch and West German troops would then eliminate the eastern side of the pocket over better ground for mobile operations. The Soviets to the west would then be slowly moved against because they were dug-in across better defensive terrain. It was a good plan, one which there was widespread approval of, even from the Dutch military.
Yet… the Dutch were watching part of their country burn. Fires raging for more than a week from Rotterdam’s port were moving eastwards. No one was fighting those fires in any organised way and while there had been heavy rain there was also wind too which had fanned the flames. The resulting inferno was driving politicians in the Netherlands to distraction, they weren’t even calmed by the news that Soviet troops were dying in the fires. There were civilians caught up there too and their country alight.
General Galvin came from Massachusetts and grew up outside of Boston, a long way from his role as SACEUR. He knew himself that he wouldn’t want to sit back and watch Boston burn if he would do anything about it. He had no choice though. He had to let those fires rage killing Soviet troops there and weakening them ready for destruction. Soon the time would come, just not yet. The Dutch did understand this – the government of the Netherlands didn’t consist of fools – but they were still trying to change the situation so the waiting game was over. His job was to make sure that didn’t happen and the greater good was all that mattered rather than a short term gain.
That was command responsibility.
There were other matters that the senior NATO commander in Europe was currently dealing with.
CENTAG – now being referred to a lot as US Seventh Army despite General Galvin’s misgivings on that matter of the sensitivity of allies – was in the final stages of planning for Operation Storm Chaser and nearly ready to go. The US XVIII Airborne Corps, led by the unused 82nd Airborne Division, was almost ready to be sent into action in a parachute / airmobile operation behind enemy lines in central parts of West Germany. The first drop zones for the 82nd Airborne Division would be in the valley of the Fulda River where hot on their heels the rest of the corps was to land at airstrips which the Soviets had built during their occupation of that area. It would be a daring mission, especially for those in the follow-up wave flown over enemy-held territory, but the chances of success were judged to be good. That success would come not from taking that territory but in getting the French III Corps and the US V Corps to lance forward and link up with the light forces ahead.
It had been made clear by the North Atlantic Council (Powell had contacted General Galvin personally as well) that there was to be no crossing of the nearby East German frontier during the operation. There would be no chasing the retreating enemy back over the IGB nor a reconnaissance-in-force. The French and American troops involved, as well as a West German panzer brigade, were to retake occupied territory there and trap those to the west of them. SACEUR agreed with that firm order which had been passed right down the chain of command because of the very real danger that if the IGB was crossed then there could easily be a nuclear response due to that. There were those above him who had made that decision, who were thinking of the big picture, and his agreement was that they had the right to be worried about that. It wasn’t as if the Soviets hadn’t used nuclear weapons before in this war…
SACEUR was looking over the latest plans now for Storm Chaser. It was a risk, a big risk, but the pay off if everything went as planned would be worth it. When CENTAG’s heavy forces started moving they were meant to hit the Soviet forces ahead of them at boundaries between field armies holding onto West German soil. The French would go through the gap between the Soviet’s Thirteenth and First Guards Tank Armys; Lt.-General Joulwan’s V Corps was to move between the Soviet First Guards Tank and Eight Guards Armys. Those avenues for attack weren’t initially ideal ground right at the frontlines, but beyond them there was good tank country for charging armour to roll across. General Galvin went over the preparations to break through the gaps by dumping artillery shells – conventional and those with chemical weapons – across them with infiltrators already in-place (in chemical warfare gear) to guide many of those shells in. Once the AMX-30s and M-1 Abrams’ got going they would soon reach their fellow CENTAG soldiers far out ahead. Flank moves once inside the enemy’s lines would envelope the First Guards Tank Army and parts of the other two as well, especially the Eighth Guards Army if Lt.-General Fred Franks’ VII Corps could achieve success with their related forward attack as well.
Those risks though were there. Operational security was damn tight but there was always the chance of the enemy getting wind – even late in the day – at what was coming their way. SACEUR was more concerned about tactical matters on the ground though: what would happen if the XVIII Corps made their drop successfully but the armoured spearheads coming to link up with them couldn’t make it to them in time?
General Galvin expected that he’d lose his position if that happened. The same could be expected for General Saint as CENTAG commander, maybe one or several of the corps commanders below him too. A failure like that would be too much and he’d have to be replaced. Of greater significance, naturally, would be the fact that the XVIII Corps would be cut off and surrounded on all sides by the enemy. It would be the same for them as it was for the Soviets in the Netherlands if that occurred. The defeat would be immense and have wide-ranging effects beyond West Germany too, he was certain of that.
So he was making sure that Storm Chaser was given everything it needed to succeed. He checked the details of the plan when it came to air support over those breakthrough areas, making sure that the French weren’t short-changed: if the V Corps got stuck then any success the French had would be of great importance. SACEUR focused on the infantry forces at the breakthrough points too. They would be hitting dug-in Soviet troops there, only afterwards would mobile enemy forces be met. In the past few days, NATO aircraft had blasted the Soviets all throughout their rears hitting those on the move with great effect. When the Soviets came to a stop though, which was what the air attacks were all about, they were hardly to kill though. The Soviets which were to be blasted as they were to allow CENTAG’s attack to rip through the front were going to be difficult to get past in the short space of time needed. After they were shelled and bombed they would have to be first pinned down by NATO infantry and then dug-out of their positions so they could fire at or call-in fire upon what came after the initial tanks driving east.
The infantry assigned to the breakthroughs were going to take heavy loses no matter what. It had been the same throughout the war, especially when NATO tactical counterattacks had been made early on and during the Eagle Fire counteroffensive on the North German Plain. Attacking defended positions and rooting out the enemy, especially in the high ground positions where those Soviets in the way of Storm Chaser were, cost men. There were West Germans – the 5th Panzergrenadier Brigade – with the French III Corps, which had been part of the 2nd Panzergrenadier Division that fell apart during the ceasefire in the middle of last month. The French were going to send them into the attack to root out defenders at their breakthroughs, but Joulwan was going to use men from a brigade of the US 42nd Infantry Division: New York Army National Guard soldiers. Those men had already shown their worth so far in this war but this would be different and a tough fight. SACEUR checked on the support given to the 1st Brigade of the 42nd Infantry Division (the infantry units were the 1/69 INF & 1/71 INF) and set about arranging for more air and artillery support to help them at the frontlines, while also making sure that there would be medical support readily available too. Everything was in order already, but he would make sure that word went down from him to Saint to Joulwan that everything that could possibly be done there would be because he had a personal interest. There was nothing unprofessional in this so he need not worry about that: he worried about those national guardsmen there.
When it came to the French attack using those West Germans, General Galvin saw what they were doing. The 5th Panzergrenadier Brigade was a ragtag force, almost the strength of a small division due to recent attachments. Many West Germans who’d given in when that ceasefire had happened had returned to the fight. They hadn’t just left their units behind previously though, but their weapons and vehicles. These returnees included so many men that NATO units were absorbing everywhere across their country; everyone was welcome apart from those who had attempted to make a defection to the Soviets beforehand. The French had many of them as light infantry and were sending them into the fight to allow their armoured breakthroughs as part of Storm Chaser though.
SACEUR saw the reasoning, understood it, but was uncomfortable with the unsaid implications of what the French were doing. They were supporting the West German infantry there with fire support, light armour behind them and everything else, but it was to be West Germans who’d previously given up before seeing sense who’d exclusively be thrown into a series of bloody infantry engagements. He’d have to let that stand because it made military sense.
Again, that was command responsibility.
March 1st 1990 The White House, Washington D.C., the United States
With the United States engaged in a global war with the fear that at any moment that conflict could go to the nuclear level, President George Bush was naturally a busy man and didn’t have the time to do all of the things everyday which he would before the war. He wasn’t often at the White House and when he was, his staff had no inclination for him to be doing meet-and-greets, holding long talks and attending press conferences. The Secret Service shared those concerns too and had made the White House grounds a fortress.
Regardless, there were still many daily meetings which required the attendance of President Bush. He preferred to have those at the White House, where he was able to come and go from so that tabs couldn’t be kept on his movements. Today, there were six official meetings which he took part in with visitors to his workplace and official residence, though not somewhere it could be said he was living at or working within full time as had been the case before World War Three started.
The British Ambassador Sir Antony Acland was first.
Acland came across from the British Embassy and into the White House through all of the intrusive security. There was politeness and respect for his position, but he went through the same checks as anyone else would. Others would have been – had been in fact – offended at the identity checks and search of his person, but he took it all in his stride and then went into a meeting with President Bush, Secretary of State Elizabeth Dole (who’d come from Mount Weather) and National Security Adviser Brent Scowcroft which took place in the Roosevelt Room rather than in the Oval Office, out there on the external facing of the White House. The usual diplomatic courtesies were undertaken and Acland gave congratulations to Dole on her position as well as offered condolences for the unfortunate loss for the United States of her predecessor James Baker several weeks ago.
Then he got down to business.
Acland explained that he was here in person to talk with his hosts about the situation with his country found itself in with the ongoing war. Britain was hurting, it was feeling the strain of the conflict. The staggering casualties which his country had taken went alongside physical damage to Britain that while not on the scale of World War Two were still very serious. Britain’s economy hadn’t and just couldn’t adapt to a wartime mode of operation. Food, fuel and munitions were flowing into Britain now that the majority of the submarine threat which had been encountered early in the war was over with but that couldn’t make up for everything that had come before it. The National Government was on the verge of collapse and there was no money left to finance the war.
This had all been explained to the Americans beforehand. Thatcher had spoken to Bush, Foreign Secretary Hurd had had many conversations on this matter with Baker beforehand and with Dole only yesterday. When Vice President Jim Webb was recently in London, the same message was sent to him: Britain was struggling to fight this war.
Acland was here to remind President Bush, Dole and Scowcroft of this once again, as per his instructions from London, but he also wanted to affirm something else too: despite the immense difficulties that his country was facing Britain wasn’t about to drop out of this war. Whatever had to be done would be done. Britain had been attacked just as the United States and the rest of NATO had been by the Soviets who had launched a wholly illegal war of aggression. British troops had faced chemical weapons attacks like American troops had. Civilians in Britain had been killed like American civilians had been. The two countries were in this together and Britain was prepared to see it through to the finish.
Furthermore, Acland told his hosts that there were unfortunate rumblings from some of his countrymen which they might be aware of here in Washington. Yes, Britain was facing all of these troubles. In addition, there was a desire to see an end to the conflict as soon as reasonably possible to stop all the deaths occurring and to see that happen before any more nuclear weapons were employed. At the same time, there were those who didn’t speak for the British Government making the assumption that they did. Britain would raise issues and concerns through official channels, not outside of those. The matter with the Vice President and comments made in the House of Commons was something which he told them that they shouldn’t take too seriously. Webb and his position were respected by the British Government and that was something that the United States should believe.
Both President Bush and Dole spoke with him afterwards where they expressed their thanks for his candid comments and the British contribution to the joint efforts made by Washington and London in fighting this war. They underpinned their commitment to the Special relationship and a hope for an end to the war as soon as possible, but on the terms of both countries, NATO and the Allies.
All in all, once he left, Acland considered the meeting a success. Everything which had been said by him and his hosts had been satisfactory and he would report back to London as soon as he returned to the Embassy… once he got out of the White House that was, because all of the security to get in here had to be passed through getting back out again!
William Webster, the Director of Central Intelligence (DCI), came to the White House not long afterwards. Scowcroft and Attorney General Richard ‘Dick’ Thornburgh were present along with White House Chief-of-Staff John Sununu: all of whom had security clearance to hear the details of what was said and also the dressing-down which Webster received.
President Bush had fulfilled the same role as Webster did back in the mid-Seventies. He was a politician not a career spook. He understood the world of intelligence at the strategic level though from his service then as DCI and positions held afterwards for his country. It was the latest revelations with the matter of CIA officer Aldrich Ames which President Bush made sure his DCI understood how angry he was at the repeated failings with this scandal. The espionage activities of this man against the United States had been going on for years and he should have been detected long ago: there were so many chances to do so. It had taken the revelations from a Soviet KGB officer who had undertaken a defection to unmask Ames’ activity and immediately after that had occurred, some of those in senior positions within the CIA had still tried to deny that they had a mole among their ranks. Ultimately, all of these people answered to Webster and he answered to his president.
Webster was informed that President Bush was ‘sorely disappointed’ with him.
All that he could do at this time was to make a promise that the damage done would be examined and efforts made to deal with that. There were people within the CIA, Webster stated, who had been asked to resign and others transferred to administrative posts for the time being while they were investigated for their failings to long ago spot what was right in front of them when it came to Ames. Webster was personally involved and was making sure that no stone was left unturned. President Bush was someone not known to like apologies but rather action taken and the DCI told him that he was to correct the failings at once.
Yet… Ames was currently in the custody of the FBI. Webster told those in the meeting – Thornburgh especially as head of the Justice Department and thus responsible for overseeing the FBI – that the CIA needed access to him if the damage he had done could be started to be undone. Frustratingly, President Bush just nodded at such a remark rather than said anything directly in response and moved to ask Thornburgh about others in FBI custody, American nationals who been spying for foreign countries currently at war with the United States. There was talk of two traitors who’d been working for some time for the Cuban DGI and now in custody: Kendall Myers from the State Department and Ana Montes from the Defence Intelligence Agency (DIA). These were low-level people who the FBI had detained after tip-offs about their activities coming from those who knew about their spying and had previously allowed that to happen before having ‘an attack of the morals’ due to what Cuba had been doing during the war and turning on Myers and Montes.
Webster started to understand that his position as DCI was untenable in the medium-to-long term: President Bush had clearly had enough of him. He wouldn’t be relieved of his duties – asked to resign, even fired – with the war going on but afterwards he would be on the way out. There was anger at this, yet at the same time he appreciated that the responsibility for what had gone on with the scandal around Ames was down to him as DCI. Others had done serious wrong, but he was the man at the top who had overseen all of those failings even unwittingly. So, he’d be for the chopping block eventually and there was nothing that could be done about that.
Condoleezza Rice returned to the White House after leaving two days beforehand.
She met with President Bush, Dole, Scowcroft, Cheney’s men Wolfowitz & Hadley and Sununu’s deputy Andrew Card. Secretary of Defence Cheney and Sununu were both supposed to be in the meeting but they had two of their underlings here and Nicholas Burns under whom she worked for on the National Security Council was missing too. Immediately, Rice felt that there was something up. She knew that she was to be listened to – otherwise President Bush wouldn’t be in the room – but the lack of other top-level administration figures apart from Dole and Scowcroft told her that something was up.
Rice was asked to summarize the report which she had sent over earlier in the day. Her task set by her president previously had been to assist in the decision-making process as to the future conduct of the war from an offensive stand-point. At that meeting the other day in this same room where she returned to, President Bush had asked about her thoughts on whether it was the best course of action to invade the Warsaw Pact nations and North Korea too. She’d been told that others were being consulted too but that her opinion was valued. Those here – and not here too – didn’t seem to have shared her expressed viewpoints within the report she had written. There was their body language for one, the manner in which Card addressed her and (more tellingly) the knowledge that she had that between the two meetings which she attended there was already an invasion of North Korea underway.
She did her duty for her president and her country though.
It was not a good idea at all to invade either Eastern Europe nor North Korea. With the latter, Rice warned of possible Chinese intervention there alongside a guerrilla war which in the long-term could be equivalent to the Vietnam War. When it came to the Warsaw Pact nations, invasions directed into East Germany and Czechoslovakia, possibly afterwards Poland, Hungary or the Balkans, the risk was of full-scale nuclear war with the Soviets. They would see it as another Barbarossa, Rice stated, and the logical way (from a Soviet point of view) to avert another invasion of their Rodina was to use nuclear weapons. Maybe there would be weapons releases at sea or against a NATO country not armed with it’s own nuclear weapons. The most likely outcome, in her opinion, would be that the Soviets would use such weapons tactically to stop an invasion of Eastern Europe. In doing so, they wouldn’t repeat what they had done with Flensburg and strike where no American forces were to be found. They would do so with the belief that the United States and its allies wouldn’t retaliate to a first strike of a tactical level and retreat instead because they feared a quick escalation to the strategic use of nuclear weapons. The intelligence previously disclosed to her when it came to Kryuchkov’s consideration of doing this as well as what was known about (supposedly anyway) his own thinking of how the West would react led her to this conclusion.
Wolfowitz asked Rice about West Berlin. The current directive for NATO armies in Europe as agreed with the United States’ Canadian and European allies was to liberate West German territory up to the IGB. Afterwards though, regaining West Berlin would be the next objective. It was the logical step. How could West Berlin be left under Soviet and East German occupation? Moreover, to not cross the IGB – and the West German / Czechoslovak frontier too – would mean that Soviet forces which managed to withdraw would be sitting ready to invade again should they be reinforced. Surely this wasn’t the best solution…?
Rice repeated her belief that the Soviets would see it as the beginnings of a second Barbarossa and use nuclear weapons. Maybe not at once, but very soon.
When it came to North Korea, Dole spoke up. The new Secretary of State was in a major influential position and was already known to be rather close to both Bush and Cheney, not so much others like Webb, Scowcroft or the Joint Chiefs. She stated that the DMZ on the Korean Peninsula had been crossed to establish a ‘security zone’ on the other side to occupy positions where North Korean artillery continued to fire upon Seoul even after the battlefield victories won in South Korea. The guns would be destroyed and the territory held. There had been contact made with the Chinese through diplomatic channels, she continued, and they were showing no sign of intervening.
Rice had to stop herself from saying that the same belief had been prevalent when it came to the Chinese and the Korean Peninsula in 1950…
When her meeting came to an end, there was an outward positive, friendly atmosphere in relation to her. President Bush was his usual pleasant self to her and so was Scowcroft. In addition, Dole was again at pains to express her liking of Rice. But Rice could see the writing on the wall: her opinions on these all important matters weren’t the ones being listened to.
Robert Gates said hello to Rice as he went into his meeting with President Bush directly after hers. Wolfowitz and Hadley were leaving, while the Deputy National Security Adviser went into see his president who was there in the Roosevelt Room with Gates’ boss Scowcroft, Dole and Card.
He had arrived back from his overseas trip alongside the Vice President last night where they had visited East Asia, the Middle East and Europe. Gates had had some sleep though still was suffering from the effects of jet lag. There were things that couldn’t wait though, especially with his country at war.
First, Gates addressed the issue with Richard Armitage and his diplomatic-military party which had been in Belgrade when Yugoslavia was attacked by Soviet nuclear weapons. They had made it back to Italy after a troublesome journey and were safe and well. Behind them they left a country which had been cowed the outrageous attack upon them and was in no mood to enter the war against the Soviets as they had been flirting with. This was something that would be felt elsewhere too: Gates stated that while Webb had been in Paris, Brussels and London recently he had paid a visit himself to Stockholm. Sweden had been another country which there had been hopes might enter the war: that wasn’t going to happen now. Dole had a question when it came to Sweden as to what was the latest news with West German warships and aircraft which had gone there during the ceasefire. Gates told her that the Swedes had asked the crews and passengers aboard such weapons of war to leave if they wished to maintain that neutrality which they had spoken of, along with their vessels and planes. If those individuals wanted to claim asylum – not defect – then Sweden would process any claims from individuals, but not groups of military personnel. Internment was what the Swedes were talking about if the West Germans wouldn’t go back home or at least to a nearby NATO country such as Norway or Denmark.
Scowcroft told Gates that there would soon be another meeting – down in the Situation Room not here – went it came to the latest estimations on the Soviet nuclear posture which he wanted him to attend within the next few hours. As he responded to that by saying that he’d be there, Gates paid attention to President Bush. The reaction which he observed was something unexpected: there was extreme concern written all across the president’s face when it came to the talk of nuclear weapons pointed at the United States.
Naturally, like every American was President Bush worried about that. How could anyone not be? Yet, Gates believed that he saw something different. His president was a strong-willed man, a combat veteran of World War Two. He had fought for and gained the highest political office in the country. Nuclear weapons were frightful, especially since their use had already occurred in limited form already. But, what Gates saw…
He was worried afterwards, when Scowcroft was talking about Bulgaria and Romania, about the future. He tried to tell himself that maybe he had been mistaken, maybe he was overreacting. President Bush was about to fold; the man was a lion. He’d been upset over the murders of first Dan Quayle and then James Baker, the latter especially. The casualty losses from the war were something he was well-aware of too. This was all weighing on his mind and would be causing him more distress than Gates could imagine.
He didn’t like his own thoughts as to what came after that if the worst happened and President Bush came apart. It wouldn’t happen, Gates told himself, but if it did… they’d end up with Webb in the White House instead! Now that was something even more concerning.
Two US Representatives from Florida came to see President Bush at the White House: Congressman Porter Goss (FL-13) and Ileana Ros-Lehtinen (FL-18), both Republicans in their first terms.
Goss and Ros-Lehtinen had secured their appointment with the president due to pressure applied from the House Republican leadership. That had gone through Sununu who’d met with senior Congressional figures – Democrats and Republicans, Senators and Representatives – recently concerning the desires of many members of Congress to leave The Greenbrier and return to Washington. Sununu had been trying to handle that issue and as part of that had agreed that the two politicians from Florida should be able to have a meeting with President Bush.
Both Sununu and Card were in the meeting.
Goss was a former CIA field officer who’d been a local mayor before running for Congress. He considered himself a patriot and like all Americans was outraged at enemy action taken so far in the war, not least Cuban troops on American soil down in the Florida Keys. He spoke with President Bush in a respectful manner but was firm in his statement that the Cubans needed to be pushed off Key West and elsewhere very soon. Every day which they were allowed to hold on to what they had taken, was another shameful day for the United States. There were American citizens held hostage by those Cubans who needed liberating too. What was the delay? America’s armies were fighting across the globe and winning battles seemingly everywhere, so why were parts of the Florida Keys still under foreign occupation?
The Congressional district of Ros-Lehtinen included the Florida Keys. It was her constituents who were under foreign occupation. She joined Goss in telling President Bush that those islands needed to be liberated as soon as possible and asked like he did what was the delay. She spoke briefly of her birth in Cuba and her life in Florida: she had no hatred towards the Cuban people, just the communist dictatorship there. With Cuban soldiers in the Florida Keys doing those things to civilians which she was hearing about, under orders from the Castro’s, Cuban-Americans were facing a growing backlash that had turned violent already.
President Bush responded to their comments by telling them both that the war was being taken to the Cuban regime. Their military forces had been smashed over Cuba itself and their troops in the Florida Keys were cut off. Marathon had already been taken and operations against Key West and Boca Chica Key would commence when the military situation was right. He said that he understood the political need to act soon, and that had been taken into consideration, but military matters took precedence. The Cubans on the ground needed to be beaten down first. If they were able to offer a strong resistance to a counter-invasion then casualties for American troops going into battle would be unnecessary high. Moreover, there would be casualties among civilians caught up in a big fight where the Cubans could effectively fight back.
He asked the two members of Congress to bare this in mind and to have faith that the issue would be dealt with soon, very soon, but only when the time was right.
General James Lindsay, the US Army officer who headed the US Special Operations Command (USSOCOM) came to the White House and went straight to the below-ground Situation Room. The ongoing situation with the Soviet Spetsnaz team on the run in the Appalachians was what he was here to brief President Bush, the Joint Chiefs and the NSC on.
Aides of the commander of the joint service combatant command which was the USSOCOM brought with them several maps of the West Virginia – Virginia state border area. General Lindsay had them put up on the projector screen and gave a briefing where he described the hunt for the remnants of the foreign commandos which had been ambushed long before they could get near The Greenbrier and were now on the run. He pointed out where active engagements had taken place by forces under his command and the Spetsnaz and told of the results of those firefights: two thirds of the Soviet soldiers were dead or captured. At the same time, he pointed out other locations where the Spetsnaz had been in action against other opponents rather than those under direct USSOCOM command.
Men of the West Virginia State Police, the Virginia State Police, the Virginia State Guard, the US Marshal’s Service and several country sheriff’s departments had fought against those commandos with devastating losses suffered by them. Moreover, there were cases where sheriffs had deputized locals into armed posses with the predictable results. Federal and State authorities had lost control at a local level and allowed those who shouldn’t have got into the fight to do so. It had been the same in Texas, out West in the Rocky Mountains and up in Alaska earlier in the war: a war which should have been between professionals had been joined by those not equipped nor trained for that fight and without higher coordination too. In this instance, there were eighty plus unnecessary deaths of law enforcement officers because of local interference in military operations. These were alongside the known deaths of thirty-four civilians (many more were expected) including members of the media: a local news team based in Roanoke affiliated to CNN was missing, presumed dead.
General Lindsay reminded those listening to him about the Spetsnaz. There were myths and realities when it came to them. They were not Supermen nor blood-thirsty maniacs who ate babies. These were soldiers trained with the Soviet Army’s Airborne Troops and in the service of the GRU though here in the United States acting on KGB orders. They knew how to fight and to fight well. The men were tough and resourceful, even when captured as a very few had been they were extremely dangerous. They hadn’t been respected enough as an opponent by those who had no idea who they were fighting against.
Now, that aside, General Lindsay turned to the map shown of Alleghany County in the west of Virginia. This was a heavily-forested area among the region of the Appalachians known as Ridge-and-Valley. This is where the remains of the Spetsnaz team, the last one on American soil, were located. Operation Blue Centaur was the code-name for the final showdown with them where they would be eliminated. There were a lot of troops assigned but General Lindsay explained that they were needed due to their opponent and the ground. The FBI Hostage Rescue Team units assigned previously had been released though leaving elements of the US Army’s Delta Force along with men from a company of the 2/11 SFG which was a US Army Reserve unit supporting them. Kill or capture was the mission, above all eliminate the opposition.
General Lindsay told those listening that Blue Centaur should be completed by the morning.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 15:18:48 GMT
Fifteen – Infighting
March 2nd 1990 Alleghany County, Virginia, the United States
Senior Lieutenant Igor Nikolayevich Bezler only wished that he could see the helicopters above. He’d take a shot at them if there had been more light in the sky than just a partial moon shining. Above him and the others there were several of those infernal hunters. Small, single-engined machines armed with guns and carrying men. He was reminded, of course, of his time in Afghanistan when helicopters had been on his side when fighting the Mujahedin: how everything had been so different then!
There came a shout over the noise from Vladislav Olegovich – the current team leader – for everyone to get ready to move again once the helicopters had moved on. Deeper down into the valley, he ordered them, because the Americans were concentrating their searches high. Make sure that you keep the hostages with you too so that they don’t get a chance to run either, he added.
Bezler had pulled his hostage down with him into the ditch when he’d first heard the arrival of the latest helicopter coming close. He’d given the man a sharp punch to the side, aiming for a kidney. There had been resistance beforehand from the police officer captured and dragged around with him and there had been no time to find out whether the man would this time offer that or be passive. Bezler had just hit him and pulled him down; the expected consequence of the delivered blow had rendered the man incapable of resistance.
He looked at the man now in the near darkness. He couldn’t make out much in terms of facial expression but really didn’t need to. Whether he was still hurt, angry, frightened or looking vengeful it didn’t matter. Nothing that the man could do would save him from his eventual fate. Bezler would have preferred to kill the man now – quickly and with little effort – rather than have him dragged around like this. Vladislav Olegovich wanted hostages kept though for their usefulness at a later stage and Bezler followed his orders despite his personal feelings on the matter. To not obey them, to challenge the leadership of the team he was part of would be fatal. He like the others knew that infighting would get them nowhere. If they stuck together and maintained their discipline then there was a very good chance that eventually they’d all manage to escape and see home in the long run.
There were four of these hostages, spread among the eleven remaining Spetsnaz men. There was his police officer, another policeman, a driver of a vehicle carrying journalists and a journalist – the last one being a woman. They’d all been captured when others with them had been killed. The policemen had foolishly surrendered as part of a larger group and while three of their colleagues had been executed the other two had been taken. As to the journalists, their vehicle had been stopped and two of the others inside killed while the driver and female news reporter grabbed. They had been beaten and humiliated. They begged for food, water and for the beatings to stop. They had tried to run and been beaten more. The woman was with Ivan Vladimirovich and he’d humiliated her in his own way which Vladislav Olegovich hadn’t been pleased with but had allowed to occur as long as it was only once; Bezler himself had no opinion on that matter which he wished to share.
The hostages were useful, or, more-correctly, would be useful eventually.
Another seventeen members of the team which had started out on this mission where there had been twenty-eight Spetsnaz men at the beginning were dead or lost. Those others had fallen to shots from the enemy in various engagements or died when a vehicle had crashed. One man, Ilya Yakovlevich, had plain disappeared in the middle of the night with no clue as to what happened to him while two more had been acting as the rear guard and contact had been lost with them when running from the Americans. The bodies of those known to have died had been left where they had fallen because there had been no time to do anything with them.
Bezler and those with him were on the run.
They’d been on the run for several days and nights now, moving though these mountains, hills and valleys in the middle of the Appalachian Mountains. Ever since they’d been betrayed when nearing their target for a kill mission against a strategic enemy political target – a large hotel complex where hundreds of American politicians were meant to be meeting in seclusion – they had been running. They were being hunted by opposing counterparts who clearly had as much training as they did but also local organised paramilitaries as well as armed civilians in assistance. Two agents who were with them, long-term American traitors who were supposed to be their guides, surely had turned against them by giving away their presence and pretended afterwards that they hadn’t. Vladislav Olegovich’s predecessor Dmitri Anatolyevich had ordered Bezler to join him in interrogating and then executing those traitors. They had feigned innocence and claimed that they were dedicated to the success of the mission even when suffering under the knife of Dmitri Anatolyevich with Bezler holding them down. Bezler hadn’t been able to understand what was being said because only the former and current team leaders spoke English, but they had appeared to be telling the truth to him. Dmitri Anatolyevich had said that they were lying though and so they had been killed: there had been no other way for the Americans to get on their trail otherwise.
Dmitri Anatolyevich had then afterwards been killed by a lone shot from an armed civilian. That had been when they were back across in West Virginia when first heading northwards while being chased. Vladislav Olegovich had taken them southeast once he had assumed command but they were still being hunted from down here on the ground and from up above. Again and again, combat was met with the enemy. They were everywhere all across this region and while the Spetsnaz team inflicted so many losses among them they were also taking their own losses. Bezler had stated, just as a few others such as Viktor Constantinovich and Vyacheslav Sergeyevich had too, that each time they killed Americans which they came across they were leaving a trail to be followed. Vladislav Olegovich told them that he knew that, but there was no other choice in the matter because they had to keep moving and kill those who could report were they had been sighted. These people knew the ground as well as had maps and radios.
It was because of the number of the opposition, not so much their strengths, that the hostages were needed. There would come a point where the enemy would surround them and the hostages, especially the woman, maybe the uniformed policemen, which would allow Bezler and the Spetsnaz to escape. Human shields were deemed to be necessary.
Bezler considered himself a Russian.
His father had been an ethnic German and his mother’s family was Ukrainian. Born in the Crimea, his internal Soviet passport stated that he was Ukrainian. Well, he considered that to be wrong: he was a Russia. Not a German, not a Ukrainian and not even a Soviet, but a Russian. To many this would be immaterial, but not to Bezler. He was a Russian and always would be.
Early in his military career, when a young officer with the Airborne Troops, Bezler had gone to fight in Afghanistan. The official line was that the ‘limited contingent’ of Soviet troops there were doing their ‘internationalist duty’. Bezler had been fighting for Russia. The Afghans were the enemy of his own people in that fight and lofty ideas extolled by official propaganda didn’t matter at all to him. He fought for his people against those people: such was his war in that country. Afterwards, upon returning home, he had gone through a process where he had been ‘invited’ to join the Spetsnaz. He was an experienced combat soldier with a stellar record of bravery, obeying orders and never giving half measures when it came to combat. His own political beliefs were kept to himself and he had impressed the right superiors. The complicated paperwork process of leaving the Airborne Troops and being reassigned to the Spetsnaz, which belonged to the GRU, hadn’t been anything that he had seen. He was just told that he was being sent to join the Spetsnaz and if he had any objections he better speak up at once. Bezler had kept his mouth shut and once transferred done as he had done beforehand: served Russia.
In early January, Bezler had been sent to Guatemala. He saw almost nothing of the country during a short stay which lasted two days stuck inside a ship docked at Puerto Quetzal then a night time ride in a truck to an air-strip in the countryside. He was with several other Spetsnaz men aboard that ship which had come from the Soviet Far East all the way across the Pacific and was joined by more aboard the aircraft which went up to Mexico. His stay in Mexico was even shorter – an hour or so – and there was a change of aircraft for another, longer flight to somewhere called Arizona that he was told was inside the United States. Bezler and everyone else had made low-level parachute jumps at twilight when arriving there. America meant little to him, it was just the land of his country’s enemy. He didn’t meet any Americans at first when in Arizona nor when he and those with him were transported first to somewhere else called Utah then up to Wyoming either. They stayed out of sight, hidden away by local traitors under the guidance of GRU officers. At that point the war had yet to begin but Bezler had known that if he and the others had been found by the Americans they would have had to fight. They were in the United States with arms and equipment and active as a foreign military unit ready to attack the Americans from within. No one told him what they were to do once the war started or even when it would start. It had been just a matter of waiting for orders to come.
When that occurred, when the fighting started abroad, some of those with Bezler had wondered why they hadn’t been sent against missile complexes or strategic command bunkers in the part of the United States which they were in. No one had said that they would, but Bezler had been aware that they were in the general location of such places and the elimination of targets like those was what he and the others were trained for. They had been acclimatising in such an environment in Wyoming among what were called the Rocky Mountains. Bezler had thought too that they would see action there yet unlike others he kept his opinion to himself and unquestionably obeyed orders.
It was to West Virginia where they went, nearly three weeks after the war started and during which time they had done nothing but stayed hidden. When Bezler later saw the map which the deceased Dmitri Anatolyevich had he was amazed at the distance traveled by them via several trucks. He had seen nothing of the majority of the United States which had been crossed as he had been hidden away like everyone else among several vehicles traveling independently of one another. He had pushed out of his mind all of the worries that there were being so deep inside the homeland of his country’s enemy and no chance to escape if anything went wrong. There had been a feeling that despite the small arsenal of weapons which he carried and his own ability to fight, death could have come at any moment. It hadn’t though because they’d all stuck together and obeyed orders. To not do so, to fight amongst themselves, would doom them all.
But then the Americans had started to pick them off one by one right before they went into action so late into the war. With that, all those who were obeying orders, including the initial team leader who’d been giving those, started to be killed as they were hunted down like they were. Bezler carried on doing his duty and ignored the voice in the back of his mind telling him that they were all done for because so many mistakes had been made. There was no other choice. On his own he was a dead man so he had to stick with him comrades right to the end.
Georgiy Borisovich called out that there were men coming down from the helicopters! They were sliding down ropes and landing in the darkness above. Mikhail Mikhailovich quickly confirmed this. A shout came from Vladislav Olegovich to cease the noise and keep moving. There came gunfire next, up above where the rear guard was.
Bezler recalled that both Pavel Timofeyevich and Sergey Georgiyevich were still above them from where they had just fled and he could hear the rattle of their submachine guns as well as the noise of other automatic weapons too: M-16s in American hands. The call came from the team leader for them all to stop and take cover again and Bezler was sure that he heard panic in Vladislav Olegovich’s voice. He dragged his hostage down with him again, this time without the need for a punch, and was fast to pull his pistol on the policeman and position it against his forehead with the intention that the man would keep quiet. This weapon was four weapons that he carried; the others being his own submarine gun, his issued combat knife, an excellent hunting rifle good for sniping taken from a dead civilian and the policeman’s own service pistol being the last one.
Gunfire continued above… and then below too where the point man Anatoly Ivanovich was.
Bezler realized that they were trapped. Above and below the Americans were. He asked himself if maybe they were on the flanks too. He couldn’t see much and there was no gunfire coming from those directions but that didn’t mean anything!
Mikhail Alexandrovich and Viktor Constantinovich were both sheltering near him, among the tree trunks. The former called out to the latter telling him that they needed to move. Vladislav Olegovich once again called for silence and for everyone to maintain an all-round defence. The hostages were to be kept close too.
Mikhail Alexandrovich got up and started to run downhill. No one had told him to but that he did. He had his weapons with him and started to weave between trees on his way downwards.
Then he fell with Bezler hearing the shots come after watching him disappear from view. He didn’t known who had shot his fellow Spetsnaz man and wondered whether it had been the Americans or maybe Vladislav Olegovich. If it had been the team leader who had done so…
There came the sound of mortars incoming next. Bezler heard the whistle which denoted their arrival before the explosions started. Gunfire continued elsewhere, but in the immediate area where he was there were the blasts from such projectiles. His hostage moved in a manner which suggested to Bezler that he might be trying to escape again so he was given a few punches, again to the side down low where the kidneys should be so that the man would suffer far too much pain to get moving. Bezler still had the pistol pointed at the policeman’s head but he had clearly considered Bezler distracted: more fool him.
One mortar landed near where Bezler knew Vyacheslav Sergeyevich was. There was a blast and a scream.
Another landed between his position and that of Vladislav Olegovich.
There was one which impacted where Ivan Vladimirovich was sheltering with that woman hostage: again there came a scream or a shout.
Gunfire was taking place everywhere now, even on the flanks. Bezler fired a few rounds off to the left where he might have seen movement then some more bullets were sent uphill. More mortar rounds arrived and there were more shouts. All around him the Spetsnaz were being killed. They were trapped and unable to move. The Americans had them surrounded.
This was it, Bezler realized. His time fighting in America was coming to an end. While he stayed low he thought about what he was to do. He was determined to survive and wasn’t thinking of dying in a blaze of glory rather than be captured. He knew he wouldn’t enjoy being in the hands of the enemy, but that would be better than death.
He stayed where he was as more deaths took place around him due to bullets and the mortars while waiting for the end of the battle. Cowardice it wasn’t; no, it was called survival.
March 2nd 1990 The Lüneburg Heath, Lower Saxony, West Germany
Unequivocal instructions had come from Defence Minister Rodionov personally that Marshal Gromov was to not expose himself to danger. There had been a massive breach of strategic electronic communications security detected and it was through that, not the unsubstantial fears of a spy at the highest level, which had brought about recent military reverses. As part of that breach, the Americans had been able to achieve many of their recent successes… and the near successes in several times attempting to kill the commander of Western Strategic Direction. He was ordered to stay away from fixed command bunkers, to remain on the move and to not use air transport either for the time being.
Marshal Gromov hadn’t been brave enough to ask in return if he would be safer returning to his pre-war headquarters in the Kiev Military District inside the capital city of the Ukrainian SSR. He didn’t think that Rodionov the Slaughterman would have a sense of humour on that matter. Marshal Gromov himself was surviving at the minute because he was able to laugh occasionally, often at the absurdities he saw and heard, but he reckoned that back in Moscow that had no concept of what was funny, what was ironic and what was not very funny indeed. They couldn’t have, not with the other orders and instructions which they sent out.
His command column was on the move at the minute and he had just got off the radio to one of his senior aides. He’d been talking to Colonel Sergey Oleksandrovich Kirichenko using one of the new radio systems now in use and had almost laughed at what he had been told. Kirichenko was furious with what was going on and there had been more anger in his voice when he’d heard his superior laugh as he had. Marshal Gromov hadn’t been able to stop himself though. What his aide had informed him about was just utterly ridiculous!
There was the wreckage on the ground within the Harz Mountains – just on the eastern side of the IGB which ran through that region – of one of those American stealth bombers. The black-painted aircraft which was covered with radar-reflective material and shaped like the oddest aircraft ever seen had hit the ground after a mid-air engagement with a specialised MiG-25 overnight which the American had lost. It had taken some time to find the aircraft after it had come down, but once discovered Marshal Gromov had dispatched Kirichenko to go there and to oversee the necessary intelligence work which would take place. There would be a pilot (or pilots) to locate and plenty of studies undertaken there and elsewhere when it came to the aircraft. The possibilities which would come from investigating the wreckage were countless. Those aircraft in American service had done so much damage to the Soviet war effort and to gain any advantage in combating them could easily positively affect the overall war effort.
They were very important to the Americans and so would be so for the Soviet side too.
Kirichenko could get nowhere near the crashed aircraft. Neither could anyone else not in KGB uniform. Personnel from the Soviet Air Force, the Soviet Air Defence Forces and the GRU were all physically halted a considerable distance from the wreckage and turned back, sometimes at gunpoint. Kirichenko had been told that if he carried on insisting of his ‘supposed authority’ then he risked being shot. The KGB had secured the area and no one else was allowed anywhere near the downed aircraft.
The MiG-25 which had shot down the stealth bomber had been subordinate to Marshal Gromov. The Soviet Army helicopters which had located the wreckage were too acting under orders sent from him. It was the same with the military intelligence team sent there straight away and who were now in KGB custody too. That aircraft, in effect, belonged to the Western-TVD after they had engaged it and found it ready for intelligence exploitation for tactical and operational purposes. Well, the KGB had stolen it in an armed robbery. That was the only way of explaining what they had done. Like a thief they had taken the property of another and were holding it by force of arms.
When first receiving word of this, Marshal Gromov had personally intervened but to no avail. The senior KGB people operating within the territory occupied west of the IGB and in certain wide regions on the eastern side all answered to his overall authority as the supreme military commander. The framework for a smooth passage of operations where all sorts of armed missions needed to take place in overlapping areas was all set up to stop any problems of infighting among men in different uniforms. There was no question that where the aircraft had landed was under his authority and all activity there would be conducted under his orders. Moreover, even if that hadn’t been the case, surely the KGB would understand that the best thing to do would be too allow the military access to the aircraft, yes?
No.
The boundaries of the operational areas for the military and the security services in the rear were just suddenly moved, even to the extent of crossing over the IGB into West Germany in that particular region. Marshal Gromov’s writ no longer ran there in the Harz Mountains. The KGB cut him out of everything to do with that aircraft and denied his people the chance to get anywhere near it.
He had to ask himself where the KGB was interested in winning this war when they acted like this.
Worried that his loyal aide might get himself into serious trouble with the KGB, because Kirichenko did have a temper at times, Marshal Gromov recalled him at once and sent instructions that other military personnel there were to back off. None of them would like it, neither did he, but that was how it had to be for the time being. Marshal Gromov had been left helpless and there was no point in seeing any more good men die from KGB bullets after so many Soviet officers already had.
He needed Kirichenko back up here in the north anyway. The colonel was on his military intelligence staff and had been instrumental in assisting the preparation of the defences on the Weser. NATO’s armies were on the western side of the North German Plain and across to the east there were extensive preparations underway to repel a major attack over the river to retake captured territory. There were some enemy light forces over the Weser near it’s estuary, but the majority were on the other side getting ready to come across in strength. Warsaw Pact forces – non-Soviet troops in the main – were arrayed to stop them but there was so much to do. Identifying where NATO would force their crossings in their main efforts as opposed to diversions to get Marshal Gromov’s troops firstly on the move (exposed to air attacks) and then sent to the wrong place were part of the remit for Kirichenko. Marshal Gromov had sent him to the Harz Mountains on a quick visit, he didn’t want to lose him there to a firing squad.
The operational area of the Western-TVD ran from Jutland and the Baltic Exits down through Germany and into Austria to the junction of the Austrian, Italian and Yugoslav borders. It was throughout this huge region, running both side of the immediate frontlines, where Marshal Gromov’s authority ran. It was here that the Soviet and Warsaw Pact armies were positioned on occupied territory and engaged in combat operations of both offensive and defensive nature. Down in Austria, Marshal Gromov’s forces with the Southern Front were still on the attack. Elsewhere though, there were a defensive posture at the minute as NATO’s recent offensives had hurt Western-TVD’s other attacks with the (running south to north) Central, Northern & Polish Fronts; the Netherlands Front was cut off and abandoned to its fate now in that country after which it had been named. This was all temporary, this stand-down of forward operations everywhere else apart from in the Alps, and Marshal Gromov had permission to have his troops withdraw into the many defensive positions which they had taken. Once NATO made their next move with another offensive, he’d counterattack them and the drive westwards would continue again.
It was in the north where NATO would strike again. The build-up of American forces there had been noted and monitored. Efforts by British, Belgian and West German forces (as little of the latter were left anyway) to force a crossing of the Weser would only be a distraction for the main effort undertaken by the Americans to carry the war back eastwards. It was obvious that that would happen from all of the intelligence which Marshal Gromov had. He would combat that though and push them back before his own reinforcements arrived after travelling the considerable distance which they had from inside the Soviet Union. There were many troops on their way from countless locations west of the Urals, reservists yes, but well-armed and trained men all ready to come to the fight. The Polish Front on the Weser – unfortunately with so many troops from European Warsaw Pact nations – had to hold first.
Marshal Gromov had ceased his earlier laughter and was busy checking that units across his commands had received their new radio equipment and were using the secure channels which came with them when an urgent message came to his command column from the Northern Front, which was located in central Germany through Hessen and northern Bavaria.
The Americans were attacking there. They had airborne forces in corps-strength landing in the rear and other armoured corps’ on the attack too!
Had he been deceived? Was every defence prepared in the north for naught?
The two alarming questions came to him as more and more news, none of it good, started to come in over the radio as the morning outside got lighter. One thing he didn’t hear though was the term ‘Storm Chaser’.
March 2nd 1990 Eichenzell, Hessen, West Germany
The commander of the 101st Infantry (Air Assault) Division – the Screaming Eagles – Major-General J. H. Binford Peay arrived on the ground inside newly-liberated territory in the late morning. The area around Eichenzell, especially the autobahn interchange, had already been taken by the 82nd Airborne Division just after dawn when paratroopers linked up with Rangers and Green Berets already on the ground. Peay came in with elements of his command staff in a helicopter rather than jumping from an aircraft, just as the majority of his division did too.
He was already in a foul mood and nothing which he saw or heard once on the ground changed that. There had been delays, excuses and idiocy back at the divisional staging areas away to the west and here in the east, in the Fulda Valley, it was exactly the same. There could be some short-term gains from ranting and raving as well as relieving from duty many subordinates. Peay could have easily done that but he wasn’t that type of officer and nor would it do any good in the long run either. He ignored the temptation, as near overwhelming as that was, and instead did his duty as a divisional commander should do: with professionalism and using his head.
Far too much of the Screaming Eagles were bunched up together near their landing zones. The lead combat brigade that was fully on the ground along with part of the second incoming brigade weren’t moving away fast enough from where the endless flotillas of transport helicopters had deposited them. In staying still where they were they were exposed to an enemy air, missile or artillery attack. Peay listened to what he was told as the reason, ignored the fury he felt at hearing another excuse where it was always the fault of someone else and issued new orders to his men here. He wanted to get them moving not just for their own safety but also because of the incoming waves of further men from the Screaming Eagles who would be brought in by all of those Black Hawks and Chinooks. There was no time to waste, not with the enemy all around them who might still be in shock at the minute but wouldn’t be for very long.
The 82nd Airborne Division still had men in positions where the Screaming Eagles were to move too? Peay sent his own men elsewhere. That meant away to the east and southeast covering the high ground and the roads in those directions.
There was no manner yet in which to send enemy POWs back to the west because they couldn’t go on the empty helicopters flying to get more of the Screaming Eagles? Then disperse them better so if they start causing trouble it will be isolated and not general.
The source of that mortar fire coming from a distance hadn’t be located yet? Then let’s get the counter-battery radars set up straight away and linked in with the heavy guns we already have on the ground.
The airmobile Red Horse teams manned by USAF combat engineers needed escorts to go to those small air-strips which the enemy had dotted all over the area and the 82nd Airborne Division was yet to supply those? Then let’s take over the mission and escort them because it helps tactically to spread us out and also gains overall operational advantage for the whole operation.
The divisional air defence battalion had lost its commanding officer in one of the helicopters show down during the assault? Then his executive officer should have already taken over and if he is incapable of getting the Vulcan anti-aircraft guns and Stinger missile teams in-place then someone else needs to take charge.
There was plenty for Peay to do and he focused on all of this for the time being as he should do. Others might be thinking of the strategic significance of the whole operation which the Screaming Eagles, the US XVIII Airborne Corps and the Seventh Army were engaged in but he was too busy to be doing that.
By the time Peay contacted his corps commander several hours later, his mood had improved. His orders were being obeyed and the Screaming Eagles were doing what they were meant to be doing. Contact had been met with the enemy and success gained. There had been no major surprises yet apart from more minefields than expected being present and continued losses to helicopters coming in that were above projections (thankfully not overwhelmingly so though.
Lt.-General Gary Luck commanded the XVIII Airborne Corps and had yet to come forward with his field headquarters staff. He was a good man to work for as far as Peay was concerned: tough, fair and professional. Luck’s staff was in contact with the 82nd Airborne Division’s headquarters and those of various other units forward already or on their way. Moreover, he had access to plenty of up-to-the-minute intelligence on the enemy much of which was available to him in real time.
Peay was told to keep spreading out as he was doing. Luck repeated what he’d said all throughout the planning for the XVIII Airborne Corps’ role in Operation Storm Chaser: throw the enemy off-balance and take as much ground as possible from the surprised enemy rear-area force but don’t be foolish and run into too much than you can handle. The heavy ground forces with the French coming from the north and the US V Corps aiming to force its way up the Kinzig & Fliede Valleys will be with you soon enough but for the time being the Screaming Eagles and their counterparts with the 82nd Airborne Division and other detachments were on their own. Luck added that as he expected the other division to use their M-551 Sheridans and TOW missile-armed HMMWVs, he wanted the Screaming Eagles to use their own mobility in the form of their own HMMWVs as well as tactical helicopter operations. Peay was to move men around but also his howitzers with his own transport assets; there was plenty of high ground to use for artillery spotting teams.
Luck wanted to know the progress on the enemy air-strips and Peay reported what he knew; he was glad that he had fast sent men to them ahead of waiting for the 82nd Airborne Division’s paratroopers. From what Peay had quickly learnt there at the four sites where he had sent troops to work with Red Horse teams the identified air-strips had been quickly seized and were generally intact. As what had been shown from aerial reconnaissance, Warsaw Pact engineers had littered occupied West German territory far back from the frontlines with temporary air-strips. Everything about them was temporary and not designed to last for very long. They were pit-stops for combat aircraft and helicopters coming from fixed bases in East Germany already carrying weapons and fuel but where they could get some more of each. There were no maintenance facilities, no shelters and nothing else associated with major airbases because they weren’t that. Some aircraft had been caught on the ground and there had been enemy troops engaged when taking them. Peay also informed Luck that he had others within sight to be seized too in his assigned area of operations. His commander asked him about the main roads and the stretch of Autobahn-66: was there any evidence that the Soviets had been flying aircraft from them too? No, Peay told him, as the same reconnaissance which had identified the air-strips in fields had shown there was no use of those. Those stretches of roadway were heavily-mined though and before the Screaming Eagles had got established when the paratroopers fought the enemy in the area there had been some demolitions from pre-laid charges that had taken place among the roads.
Peay was asked by his commander about POWs. Luck wanted to know if any NATO prisoners had been encountered and liberated from enemy custody by the Screaming Eagles. The answer was no, but Peay certainly had his men looking for any detention facilities. He already had enemy POWs under his control, far more than the 82nd Airborne Division had taken. There was his own divisional military police company already here and a company from the 16th Military Police Brigade’s 503rd MP Battalion was here with him too. There were military intelligence teams assisting them in separating the POWs by nationality, service and rank (officers and conscripts). Peay let his superior though that there had been some infighting among the POWs and not of the usual sort either so he wanted to pass that up the chain-of-command. There had been Soviets, East Germans and Czechoslovaks captured by the Screaming Eagles; it had been the East Germans and the Czechoslovaks fighting each other with fists, boots and a few hidden knives with the Soviets not involved. Luck replied that there had been psychological warfare operations of a strategic nature carried out by the USAF over this area – Commando Solo was the code-name – as part of an effort to sow discord between the Soviets and the Eastern Europeans but that had been focused as far as he knew on making the East Germans, the Poles and the Czechoslovaks want to fight the Soviets. Regardless, he was happy that there had been a positive effect even if it wasn’t one expected: he too would pass that up the chain-of-command with the hope it could be expanded upon elsewhere to a greater degree.
Peay went back to commanding his division in the fight. There was a battle underway with the Screaming Eagles 2d Brigade fighting to take the village of Welkers away to the southeast and the arrival of more troops along with one of his two executive officers. Brigadier-General Hugh Shelton – Assistant Divisional Commander for Maneuver (there was one for Support too) – had had his helicopter shot-up badly earlier and been forced to return to the staging area from where that Black Hawk had come. There had been far more opposition from ground defences over the multiple approach routes with multiple-barreled anti-aircraft guns found more dangerous than SAMs. Apache and Cobra gun-ships were everywhere now to defend the transports carrying men, guns, vehicles, munitions and stores.
The 1st Brigade came with Shelton, the 327th ‘Bastogne Bulldogs’ Infantry Regiment. With those further three infantry battalions, Peay would again expand his operational area further. There was still plenty of ground to seize and hold ready for when the ground forces turned up after fighting their way here.
It was going to be a long and tough fight.
March 2nd 1990 (Another) Revolutionary Armed Forces bunker, east of Havana, Cuba
Jefe Raúl Castro hadn’t taken it personally.
The Americans had dropped a barrage of bombs on the bunker where he had previously been three nights ago. Their aim had clearly been to kill him and decapitate the leadership of the Cuban Armed Forces. In their position, given the opportunity, he’d have done the same thing. They’d nearly achieved their aim too if it hadn’t been for the skill of the East German engineers who’d built that facility. He and those inside had survived the bombing but it wasn’t somewhere that would be used again: the Americans would have come back for a second attempt when they learnt that their first try had failed.
So he was elsewhere now, putting his faith in the inability of the Americans to locate this place and the ability shown by those who build this facility too in stopping penetrating bombs. Bunkers, as far as Jefe Castro, were concerned where safe enough for him for the time being… and not just from those trying to kill him from high above.
When his previous bunker had been attacked as it had, with Jefe Castro inside and underneath the damage done above, word had spread that he was dead. Where the rumour had exactly started and how it had spread so quick were of no real concern to Fidel’s brother. What was of consequence was the actions of many when they heard the false news that he had been killed.
Believing that he was dead and that Fidel was at the other end of the country – in a trench with a rifle ready to fight hand-to-hand with the norteamericanos when they came to retake Guantanamo Bay, apparently – a large number of Cuban military and intelligence officers had attempted to launch a coup d'état.
The daring of such people!
To do as they did, there must have been a conspiracy active for some time. Officers of mid-level rank within the Revolutionary Armed Forces and the DGI had tried to overthrow the regime which Jefe Castro and his brother led by working to take command of (what was left of) the government in Havana and issuing orders for action to be taken elsewhere. Their aim hadn’t been to end the war with the United States, but rather to continue, even intensify it, as they believed that it hadn’t been fought in the manner which it should be.
Infighting had been their undoing though. During their ‘morning of action’ they had spent too much time arguing first with words then taking their disputes to the level of gun-play rather than finishing what they had started when they arrested senior officers and made radio broadcasts. None of them had sent anyone working for them to where that attacked bunker was to find out if Jefe Castro was actually dead nor to stop the work underway to dig out an entrance to the bunker among all the rubble of the above ground destruction.
They’d been fools and amateurs aplenty.
Before he’d even been rescued, those loyal within the armed forces and the intelligence apparatus had already made their countermoves in support of him: they’d remembered their duty. They attacked those taking part in the coup at every opportunity and put an end to it. It had been bloodily done, but effectively so. If the Americans hadn’t tried to kill him like they had, then those plotting in secret for a long time to overthrow the regime of him and his brother wouldn’t have been detected. The Americans had done Jefe Castro a favour!
Hang those you have caught, Fidel had said when told, or shot them. Do as you must was his response, but get it done fast. Such was the reaction when told from Cuba’s leader with regards to the failed coup.
Once again, when told of betrayals and treachery, Fidel wanted it dealt with by someone else. He was only focused on the epic battle which he was sure was coming soon when the US Marines came ashore on Cuba down in the south. Guantanamo Bay would be defended with him at the head of that in a victory which be remembered for hundreds of years… etc. etc. To stop that invasion when it came was all that Fidel was concerned with now. When it came to other military matters, such as Cuban troops ashore in the Florida Keys or B-52s bombing Havana, Fidel’s focus was on making sure that Cuba was to be in the best position to fight off the coming attack on Guantanamo Bay rather than those other events. Cuba’s best troops were positioned to defend the shoreline and launch overwhelming counterattacks if that initial defensive effort failed.
Jefe Castro was starting to be convinced that his brother’s mind was failing. He was unconcerned with everything else apart from his firm belief in that final battle for Guantanamo Bay. Fidel had been told that all intelligence pointed to the Americans liberating their own sovereign soil first before they even considered going after Cuba directly but he didn’t believe that. He told his brother that he had a better understanding of the norteamericanos than he did.
There wouldn’t be an attempt to retake the Florida Keys any time soon because Guantanamo Bay was all that the Americans were concerned with. So said Fidel and it was he who – despite his many recent misgivings – who Jefe Castro was loyal to and would obey come what may.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 15:22:08 GMT
Sixteen – Special Operations
March 3rd 1990 The Florida Keys, Florida, the United States
The liberation of the remaining portions of sovereign United States soil in the Florida Keys – overall named Operation Golden Talon – began in the very early hours of the morning two weeks after the Cuban invasion.
There were occupying troops on Key West, its smaller a-joining isles and on Boca Chica Key. Golden Talon would see the destruction of those enemy forces and the liberation of the civilians and military personnel held hostage… with the result to be the elimination of the Cuban forces present. The USAF had struck from the air before the liberation got underway and would continue to support the mission. The US Navy was offshore maintaining a blockade and would be called in for naval gunfire support. The US Marines would generally miss out the fighting but there were a few of their number involved. It was to be the US Army which would do the bulk of the fighting with the enemy with Green Berets leading the way followed by specialised light infantry units.
De oppresso liber: to free the oppressed.
US Army Special Forces commandoes with the 7th Special Forces Group (7 SFG) were assigned to the Caribbean and Latin America. At the outbreak of World War Three back in early February, against the wishes of the commanding officer, one battalion (3d Battalion) from the 7 SFG was sent to Europe leaving two more in-place: one in Panama (2d Battalion) and the other at Fort Bragg in North Carolina (1st Battalion). There had been no sign then of active Cuban involvement in the war which had started in Europe and the Korean Peninsula and the hope was that it would remain that way. Fears were in some quarters that a conflict with Nicaragua might start as that country may invade a neighbour but that again hadn’t occurred. Cuba had then gone and done the impossible and struck as it had yet only after significant American military forces were very far away in active war zones. The 7 SFG had been preparing unofficially for a fight with Cuba though; unfortunately, it came where they didn’t expect it. When they did get into the fight, the Green Berets from Fort Bragg took on Cuban commandoes holding Marathon and its airport further along the Florida Keys from Key West. The enemy there was eliminated in violent combat which the 1–7 SFG commenced when surrounded by civilians – innocent Americans! – on Vaca Key. That had been a challenge indeed because external fire support couldn’t be called upon and they had to take care with every instance of gunfire.
They learnt from the fighting there and would use that when taking part in the sub-operation of Golden Talon which was to be the initial combat around Key West, Operation Burning Phoenix.
Broken down into small, mission-orientated teams 1–7 SFG and 2–7 SFG (coming up from Panama) assaulted the outlying isles around Key West itself. The island itself was still full of the enemy in number in fixed defences where there were a lot of civilians, but on the smaller Sunset Key, Wisteria Island, Fleming Key and Dredgers Key that wasn’t the case. The first two islands were empty of Americans and there were only a few in the second pair; Fleming Key and Dredgers Key (better known as Sigsbee Park) were military facilities part of the NAS Key West complex. There were Cuban troops on those isles though.
Fighting in the darkness after making assault from aircraft, helicopters and small boats, the Green Berets took on those defenders. They had plenty of assistance from above and on the water as well as access to plenty of intelligence. Where the enemy was, his projected numbers and what weapons the Cubans were manned was information which those taking part in Burning Phoenix had access too. Much of that was found to be accurate, but, of course, there were a few unfortunate surprises.
The residential and very exclusive Sunset Key had been emptied of civilians by the Cubans and the isle garrisoned by a company of paratroopers. These men had mined the beaches and the piers and retreated to fighting positions away from the shore. Sunset Key was tiny though and they had no covered shelter apart from the homes which they had taken over… and looted too. 2–7 SFG Green Berets enveloped the Cubans hitting them with stunning violence using an array of hand-held weaponry to come at them. Too many Cubans had been asleep and those who hadn’t and were meant to be on watch weren’t paying enough attention. The fight was over before it begun in all honesty with the defenders not standing a chance. Burning Phoenix was a complete success when it came to Sunset Key.
Wisteria Island was an uninhibited artificial isle. There were Cubans there, a platoon of them dug-in and in a sorry state. They were meant to be providing an outpost and to stop an attempt to surround Key West by the Americans. It had been far too long since the men on the isle had been bothered by the Americans as air attacks had concentrated elsewhere. Their lieutenant had died during the invasion (his parachute hadn’t opened and he’d fallen like a stone onto the surface of the ocean) and the senior sergeant had not shown much of an interest in making Wisteria Island a fortress. 2–7 SFG arrived from out of nowhere firing rifles, throwing grenades and slitting the throats of his lone pair of sentries. Again, it was all over before it started. Wisteria Island fell in a swoop, a letter-perfect operation where the correct use of force had been employed after expert surveillance.
Green Berets with 1–7 SFG assaulted Fleming Key. This larger island was part of the Trumbo Point United States military facility and there were many uses for it by the Americans before the Cuban invasion, including a training facility for Green Berets. 1–7 SFG commandoes who had spent time there were almost exclusively part of the assault force to help in making this element of Burning Phoenix a success. They were keen on retaking it, naturally, as well as freeing the POWs which were believed to be held on Fleming Key: US Armed Forces service personnel overwhelmed in that sudden assault on February 17th. When landing, the Green Berets were cautious in getting ashore but quick to start fighting the Cubans when they found them. They took the training facility and the bridge connecting the isle to Key West (cutting the wires to demolition charges while doing so) but got into a major firefight around the wastewater treatment plant where they took losses. Cuban paratroopers dug in there fought like lions in an unexpected development. Calling-in air support was considered but Green Berets reported observing DGI officers which could have been with the expected POWs. That air support – high-explosive bombs from a waiting flight of USAF F-16s would have been guided-in with hand-held designators – was called off and the rest of Fleming Key taken so that the Cubans could be surrounded. Once morning came and there was more light, the Green Berets would take on their trapped enemy and with hope rescue the POWs without incinerating them from above.
Sigsbee Park was always going to be the biggest challenge for Burning Phoenix.
The isle was a military housing facility (Sigsbee Annex part of NAS Key West) where many families of US service-personnel had been before invasion. Information on the fate of those dependents was worrying; there was believed to be a strong DGI presence there with mistreatment suspected of wives and children because of their POW husbands and fathers. Political pressure all the way from the top of the Defence Department’s wartime headquarters at Raven Rock had come to liberated these oppressed American civilians and to not have their lives lost. This put more pressure on the planners of Burning Phoenix than they had taken on themselves; they had all sorts of worst-case scenarios war-gamed with individual Cuban soldiers using civilians as direct hostages. At the same time, it was recognised by many – though carefully spoken of – that this would all be good practice for Key West itself where there were many more civilians who the Cubans were anticipated to use as human shields too. That was a harsh viewpoint to take but perfectly valid.
More than two hundred Green Berets with 1–7 SFG made multiple landings across Sigsbee Park. They came in carefully and tried their best to eliminate as many sentries as possible before any alert was raised. The identified location of the reaction force was assaulted too while defensive trenches were to be hit from behind rather than in front. There was much initial success but some failures too. Sigsbee Park was a hive of Cuban activity and there were too many defenders to be taken wholly by surprise. Gunfights erupted everywhere and explosions rocked the isle. Green Berets liberated many civilians but saw others killed. They took losses themselves from Cuban paratroopers who were demoralised by still knew how to fight. It was very difficult for some to maintain their discipline when they saw that the fears about what the Cubans might have been doing to hostages turned out to be true in a few places: some DGI men ended up having ‘accidents’ once captured. These were only a few isolated incidents but they did occur because the Green Berets were generally family men themselves and some of what they saw made several lose their heads for the briefest of time and react as they did.
By daybreak Sigsbee Park was taken joining Sunset Key and Wisteria Island in being liberated. Most of Fleming Key was in American hands too and the fight continued there with the available natural light to save as many captured POWs as possible before the Cubans might decide to start shooting them.
The aim of Burning Phoenix was more than just retaking those isles and liberating those there. Taking out the outlying defences – such as they were anyway – of Key West was the ultimate aim. The special operations undertaken here by elite troops were to start to surround the main body of the enemy. Observation points close up, as well as truly forward bases for raiding parties and intelligence forays into that island, were what Burning Phoenix was to achieve.
Next up, would be more sub-parts of Golden Talon when Boca Chica Key, where the main part of NAS Key West and the airbase was located, were retaken. Further 7 SFG elements would be with regular US Army troops who would do the majority of the fighting there against larger numbers of defenders.
March 3rd 1990 Kirchberg, City of Luxembourg, Luxembourg
The NATO summit was due to start officially tomorrow in the midst of the tightest of security following the massacre in Paris last month at a similar gathering. Senior politicians and diplomats were due to arrive in Luxembourg later tonight and the following morning they would begin a series of meetings.
The American Secretary of State would be attending, so too the Canadian Minister for Foreign Affairs. From all of the European nations which were part of NATO, including West Germany with their Munich Government, foreign ministers would come to Luxembourg. They would have their diplomatic parties with them: official functionaries, advisers, interpreters and bodyguards. Between the formal talks there would be some time for a little bit of relaxation, especially for those who had traveled far, but this was hardly to be a holiday for anyone. There would be plenty to talk about and the discussions were due to lead to a united approach to events ongoing and to come.
Ahead of the major figures and their escorts, others were already in Luxembourg preparing for the upcoming summit.
David Davis MP had been appointed to the junior minister role of Parliamentary Under-Secretary of State (PUSoS) for Foreign Affairs two weeks ago. His predecessor had been killed in Paris – one of the few British casualties there – and Davis asked to take on major responsibilities in comparison to those as an MP less than three years into his first term in Parliament. He had accepted because it was the right thing to do… and of course it would ultimately be beneficial to him in the long run in what he hoped would be the successful political career which he had ahead of him.
The role of a PUSoS was usually to provide support to ministers above him in Parliament such as Europe Minister Francis Maude and Foreign Secretary Hurd. He had been doing just that and had remained in London since his appointment and been unable to return to his East Yorkshire constituency. Usual politics at the moment in Parliament were supposed to be on hold with the ongoing war and the National Government presented a united front. That was far from the case out of the spotlight though and Davis had been involved in a few verbal scuffles with those opposed to certain aspects of how the war was being fought; that wasn’t all partisan as well as an outsider might have expected. When the Foreign Secretary had asked him to go to Luxembourg ahead of the Foreign Office party to assist in making arrangements there, Davis had at once said yes to that. He had only then asked afterwards why he would be needed there.
This morning, Davis went into a meeting with junior ministers from several Western European nations who were like him here ahead of their country’s main diplomatic parties. He had an interpreter with him along with a Foreign Office official and an MI-6 man. Davis told those who’d come from Norway, the Netherlands, Belgium, France and Spain that the rumour which they had heard was false, a lie spread by the Soviets: the Americans hadn’t made the decision to cross the IGB when the opportunity presented itself in the face of a Soviet threat to use nuclear weapons if that happened. Moreover, Davis also affirmed that Britain hadn’t secretly agreed to support that decision nor was the Foreign Office or Britain’s intelligence services already working on the Americans behalf to elicit support from other European nations for this.
None of this was true at all and it was all a propaganda effort being made by the Soviets to sow discord amongst NATO countries.
This apparent Soviet threat wasn’t true and there was already an agreed stop-order in-place among all NATO nations when it came to ground operations on the other side of the IGB, which no NATO forces were reasonably close to anyway. The supposed leak from Portugal and another that had reportedly come from Denmark where British diplomats and intelligence officers were active securing support for the so-called wishes of the Americans were further lies.
Davis followed his instructions from above in delivering these assurances to those listening to him. He tried to read the mood of those whom he spoke to but that was a difficult thing to do with no personal relationship to fall back on and also his limited understanding of Europeans. If he’d been meeting with Americans, Davis knew that he would have done much better; it wouldn’t have just been the missing language barrier but also his time spent in the United States before entering politics. He was only repeating what he had been told too and couldn’t be personally sure whether everything that he had been told and was assuring his country’s allies of was wholly true itself.
There was a sneaky suspicion, a concerned voice in the back of his head, which told him that the ‘lie’ might not be that at all…
Davis’ French counterpart hit him with a related issue, one which Davis had been planning to turn to afterwards as part of the informal briefing he was supposed to give. Was it true, the Frenchman asked, that the United States had been having talks with the Chinese where they were aiming to cut a deal to have China stay out of entering the war on the Korean Peninsula in exchange for lifting the post–Tiananmen arms embargo? Was Britain again supporting the United States in that with the aim of securing European support for that too?
The briefing given to Davis on that beforehand hadn’t been as extensive as the other matter but it had been discussed back in London.
Davis informed those with him that on this latter matter, part of what they had heard was true. Yes, the Americans had been talking to the Chinese. An intervention of theirs in the Second Korean War would be just as bad as in the First. It was in the interests of the Allies, not just the United States, to keep China out of the war there. Britain, France and the rest of NATO were part of the Allies: all united in fighting the Soviets and their allies worldwide. As to British support, there was a diplomatic effort underway by other Foreign Office representatives elsewhere in the world to assist in keeping China out of the war but none here in Europe. Britain wouldn’t take part in any effort to sell-out Europe’s interests in reaction to what had occurred in China last year – an event which preceded and probably inspired the East German crackdown on their own protesting citizens – despite what had been said by some. Again, Davis cautioned that the Soviets were still spreading their propaganda and being clever about it by disguising sources as well as mixing little bits of truth with many falsehoods.
Once again, Davis couldn’t be sure of how much of what he said was believed as well as not being sure of how much he thought he knew as true was only the official Foreign Office line with regards to Britain’s policy when it came to the conduct of this war. There was a lot of diplomacy going on which his government was taking part in as well as special operations taking part in the intelligence field which had diplomatic implications.
There were always going to be things that were kept from him as a junior minister and he understood the need for that. It wasn’t pleasant but it was the way things were done, had to be done. The Soviet intelligence apparatus was still active worldwide and so much of that was in the shadows with much use made of proxies. Their country was fighting a war with a wide alliance of many countries spread across the globe and they were currently on the defensive. Naturally, they were striking back and at the moment he was having to deal with that. They had really tapped into the worries of many with their latest efforts, especially the first matter which he had discussed here. Britain had been dragged into the game which the KGB – it had to be them – was playing in trying to cause division. Not experienced in the intelligence field himself, he still was able to see how clever that had been; the Soviets hadn’t just tried to cause a straight-up trans-Atlantic divide but added Britain into the mix to muddle the waters.
More importantly, the particular fear which the Soviets had brought in with the threat of further nuclear detonations would do damage no matter how hard Davis and Hurd following him would try to dampen that. Flensburg had been bad enough but Europe’s leaders now knew all about Belgrade and Sofia too.
He hoped that further efforts from the Foreign Secretary and others would shut all of this down as soon as possible. The division which the Soviets were trying to open up could be fatal if it was allowed to get out of control.
NATO couldn’t win this war if it was arguing amongst itself.
March 3rd 1990 KGB detention center, outside Clenze in Wendland, Lower Saxony, West Germany
The KGB was operating various detention sites all across Europe. There were locations for holding people throughout the Warsaw Pact nations of Eastern Europe as well as those on occupied territory in Denmark, West Germany and Austria. The latter facilities were in-place due to reasons of convenience near the frontlines but also because the KGB didn’t want direct oversight and/or observation either from their supposed allies nor others within the Soviet Union.
The camp located in the Drewehn Hills, on the eastern edge of the Lüneburg Heath and very close to the IGB, was where it was due to several of those categories. From here the KGB could run several of their special operations undisturbed. There were sixty-three detainees held here currently; there had been as many as ninety plus at one point but the shallow graves nearby reflected the current lower number. These detainees were either being put to use at the moment or would be at a latter undetermined stage. There were those who had been in military service and civilians too. Most were men, but there were a few women too. Moreover, not all of those were from nations currently at war with the Soviet Union either.
Ursula von der Leyen was one of those being held here by the KGB.
The young doctor specialising in woman’s health had been working in Hanover when the war commenced. Against her wishes, she had been removed from the hospital there two days into the start of the conflict and taken away for her own safety by officers with the Lower Saxony LfV. This was due to who her father was, the politician Ernst Albrecht who was the Minister-President of Lower Saxony. During the late Seventies, when studying for her medical degree in London, Ursula had used the pseudonym ‘Roschen Ladson’ due to the threat to her from West German left-wing militants because of her father and the LfV agents had called her that when they had taken her. However, she had fast discovered that those who were meant to be saving her from kidnap were actually doing just that themselves.
Ursula had ended up in the hands of the KGB.
She had no idea where she was nor any news from the outside world for a long time. The guards here were all Soviet KGB men and were focused on enforcing isolation upon her and the few other prisoners; she saw glances of them and also heard their screams. Dogs barked continually as they prowled the grounds inside the barbed wire fences which she had once observed. When interrogated, Ursula was beaten and humiliated. She was tortured too with the most terrible methods employed in what was often just an effort to inflict pain not gain anything else from her.
What the KGB wanted from her was for her to make a videotape and to write some letters. She had exactly as they had wanted but still been beaten regardless. She pleaded for her life from her father and told him that if he didn’t do what the KGB wanted then she would be hurt further: in the video she was displayed with many visible injuries and being hurt some more.
There had been questions asked of her which had come with more abuse. Ursula was asked everything possible about her father and his life. There were questions too about her brother and her husband as well as threats made to find and kill her two very young children. She answered everything asked but again that still didn’t stop the beatings. She was accused of telling lies and more torture came so that she would reveal the truth. Trying to fight back or ignore the pain was impossible. She was weak from the lack of food and water, tired from the enforced lack of sleep and within hours of being at Clenze had had her will-power broken.
Ursula couldn’t see any time when all this would stop and today was another day where the suffering at the hands of the KGB was inflicted upon her.
A chemist from East Berlin was also being held at Clenze, one by the name of Angela Merkel.
Merkel was an East German national with an official ‘good standing’ despite not being within the political establishment. In her early years she had been active with the Freie Deutsche Jugend (FDJ) – the Free German Youth, a patriotic youth organisation which there was no choice but to join if one wanted a chance at access to higher education – and as far as the East German Stasi was concerned she had no known political affiliations. Merkel spoke Russian very well but with her age (thirty-five) and her academic profession, as well as being a woman, there shouldn’t have been any reason why she should have seen war. Nonetheless, when war came to Berlin with the incursion of West Berlin which the Stasi’s Felix Dzerzhinsky Guard Regiment had taken part in, many casualties had been inflicted upon Stasi personnel who spoke Russian and worked alongside Soviet units which had taken part in that operation. When afterwards the same elite unit was redeployed to West Germany following the ceasefire, there had been a need for more translators to be called upon. Merkel’s name was on a list which she knew nothing about and she also had a connection to where the Felix Dzerzhinsky Guard Regiment was sent to: it was in Hamburg where she had been born.
The very short time when she was with the Felix Dzerzhinsky Guard Regiment, Merkel was far back from the frontlines serving in the rear assisting in communications duty. She wasn’t in any way involved in anything directly combat related but rather working with Soviet military rear-area forces to secure the passage of the Stasi combat troops up towards Hamburg where they were to take the city. Merkel was far from happy at being involved in the war yet had known to keep her head down and do what she was told. Her country had gone crazy since events last October and the outbreak of state-imposed patriotism meant that everyone was expected to do their duty for the German Democratic Republic no matter what.
In doing something, an act which she wasn’t aware of, Merkel had attracted the unwelcome attention of the KGB. They had taken her away outside of Hamburg without any of her fellow East Germans coming to her aid. Why and on what reason she was held, she didn’t know. They didn’t tell her anything but just held her in a cold, dark cell in isolation. There was no violence: no beatings, no torture and no rape. She was asked many questions about her personal and professional relationships back in East Berlin as well as those when travelling with the Felix Dzerzhinsky Guard Regiment yet there was only the threat of violence rather than the act. Merkel was given no choice in nor information on the ‘medicines’ she was told to take either.
Pure terror ran wild through her mind at what her future held. Today, like each day she was here, she waited for her treatment to get as bad as it was for the others whose screams she heard. Merkel wondered when that attention would turn to her while at the same time having no idea why she was here in this place she knew nothing about.
Intelligence agencies of several NATO nations knew about the detention facility outside of Clenze like they knew about others too. The camp had been spotted by satellite and aerial reconnaissance while there was also some signals intelligence concerning transfers of prisoners referred to by number designators. On later piece of intelligence had pointed to the graves dug outside of the camp in the woodland.
But, as said, it was one of many facilities spotted and there was a certainty that there were more of them too.
There was a desire to see the camps dealt with. NATO wanted to know everything about them from who was held there, who was working at each and what exactly was being done inside. Yet this was one of many wishes for action to be taken against so much of the enemy’s current activities.
Rescue was not going to come any time soon for those being held at places such as Clenze and the KGB would carry on with what it was doing for now.
March 3rd 1990 Nörvenich Airbase, North Rhine–Westphalia, West Germany
Nörvenich Airbase was currently a center of activity for NATO special forces operations in the northern part of West Germany as well as in the nearby Netherlands too. Luftwaffe Tornado strike-bombers which had flown from here pre-war were either lost in combat or flying from elsewhere (many with either British or Italian aircrews now) and instead specialist transport aircraft and helicopters were calling the facility home. Hasty work had been done to commence expansion of the airbase through more of the Nörvenich Wald – cutting clearances among the trees in which the facility already lay – and there were plenty of air defences for the Nörvenich as well.
Lt.-General Peter de la Billière (often known as DLB) had made Nörvenich his operational headquarters. The British Army officer who had started the war commanding the regional South-East District back home before being named Special Operations Commander responsible for the NORTHAG area had chosen the site because of its immediate location within natural cover and its general position back on the western side of the Rhine. There would have been safer places, even further west, but Nörvenich had been available and was close enough to the frontlines without being too close: enemy interference in activities here had occurred yet thankfully not too frequently.
Supported by his staff and his deputy – Major-General William Garrison from the US Army – the operations of NATO special forces north of the NORTHAG-CENTAG boundary which ran across the middle of West Germany and south of the Danish border were commanded by DLB. These consisted of missions undertaken of a tactical and operational nature; those designated as strategic were beyond his purview and that line was often blurred too. DLB wasn’t in charge of Gladio operations nor big airborne assault missions undertaken in direct support of the ground war. What was under his command were those directly related to the fighting which remained underway on and around the frontlines. Commando teams deposited in the enemy rear, search-and-rescue of downed pilots and intelligence gathering efforts using watchers were commanded from Nörvenich.
DLB had British, American, Dutch and Belgian units under his command; the West Germans were a spent force when it came to special forces. The commandoes were from the regular SAS and the TA’s reserve-manned SAS formations as well. The Americans provided Green Berets who were from both the regular 10 SFG and the reserve 12 SFG. The Dutch had their Korps Commandotroepen men (of which many weren’t left alive) and the Belgians provided Equipes Spéciales de Reconnaissance commandoes. Both the RAF and the British Army had helicopters attached to the operations ran from Nörvenich and from the Low Countries there were some more helicopters. However, it was the Americans which were providing the majority of the aviation assets with plenty of specialised flying machines.
The operations commenced against Soviet and Warsaw Pact forces were wide and varied. Initially, before DLB had come across to the Continent and there had been a Bundeswehr officer in-place (who’d unfortunately been caught out by the sudden mid-February ceasefire and nearly captured alive when his men surrendered all around him with the end result being his sacrificial suicide to hide what was in his head) and many more stay-behind operations were then being run than there were now. SAS units had joined with West German Fernspähkompanie formations in hiding in selected areas and allowing the initial wave of main fighting to pass them by before they then emerged in the enemy’s rear areas. Harassment of lines of communication, the sniping at enemy heavy weapons set-ups and the calling-in of reports concerning mass movements of armour had been their role and they had done very well indeed. Unfortunately, the majority of those small teams had been tracked down as the Soviets increased their security and purposely hunted for them through forests, hills and valleys in occupied territory. Some men had escaped and linked-up with more NATO special forces arriving on the Continent and their experience was extremely valuable. Yet there had come a move away from those early missions. DLB had supported the decision made from higher than himself because more damage to the enemy was believed to be done by hitting them with raids where the men were inserted and withdrawn afterwards. The ability to snatch prisoners for interrogation by military intelligence teams was something more and so too insertion and subsequent extraction of targeteers. There was also the lesser number of lives that would be lost by no longer keeping men in the enemy’s rear unsupported for far too long.
The change of doctrine had been resisted by many, but there was an eventual flooding of the enemy’s rear by their own security forces. The East Germans in particular were used for that mission where as part of their occupation duties thousands of paramilitary soldiers were sent into West Germany to scour the countryside. They were not directly sent after the special forces stay-behind teams, rather instead regular NATO soldiers who had been left behind and also West German civilians who’d fled from their homes, yet there were so many of them and numbers started to overcome the cunning of the special forces teams with the predictable results of so many dead men who before they had died had spent too much time on the run to be doing anything effective. If it had been regular Soviet soldiers pulled from the frontlines who’d been after them, then it might have been different.
DLB had commando teams active all of the time.
His men did most of their work, caused their most chaos to the enemy, at night. Aircraft and helicopters would drop off men to undertake missions to strike at the enemy where the hope was most could be achieved. The majority of them would be soon picked up again either before it got light or the next evening. The days were still short and with what seemed like half of Western Europe still alight from raging fires – towns and forests – all of the smoke covered much of the moonlight. The Soviets and Warsaw Pact nations couldn’t keep their men awake and alert at night; DLB had enforced sleep discipline in the day time for so many of his. Explosions and gunfire erupted every night but on other missions commanded from Nörvenich there was less ‘action’ and reconnaissance done as well as targeting for more conventional warfare platforms than men fighting in the darkness. There was also plenty of activity to rescue NATO aircrews from downed aircraft; early in the war this hadn’t been done enough due to lack of resources and other commitments… such as Soviet tanks rolling as far forward as they had.
Losses came alongside the successes though.
DLB was a former SAS man who’d personally fought in Malaya, Oman and Borneo. He had also commanded operations worldwide including the Iranian Embassy storming in London and a failed mission into Argentina itself to eliminate the Etendard / Exocet threat during the Falklands War: the still-secret Operation Mikado. He knew what it was like to see men killed and had killed others himself as well. There were far too many fools, dreamers and schemers who had ideas about what special forces operations could achieve. Many of them had influence when they shouldn’t and it was those who he had to combat as much as the Soviets to shoot down their ideas about sending men under his command into battle on suicide missions for no appreciable gain other than to massage their ego. He and his staff made mistakes themselves, other times happenstance or an uncooperative enemy led to losses being taken. DLB had to accept the latter but wouldn’t allow the interference of armchair warriors to see his men killed or end up in the custody of the enemy.
There were enough, terrible stories which he’d heard – confirmed and not – of what had happened to NATO special forces soldiers when the Soviets got ahold of them.
In particular, one of Garrison’s aides, Major McChrystal had related the story of an American MH-53H Pave Low (an advanced combat helicopter) pilot by the name of Captain Marshall B. Webb. After his helicopter had gone down with casualties when returning from an extraction, Webb had been forced to run and evade the enemy: he’d seen and heard what had happened to some of the others who’d survived the crash, been unable to get away from the wreckage and who East German paramilitaries had come across. The commander of 22 SAS, Lt.-Colonel Cedric Delves, had been present when that news had come in – visiting Nörvenich because so many of his men were sent on operations commanded from here – and shut McChrystal up less too many people hear what he had been saying, but DLB had already expected that soon enough confirmation of such things that they’d only heard rumours about and suspected would come.
Knowing that, and then gaining other later information too, every time DLB sent out men he remembered that he had the fate of so many people in his hands and no matter how much he and his staff tried to cover every angle and make sure that the missions were a success, men were still going to die. That happened in war.
Tonight, with darkness all across Western Europe, men under orders from DLB were out on special operations. He had many missions underway on the North German Plain, across on the other side of the Weser. NATO ground forces were on the cusp of making a major assault over that river to launch an offensive with the hope of taking back West Germany up to the IGB. That was an ambitious task and wouldn’t be easy. The Soviets had been knocked right off balance but weren’t defeated yet. In support of this, preparing the way, commandoes were active in many places taking part in varied missions to hurt the enemy but also confuse the Soviets as to where and when the big ground offensive would come. Some aircrews downed last night and during today were also going to be gone after as well while there was too a snatch mission getting ready to go so that prisoners could be taken from a communications post in the general area of Hanover where internal signals from the Soviets were encoded and decoded for operational uses: such places could be bombed but DLB preferred, when possible, to raid them and grab men and documents to pass information extracted up the chain-of-command.
Then there were operations underway in the Netherlands: Scud-hunting.
Soviet forces cut off far to the west of the Weser, behind two major rivers and being slowly strangled from all sides, had brought with them tactical nuclear weapons. These came in the form of warheads for bombs and missiles to be fired from combat aircraft as well as further warheads for artillery shells and ground-launched missiles. Exactly what had come with the advancing field armies trailing behind them and what was still functional consisted of plenty of contradictory information. The Soviets hadn’t used any of those weapons but clearly had had some lost when the warheads were blown up (without a thermonuclear detonation) or fell to the ground when attached to aircraft trying to ferry them out of the encirclement. The whole issue was an almighty mess. DLB couldn’t imagine NATO attacking forces doing the same – dragging so many weapons so far forward with weak flanks open to counterattack and then losing track of some of those weapons – but the Soviets had done just that.
There was an effort being made by the KGB to regain central control over such weapons left within the encircled area; also to find out what happened to those missing including looking at those radioactive sites scattered everywhere. NATO was naturally concerned about this because of fears that when the end came for the Soviets trapped in the Netherlands there might be an unauthorised (or maybe authorised) effort to use or threaten to use them. Throughout the war, both NATO and the Soviet-led Warsaw Pact, had targeted the nuclear weapons capabilities of the other side on a tactical level. Again, the lines between tactical and strategic were blurred, but no one was bombing ICBM sites in Siberia or sinking SLBM-armed submarines outside the naval bases of the nuclear powers. Hitting tactical weapons alarmed many people who feared escalation, DLB included, but those were his orders.
He had men tracking and targeting identified Soviet nuclear weapons and weapons personnel inside the Netherlands. There were no more aircraft-delivered bombs – aircraft couldn’t be based in Soviet-held territory because the airfields were destroyed or recaptured – but there were other nuclear weapons. Finding artillery shells was hard but it was easier to locate mobile missile-launchers: those designated by NATO as Scud systems especially. The Dutch whose territory this was occurring on, as well as the Belgians too and possibly the French from what DLB had been told, were not happy at all with this but it was being done after decisions made high up within NATO between heads of governments. It had been and was being done elsewhere – Soviet Spetsnaz had early in the war hit many Pershing missile sites in unoccupied West Germany while units under his command were doing it now east of the frontlines in occupied West Germany – and DLB had explained that when officers (British and others) under his command had respectfully questioned those orders for the dangers they posed.
That didn’t mean that it wasn’t very controversial though.
Something else that would be controversial when news spread was the result of the meeting that DLB was to have later tonight here at Nörvenich. Garrison and the visiting US Delta Force commander Colonel Peter Schoomaker would talk alone with DLB about that: others like McChrystal or Delves wouldn’t be involved.
The meeting would concern starting to make plans for operations east of the IGB. There was no official decision yet on that, DLB had been told and would make sure that he passed that on, but it was pending once wide NATO talks had covered it. Secrecy even from allies, from junior officers even was needed at the minute on this. DLB again had personal feelings on the matter but would keep them to himself. His orders were to make those high up in the chain-of-command like he was were prepared for those to come and were not blindsided by it.
He had also been told that it was possible that such a decision might not be made and there would be no later special forces operations in East Germany: another reason not to spread word fast. DLB didn’t believe that for a moment, not after all that the Soviets had done so far in this war.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 15:24:37 GMT
Seventeen – Head Start
March 4th 1990 Hirtshals, Jutland, Denmark
Alan West’s rank of Captain in the Royal Navy didn’t denote his direct command of a vessel and it was a far more senior position than that of a captain in, say for example, the British Army: it equated to a full colonel with that sister service to the Royal Navy. On a career path for further advancement, Captain West was currently serving as head of Naval Service Intelligence within the MOD’s Defence Intelligence Staff (DIS).
There had been many difficult moments for West, his staff and the whole of the wider Royal Navy during the war. Losses had been heavy among vessels, aircraft and men with the addition of enemy action being taken against bases in the UK mainland too. Yet, at the same time, there had been still a measure of safety when back in Britain. Those attacks had been few and undertaken early in the war with minimal losses overall when compared to the casualties inflicted upon those on the frontlines. West had had his ship sunk from underneath him due to enemy action in the Falklands – bombs from an Argentinean aircraft had sunk HMS Ardent, killing twenty-two men under his command – and knew full well the horrors which came with full-scale for those on the frontlines. When directed by the head of the DIS to take a short trip out to the Baltic Exits to see the situation there which the Royal Navy was facing at the moment, to give matters a personal visit rather than relying on reports coming back, West had known full well that he was off to face grave danger there as the area was an active war zone.
That was why he wore the uniform that he did though and those attired like him faced those same dangers.
The town of Hirtshals lay on the northwestern corner of the very top of Jutland. It was a ferry port with many peacetime connections to Norway and those vessels would make use of the harbour facilities. Many of those ships were doing the same now in war, though not carrying tourists but rather instead troops and military equipment. The Soviets had bombed Hirtshals several times and hit it with missiles too. The surrounding town around the port had been devastated by those attacks and while the harbour facility had been hit there had been emergency repairs made to keep it in operation: the struck areas of the town were left alone for the time being.
Upon arriving by air, West had seen from his helicopter all of the flattened buildings which were people’s homes and places of work. He had been saddened by seeing that because a previous visit here many years before had shown a beautiful little town, His business here wasn’t to address any issues with that though, but rather the military build-up ongoing here. Ships were continually arriving in Hirtshals after coming across the Skagerrak and before that the North Sea and the North Atlantic beyond. The Royal Navy was active in assisting the defence of those sea-links here into Jutland and to help them better do that task, as well as conduct other operations in the Baltic Exits, West was present to see what more could be done.
Control over the Baltic Exits, a vital strategic region in the ongoing World War Three, was still contested. There was a belief among some that the war had been won here already when just before the short ceasefire NATO navies – the Royal Navy included – had won a major victory against the Soviet-led United Baltic Fleet in a long surface engagement. Soviet, Polish and East German ships had been sunk en mass in several linked engagements just before Warsaw Pact ground forces on Zealand outside Copenhagen were defeated too and forced to surrender. The nuclear attack on Flensburg which marked the end of the ceasefire had opened up the frontlines there on the West German–Danish border though for a major armoured attack to take place where Soviet tanks rolled afterwards across the open countryside up into Jutland. Again though, NATO struck back when US Marines fresh from the earlier fighting in Norway landed with the support of the aircraft carrier USS Saratoga and the battleship USS Iowa to secure the tip of Jutland. Soviet control on land where they held most of Jutland negated somewhat their losses at sea because they had an open air corridor which they soon exploited. Danish airbases where NATO aircraft had flown from were lost and the Soviets were flying from them now. There came missile-launchers brought into Jutland too: those for long-range SAMs, land-attack missiles and anti-ship missiles.
For the Soviets, holding the majority of Jutland as well as Schleswig-Holstein south of there meant that they still had a foot in the door in the Baltic Exits, a gap torn open in NATO’s defensive lines. They were flying aircraft all across the region and launching missiles. The sea and air connections down to Zealand where the bulk of Denmark’s remaining fighting strength lay were under attack. So too were those to the north and west between Norway and Britain. The Soviets were unable to operate their own (sunken) warships out into the North Sea but they were still able to threaten and attack the coastal regions of Western Europe where men and war supplies arrived by using aircraft and missiles.
NATO needed to rid the Baltic Exits of the Soviets yet this was still a major task and not an easy one at that either. It hadn’t helped that the enemy had had a head start in the fighting here due to their military activities right on the eve of war. They had sent ships, submarines and commandoes forward out into the Baltic Exits right before the open fighting erupted. Once combat got underway, that first wave was generally lost in NATO counterattacks after doing the damage that they had. The vessels were sunk, the special forces soldiers killed and what minefields had been laid had been identified, marked and avoided. In combating those, losses had come which had ultimately diluted the strength of those that remained. Moreover, NATO was still finding that it was continually playing catch-up: they were again and again forced to react to Soviets moves in the region rather than taking the initiative themselves. There had been early plans to use the US Marines from Norway elsewhere in the Baltic Exits, to take the fight to the Soviets where they didn’t expect it, but the emergency landing to stop the whole of Jutland being lost had occurred and they were now in engaged in fighting there. Moreover, more US Marines, reservists who’d just about escaped encirclement in Schleswig-Holstein before a hasty evacuation just after the ceasefire ended, were now being sent to join their brethren in the northern tip of Jutland. To many high up with NATO’s senior military leadership, the fighting on the edges of the Skagerrak there may have saved the day and made sense operationally, but it had been a strategic mistake in the long-run where elite assault troops were tied up against a strong enemy in a fight where they couldn’t win an outright victory but would have to be content to forestall the enemy’s plans… and take many casualties while doing so.
The Royal Marines, who’d also come down from fighting in February across northern Norway, a move delayed to free-up transport for the US Marines, were at the moment the only free and uncommitted major NATO ground force available for operations in the Baltic Exits. Where to use them, in conjunction with the Royal Navy and others, was another reason why West was currently here at Hirtshals. His task was to assist in the decision-making process – not make the ultimate decision though – by looking at where NATO as a whole could operate to achieve a major victory in this region and finally secure the Baltic Exits.
It wasn’t going to be an easy task, West knew. There were others doing the same thing who had already come up short with a firm idea and many of those were Royal Marines, not sailors like him. He would do what he could during his short visit though. He would talk to those intimately involved in the fighting already and see firsthand the region.
West was here to help.
March 4th 1990 Near Brunsting, Drenthe, the Netherlands
There were delays up ahead at the roadblock which was to do with a small convoy of trucks being searched by the military policemen with the Commandant’s Service.
Wearing his new shoulder epaulets affirming the promotion which he had attained to that of a Polkovnik rather than the Podpolkovnik he had been beforehand, Colonel Putin chose not to set outside in the driving rain and bully his way through the hold-up. He was proud of the promotion that had come moving him up from a lieutenant-colonel even if almost every other mid- and high-level KGB officer within the Netherlands Pocket had received one just as he had on orders from Moscow. There had come comments that Moscow didn’t want to see a collapse of the position here on occupied territory and by moving so many personnel higher in rank there would be less incentive for a surrender. He wasn’t sure how that theory would work, but many had been convinced by it. Either way he was happy with his new additions to his uniform and didn’t have a coat with him to go over his uniform. It was dry inside the civilian car commandeered for KGB use and also warmer than it would be outside.
When Putin reached the Third Shock Army headquarters, where his new assignment was, then he’d get out of the car into the rain and the cold.
Not being able to see exactly had his driver could, Putin looked first to the right out of the window from the rear of this vehicle. Once again, the description of the Netherlands as part of the ‘Low Countries’ was perfectly accurate. There wasn’t a hill in sight, everywhere was just flat. He touched the inside of the window with his gloved hand and wiped away some of the moisture but still couldn’t see much apart from the outside of the landscape. Far away, off over the horizon, was the border with West Germany and also the frontlines along part of the River Ems as well. He was heading towards more of those frontlines too, far up ahead where the Third Shock Army had been pushed back from its positions outside Groningen when the joint Dutch and West German forces had attacked there yesterday evening and carried on the fight through the night. He had new duties there, ones which we sure to be like those further south: shooting men who wore the uniform of his country’s armed forces and security services too.
Putin turned the other way and again wiped the window on that side to get a better look at what was visible there off to the west. He saw something strange. There looked to be tanks or other armoured vehicles out there coming across a field in this direction. He wondered just what was going on with that. There was a chronic fuel shortage and no one should be driving tracked vehicles around in the rear for no reason. His driver looked that way too… and then shouted at the top of his lungs: “GERMAN TANKS!”
Moments later Putin, his driver and several others who’d abandoned (without orders) their stationary vehicles – targets aplenty! – were running away from the road into the tree line. There was gunfire behind them from multiple machine guns and then an almighty explosion. The shockwave from that blast only added to Putin’s forward momentum as he dived to the ground: right into the mud where the thought hit him when he landed that his epaulets would get filthy. He looked up after landing, still lying down in the mud, and was witness to someone else who’d run like he had shamelessly done and got further ahead from a head start on him who seemed to be lifted up and thrown through the air. It was an odd sight to see and he struggled to understand what was going on until he saw a puff of smoke from a blast where the man had been before he flew.
An explosion from a mortar?
Or a tank round hitting the ground and blowing up?
Putin couldn’t tell and was still trying to work that out when his driver screamed at him: “GET YOUR HEAD DOWN, SIR!”
After doing that, Putin heard more explosions behind him. His vehicle was probably caught up in that but he didn’t know. He curled into the fetal position and willed himself to stay still and stay down so as to not get in the way of the flying projectiles. Putin wondered over those ‘German tanks’ though.
Could they have been West German Leopards?
Didn’t the Dutch have some of them too?
He didn’t dare look though. There was gunfire and explosions and screams and more explosions everywhere. He was on the ground as it all went on around him and staying out of the way. This was a war for soldiers, not him. Putin would just stay where he was because he was sure that his pistol wasn’t going to influence anything here beyond a foolish suicide.
Whilst he waited for the outcome of the fight, keeping his eyes shut and staying perfectly still, Putin’s mind raced. He understood that NATO forces were counterattacking and that they had somehow got very far behind where the frontlines were supposed to be. He had no idea how that had happened and wasn’t in the loop when it came to the exact tactical situation though did know that he had been travelling along a main road running north and at a major crossroads where if an attack was going to come it would come there. He had seen anti-tank guns, massive weapons for defence against such things, in-place at other similar sites and was sure that they were part of the current fight back against those ‘German tanks’.
Putin’s thoughts turned to what was going to happen next, his personal fate especially. There was a chance that the enemy would be driven off or maybe they were just raiding the area and would depart themselves. They might be on the move and have no time to slow down or stop and for infantry to be deployed. That was his hope… for if not then Putin would have to face the chance that if he wasn’t killed when NATO infantry arrived then he’d end up as a prisoner. He was wearing his KGB uniform and carrying his identity papers that denoted his rank and service. He had to consider what would happen than should he end up in the hands of the enemy. If he wasn’t shot out of hand by a vengeful West German or Dutchman then he’d be taken elsewhere and interrogated, possibly tortured for information too: anyone who said that wouldn’t happen to a KGB Polkovnik was a fool. There had been broadcasts made by NATO as part of their propaganda which Putin was aware of where they said that Soviet prisoners of war were well-treated: there had been purported Soviet soldiers talking over the radio-waves in flawless Russian about food, medical care and good treatment. Those radio broadcasts had earlier been jammed each time when made so very few heard them yet with the capability degraded by enemy action to do that there were more of them. That was having a bad effect upon the morale of the men, the rank-and-file soldiers, those whose morale had previously been good when all outside information was kept from them and they were always on the move from victory to victory rather than staying put and trying to defend against an enemy which surrounded them.
Regardless, Putin knew that his future wouldn’t be one which he would enjoy, especially as a KGB man. He told himself that he would have to take any opportunity which came his way to make sure that he wasn’t identified as a KGB officer. Should he be able to, he would try to change his uniform and get the papers of someone else.
One of the Commandant’s Service men?
He surely couldn’t pass for an ordinary soldier or as a Soviet Army officer, no?
Putin told himself that that was all that he could do and if it came to that then he would have to act damn fast. If he wouldn’t find a dead body to take the uniform and papers off then… But he would have to be mighty fast indeed to do that should NATO infantry follow-up these tanks.
He had made the decision to do this should it come to it though also took a moment to consider the consequences of doing so as well. A man in his position, who’d seen and done what he had during this war where everything was so vastly different from his peacetime activities, he to think about what would happen if things went wrong.
If I’m in that uniform with someone else’s papers and the situation changes, then I’ll be in trouble, won’t I?
Could I be seen as trying to desert should I meet a fellow KGB man who was unsympathetic to the situation?
There was a chance that such a thing could occur. Maybe there would be a counter-counterattack and his own side would ‘save’ him only to find that he wasn’t who he said he was. Men had been shot for desertion on many occasions and Putin himself had overseen that as well as those executed for cowardice. Those could be the charges laid against him if he did what he planned to. He recalled yesterday when he had supervised a firing squad for a pair of Soviet Air Force officers caught planning to fly a civilian lightweight aircraft – a microlight – from out of a hidden improvised hangar and away to NATO territory. They had said that they had heard that Moscow had abandoned all those in the Netherlands and they didn’t want to die in a final last stand fighting for those who’d left them to rot. Those men had been loyal previously and in good-standing. They had decided though that to avoid the death which they feared they had to do something. The situation with him as he lay here as battle raged all around him wasn’t the same, but he put the two of them together. He knew what they had been about to do was wrong even though they thought it was right.
Would I be judged the same way if found by his own side pretending to be someone else and avoiding a fight with the enemy in the midst of battle?
Yes.
Of course he would.
Putin knew that everyone here in the Netherlands had been abandoned. No one had told him that and it was denied with promises that an offensive would be made to retake lost ground back across in West Germany. Yet with his own eyes he had seen the burning of documents, the destruction of radio encryption equipment and the shooting of many Dutch civilians who’d been coerced in the short time which they had been under KGB control into ‘assisting’ the Soviet war effort. As to the latter, those Dutchmen (and a few women) had been idiots anyway who won’t have survived that long even with a total victory. They had betrayed their own country so of course they would later betray the KGB too. The political motivations of them – eurocommunists, Trotskyists, anarchists, pacifists… fools in short – wouldn’t suit KGB needs either. Nonetheless, it was clear that the situation here was lost and those high up in the command structure were thinking of the end of it all having nothing to give the enemy to use against them.
Back in the car, Putin had been happy in his uniform with his position that rated a driver and a posting as assistant political commissar for a whole field army. He had ignored that warning in the back of his mind that the end was coming but now he understood. No matter how this particular incident turned out, he understood that in the long-run, even if he escaped now, there would have to come a time when he would need a different uniform and someone else’s identity papers.
Then the gunfire stopped. And the explosions ceased. And there were also no more machinery noises from those tanks.
But the screams of the wounded were something which did carry on.
Putin raised his head and opened his eyes to see if now was the time to do what he knew he must do or whether that would come later.
March 4th 1990 Hradec Králové Airbase, Bohemia, Czech SSR, Czechoslovakia
The Soviet Air Force (VVS) was organised in peacetime in many ways like the USAF was when it came to higher commands. Organisations such as Frontal Aviation, Long Range Aviation and Military Transport Aviation of the VVS were similar to the American’s Tactical Air Command, Strategic Air Command and Military Airlift Command. Below, where the USAF had numbered air forces, the VVS used numbered air armies. Further down though there were many differences and not just with organisation but seemingly everything in the differences between the VVS and the USAF.
As to those air armies of the VVS, there were currently eight assigned to the joint command which was the Western-TVD: the Fourth, Fourteenth, Fifteenth, Sixteenth, Twenty–Fourth, Twenty–Sixth, Thirty–Sixth and Forty–Sixth Air Armys. These came from across Eastern Europe where the VVS was stationed in peacetime and from inside the western regions of the Soviet Union itself. There was a large retention of basic wartime structure at the heart of each as they were assigned to support the war against NATO yet at the same time large numbers of reinforcements including by East German units while the Poles and Czechoslovaks fielded their own (smaller) air armies. Under operational control of them weren’t just combat aircraft but support aircraft, SAM detachments and the immense ground support for them. Furthermore, there had been the addition to these VVS commands of many Soviet Air Defence (PVO) units as well with interceptors and more SAMs which had taken place during the course of the war: an act which had brought many problems of its own as the VVS and the PVO were in many ways as similar but as different as the VVS was to the USAF.
The war was being fought inside Western Europe primarily by the Soviet Army. It was the Soviet Army which was preeminent in the invasions of Denmark, West Germany, the Low Countries and Austria with the leadership of the war coming from the Soviet Army. The VVS was tasked to support the Soviet Army, it wasn’t an equal partnership. What the ground war needed in air support the VVS was charged to provide. Naturally that irked – to put it mildly – the VVS yet such was how the situation was and there was no changing that. Where the Soviet Army wanted the VVS to operate and how was what was done. Battlefield air support, air denial missions, and military transportation of men and material were all provided by the VVS in this. Tactically and somewhat operationally the VVS did what they did following their doctrine and without overt, minute instruction yet on a strategic level the Soviet Army’s needs were those that had to be met.
Organised for the war, those air armies were tasked to support a geographical region rather than the Fronts or specific field armies. In the north, the Fourth, Fifteenth, Sixteenth and Twenty–Sixth Air Armys fought the war there while to the south the Fourteenth, Twenty–Fourth and Thirty–Sixth Air Armys were active. The Forty–Sixth Air Army, with many Long Range Aviation assets, was tasked to support both and missions far further forward as well as those of a strategic nature. There were combat aircraft built by MiG and Sukhoi serving in the air armies over the frontlines while Tupolev bombers operated at greater distances. On the ground there were the countless SAM sites linked to radars (the majority mobile rather than fixed) while there were command-&-communications centers and jamming equipment. Big airbases constructed back in peacetime were used from across Eastern Europe and so too were a few captured ones in Western Europe; civilian air facilities were also made use of on occupied territory. Many small, temporary airstrips were active as well for VVS use and they were all over the place when natural cover and camouflage was made as much use of as possible.
In combating NATO, the VVS had had its fair share of success and failures. With greater numbers of aircraft – and especially SAM systems for air denial of the enemy – there was a natural focus on quantity over the more quality focused NATO air forces which they were opposed by. Nonetheless, the VVS was certainly not inept at warfare with aircraft which were no more than ‘baby seals’ ready for slaughter. Their aircraft, weapons and the willingness of Soviet aircrews to follow orders exactly made them a fearsome opponent for NATO. When faced with sophisticated enemy electronic warfare brute force was used and that many times paid off. SAMs were lofted into the sky against NATO aircraft when VVS fighters failed to shoot them down and these had a lot of success. Plenty of reconnaissance and intelligence-gathering was done to combat weaknesses which came with the many advanced means of aerial warfare that their opponents had. There was also deception undertaken which the VVS believed that it excelled at too.
As to the latest aircraft capable of matching the very best that NATO had, the VVS had some of its own too: in wartime conditions and given certain advantages, these did plenty of damage to the enemy especially when flown by skilled pilots with plenty of external support in the form of electronic warfare. Those were MiG-29 Fulcrum fighters, Sukhoi-24M Fencer strike-bombers and the VVS versions of the Sukhoi-27 Flanker strike-fighters.
If there had been an outside, neutral observer on the air war fought over Western Europe the fair summary would be that there was currently a draw over all with neither the VVS nor NATO winning. That would be a total of everything though because in certain areas one side had the lead over the other. The VVS and other Warsaw Pact air forces had lost more aircraft – in the air when compared to the losses NATO had taken with aircraft when on the ground – than their enemy yet had been able to better reinforce from others within the Soviet homeland. Of course those were of lesser quality, and the aircrews were not combat veterans too, but it was something that could be done to replace losses. NATO had to get their replacements from farther afield too; plus the VVS had had a head start when it came to the air war by being more prepared for the war to start.
However, as to those replacements, the number of aircraft and aircrews was finite… and there were also still significant VVS assets kept in the Soviet Far East; the Soviet Army had the same issue with their troops too. Commanders and their senior staffs were all aware of this and understood that eventually, some unspecified time in the near future, that would come to a head.
Just not yet.
Colonel-General Evgeniy Pavlovich Zarudnev was the commander of the Twenty–Fourth Air Army.
He was a survivor, a commanding general who (so far) had not been killed by a NATO smart-bomb nor shot by the KGB for apparent failure. Elsewhere, Zarudnev’s comrades commanding other air armies and also Soviet Army field armies had lost their lives in this war but he had not. He couldn’t foresee that happening either because he was too wily for NATO to get a track on and he also made sure that all failures met weren’t those which could be blamed upon him. Avoiding both unfortunate fates was hard work and certainly distracted him from many of his official duties, but he had survived – prospered even – where others had so far failed and wasn’t about to change what he had been doing to end up either buried beneath the rubble of a command bunker nor lying in a shallow grave being eaten by worms.
Zarudnev spend much time worrying about those endings for himself.
The Twenty–Fourth Air Army’s peacetime headquarters was in Vinnitsa in the Ukrainian SSR. It was a semi-strategic air army with many Fencers and Flankers (the latter for strike-escort missions) with those aircraft home-based at sites across the western Ukraine and up into southern parts of the Belorussian SSR too. There was a focus when back at Vinnitsa for the Twenty–Fourth Air Army in operating in support of a wartime Southwestern-TVD for Balkan operations. That command was currently active but with the VVS providing only the small Fifth Air Army there and instead the Twenty–Fourth Air Army had been tasked to work under Western-TVD supervision.
Zarudnev had taken his command into Czechoslovakia on the very eve of war. The Twenty–Fourth Air Army had moved west without NATO noticing into waiting facilities and gone into combat on the first night of the war. Long-range strikes had been made to interfere with the early stages of REFORGER as it got underway bringing American forces into Europe from the other side of the North Atlantic. Large military airbases and civilian airports had been attacked in central parts of West Germany with many large transport aircraft hit when unloading troops or loading hastily-departing military dependents. Other aircraft laden with men or equipment aboard had been engaged in their air when and where the opportunity had come in the face of strong NATO fighter opposition. Weapons storage sites had been hit as well as transport links that would support REFORGER. The Fourteenth Air Army – also from the Ukraine but with a more tactical-focused order of battle – had linked up with VVS forces deployed in peacetime to Czechoslovakia and the Czechoslovak’s own air force to operate on a battlefield support mission and Zarudnev soon had his command taking part in that too. There had slowly become less and less of a need for long range missions far into the enemy rear’s with combat aircraft themselves due to the requirements over the battlefield as well as the enemy defences in the distance needing to be avoided by using missiles fired from afar rather than bombs dropped from above. The Soviet Army had demanded that the Twenty–Fourth Air Army provide immediate support and that was what had occurred.
When the losses to his command mounted, Zarudnev had been sent replacements of others from far afield. There were more Fencers which came up from the Trans-Caucasus, factory-fresh Flankers, some of both types of advanced combat aircraft from training units and also a steady supply of new aircrews also from either training units or VVS staff courses. The many SAM units under peacetime command came further forward in basing that the aircraft of the Twenty–Fourth Air Army did with those ending up either right on the Czechoslovak-West German border or across that. His aircraft flew from airbases in the Czech SSR and operated westwards into West Germany above Bavaria and parts of Hessen. Opponents in the sky were the Americans along with the West Germans, the French, the Canadians and on occasion some Spanish aircraft as well.
As far as Zarudnev was concerned, the Twenty–Fourth Air Army was winning its part in the overall air war. This was a hard won series of victories with many setbacks, but there was a final victory on the horizon… that was if the Soviet Army could get its act together and start fighting as well as its own propaganda.
Here at Hradec Králové this afternoon, Zarudnev was making a flying visit to the Twenty–Fourth Air Army air assets making use of this facility back far from West Germany. One of his Fencer regiments was based here though using forward airstrips as pit-stops for fuel and bombs. It was here they were commanded from though and where all the necessary staff work plus maintenance of the aircraft took place rather than those exposed forward sites.
Zarudnev avoided the command bunker – a death trap if there ever was one – and watched several aircraft lift off. He had spoken with the commander of the 7th Bomber Aviation Regiment and attended a couple of pre-mission briefings. There had been a KGB political commissar present who Zarudnev had had to deal with too: he had wanted to ‘accidentally’ shoot the man with a pistol shot up and into the rectum.
The Fencers were off to see action above the frontlines in eastern Hessen and northern Bavaria. That American offensive where they had used paratroopers followed up with a massed armoured attack was still making headway and there was the very real risk of almost all West German territory in a wide region being retaken… apart from surrounded pockets of Soviet troops outflanked by crafty pincer moves. Zarudnev had been instructed to make sure that the threw everything at stopping that from happening and that was what he was doing. His Fencers from here and elsewhere, along with the Flankers escorting them by charging ahead to clear the skies, were taking the war back to the Americans there. He was certain that even with the losses that were coming already, those under his command would do their very best and not let him down.
Only some of the very best VVS aircrews served in his command.
Would that be enough to save the Soviet Army on the ground there though?
Watching more Fencers lift off up into the sky, not yet laden with heavy external ordnance which they had to pick up on the way, Zarudnev silently asked himself that question without being able to come to a conclusion on that.
March 4th 1990 Bokel, Lower Saxony, West Germany
Brigadier-General Clark was aware that conventional military sense might have been to go north or southwards from the bridgehead held over the Weser Estuary towards Bremerhaven or Bremen. Those cities built around ports lay in either direction along the Autobahn-27 and the 177th Armored Brigade could have swung around behind each and trapped the dug-in defenders holding each cutting them off. His armoured force could have driven fast from Sandstedt tomorrow morning through defences along and either side of that major road and by nightfall probably achieved either mission ready to allow NATO light infantry to move in to each city.
The cost in terms of lives lost, those under his command and whatever infantry was assigned to take either city, would have been immense though. Moreover, neither was worth that cost for the value of each currently was far from work it with the harbour facilities wrecked and access to them blocked.
Clark also hadn’t wanted to take part in a fight for Bremerhaven or Bremen because the enemy would be expected that. Thankfully, those above him had the same thoughts on the matter and were looking at cracking open the frontlines – manned by Poles – between the Weser Estuary and the distant Hamburg. How could that be best done? By charging east, through the shallow frontlines and racing into the enemy’s rear in something that should have been but clearly wasn’t expected. That was how wars were won, that was what would eliminate the enemy’s hold over this part of occupied West Germany.
Tomorrow, further south from Sandstedt, along the Weser as it headed south and ran upstream, the US Third Army and the British-led NORTHAG were to commence their major offensive to retake much larger regions of West Germany long under hostile occupation.
Clark had been instructed that his attack was to take place this evening and through the night. The bridgehead over the Weser from where the 177th Brigade was to begin from was a good springboard. Attacking so late in the day was planned to surprise the Polish nearby and Clark’s brigade was expert at fighting in the hours of darkness. He would get a head start on everyone else too in addition to drawing enemy attention – hopefully panic – to his advance with the planned early commitment of Warsaw Pact reserves.
It would be a difficult mission, Clark had been told and confirmed himself, but the pay-offs should be worth it as long as the 177th Brigade kept moving. If his command was to get struck and be caught by the enemy managing to successfully move against him then there was the very real risk of wholescale destruction.
It was up to him to make sure that destruction didn’t come for that would mean the lives of all of the US Army officers and enlisted men under his command. And, Clark had absolutely no intention of making a personal, career-ending failure either.
The 177th Brigade was still charging east.
Sandstedt and the dead Poles who’d been in the ineffective cordon around there were very far behind now. The massive artillery and rocket attack, followed up by skies full of attacking Apaches and Cobras doing their own work, had opened the way for Clark’s men to break free from there. Autobahn-27 had soon been reached and crossed over rather than followed either north or south. Then it was deep into the German countryside for the 177th Brigade and into the Polish rear.
Clark stuck close to his combat troops. He kept a safe distance from the moving frontlines but didn’t want to be too far behind where the engagements with the enemy was taking place. He hadn’t been about to do that before when the 177th Brigade and gone into action south of Wilhelmshaven on the other side of the Weser and neither could he do it here this side of the river. He kept his command column on the move following the path of chaos torn through the enemy and in close contact with those subordinates taking the fight to the Poles.
M-1A and M-60A3 tanks, followed by M-2s & M-113s laden with infantry then plenty of support vehicles, had followed a course eastwards through flat terrain where enemy strongpoints as well as targets for destruction up close and personal had previously been identified through aerial reconnaissance. At small villages such as Driftsethe, Kassebruch, Hagen im Bremischen, Wittstedt, Bramstedt, Langenfelde and now Boxel – all rural localities and far off the beaten track – the 177th Brigade had smashed into the Poles found in and around those. There had been supply dumps, communications arrays, SAM sites, fuel storage sites and so on. No major, strategic-level targets had been encountered, just those part of the wide support network for the already-weakened Polish First Army which was mainly deployed to the south. Convoys on the move, carrying supplies and men, were came across. So too were roadblocks for security and detachments of occupation troops which consisted in the main of East German paramilitaries.
The 177th Brigade blasted everything of military value in sight and shot back at all resistance to them.
Taking part in combat operations in the darkness, under a cloudy sky with plenty of falling rain too, was not easy. Neither was navigating in the dark through enemy-held territory. There were some country roads used but mainly Clark had his men rolling across open fields because many of those fixed routes were (rightly) suspected to be mined and blocked with other obstacles. Doing this was what the 177th Brigade when back at the National Training Centre in California trained others to do: now they were doing it themselves in the most expert fashion. What Polish mobile units they encountered, which survived the onslaught of all the air power that Clark was given in support for the time being, acted as if they had never operated here themselves. The Poles were getting lost very easy even over very short distances while his men relied upon their night-vision equipment and the Navstar-GPS receivers issued. Clark had been previously told that there had been active interference by the Soviets with that satellite navigation system yet at the same time it appeared the Soviets had been using itself in places. He was under the impression that they had their own system based on Soviet satellites as well so wasn’t sure about all of that. Either way, the Poles which he encountered were clearly not being given such guidance nor were their own night vision systems doing them any good.
A whole swatch of West German territory had been liberated. There were civilians which the 177th Brigade came across but again there were now POW camps. Clark had known that intelligence had shown none but had hoped to find a few sites and rescue men held in them. There were civilians which needed aid and the follow-up troops behind him – motorised units of the 10th Infantry Division – would help but Clark had wanted to find military captives: US Army soldiers or those from other armies, it didn’t matter which.
He had all night to keep fighting and moving deeper forward, turning to the northeast now in the general direction of the communications center around the town of Beverstedt was. Larger Polish forces were expected in that area and air recon reports were saying that armoured units were coming out of cover in that area with the aim to engage him. Clark was confident that when they were met in battle, he would be able to ambush them and defeat them. That was his mission and with most things going to plan – there had been some unfortunate heavy losses from mines, more mines than expected – he was sure that he was to achieve all that he and his higher command wanted.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 8, 2018 15:27:37 GMT
Eighteen – Fear
March 5th 1990 Stockholm, Sweden
Either assassins or kidnappers came for Carl Bildt in the early hours.
Staying in the house of a long-term friend within the Swedish capital Stockholm, where Bildt was sleeping was meant to be a secret. It turned out that that was far from the case though. Men with guns assaulted the house and killed several of the bodyguards assigned from SAPO (the Swedish national intelligence service) on their way in. Bildt was dragged from his slumber by another bodyguard and both retreated to a bathroom. There were further gunshots outside and Bildt was naturally fearful that the end was coming for him.
Someone above was smiling upon him though.
There was more gunfire, the rattle of automatic rifle fire rather than lone pistol shots, and a hell of a lot of noise with what sounded like men in combat boots crashing around the house opening fire on others. The bodyguard hissed at Bildt to stay laying down inside the un-drawn bath when he raised his head and also kept his pistol out. Yet there was an exchange of code phrases given and Bildt was able to hear the relief in the voice of the young man with him when the necessary confirmation came back.
Ten, maybe a dozen armed men clad in black surrounded Bildt as he was taken out of the house and to a small helicopter which had landed in the rear garden. He was placed aboard that and the helicopter was rapidly airborne. Bildt, a Member of the Riksdag and leader of the Moderate Party, had escaped unharmed though was well aware that there would be plenty of dead left behind.
Where he was being taken, and by exactly whom (he assumed it was military), Bildt didn’t know. It was still dark and all he was able to tell was that it was out of the city he was being flown. Sweden wasn’t undertaking a nighttime blackout like elsewhere in Europe and he could see the lights of Stockholm fading. There were soldiers in the helicopter passenger cabin with him as well as a senior SAPO intelligence officer who he knew very well. He had been offered headphones so he might be able to talk but had declined them.
Bildt took the opportunity to think without distraction for a few moments.
*
When the war had started more than a month ago, a national government had been formed within Sweden. As leader of the main opposition to the ruling Social Democrats, Bildt had been offered a role in that wartime administration with what elements of the Moderate Party were invited to join. Bildt had refused though, telling Prime Minister Ingvar Carlsson that he couldn’t in good conscience do so. He had no belief in the ability of Carlsson’s peacetime administration nor the one which he would lead in wartime to maintain the neutrality of Sweden to an honest degree. Talks on the eve of war had convinced him of this and what occurred immediately afterwards where the neutrality and the national sovereignty of Sweden was raped proved Bildt correct.
He had taken no pleasure in that.
Notwithstanding what the Soviets did elsewhere as they launched their war of aggression against Sweden’s neighbours, Sweden itself was targeted by their war. There were bombs, assassination, acts of arson and disappearances which took place. Bildt was well-known for his long term opposition to Soviet actions before the war, not just violating Swedish territorial sovereignty then, but elsewhere in the world. Yet the scale of what they done within Sweden was extraordinary. He had warned that some of this would be done and the national government had refused to believe that with the foolhardy notion that in the end Sweden would be generally unmolested as long as it showed no sign of joining the war against the Soviet Union. The Soviets brought a climate of fear to his nation and Bildt watched helplessly as that worked to their advantage.
No one in Sweden wanted the country to enter the Third World War. Bildt certainly didn’t, neither did the national government and especially the Swedish people. The horrors which would come to the country were not wanted nor did many believe that Sweden could survive those. What Bildt didn’t want to see though was the Soviets being able to get away with what they were doing here and elsewhere but Swedish official connivance in that again all in the name of neutrality that was no more than appeasement and moral cowardice on a national scale.
News which had come from aboard told of massacres of prisoners and tortures committed against civilians. There had been a few broadcasts made by the Swedish media in the war’s first week of these allegations made against the Soviets where they fought in Norway, Denmark and West Germany. Those were truths and not embellished nor were they made to further NATO war aims. Nonetheless, the immediate protests made by the Soviets to those claiming that they were lies and their own demands that their (clearly false) ‘evidence’ of NATO committing war crimes be broadcast in Sweden were caved in to. Eventually, there had come a decision from the national government to not make any more allegations, from neither side, on war crimes committed: Bildt saw this as a Soviet propaganda victory that his nation had granted Moscow. It was the same with the events in Finland where Soviet influence without direct occupation resulted in deaths, disappearances and terror greater than Sweden had suffered: again no one in Sweden was told about this by the media for fear of upsetting the Soviets and making Sweden no longer neutral.
It was that fear of the Soviets attacking Sweden, and Sweden having to fight alone to defend itself against a far stronger enemy, which brought the national government to these decisions. Bildt had spoken to some people who were certain that Soviet agents and Swedish traitors were behind everything that was happening. He knew that this was partially true, but not overwhelmingly so. It was the shivers that went down the spines of his fellow countrymen as to what war would bring to them that in the main caused the non-reactions that took place. Invasion and occupation were behind that fear, not so much a desire to see Sweden betrayed. What Bildt tried to explain to the members of the national government when they spoke to him was that should the Soviets win the war then they would eventually turn against Sweden regardless. Swedish neutrality wouldn’t mean a thing to them after they had seen how ineffective Sweden had defended itself when that was breached.
He’d been told by a few that Sweden’s neutrality would be respected… he countered to those fools to take a look at the ongoing war in Austria.
Under the orders of the Prime Minister, though at the behest of others within the national government who shared many of his concerns, Bildt had been kept abreast of events.
He had been informed how the head of SAPO had supposedly hung himself right on the eve of war, how the youngest daughter of Carlsson had nearly been kidnapped by unknown perpetrators and the disappearance without a trace of some other very influential & important people within Sweden right before the war opened. Bildt was told of how Soviet fighters escorting transport aircraft had overflown first Finland and then the northern reaches of Sweden during the invasion of Norway… and how Swedish interceptors on patrol had been ordered to not fire on those aircraft.
As the war got going, Swedish air space and waters in the south had been repeatedly invaded by Soviet aircraft and vessels. The national government ordered verbal warnings to be issued and then war shots were finally authorised, though with the latter designed to miss. There had been many discussions within the national government where an eventual consensus had been reached to tell the Soviets in the strongest terms to cease those. The message had been sent through diplomatic channels with the retort from Moscow that when Sweden was able to stand-up to NATO incursions of its sovereign territory then the Soviets would stop doing what they did. The national government had agreed to send to NATO a threat to attack their aircraft and vessels if they infringed on Swedish territory above or just offshore: that was something that hadn’t occurred though!
A Soviet fighter pilot landed in Sweden and claimed asylum. Immediately the Soviets demanded that he and the aircraft be returned to them, and with haste too. Bildt had been furious to hear that the national government had first seriously considered giving the pilot back before rejecting that notion, yet they then agreed to a Soviet demand to having the fighter sent back to them. In a similar action, when the ceasefire came about in Germany and select West German military forces – a warship and some aircraft – fled to Sweden in fear of the results of what appeared then to be a capitulation of their country, the national government had refused NATO requests to hand back the military equipment (they didn’t ask for the return of those who’d been interned) because the Soviets issued coded threats of dire implications to that!
Worse than any of this was the murder of Swedish sailors aboard the submarine Helsingland. Twenty-four of them had been aboard the small vessel when it was operating inside Swedish waters off Karlskrona patrolling in search of efforts to lay minefields nearby by the Soviets. A Soviet submarine had launched an unprovoked attack and killed everyone aboard. Upon launching an official protest with Moscow and asking for an explanation, the national government was first told that that an American submarine armed with nuclear-tipped cruise missiles pointed at the Soviet Union had been engaged, not a Swedish vessel. Afterwards, the Soviets changed tack and claimed that they had been targeting the (fictional) American submarine but the Swedish vessel had been sheltering it with its presence. Why was Sweden provoking the Soviet Union in such a manner, so came the return charge. The national government gave in and let the matter go, just like the issue with Soviet-laid minefields laid in the Baltic drifting towards Sweden’s shores.
Overseas, former Swedish Foreign Minister Hans Blix who was working for the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) had been shot in West Germany. He had come to oversee efforts led by the IAEA to contain the radiation leakage from a nuclear power plant there damaged during the war and in NATO-held territory when a sniper had fired at him. Blix was alive but in a coma down in Switzerland: the Soviets clearly had shot him.
Swedish diplomats working with the United Nations High Commission for Refugees (UNHCR) also based out of Switzerland had witnessed the activities of the Soviets in trying to interfere diplomatically with the work to assist West German refugees spread across Western Europe. Overt and covert actions had taken place in this effort to subvert the work of the UNHCR with the claims that it shouldn’t be taking sides in the war. Why the Soviets were doing this was because they believed that UNHCR efforts overall alleviated the pressure on NATO nations when it came to those civilians who’d ran far away from the fighting but fast ended up facing other dangers rather than Soviet bullets and bombs. The Brazilian Sergio Vieira de Mello who had been intimately involved in that humanitarian work had been poisoned; Bildt again knew that that, like Blix’s shooting, was the work of the Soviets.
Soviet biological warfare had been unleashed selectively in South Korea, Japan and most-recently Pakistan. There were claims and counter-claims denying responsibility, but Bildt had been shown that it was the work of the Soviets. They had deliberately targeted and killed thousands of civilians on purpose with those attacks. The KGB-led Soviet Union had caused the deaths of civilians in Western Europe too when they unleashed chemical weapons against NATO troops – a terrible act, a war crime – alongside all of the other terrors upon the defenseless which they had done.
Bildt was not a naive fool.
He knew that NATO had done some terrible things and when they retaliated in kind with chemical weapons in Germany civilians had died at their hands. The Americans were working with the South Africans and many nasty Latin American regimes. There were allegations that the French had illegally detained West German political figures. The British had looked the other way to certain events in Northern Ireland. Inside South Korea, nuclear detonations had killed North Korean troops by the thousands and the fallout from that would do major ecological damage.
This was all unfortunate and morally wrong.
It was nothing in comparison to what the Soviets had done though. They had slaughtered protesters across Eastern Europe starting late last year and continuing into this year, people who wanted to be free. Gorbachev had been assassinated by the KGB who after launching their coup had resorted to killing their own people. Then had come the war they had launched against NATO and neutral Austria with the aim to conquer and enslave Western Europe too. Later they had attacked the civilian targets which were Flensburg and the airports outside of Belgrade and Sofia with thermonuclear weapons!
It was the latter with whom the national government was doing deals with when Sweden had suffered their aggression too in the hope that the horror of Flensburg and the terrors of occupation wouldn’t befall Sweden afterwards.
*
As the helicopter flew onwards towards somewhere that would hopefully offer more safety than the supposed anonymous location where he had been, Bildt told himself that while anger was a good thing to have in response to what had just happened to him personally it was only one of a range of emotions he should allow himself to have.
He needed to be rational and calm because he should use the attempt against him to help the cause that he was currently trying to promote: that Sweden should not get involved in trying to arrange a second ceasefire to the war.
Carlsson and the current Foreign Minister – Sten Andersson – were planning to try to bring the fighting to an end in Europe. Their intentions were noble enough but foolish. If they succeeded in doing that, what would the result be? The frontlines would stay where they were leaving large parts of Western Europe under occupation of the Soviets and other free regions near-surrounded. So many lives would be saved from the fighting coming to a stop, but Bildt believed that many more lives would be ultimately lost in the long run. It wasn’t just about not letting the Soviets getting away with what they had done or seeing a revenge upon them that he didn’t want to see a ceasefire now for Bildt. He was well aware that his view wouldn’t be shared by many and he would be personally vilified for wanting to see the war carry on. There would be people who couldn’t see the bigger picture or those who did but wanted the fighting to stop at once immediately regardless due to their fear instilled by what had already occurred.
Yet, the Soviets had to be stopped, they had to be defeated.
Someone had clearly betrayed him to the Soviets. Who and why weren’t important at the minute. Maybe the SAPO would find out or maybe they wouldn’t. In doing so, rather that stopping him and the cause he was trying to promote that would only be enhanced. Bildt told himself that it was important the Sweden not be involved in the bringing about another ceasefire. Whatever it would take for him personally then that couldn’t be allowed to happen.
History would judge him harshly but he – and his few but growing number of supporters – would know the truth: they and Sweden could no longer be a party to all that had happened already and would occur later if the war came to a stop now.
March 5th 1990 In the Upper Main Valley between Unnersdorf & Lichtenfels, Bavaria, West Germany
E Troop, 2–2 CAV, had been issued a ‘frag order’ this afternoon in addition to the standing operations order. The extra, fragmentary information sent informed the company-sized Armored Cav’ troop that part of their mission had changed.
Instead of search, fix and delay the enemy force expected to be coming down the northern and left-hand side of the Main in northeastern Bavaria, E Troop was now to search, fix and destroy the Czechoslovak armour. Everything else with the five-point operations orders remained the same with regards to the situation, mission, assigned support and command-&-control; the execution had changed.
The commander of E Troop, Captain H. R. McMaster, acknowledged what 2–2 Cav’s commander had sent to him and carried on heading towards Hill 73 East. He was charging for the flank of an oncoming Czechoslovak tank division approaching the American and Canadian troops fighting as part of the US VII Corps to ambush them before they could do that first.
Through a downpour of near torrential rain and with a rapidly-darkening sky, E Troop moved forward on a collision course with the enemy. McMaster and his men had done this before, many times indeed. Again and again they had clashed with invading Warsaw Pact troops all across northeastern Bavaria and came away the majority of the time victorious. Defeats had come though and so too had loses been taken each time they had gone back to fight again. Yet, doing what they were doing was why they were in the Cav’: this was the sharp end of warfare.
McMaster, a young and keen officer sure that his career would go somewhere as long as he survived this war, fought against the urge to take minute control of E Troop as they went into battle. He had his advance guard out front and all of his men knew to keep their eyes open for the first sign of Czechoslovak armour or other Warsaw Pact troops. He could have acted like a dictator within his small command by making sure that everything that happened was down to him but that was the wrong way of doing things. His lieutenants, sergeants, other NCOs and even the junior enlisted men of lower rank had to be trusted to do their job. It was their lives on the line and these men had fought with him before. From below all the way up to him the chain-of-command ran and McMaster understood the importance of that in allowing E Troop to be the successful fighting force that it was. If something wholly wrong occurred then he would jump in, but before then he kept an ear on the radio and an eye on the sights attached to his tank.
As troop leader, McMaster rode within an M-1A1 Abrams sitting in the tank commander’s position. His executive officer (XO) was aboard one of the M-113 tracked infantry carriers laden with radio equipment back in the rear yet McMaster was towards the front of the moving column which moved along the valley rolling across fields. There were other Abrams’ around him – another eight in addition to his own – along with thirteen M-3A1 Bradley armoured reconnaissance & scout vehicles: for the first time since the war had started there was a full complement of armour following a massive recent sealift arrival. In addition, E Troop also had two M-113s under command along with a pair of M-106 tracked mortar carriers (each with a 107mm mortar) and an M-88 armoured recovery vehicle. There was nearly a full complement of men as well with E Troop only half a dozen soldiers short: lightly-wounded men from earlier engagements in the war along with reservists and a few early retirees made up the numbers of the dead, badly wounded and missing.
The mission of the Cav’ demanded that all soldiers within a troop such as McMaster’s be able to fight including the commander. McMaster had and would carry on doing just that in this war. He had commanded this tank and others into many engagements all across northern Bavaria throughout the war doing a whole range of battles. There had been tactical withdrawals, fast retreats, counterattacks, counteroffensives and everything in between. Screening the flanks and scouting forward was done often too. The enemy had been fought when in tanks and other armoured vehicles as well as when dismounted and in attack aircraft & helicopters. There had come times were near defeat had only just been averted and on other occasions when E Troop had seen battle they had conquered all before them. McMaster believed that he had a good relationship with his men beneath him and his officers above him and was certain that morale remained high within the subunit of the 2–2 Cav which he led as well as higher up through the 2d Armored Cavalry Regiment and to the US VII Corps. At the moment, with the US VII Corps advancing towards the IGB, there was naturally a good feeling of ultimate victory approaching with the news that the enemy was truly on the back foot either being surrounded in giant pockets or defeated in detail in stand-up engagements. Men still had their fear of death or injury, yet there wasn’t so much a fear of defeat anymore as there had been a few – a very few – times early in the war when the Big Bad Soviet War Machine was going for victory to victory and pulling back had been the case most days, giving up hard defended ground.
When the news had come earlier that there was a Czechoslovak tank division, a third-line reserve unit no less, coming forward and that E Troop had been tasked to assist other Cav’ elements in breaking that formation up first before the main battles by others took place against it there had been some concern yet a general feeling that this was a mission which would be achieved. Non-Soviet Warsaw Pact units when met in battle before had been given the rough treatment that only the Cav’ could give them and today was expected to be no different.
Yet, even McMaster couldn’t imagine the scale of the enemy defeat which he was to inflict this afternoon around Hill 73 East upon the enemy.
It all happened very fast.
The advance guard came across several BRDM wheeled scout vehicles following a small road and engaged them with 25mm chain guns fitted to their Bradleys. More vehicles were spotted, this time Czechoslovak-built versions of the BMP infantry vehicle configured for the reconnaissance role. Those were dispatched by an Abrams’ in support of the advance guard. Air support in the form of Cobra attack and Kiowa scout helicopters flown by the Air Cav’ came into play at that moment with missiles being fired against a ZSU-23-4 self-propelled anti-aircraft gun, a MT-LB mounting anti-tank missiles and some more BRDMs on the flanks.
The radio came alive with contact reports soon afterwards as the main body of E Troop engaged the enemy. McMaster’s men were trained in radio discipline using the correct coded terminology and keeping their reports precise and informative. He himself spotted one of the T-55A tanks which others had spoken of and ordered the firing upon that tank. There were more blasts off in the distance as Czechoslovak armour coming across the ground in the shadow of Hill 73 East was engaged at long-range. The enemy had come under attack at once from several directions and was observed blundering around a bit trying to reorganize for a road march into an attack position. The Abrams’ were blasting off 120mm armour-piercing shells and the Bradleys were launching TOW missiles. The Air Cav’ concentrated their fire to the flank – out of E Troop’s direct line of fire – and took out several T-55As either trying to withdraw or maybe undertake the beginnings of a flanking maneuver to try and hit back at McMaster and his men.
It was soon a slaughter.
E Troop moved forward blasting away at the targets who were unable to effectively fight back. McMaster quickly came to the conclusion that they had lost their commander – his gunners were trained to target tanks with command antenna – and were also extremely inexperienced, maybe even green. It was far from a fair fight, but fair fights were not what the Cav’ was all about.
The Abrams’ took the lead, moving faster and closing up. There had come a report from the Air Cav’ saying that up to forty vehicles had been spotted: it could easily have been a whole battalion. McMaster was momentarily tempered by such news because that was a large force for E Troop to take on but the enemy’s lack of effective resistance made him overcome any hesitance. His XO and the Air Cav’ were both reporting in and calling upon support. It appeared as if this one Czechoslovak battalion might be leading a regiment – far too much for E Troop to take on alone! – and behind McMaster there was Task Force 2–64 Armor (TF 2–64): a mixed-arms battalion group of tanks, armoured infantry and combat support assets from one of the 3rd Infantry (Mechanized) Division’s brigades. Until that support arrived, and he himself received new orders, McMaster would carry on.
His Abrams went forward with the main gun firing upon T-55As starting to turn away. Perhaps they were maneuvering into a better position or maybe they were frightened and starting to run. The XO had smoke dropping all around the Czechoslovaks to mess with their vision and the crews within each would have seen their comrades blasted apart all around them. The Czechoslovaks couldn’t get any hits in with their 100mm main guns firing shells that were generally badly aimed with those few on target bouncing off Abrams with their Chobham armour; an unsettling experience even for experienced Cav’ crews who’d been under fire before, but not fatal or tank-killing. McMaster kept his tank firing and made sure that the others were doing so. One Abrams was lagging behind after getting stuck in the mud – the tank commander offered a brisk, furious apology – along with the Bradleys but the rest carried on.
T-55A tank turrets flew in the sky with the hulls left burning. Other Czechoslovak tanks and armoured vehicles had taken devastating hits too and were left on fire.
There were men on the battlefield, running between the wrecked vehicles. McMaster paid attention to them as he continued to scan for more targets and have those fired upon. His gunner had the coaxial machine gun (the M-2 Browning .50 Caliber, AKA ‘Ma Deuce’) with its 12.7mm bullets ready in case any one of those had a hand-held weapon of significance ready, yet there was no need. All of those tank and vehicle crews McMaster saw looked lost, dazed and many had their hands in the air: fear showed on many faces. The driver went around them and the smashed Czechoslovak vehicles under McMaster’s orders as there was still more of the enemy surely ahead.
Hill 73 East and the fields at its base was left behind because there was surely more of the battle to be fought. Behind E Troop lay a smashed Czechoslovak battalion with casualties among McMaster’s men being exactly zero.
McMaster soon saw the small town of Lichtenfels coming into view. The sky was dark ahead now with visibility dropping. He switched to night vision as he prepared to take E Troop around it to the northern side and scouted for more targets. One of his other tanks hit a truck and another blew apart a staff car trying to race away. McMaster had fulfilled his orders and contacted 2–2 Cav’s Operations staff to gain new frag orders.
Those came fast enough.
TF 2–64 was moving up fast behind now and E Troop was to secure a position outside of Lichtenfels and wait for them. The Air Cav’ and a flight of USAF A-10s was to search ahead but McMaster was to wait. There was still estimated to be the rest of that Czechoslovak regiment ahead: maybe they wouldn’t be able to put up a fight either, but maybe they might. He was told that with his Bradleys with him, E Troop as a whole would fight alongside TF 2–64 with much air support available.
As the afternoon turned to evening, E Troop got ready to go back into the fight again and ready to fight another battle like the stunningly-overwhelming one-sided one which they just had. McMaster knew that he and his men had done well, but they also had everything on their side to give them that victory.
Superior equipment, training and unit cohesion.
A perfect understanding of the battlefield due to reconnaissance and surveillance.
A cooperative and incompetent enemy with demoralised reservists not experienced.
And a mission that they and the Cav’ had spent so long mastering.
March 5th 1990 Above East Germany
‘Goatie’ and ‘E.T.’, two F-15C Eagle pilots, flew high above East Germany heading south after rounding Berlin to the rear.
The major and the captain with 32d Tactical Fighter Squadron (32 TFS) were moving fast and above the rain clouds below. It had gotten dark a few hours ago, long before they lifted off from the 32 TFS’s new base at Florennes in Belgium rather than their regular home base at Soesterberg in the Netherlands. Both men had seen little this evening outside of their cockpits – lights mainly, sometimes distant explosions – and concentrated instead on their flight instruments, the radar display being down-linked from the AWACS and also what the fighter controller aboard that E-3B Sentry said to them over a secure channel. They were under enormous stress and well aware that they needed to focus upon their mission to keep themselves alive and their aircraft flying. Each had faced many instances of combat before with multiple dangers, though neither had been this far east and so deep into enemy territory beforehand. There was confidence from both Goatie and E.T., expressed to one another and others, in their mission though with the belief that they could successfully achieve their assigned task.
That was to get into the Soviet air transport stream making use of air facilities south of Berlin and down as many helpless aircraft laden with men and especially material as possible.
While the Polish border remained to the left of the pair of F-15s, Berlin was now behind them as Goatie and E.T. started to make a gentle turn to the southwest. They were both still following their planned flightpath despite deviations taken earlier when flying over the northern parts of East Germany under instruction from the AWACS and afterwards returning to the planned course. Those course changes had been made to have the two of them avoid enemy fighters, which was quite a change for Goatie and E.T. as they would on a usual mission be tasked to engage such threats spotted when they were airborne. Today was different though. They were not flying a defensive mission back over West Germany being directed to fire upon hostile contacts coming west but instead had been sent on the offensive. Soon enough though, there would come more instructions and those wouldn’t involve avoiding contact with the enemy.
Their radar displays showed what the AWACS saw: dozens of contacts ahead with many already in range and all of those (hopefully) utterly unaware of Goatie, E.T. and the two more pilots flying another pair of F-15Cs twenty odd miles behind.
The pre-mission brief when back in Belgium had stated that airbases such as Juterbog, Schönhagen, Sperenberg and the airport at Schönefeld were being used by transport aircraft arriving and departing from those sites. Aircraft flying the colours of several Warsaw Pact national air forces as well as quasi-civilian airlines were being put to use flying airlift missions. The Soviet Air Force’s Military Transport Aviation (VTA) was in-charge of all of this and that organisation was noted as having a ‘good war’ in terms of missions completed and their operations following the first hectic days of the war suffering few losses. Now the VTA was engaged in flying into East Germany men, equipment and stores from locations back in the Soviet Union due to massive NATO disruption of land and coastal sea links; aircraft were flying back home afterwards (presumably empty) ready to return with more cargo. The air facilities were all heavily-defended with SAMs and anti-aircraft guns on the ground while there was a fighter screen away to the west dedicated to defending them from frontal attack. All sort of transport aircraft from air freighters to airliners, jets and propeller-driven aircraft, were expected to be encountered… if they could be reached.
Goatie and E.T. – along with ‘Home-brew’ and ‘Ninja’ behind them, experienced men with the 32 TFS too – were to get at those aircraft when they were in the sky. Assigned to the mission which they were taking part in had been a two-aircraft flight of F-111F Aardvarks which while the F-15s were waiting were making a daring low-level attack on both Sperenberg and Schönefeld using parachute-retarded bombs to hit the runaways. The damage they were to do was expected to be minimal because they were to be busy dodging enemy fire but their aim was in fact to cause disruption in the air more than on the ground. With the two biggest air facilities attacked, so the mission plan went, temporary chaos would be caused with Soviet air movements as landings were cancelled and aircraft diverted. There would be transports in the sky, stacked up waiting new instructions to land at their planned destinations or at a divert site. That chaos was then to be taken advantage of with missile shots taken at beyond visual range into the transports, all of whom were expected to scatter but remain helpless. Meanwhile, the fighter screen of Soviet and East German interceptors was expected to deploy into positions to fight against a big air attack coming towards the air facilities from the west, not from behind and the east.
The time was ticking away and Goatie and E.T. were on a deadline. They couldn‘t wait forever and were getting closer and closer to their planned firing area. The mission was extremely complicated when it came to moving all assets – all four F-15s, the F-111s and the low-flying EF-111A Raven electronic jamming aircraft also in the area – into place so that everything would work out. Their speed, height and the stand-off jamming which came from a RC-135V Rivet Joint flying above the Rhineland gave them the advantage at the moment but that couldn‘t last for very long.
They waited, keeping calm and fighting nerves for the AWACS to declare they were ready to strike.
Nerves were one thing, fear was another.
Goatie and E.T. silently told themselves that they didn’t have any fear tonight on this mission. They’d each felt it before during this war but not tonight. Again and again, each USAF fighter pilot reminded themselves that they’d seen more danger than this and survived.
For Goatie – a name which had been gifted to him against his will due to a one-time, silly experience with some outrageous facial hair for a dare at Colorado Springs – he recalled the most fear he had had during this war. It had been on the second night of the war when at Soesterberg. 32 TFS had aircraft taxing out of their hardened aircraft shelters in the darkness getting ready to lift-off, with him sitting in his cockpit as his aircraft moved forward across the flight-line, when the intercom had come alive with the shouts of ‘sappers in the wire!’ One of the ground personnel, a Vietnam veteran, had made that call when Polish commandoes had appeared from nowhere all over the airbase. Goatie was ordered to make an immediate combat take-off and had been about to do so as gunfire erupted outside all over Soesterberg when a lone figure had appeared on the taxiway he was departing. The man had stopped, crouched and raised a long tube over one shoulder. Shivers had gone down Goatie’s spine and he had frozen momentarily. His finger had moved for the trigger for his F-15’s cannon but before he could even consider trying to take aim – which would have in all honesty been impossible when on the ground at such low speed with a fixed barrel – an RPG had erupted from that weapon that he had been convinced had been pointed at him. There was the flash of the blast exhaust and then another F-15 off his port wing, getting ready for an emergency departure too, had exploded in a terrible explosion – the pilot, Water-boy, had died a terrible death. The commando had then been cut down by automatic fire from USAF security police troopers while the radio screamed at Goatie to get airborne.
Soesterberg had been hit by a second commando attack at a later date and Scuds had targeted the facility, several times with chemical warheads. It had recently been abandoned when Soviet tanks had rolled into the Netherlands and even though uncaptured had become useless because the frontlines had been so close and it had come under fire. When in the sky fighting the air war, just like at Soesterberg, Goatie had seen action where there had come the very real risk of death but there had been no moments of helpless fear like that one moment when he had been convinced that that RPG was coming for him from thirty odd yards away.
With E.T., his moment of greatest personal fear had come a week into the war, a few days before the temporary ceasefire, when flying over NATO-held territory on the North German Plain. He and other 32 TFS pilots had been protecting several flights of NATO ground attack aircraft taking part in many missions as the F-15s such as his would launch long-range missile shots with Sparrows against distant targets which were unseen visually. Dog-fighting was very rare and the air combat was just like the video games his nine year-old boy back home in Missouri was so enamored with. On one mission, Soviet SAMs had been fired at extraordinary distance (probably from an advanced position near the moving frontlines) and those had been SA-12 Gladiators. In the bright morning sky, several of those missiles that were strategic weapons had ‘tipped-over’ after gaining so much height and came at him and his F-15 from above. It had been an alarming sight indeed as the SAMs had made such an unexpected attack like that: rather than chasing cruise missiles the Gladiators had come for him. He had evaded and been chased for a bit but the whole attack had come so out of the blue and fear had overcome him when faced with it.
The Soviets had come at E.T. before with their best fighters and interceptors: Foxbats, Fulcrums, Foxhounds and Flankers. They had jammed AWACS platforms and come at the 32 TFS in what seemed like tsunami waves of air-to-air missiles fired from far away. E.T. and his fellow pilots had learnt the strengths and weaknesses of the Soviets and, more importantly, been able to change and adapt whereas their opponents remained generally fixed to rigid procedures. That had come easily for E.T. and others under wartime conditions because if they hadn’t then they would have been casualties of war. The Soviets refused to learn though; E.T. had seen them use fighters to defend SAMs (stupid) and try to repeat unsuccessful ambushes of AWCAS aircraft in the same manner as what had failed beforehand. Through all of that, all the combat he had seen personally and what he had been briefed upon, that fear the first time he had seen those SAMs that day tipping over like he had before he slowed down and climbed to confuse their missile-homing software, had never been repeated.
Finally, the call came from the AWACS to proceed with the attack.
Goatie and E.T. energized their fighter radars. The images which they saw matched what the previous ones down-linked to them had displayed. There were fighters off in the distance and transports close-in. As to the latter, some were low and some were high while others were close and more were far away. From their own radar signals and well as their shapes, computer-generated aids identified the shown aircraft as best as possible. As per their mission orders, Goatie and E.T. looked for the most valuable targets rather than the most opportune.
Freighters such as Antonov-22 Cocks and Ilyushin-76 Candids were valued more over Antonov-12 Cubs and Ilyushin-18 Coots. Airliners such as Ilyushin-86 Cambers and Tupolev-154 Careless’ were preferred over Ilyushin-62 Classics or Tupolev-134 Crustys.
Goatie and E.T. started to launch Sparrow missiles. Both were carrying six of these tonight in addition to two Sidewinders (air refueling had come early in the flight from Florennes) though both pilots only launched four. One after another these were launched against near clusters of transport aircraft. Not a fire-and-forget weapon, the F-15’s radar needed to be pointed at the target to allow for the ‘painting’ with radar waves of the transports. It took what seemed like an extraordinary long amount of time, or so it seemed. In reality the rapid firing at not to great distances cut down on this time allowing for the movement from one target to another. With the transports unaware until the last moments that they were under attack and the airwaves being jammed to interfere with radio communications from that RC-135V far away, and the strengths of the F-15/Sparrow combination, the two of them hit six of eight targeted aircraft.
Then they shut down their radars, turned for home and increased speed. Home-brew and Ninja were firing as well, aiming more Sparrow’s at target before they would follow.
It would be a long flight back home but smiles were worn on the faces of Goatie and E.T. because they had done what had been asked of them. Soviet losses would be heavy, their airlift operations hurt badly and pandemonium certain to have occurred; two transports had a fatal mid-air collision in addition to the eleven air-to-air kills (Home-brew & Ninja had got five). No one meanwhile was on their tail as the enemy had been looking the other way.
Success was complete.
March 5th 1990 The Arnsberg Forest, North Rhine-Westphalia, West Germany
Defence Secretary Dick Cheney had met with both senators and congressmen yesterday and briefed the two groups that the pre-war bridges over the Elbe and the Oder which provided east-west communications across East Germany were down and destroyed. The road and rail links which could carry heavy loads had been brought down by repeated targeted attacks by F-111s, Tornados and even a few F-117 strikes. Moreover, from what General Galvin had been told, Cheney had showed those American politicians video footage of the bombings in progress when smart bombs had been used as well as before and after satellite photographs too. The big bridges were down, was the message given, and what replaced them in the form of temporary pontoon crossings – being attacked regularly by cruise missiles – couldn’t carry the weight that they did therefore making sure that no more major reinforcements were coming west to assist the war in Germany. When informed of this by Colin Powell, SACEUR had been told that Cheney and those with him at Raven Rock where Defence Department operations were being run from were fed up with a drip-drip series of false information on the matter being given to the politicians at The Greenbrier from CIA sources. Those bridges were down, there was EVIDENCE that they had been destroyed and the CIA could talk about all of their confidential sources all they wanted but the truth was evident.
The personal and organisation dynamics of what was going on back home shouldn’t have concerned General Galvin because he was here in Europe to fight the war here. It was his assets which had struck those bridges in addition to others over smaller rivers too (just as important as far as he was concerned were those crossing the Havel, the Neisse and the Spree) and information which had gone back to the United States had come from his headquarters. Combat pilots from NATO strike aircraft and captured Warsaw Pact pilots both had flown over the downed bridges while SACEUR’s trained intelligence staff had seen the results of the bombing attacks as well. Furthermore, because those bridges were no longer operational, the mass of reservists that should have formed another echelon of Soviet armies hadn’t come forward from their mobilisation bases back across their country and instead the Soviet troops already forward of those rivers were fighting alongside Warsaw Pact troops.
General Galvin knew all about maskirovka. That was what the CIA were talking about, saying that the Soviets had created an immense, complicated one with those bridges to make NATO believe that they weren’t funneling large numbers of fresh (if inexperienced) troops and armour forward. Maskirovka had been seen elsewhere with the Soviets being very adept at deception, even deceiving their own men and officers so when captured many they had no idea of what was going on. The Soviets had undertaken deception operations using decoys, false signals, concealment and a whole plethora of tricks. That was what they were good at and many times NATO had been taken in by those, sometimes with very painful end results.
But those bridges were down!
General Galvin was as sure as Cheney at Raven Rock was. With video and photographic footage, radar-imagining from satellites and personal accounts from those who had seen them hit by laser-guided bombs, SACEUR was adamant that they were down. He refused to believe the apparent CIA theory that they were still operational and NATO had been targeting the most careful constructed decoys. This wasn’t stubbornness on his part or a fear of being wrong, but instead a known fact because he had seen so much evidence to support it from multiple and independent sources: there was no ‘group-think’ on that matter as apparently some CIA bigwig in a smart suit back home believed.
The bridges were down!
It was frustrating to keep being told that there were whispers in places from some that he and everyone else had been taken in by the Soviets. Yes, it had happened before, but NATO had learnt hard and fast from that. Check intelligence over and over again, was that lesson, and use a ‘Team B’ to attack all of your own precious theories. That had been done and the agreement was still there based on the evidence that NATO bombs had done their work and smashed those vital communications links. General Galvin had noted that the similar strikes on Baltic port facilities that the Soviets had been using hadn’t been questioned like the issue with the big bridges even when the same aircraft and same post-strike intelligence came back. Instead, it was the river crossings that he was told weren’t destroyed and he and his staffs had been taken in there.
SACEUR had only recently read a report of a British Special Boat Service (SBS) team who had been to Rugen Island off the East German coast. The SBS naval commandoes had used a submarine to get close, swum to the shoreline and might as well have physically touched the smashed piers, cranes brought crashing down and burnt out harbour facilities. There had been a massive Soviet-operated transport base there built in recent years at great expense and a strategic investment to keep communications links open with East Germany for Soviet forces stationed there in case they had lost control over Poland. That port was permanently out of action, so too were others and so were the bridges. Diplomats were still meeting in Luxembourg at the minute with their major conference where the main topic of conversation was whether to authorize ground offensive operations on the other side of the Iron Curtain once West Germany was finished being liberated. General Galvin had alerted his special forces commanders to start planning for missions ahead of the tanks and infantry that could soon be pouring their way into East Germany, maybe Czechoslovakia too, and if given the green light he would sent commandoes by air to those bridges to be double, triple, quadruple sure.
Yet SACEUR was certain that the bridges were down anyway!
General Galvin was currently aboard a helicopter taking a short flight between where he had just been near the Upper Weser at the Belgian I Corps’ rear headquarters and his own ground command column that was waiting for him outside of Arnsberg. That small town lay on the other side of the forest the US Army UH-60C Blackhawk (a command-&-control variant fitted with radios for senior commanders’ usage) was flying above and he was on the last leg of his journey back. There was a Canadian CH-136 Kiowa assigned as escort flying alongside low like SACEUR’s transport was and off in the distance a NATO AWACS was well-aware of the two helicopter’s mission.
He had met with the Belgian commander near Höxter and congratulated the man on the success which had been seen in getting the Belgian I Corps over the Weser and as far forward as it had already done. The Belgians were fighting under the command of NORTHAG alongside the British I Corps and were returning to territory long ago they had been forced to abandon. The terrain which they faced was tough, not inviting for exploitative armoured warfare and good for a defender to hold, but they had done very well indeed. NORTHAG was taking part in the mass offensive on the North German Plain alongside the US Third Army, an operation a week in the waiting. During that wait there had been a major air campaign to precede it as well as extensive special forces work. NATO was now moving forward on the North German Plain with defenders engaged first near the Weser where the frontline had been while waiting to push forward armour very soon.
That offensive was currently one of four underway within SACEUR’s area of responsibility, a major achievement but also something that needed careful management. There was the CENTAG operation in Hessen and northern Bavaria and then smaller offensives in both the Netherlands and Austria. Capable subordinates, men who had all seen war, were in charge of those operationally though General Galvin had overall strategic supervision.
When talking with the Belgian commander, SACEUR had been informed about the East German troops engaged by the attacking Belgians. They were third-line troops who were only semi-mobile yet had put up one hell of a fight. From prisoner interrogations as well as signal intercepts, the enemy had been identified as being of a rather low-grade. This was just the same elsewhere along the frontlines on the North German Plain. Some Soviet but many Warsaw Pact troops – East Germans and Poles – were forward and behind them there would be many professional Soviet forces waiting to counterattack… if they could survive doing so in the face of NATO tactical air power. There was no mass of Soviet troops by the million, mobilised over the last month and somehow brought into Germany across destroyed lines of communications through. Pontoon bridges, even strategic airlift, couldn’t achieve that alone.
General Galvin could have easily spoken to the Belgian over a secure radio channel or sent an aide forward. He hated being a château general though, hiding in bunkers or constantly on the mobile with his command column hiding in forests. He had judged his visit to the Belgians as justifiable due to multiple factors: the lack of recent Soviet air activity this side of the frontlines as they defended their own territory (or tried to anyway), the near-absent commando threat because so many Spetsnaz were dead & no longer seemingly everywhere armed with shoulder-mounted SAMs and the secrecy of his visit too where only the bare minimum of people had known. Evidence for the latter came with how informal the arrival at the Belgian I Corps rear headquarters had been! There was no dedicated air cover for his helicopter and escort in the form of assigned fighters either because that would be something which the Soviets would be able to observe from a distance and speculate upon before next time he made a flight send a regiment of interceptors screaming towards him.
SACEUR had done everything right and so too had those who were with him and those (few) involved in protecting him. The helicopters were flying low over friendly territory and there was an AWACS in the sky commanding F-15s ready to engage enemy fighters who might come close to the Arnsberg Forest. General Galvin hadn’t gone too far forward nor been betrayed.
It was just a case of tonight he was damn unlucky.
A pair of MiG-27K Flogger J strike-fighters, far from their home base in the Central Asian Military District and assigned to the Fourteen Air Army of the VVS, had broken free from AWACS coverage. There had been a massive air battle underway quite a distance southeast of where SACEUR’s helicopter was, taking place back on the Soviet side of the frontlines. NATO fighters had engaged many Soviet and Warsaw Pact aircraft and the battle was thought to be over with enemy aircraft downed or fleeing back to base. General Galvin’s flight had been delayed and rerouted a little (taking his helicopter a little further north) because of that.
Heavy electronic jamming and – ashamedly – a little overconfidence had come into play though. The Floggers weren’t the only aircraft undetected flying very low over NATO-held territory and looking for a target of opportunity, there were others elsewhere and much further south soon about to make themselves known and causing NATO to scramble to catch up with a suddenly changing air situation. Meanwhile, these two aircraft were searching for a target for their carried bombs. The pilots of the swing-wing aircraft were hunting for a troop / supply convoy or such like, something on the roads in the rear and defenseless. They were using their infrared for navigation and detecting a target as both knew full well the consequences of using their radars to do either.
The Blackhawk and the Kiowa were spotted and the Soviet pilots decided to attack on a whim. The passengers aboard nor the mission of the helicopters mattered not to them, they were just located targets on the way to some more before the Floggers would head back home. One R-60 AA-8 Aphid infrared-guided air-to-air missile was fired from each strike-fighter against each helicopter. There was no warning, no time to react for the helicopter crews. Missile impacts were observed and the helicopters were seen going down. The Floggers then flew onwards, unaware of the whom they had just killed when his burning helicopter slammed into the forest below.
NATO would afterwards need someone to replace General Galvin… after confirmation that he was missing, presumed dead.
A US Army four-star general officer would very quickly have to be appointed to the role of SACEUR: one with experience in dealing with allies and also commanding major theater-level commands. This would need to be someone who would have to command the respect of many and would be able to do all that General Galvin had been doing before his untimely death too. Moreover, someone was little fear of such a demanding task and all that came with the position to which he would be appointed.
There was such a man available…
END OF PART TWO
|
|